『新版日本語教育事典』英語版について『新版日本語教育事典』（本学会編 2005 年初版刊行）の英語版（第 2 章のみ）をウェブサ
イト上で公開しています（諸事情から公開ができない項目があります）。なお、第２章以外の英語版公開の予定はありません。

目 次

頁

A-総論
■日本語文法研究の歴史

1

B-形態論
■派生

4

■複合

5

■品詞分類

8

■文法カテゴリー

10■活用の捉え方

11

■動詞

19

■自動詞と他動詞

21

■形容詞

26

■名詞

28

■数量詞

29

■様態副詞

31

■程度副詞

33

■陳述副詞

35

■連体詞

37

■接続詞

38

■感動詞

40

■助詞

41

■助動詞

42

C-文型
■文の成分

44

■基本文型

46

■基本語順

48

D-格
■日本語の格50■連体修飾節主語を表すガとノ

52■対象を表すヲとガ

54■場所を表すニとデとヲ

55■起点を表すヲとカラ

57■時を表すニの使用・不使用

59■目的地を表すニとヘ

60

■材料を表すカラとデ

61■起因を表すニとデとカラ

62■動詞と格助詞

64■格助詞の用法68■複合格助詞71

E-ヴォイスとその周辺
■ヴォイス

76

■受動文の種類78■受動文での動作主の格

80■受動文の諸特徴

82■自動詞と他動詞の受身

84

■使役

86

■使役と他動詞

88

■自発

89

■可能文に用いられる形式

90■可能文の諸特徴

92■相互文の諸特徴

94■授受の補助動詞表現

96■授受表現の諸特徴

98■方向性表現100

F-肯否■ナク（テ）・ナイデ・ズ（ニ）102G-テンス・アスペクト■アスペクト

104

■状態動詞

105

■スル形・シテイル形の意味

107■ツツアル・テクル・テイク－直前，変化の進展など 110■アスペクトの複合動詞

111■テオク・テアル

112■形式名詞系のアスペクト形式

113■動詞とアスペクト

114■副詞とアスペクト

116

■タ形

118

■ル形

120

H-モダリティ■モダリティ

122■疑問文の種類124■疑問形式の用法

126

■確認表現

128

■意志の表現

130

■誘いかけ

132

■行為要求

134

■禁止

136

■義務・許容137■不確かさを表す表現

139■証拠からの判断

141

■伝聞

143

■ノダ-説明のモダリティ

145■終助詞の用法

147■モダリティの副詞

149

■感嘆文

151

I－主題・とりたて■主題

152■ハとガ－基本的な違い

154■ハとガ－有題文と無題文

156■ハとガ－顕題文と陰題文

158■ハとガ－文の中と節の中

159■ハとガ－対比と排他

161■ッテとハ－主題のバリエーション

162

■とりたて

164

■サエとマデ－意外性のとりたて166■デモとモ－意外性のとりたて

168■デモとナンカ－例示のとりたて170■ナンカとナンテ－低評価のとりたて172■ナンカとクライ－低評価のとりたて

174■ダケとシカ－限定のとりたて176■ダケとバカリ－限定のとりたて

178■数量詞+ハ・モ

180■無助詞，格助詞の省略

182

J-複文
■テ節・中止節184■キリ・ママ・ナリ

186■バ・ト・タラ・ナラ－条件

187■条件節の周辺形式

190■テモ・タッテ・トコロデ－逆条件

193■カラ・ノデ・テ－原因・理由

195■理由を表す節の周辺

198■ノニ・クセニ・モノノ

201■タメニ・ヨウニ・ノニ－目的

204■ガ・ケレド－逆接・前置き

206■並列を表す形式

208■最中・ウチニ・アイダ

210■ヤイナヤ・ガ早イカ

212■連体修飾節214■コト・ノ・トコロ－名詞節

217■ト・カ・ヨウニ－引用

219

K-談話・テキスト■文章のまとまり-結束性・一貫性

221■ダイクシス（直示）223■指示詞（現場指示）224■指示詞（文脈指示）

226

■分裂文

228

■名詞句の省略・繰り返し

230■代名詞の使用・不使用

231■ハイ・イイエ・エエ-応答

233■アラ・マア-感動詞

235■アノ・エート・マア-フィラー

236■接続詞・接続表現

237■旧情報・新情報（定・不定，既知・未来）

239

■視点

241

L-敬語
■待遇表現の体系

243

■尊敬語

245

■謙譲語

247

■丁寧語

249

■待遇表現の運用

251

M-教育のための文法分析■感情・感覚形容詞，感情動詞

253■見える・聞こえる

255

■受給表現

257

■モダリティと文体

258■接続表現と文体

260■表現機能から見た文法項目

261

A.

Overview

 History of Grammar Study of the Japanese Language Grammar Study in Pre-Meiji Era
When a language comes in contact with another language, it is known that the language goes
through a period of reflective self-awareness. Contact with Chinese was a major influence on thegrammar study of the Japanese language. One example of what this contact brought was thedefinition of 詞 (shi) as 実質語 jisshitsu-go (substance word) versus te, ni, wo, ha as functional
vocabulary. Te-ni-ha taigai shoo [Annotated Summary of Te-Ni-Ha], which is estimated to havebeen written at the end of the Kamakura period or as late as the beginning of the Muromachi period,
has the following description, “詞 (shi) is like a temple or shrine, and te, ni, ha organize anddecorate this temple or shrine beautifully.”

This is an example of emerging awareness of wordclassification. It expresses that 詞 (shi) and te, ni, wo, and ha have separate functions. Thisawareness influenced and furthered the field for generations to come.
The two giants of grammar study in the Edo period are Motoori Norinaga and Fujitani Nariakira.
Moto’ori wrote Te-ni-wo-ha himo kagami [Hand-Held Mirror for Te-Ni-Wo-Ha] (1771) and Kotoba
no tama no o [Precious String of Words] (1785). In the former he classifies kakari (relation
opener) into three 行 (gyō, column in this context), ha, mo, tada, zo, no, ya, nani, and koso, andcreates a single chart that lists the musubi (tying, conclusion) in 43 rows. This relatively simple
chart succinctly captures the regularity of the rules of kakari-musubi.

In the latter he explicates ingreat detail the rules of kakari-musubi which he captures in Te-ni-wo-ha himo kagami withnumerous citations of poems.
Fujitani wrote Kazashi shoo [Annotated Hair Ornaments] (completed 1767) and Ayuhi shoo
[Annotated Leggings] (1778), among others.

He classifies words into four classes: na, yosohi,kazashi, and ayuhi, and explains the fundamental characteristics of these four classes as follows: na
explains things, yosohi defines events, and kazashi and ayuhi are entrusted with these words” (Ayuhi
shoo).

Roughly, na corresponds to indeclinable words, yosohi to declinable words, kazashi topronouns, adverbs, connectives, interjection, affixes, and ayuhi to particles, auxiliary verbs andsuffixes.
Other books worth noting from this era are Suzuki Akira’s Gengyo shishu ron [Four Types ofWords] (1824), and Motoori Haruniwa’s Kotoba no yachimata [Eight Forks in Language] (1808)
and Kotoba no kayoiji [Paths in Language] (completed in 1828).
 Grammar Study in Early Meiji Era
In the early part of Meiji the modality of grammar study of the Japanese language was called
Western-style 模倣 mohō (imitative) grammar book.

Works adopting this modality include

Tanaka Yoshikado’s Shōgaku nihon bunten [Elementary Japanese Grammar Book] (1874) andNakane Kiyoshi’s Nihon bunten [Japanese Grammar Book] (1876).

Baba Tatsui published An

Elementary Grammar of the Japanese Language in London, 1873. Tanaka did not recognize
particles (joshi) as words (go); rather, he treated them as relating to case, and explained them in thenoun section. Nakane explained the underlined items in asaki kawa,1

hana no inochi, asaku horu,

and hayaku kuru in the adjective and adverb sections.
 Ōtsuki GrammarŌtsuki Fumihiko tried to integrate Western-style imitative grammar books and the Yachimata
School of grammar study in Kō nihon bunten [Large Japanese Grammar Book] (1897). He
classifies words into eight types: noun, verb, adjective, adverb, connective, interjection, auxiliary
verb, and te-ni-wo-ha. He also correctly points out the differences between adjectives in Western
languages and those in the Japanese language. Kō nihon bunten is the first systematic modern
grammar book that was written using the Western grammar book framework, which the author
adopted with a critical attitude.
 Yamada Grammar
Yamada Yoshio constructed a unique and large-scale logical framework, taking in full consideration
both traditional grammar study and works of Sweet and Heyse, and even western psychology.
Yamada’s representative works include Nihon bunpō ron [Study of Japanese Grammar] (1908) andNihon bunpōgaku gairon [Survey of the Study of Japanese Grammar] (1936).
Yamada’s grammar theory deals with two major categories: word (go) study and phrase (ku) study.
His word study examines the characteristics and usage of words, which he considers to be thebuilding material for thought expressions. Words are categorized into four main types: indeclinable
words, declinable words, adverbs, and particles. So-called auxiliary verbs are considered ascompound word endings, and they are placed below word level. Phrase study deals with the rules ofsentence formation.

According to Yamada, a phrase is “the linguistic presentation of thoughts,

which has been organized through a one-time apperceptive activity” (Nihon bunpōgaku gairon).
Further, declaration (chinjutsu) is a term that explains this apperception as a function of declinable
words. The concept of declaration would later develop into one of the important points ofdiscussion in the grammar study of the Japanese language.
 Matsushita Grammar
Matsushita Daisaburō pursued universal grammar with his own brand of terminology and strong
scientific spirit.

His most representative work is Kaisen hyōjun nihongo bunpō [Revised Standard

Japanese Grammar] (1928).

His earlier works include Nihon Zokugo Bunten [Grammar of

Colloquial Japanese] (1901) and Hyōjun kan-bunpō ”Standard Grammar of Classical Chinese”(1927).
Matsushita separates grammar rules into internal rules that deal with thoughts and the external rulesthat deal with sounds and external forms.

He states that the former are universal and the latter are

individual. He further sets up three levels of linguistic units: 原辞 genji (‘morpheme’ in thiscontext), 詞 shi (roughly ‘parts of speech,’ or components of a sentence, in this context), and 断句
danku (‘sentence’ in this context) . 原辞 genji are the building material for a 詞 shi, and generally
correspond to morphemes in structural linguistics. 詞 shi is a component of a 断句 danku.
and hon o are respectively one 詞 shi.

Hon

What must be particularly noted is the distinction between

the study of aspect (sō) and that of case (kaku) in his study of 詞.

The study of aspect deals withparadigmatic relationship while the study of case deals with syntagmatic relationship.
 Hashimoto Grammar
2Hashimoto Shinkichi placed an emphasis on form in his study of grammar. He wrote Kokugo-hō
yōsetsu [The Essentials of Japanese Grammar] (1934).

The concept of 文節 bunsetsu (roughly‘phrase’ in this context) is at the core of his grammar study. 文節 bunsetsu is defined as follows
in Kokugo-hō yōsetsu: “When one divides a sentence into as many segments of 実際の言語 jissai
no gengo (meaningful units) as possible, one obtains 文節 bunsetsu.”

He analyzes sentence

structure using the concept of 連文節 renbunsetsu (collection of phrases). This method shares
similarity with IC analysis in structural linguistics. Hashimoto’s work on grammar has long formed
the basis for school grammar instruction.
 Tokieda Grammar
Tokieda Motoki attempted to construct a grammar system using a unique theory called the theory oflanguage process.

His representative works are Kokugogaku genron [Principles of the Study ofJapanese] (1941) and Nihongo bunpō kōgo hen [Japanese Grammar: Colloquial Language] (1950).
The most prominent characteristic of this approach is evident in his categorization of 詞 shi(roughly ‘free/substance word’) and 辞 ji (roughly particle/bound word). 詞 shi is an objective,
conceptual expression of things and events, and is an objectivized expression vis-à-vis the subject.
辞 ji is an expression void of conceptualization process, and is a direct expression of the speaker’s
perspective toward what is expressed. He proposes to set up a 句 ku that is made up with 詞 shi
and 辞 ji, and to analyze the sentence using the 句 ku-nesting method.
Further Development

Two topics of controversy have been wa and the study of sentence formation. Works on wa include
Mikami Akira’s Gendai gohō josetsu [Introduction to Contemporary Grammar] (1953) and Zō wahana ga nagai[Elephants Have Long Noses] (1960).

In the area of the study of sentence

formation is Watanabe Minoru’s Kokugo kōbunron [Study of Japanese Syntax] (1971), in which hefurther develops Yamada’s and Tokieda’s sentence formation theories by introducing the concepts ofpredication (jojutsu) vs. declaration (chinjutsu). Scientific studies have resulted in such works as
Suzuki Shigeyuki’s Nihongo bunpō: keitairon [Japanese Grammar: Study of Morphology] (1972)
and Okuda Yasuo (et al.)’s Nihongo bunpō: rengo-ron (shiryō hen) [Japanese Grammar: Study ofCollocations: Materials Collection] (1983).

Teramura Hideo’s Nihongo no shintakusu to imi, I,

II, and III [Japanese Syntax and Meaning, I, II & III] (1982, 1984, 1991) was born out of Japanese
instruction in classrooms.

It is a meticulously written book of descriptive grammar.

Currently,

more and more research is being done based on meticulous analyses of grammatical phenomena,and researchers look at language research done overseas as well.
 References
Fukui, Kyūzō (1953) Zōtei nihon bunpō shi [Expanded History of Japanese Grammar]. Kazama
Shobō.
Tokuda, Masanobu (1983) Kindai bunpō zusetsu [Illustrated Modern Grammar]. Meiji Shoin.
(Nitta Yoshio)3 Derivation
Derivation refers to word structure in which a subordinate form, i.e., affix, connects to the core part(base), as in tanoshi + sa ‘enjoyability’. Japanese affixes may be either prefixes or suffixes.
A prefix is a dependent morpheme that is attached at the “head” of a word. Some of the examples
are go/ō- (honorific marker), ō- ‘large’, ma- ‘true, pure’, ka- (emphatic), mu- ‘non’, and fu- ‘in-,un-‘. They tend not to change the part of the speech of the word, as in yowai ‘weak’ (adjective)→ ka-yowai ‘feeble’ ( adjective). One must be careful, however, with fu- and mu-. Look at the form,
mu+kanshin ‘indifference’, for instance. Kanshin ‘concern’ is a noun, but mu+kanshin, with muadded, is the stem of the na-adjective, mukanshin na ‘indifferent’.
A suffix is a dependent morpheme that is attached at the end of the word stem. Quantifying particles
such as -ko, -kai, -tsu, -bai, other expressions that follow numbers such as -koro, -miman, markers
used to express respect attached to names such as -sama, -kun, and plural markers such as -tachi
and -ra, are some of the examples of suffixes. Two or more suffixes may be combined as in san-nin
sama zutsu ‘in groups of 3 people-honorific’.
Suffixes tend to change the part of speech of the word. Tanoshii ‘pleasurable’ is an adjective, butwhen the suffix -sa is attached to the adjectival stem, tanoshisa ‘pleasure’ becomes a noun.
When -garu is attached, the verb tanosigaru ‘to enjoy oneself’. Sekai ‘world’ is a noun, andsekai-teki ‘global’ becomes the stem for the nominal adjective sekaiteki na ‘global’.
Derivation includes grammatical derivation and lexical derivation. Samu+sa ‘coldness’, shiro+sa‘whiteness’, and Tarō-yō ‘for Taro’s use’ are examples where combinations are basicallyunrestricted (grammatical derivation). *Ka + usui ‘thin’, *atsu ‘hot-weather’ + -mi are notpossible because of the constraint imposed by the stem (lexical derivation).
One also must be aware of how tightly linked the constituents are in word formation. Take, forexample, prefixes of negation. There is no pause in the utterance after fu-, and mi-, but there canbe a slight pause after hi-. Morphologically as well, when hi- occurs with another prefix ofnegation, hi- is placed outside the rest of the word, such as hi-mitōrokusha ‘non-unregisteredperson’. Also, hi- can negate an entire compound, as in hi-saishoku shugisha ‘non-vegetarian
person’. Thus, when a word has a suffix, such as -teki ‘having the characteristic of’, and when one
needs to negate the entire word, hi- is the prefix of choice, as in hi-kensetsu-teki ‘non-constructive’.
(If one is to negate only the verb, mi-kensetsu ‘not yet built’ is possible.)
Derivation also differs with types of words such as kango (words of Chinese origin) and wago
(words of Japanese origin). For example, the prefix o- (honorific marker) in principle cannot be
used with loan words, as in *o-pan ‘bread’. (O-biiru ‘beer’ is an exception.) This prefix is
pronounced [go] when attached to a kango (of Chinese pronunciation), as in go-shisoku ‘your son’and [o] in front of a wago (in Japanese pronunciation), as in o-kosama ‘your child’. (O-tanjōbi‘your birthday’ is an exception.) In general, affixes of Chinese origin, such as mu-, fu-, and -teki, areused with kango, as in mu-ishiki ‘sub/unconscious’, fu-kanō ‘impossible’, and jindō-teki‘humanitarian’.
In relation to orthography, how to pronounce the affixes written out in kanji is a problem. If one
pronounces the 中 as -chū in 水槽中 suisō-chū, the suffix signifies somewhere in the domain(‘inside the water tank’). If one pronounces it -jū, the suffix signifies the entire area of the watertank (‘throughout the water tank’). (This distinction does not always exist, however, as in 今週中,
konshū-chū/konshū-jū ‘within this week’.) The suffix -人 is pronounced -nin as a counter, -nin as
the agent of an action (e.g., 代理人 dairinin ‘representative’), and -jin when signifying theaffiliation or attribute of the person (e.g., 外国人 gaikokujin ‘foreigner’).
→語構成 word formation (2-B), 派生語 derivatives (3-C), 接頭辞 prefix, (接頭語 prefix word)(3-C), 接尾辞 suffix, (接尾語 suffix word) (3-C)
 References
Kageyama, Taro (1993) Bunpō to go-keisei [Grammar and Generation of Word]. Hituzi Syobo.
Saito, Michiaki and Ishii Masahiko (ed.) (1997) Go-keisei [Word Formation]. Hituzi Syobo.
[Moriyama Takurō]
4 Compounding
Compounding refers to the combining of two or more independent words, and it occurs withwago (words of Japanese origin), kango (words of Chinese origin), and gairaigo (loan words). In
principle, words of the same type combine to create compound words, and the part of speech of
the compound word is determined by that of the word that comes at the end. If the last word is averb in the adverbial form, the compound word becomes a noun (e.g., ameagari ‘end of the rain’),and if the last word is the stem of an adjective, the compound word becomes a na-adjective (e.g.,kimijika ‘short-tempered’).
Compounding may restrict the meaning of the word thus created (e.g., akaji. which means‘deficit’, and does not mean ‘red letter’.)The structure of a compound word basically follows the relationship among the words that areused to form the compound. Various types of relationship are: comparison, contrast,
juxtaposition (e.g., oyako ‘parents and children’; deiri ‘going in and out’) and modification andsupplementation (e.g., oyagokoro ‘parental tenderness’; deokure ‘getting a late start’). Somephonological changes, such as sequential voicing, euphonical changes, vowel switching, andsandhis (e.g., sakadaru ‘sake barrel’; makuragi ‘railroad ties’) tend to occur in the process ofcompounding, except when the compounds are in relationship of comparison and contrast (e.g.,oyako ‘parent and child’; kusaki ‘herbaceous plants and trees’).
 Compound Nouns
When the last word in the compound is a noun, what comes before is, for the most part, a noun,an adjective stem, or the adverbial form of a verb (e.g., akikusa ‘autumn plant’; aokusa ‘young
green leafy plant’; karekusa ‘dead grassy plant’). When the last part is the adverbial form of averb, it is important to know if the verb can be used with +suru. Compound nouns can beclassified into four types: noun+adverbial form of verbs (e.g., hitogoroshi + suru ‘to commit amurder’ but hitodōri ‘people coming and going+ *suru), adverbial form of verbs + adverbial
form of verbs (e.g., mikiki ‘to see and hear’+ suru but misugi ‘to watch too much’+ *suru).
(1)
minaoshi: suru :minaosu(2)
mikiki: suru :(no verb form)(3)
misugi:*suru :misugiru(4)
miosame:*suru:(no verb form)
 Compound Verbs
Compound verbs can be formed with nouns, adjectives, and adverbs (onomatopoeia) (e.g., ikizuku‘to breathe, to be alive’, chikazuku ‘to approach’, furatsuku ‘to reel, to wander’).
There aremany ways of forming compound verbs. The process of forming compound verbs in Japanese isvery productive, and compound verbs are important in Japanese language instruction and learning.
They are classified into two major types based on the verb at the end.
(1) Lexical compounding. Semantic constraints (e.g., in mimawaru ‘patrol, doing the round’ isthe primary meaning) and lexical combining constraints (e.g., mawaru only combines withdurational verbs. *Shini ‘die’ mawaru) apply. Major types of semantic relationships between
the constituent words are: manner & means (e.g., kiritaosu ‘to cut down’ →kitte taosu ‘to5topple by way of cutting’; attendant circumstances: asobikurasu ‘to loaf all thetime’→asobinagara kurasu ‘to live one’s life having fun’); alternate action (e.g., nakisakebu‘to cry frantically’ →naitari sakendari suru ‘to cry and shout’); aspect (e.g., furiyamu ‘tostop raining/snowing→furu no ga yamu ‘the action of falling stops.’ The case particle in theword-final verb may govern the compound verb (e.g., {ni} noru ‘to ride’+ {o} mawasu ‘toturn’: kuruma o norimawasu ‘to ride around in a car’; {o} kamu ‘to bite’+ {ni} tsuku ‘toattach’: ashi ni kamitsuku ‘to bite one’s leg’).
(2) Grammatical (syntactic) compounding. The constituent words are in complementary
relationship. In this type of compounding, constraints that are at work in (1) above do not
apply. Therefore compounding of this type is very productive. The major types of semantic
relationship between the constituent words are 1. aspect (e.g., miowaru ‘to finish
watching’→miru koto ga owaru ‘to finish the act of watching’); 2. excess (e.g., misugiru ‘towatch too much’→miru koto ga sugiru ‘to overdo the act of watching’; 3. possibility (e.g.,
miuru ‘to possibly watch’ →miru kanōsei ga aru ‘there is a possibility that one watches’).
Type (2) of compounding is different type (1) in what can be used in the position of the first verb.
1. Use of sō suru to substitute the original verb (e.g., Watashi wa miuru. Kare mo sōshiuru. ‘Iwill possibly see it. He also may do so’); 2. Use with nominal verbs (e.g., benkyō shiuru ‘will
possibly study’); 3. Honorific verb forms (e.g., o kaki ni nariuru ‘will possibly write’); 4. Passive
and causative forms (e.g., sareuru, saseuru).
One must be careful when a word has both usages, (1) and (2). Soto e mochidasu ‘to carrysomething outside’ (moving something to the outside (1)) vs. ame ga furidasu ‘rain starts to fall’(starting up, (2)); Hito ni hanashikakeru ‘to talk to someone’ (object-oriented (1)) vs. iikakeru ‘tostart saying something’(starting up, (2)). The order in which the process of compounding occurs
with the constituent words is first (1) and then (2); the reverse does not occur (e.g., kiritaoshi +kake + hajimeru ‘about to start cutting down’).
 Compound Adjectives
Nouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs (onomatopoeia) may be combined to form compound
adjectives. Examples: nadakai ‘famous’; kogekusai ‘smelling scorched’, hosonagai ‘long andslender’, horonigai ‘slightly bitter tasting’. The productivity of this type of compounding is notvery high.
→複合語 Compound Words (3-C), 語と形態素 Words and Morphemes (2-B), 語構成 Word
Formation (2-B)
 References
Nomura, Masaaki (1977) ‘Zōgohō’ (Method of Word Creation) in Iwanami kōza nihongo #9: goi
to imi “Iwanami Lecture Series #9: Vocabulary and Meaning.” Iwanami Shoten
Nishio, Toraya (1988) Gendai goi no kenkyū (Study of Contemporary Lexicon). Meiji Shoin.
Kageyama, Taro (1993) Bunpō to go-keisei (Grammar and Word Generation). Hituzi Syobo.
Saito, Michiaki and Ishii Masahiko (ed.) (1997) Go-kōsei (Word Formation). Hituzi Syobo.
Himeno, Masako (1999) Fukugō dōshi no kōzō to imi yōhō (Structure of Compound Verbs and6

Their Semanic Usage). Hituzi Syobo.
(Himeno Masako)

7 Parts of Speech What Are Parts of Speech?
Once one recognizes a word in a language, one goes on to classify it according to the form it
assumes within a sentence or a sequence of sentences, the grammatical meaning it carries, how theconstituents of the word are constructed, and what grammatical functions the components carry.
There is an important question of what a word is to begin with when one studies language. A word
has both lexical and grammatical characteristics, and these two aspects are inseparable. On theother hand, some consider dependent morphemes, which possess only the grammatical aspect andnot the lexical aspect, to be also words, such as particles and auxiliary verbs. In Japanese language
instruction, it is advisable not to teach explicitly the principles involved in parts of speechclassification. Rather, it is meaningful to spend some time covering the usage of particles andauxiliary verbs that appear in and at the end of sentences, so that students will develop proficiency
in the use of such entities.
 Major Parts of Speech
Major parts of speech that structure the basic framework of a sentence include nouns, verbs, andadjectives (i-adjectives and na-adjectives). A noun changes its form through what is called
declension (case change), and has the structural function to become the subject of the sentence, i.e.,
the thing about which a statement is made. A verb or an adjective changes its form via conjugation,and has the structural function of predicating, that is, making a statement about the subject. There
are also adverbs (adverbs of manner, degree, and declaration) and adnominals. They do not change
their word form, and their function is to semantically restrict components of the basic sentence
structure. Connectives, which have the function of connecting sentences, and interjections, which
can form sentences on their own, contribute to fill out the sentence structure. Neither of themundergo word form change.
 Nouns
In many cases a noun is accompanied by a case particle, and forms the core part of a syntactic
component, such as the subject or object, of a sentence. In that capacity the noun works as a wordthat carries concrete meaning such as persons, things, events, and phenomena, all of which have apart in the situation expressed by the sentence. A noun assumes the semantic role as the subject orobject of the situation which a verb or adjective expresses. It may also accompany da, de aru, desu,
etc. to function as the predicate of a sentence. In this capacity, the noun carries non-concrete
meaning such as attributes and relationships of and among people, things, and events. Amongthe nouns, quantifiers demonstrate unusual behavior not seen in other nouns.
 Verbs
A verb may express movement, change, or state, and primarily functions as the predicate of asentence. Verbs conjugate, and change according to grammatical categories such as voice, aspect,and mood.
They also possess functions to suspend the predication in a sentence, or to modify
nouns.
 Adjectives
Adjectives conjugate, express attributes of people, things, and events, express people’s senses andfeelings, modify nouns, and predicate attributes when acting as the predicate of a sentence. The
adverbial form of an adjective modifies the movement and the manner of change expressed by theadverbial form of a verb, and it also functions to limit the degree of the concept of stativity.
 Adverbs
Adverbs do not change form. In many cases they are classified into three main categories: 1.
adverbs of manner which modify the movement and change expressed by the proposition of asentence; 2. adverbs of degree which modify the state expressed by the proposition; 3. adverbs ofdeclaration which appear at the beginning of a sentence and reinforce or indicate in advance themodality of the sentence.
→動詞 Verbs (2-B), 形容詞 Adjectives (2-B), 名詞 Nouns (2-B), 数量詞 Quantifiers (2-B), 様態
副詞 Adverbs of Manner (2-B), 程度副詞 Adverbs of Degree (2-B), 陳述副詞 Declarative8

Adverbs(2-B), 助詞 Particles (2-B), 助動詞 Auxiliary Verbs (2-B)
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō, keitairon (Japanese Grammar/Morphology). Mugi
Shobo.
Teramura, Hideo (1982) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Suntax and Meaning I).
Kurosio Publishers.
(Koyano Tetsuo)

9 Grammatical Categories
 What Are Grammatical Categories?
The grammatical meaning that a word carries can be categorized according to the change that is
added to the form of the word. Forms that distinguish the grammatical meaning of words can begrouped into “genus” and “species” by collecting ones that belong to different “species” but which
comprise the same “genus,” and their common grammatical meaning is called a grammaticalcategory. For example, the forms aru and yomu signify “non-past,” and atta and yonda signify“past.” These forms all indicate tense. Tense, in this case, is a grammatical category.
 Grammatical Categories of the Predicate
The predicate of a Japanese sentence can be a verb predicate, an adjective predicate, or a noun
predicate. The grammatical categories of the predicate include affirmation/negation, tense,
politeness, and modality (mood).
Each grammatical category can be manifested in morphologically contrasted forms such as
Affirmation/Negation: hashiru ‘to run’ (affirmative) vs. hashiranai ‘not run’ (negative); Tense:hashiru ‘run’ (non-past) vs. hashitta ‘ran’ (past); Politeness: hashiru ‘run’ (plain) vs. hashirimasu‘run’ (polite); Modality: declarative modality, such as hashiru ‘run, will run’ (assertion) vs.
hashiru darō “will probably run” (conjecture), and other forms of modality, such as hashire ‘Run!’(imperative) vs. hashirō ‘intend to run, let’s run’ (volition, invitation). There are two types ofmodality: modality of cognition, and modality of utterance and transmission. The modality ofdeclaration, command, volition, and invitation are included in the modality of utterance andtransmission. The modality of declaration includes assertion and conjecture, which are derived fromthe modality of recognition.
Adjective predicates can be categorized as follows: Affirmation/Negation: ōkii ‘big’ (affirmation) vs.
ōkikunai ‘not big’ (negation); Tense: ōkii ‘big’ (non-past) vs. ōkikatta ‘was big’ (past); Politeness:ōkii ‘big’ (plain) vs. ōkii desu ‘big’ (polite) vs. ōkyū gozaimasu ‘big (very polite); Modality: ōkii‘big’ (assertion) vs. ōkii darō ‘must be big’ (conjecture).
Noun predicates can be categorized as follows: Affirmation/Negation: gakusei da ‘is a student’(affirmation) vs. gakusei de (wa) nai ’is not a student’ (negation); Tense: gakusei da ‘is a student’(non-past) vs. gakusei datta ‘was a student’ (past); Politeness: gakusei da ‘is a student’ (plain) vs.
gakusei desu ‘is a student’ (polite) vs. gakusei de gozaimasu’ is a student’ (very polite); Modality:
gakusei da ‘is a student’ (assertion) vs. gakusei darō ‘is probably a student’ (conjecture).
Inadjective predicates and noun predicates, politeness is expressed in a tripartite contrast.
When one tries to understand the grammatical meaning of a form, it is important to recognize, forinstance, that a marked form, e.g., hashira+nakat+ta+deshō, expresses
negation+past+politeness+conjecture, whereas the unmarked form, hashiru, expresses
affirmation+non-past+plain+assertion. Hashitta does not only express past; it also carries othergrammatical categories.
 Grammatical Categories of Verbs
Some, not all, verbs carry voice and aspect, which are not included in the grammatical categories
mentioned above with adjective and noun predicates. Active voice and direct passive voice, which
are the major aspects of voice, are expressed in morphological contrasts, e.g., shikaru ‘to scold’ vs.
shikarareru ‘to be scolded’. The core aspect is expressed as shikaru ‘scold’ vs. shikatteiru ’is
scolding’.
→ ヴォイス Voice (2-E), アスペクト Aspect (2-G), テンス Tense (2-G), モダリティ Modality(2-H).
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1996). Keitairon: josetsu (Morphology: Introduction). Mugi Shobo.
Nitta, Yoshio (2002). ‘Nihongo no bunpō kategori’ (Grammatical Categories of Japanese) in
Gendai nihongo kōza: 5 bunpō (Lectures in Contemporary Japanese #5: Grammar). Meiji Shoin.
(Nitta Yoshio)10 How to Understand Conjugation
In Japanese, words that form the predicate, such as verbs and adjectives, change form according totheir meaning and function. This change of word form is called conjugation, and words thatchange their forms are called conjugational words.
 Yōgen (用言: roughly verbs and adjectives) Complex
Japanese predicates can be divided into several “words” when one looks at formal characteristics
such as accent and breathing. (Here, a “word” is almost equivalent to an accent unit, or the smallest
a unit governed by breathing pauses, and is larger than the word described in school grammar.)That is, the Japanese predicate does not consist of one word; rather it is a complex of yōgen, madeup of a series of words.
Each of the “words” that make up the predicate (i.e., yōgen complex) undergoes word form change,
and words in a similar category may be strung together in a row. Therefore, altogether there isquite a wide variety of forms of predicates. Some people do not divide the yōgen complex intowords, however. They treat the predicate as a single entity, and call the entire variety of changes
conjugation. Some try to integrate all variety of such word form change into a single chart. This
chart not only tends to be enormous in size, but also each word shows the same inflection cyclically.
There is much redundancy in this approach. When dealing with Japanese, it will be much simpler
if one separates the description of the order in which the components of the predicate (yōgen
complex) appear and the description of the word form change of individual words.
The yōgen complex has the following structure:yōgen proper — auxiliary yōgen — auxiliary verbs — final/connective particle
The yōgen proper, auxiliary yōgen, auxiliary verbs, and particles are all “words.” There may be
more than one auxiliary yōgen, auxiliary verb, or sentence final particle. Several words in one
category may be strung together (in a particular sequence). Each yōgen proper, auxiliary yōgen
and auxiliary verb undergoes inflection.
<用言 Proper>yomu<Sentence Final Particle>
yonda<Aux. Verb><Conjunctive Particle><Auxiliary 用言>----------------yonde-iru
rashiiyoyonde-itarashikatta
node
When an auxiliary yōgen is attached to the yōgen proper, the two work as one unit, and the“conjugation” (in the narrow definition, explained later), which the yōgen proper normally
undergoes, is performed on the auxiliary yōgen.
An auxiliary verb has its independence as a word and it undergoes word form change by itself.
However, it is different from an auxiliary yōgen in that an auxiliary verb can make the preceding
word to undergo word form change. What we call “auxiliary verbs” here differ from those used inschool grammar in that they are independent words, and are limited to such words as rashii, (kamo-)
shirenai, (ni) chigainai, sōda, darō, deshō. The majority of auxiliary verbs in school grammar(e.g., (ra-) reru, (sa-) seru, tai, masu, nai, and ta) are not “words,” but are simply morphemes thatare components of words, and they only function as internal affixes/word-endings to yōgen ( yōgen
proper and auxiliary yōgen). Similarly, there are conjunctive particles in school grammar that are
simply word endings to yōgen, such as -te, -nagara, -ba, and -tara.
Yōgen proper and auxiliary yōgen not only undergo word form change, but they also are capable ofderiving other yōgen proper and auxiliary yōgen.
1.a. yomu
1.b. yonda
2.a. yomaseru
2.b. yomaseta
11

3.a. yomareru
3.b. yomareta
4.a. yomanai
4.b. yomarenakatta
The word form change seen in 1.a. to 1.b. is called “conjugation” (in the narrow sense) of itself,
whereas the generation of 2., 3., and 4. from 1. is called the derivation from 1. The derived yogen
2., 3., and 4. are words in their own right, and they conjugate (in the narrow sense) into 2.a., 2.b.
and 2.c. respectively.
Given the relationship between the behavior of the word form and the grammatical categories of thepredicates, the convention is to describe voice, politeness (-masu), affirmation/negation, desire, anddifficulty/ease as derived yōgen; aspect and giving/receiving as auxiliary yōgen; politeness (desu)
and part of modality as auxiliary verbs. Tense, some forms of modality, and conjunctive relationshipare commonly described as “conjugation” (in the narrow sense).
 Characteristics of Conjugation in JapaneseJapanese words that conjugate do not totally change their form when they undergo conjugation. The
structure of a “word” is a string of morphemes that represent meaning and function in a certain
sequence, and the form of each morpheme is almost always constant. The conjugation only occurs
at the boundary between morphemes.
In required grammatical categories, the unmarked meaning (such as “affirmation” inaffirmation/negation) is expressed by the absence of the opposing morpheme (i.e., the existence ofthe zero morpheme). Only visible morphemes are significant in conjugation, and zero morphemes
are ignored.
Morphemes that are part of a conjugated word can be classified by the position at which they
appear: the “word-stem” that appears at the beginning of the “word,” the “ending” that appears at
the end, and the affixes that appear between the two. Multiple affixes may appear in a fixedsequence in a word.
For example, yomu can be broken down into the following morphemes: yom-u, yomaseru into
yom-ase-(r)-u, and yomaserareru into yom- (stem), -ase- (affix), -are- (affix), and -u- (ending).
Conjugation (in the narrow sense) can be defined as the word form change that involves the word
ending and the morpheme that directly precedes it. Derivation can be defined as the word formchange that involves the affix and the morpheme that precedes or succeeds the affix. However,both processes use a mechanism of the same nature as far as the form is concerned, and can betreated as the same from the point of view of word form generation. What is commonly called
conjugation includes conjugation (in the narrow sense) and derivation. Conjugation in the
broader sense will be discussed in subsequent sections.
Conjugation varies according to the type of yōgen.
 Conjugation of Verbs.

There are various methods of sorting and presenting conjugation in Japanese
Conjugation is a topical phenomenon that occurs at the boundary of morphemes. Thus, rather
than presenting the word as a paradigm, it is easier to describe it in detail if one lists the precedingmorpheme (tentatively, the preceding part (senkō-bu) hereafter) and the succeeding morpheme (thesucceeding part (kōzoku-bu)) to describe what change occurs at the boundary (the middle part(chūkan-bu)). The reason we use the terms preceding part and succeeding part instead of stem andending is that we need to include affixes in our discussion. The stem is always a preceding partand the word ending is always a succeeding part, but an affix becomes a succeeding part when it
follows the stem, and a preceding part when it is followed by the word ending.
To take theexample yom-ase-(r)-u, the stem yom- is the preceding part in yom-ase- and the affix -ase- is the
succeeding part, while in -ase-(r)-u the word ending -u is the succeeding part to -ase-, which
thereby serves as a preceding part.
The simplest method to designate conjugation is simply to show the preceding, middle andsucceeding parts in the order in which they occur.
So-called conjugation tables place thepreceding succeeding parts as the vertical and horizontal axes respectively and the middle part is12

shown at the intersection of the two.
the diagram below:
preceding part↓
middle part →The morphological form of the verb is obtained as shown insucceeding part

Chart 2-1 shows the conjugation of the contemporary common dialect.
In school grammar a verb consists of only the preceding part and middle part (the middle part iscalled the conjugating ending and the preceding part and middle part together are called the
conjugated form), and the succeeding part is a separate entity. However, there is no ground forincluding the middle part in the preceding part.
Chart 2-1: Tentative Verb Conjugation Chart of Contemporary Japanese I（読）yo（起き） oki（逃げ） nige（読まれ）yomare（読ませ）yomase-ma-----nai, -zuni, -naide-mi-----nagara, -masu-mu-ru-me-----ba-me-ro-ma-ra-reru-ma-sa-seru-mo-yo-u
Chart 2-2: Verb Conjugation Table of Contemporary Japanese in School Grammar
読
起
投
yo
oki
nage
(1) ma/mokigenai, u/you, re/rareru, seru/saseru(2) miki
genagara, masu
(3) mu
kiru
geru
Noun
(4) mekiru
geruba(5) mekire
gere(6) mekiro
gero
Chart 2-3: Tentative Chart of the Verb Conjugation of Contemporary Japanese II
yomokinage-are-asea------na-(i)-zuni-naidei------nagara -nas(u)
--r
-u
-eba
-are-(ru)--s-ase-(ru)--y-ooThe conjugation table created by classical Japanese scholars in the Edo period, which forms thebasis of the school grammar conjugation table, is created with the same principles used in Chart 2-1.
It differs, however, in two points. 1) Empty columns (marked “---“ in Chart 2-1) were not13

recognized since they did not know the concept of zero; 2) the passive and causative forms are
regarded as co-hyponyms with transitive and intransitive verbs, and are treated as separate
categories. They are not included in the conjugation table.
The school grammar conjugation table of current Japanese was not created by induction through thereality of the current usage. Rather, it replaced the conjugation table for classical Japanese withcurrent words without adjusting the number of columns. Furthermore, the passive and causative
forms are forcefully fit into it. Therefore the reader will not only formulate real forms such as
yoma-nai, yomo-o, yoma-reru, oki-saseru, but also non-existing forms such as *yomo-nai, *yoma-u,*yoma-rareru, *oki-seru in Row . In Rows and there are unnecessary duplications. This
table is inappropriate for use in Japanese language classrooms. It at least has to be modified to thelevel of Chart 2-1.
Classical Japanese scholars in the Edo period did not have a method of transcribing phonemes.
Currently, there is no reason we should rely on kana to describe the language. Chart 2-3 is thetranscription of Chart 2-1 at the phonemic level.
It is problematic that, in school grammar, the majority of regular verbs (Five-Rows Verbs, Upper
One-Row Verbs, Lower One-Row Verbs) and the very few, irregular verbs, which include suru ‘do’
and kuru ‘come’, are treated as equal categories. This practice obscures the regularity that the
majority of verbs exhibit. Classical Japanese scholars called such irregular verbs “irregular case
verbs (henkaku dōshi)” and treated them separately. We should re-adopt their intelligent approach.
The only difference between Upper One-Row Verbs (okiru and the like) and Lower One-Row Verbs(such as nageru) is that the stem ends with -i or -e, as shown in Charts 2-1 and 2-3. Otherwise,
they conjugate in exactly the same way; there is no need for differentiating the two. If one applies
the same level of differentiation to Five-Rows Verbs, one will have to separate the verbs according
to the consonant at the end of the stem, e.g., -m- group as in yom- ‘read’, and -g- group as in oyog‘swim’, and so on. The current One-Row Verbs used to conjugate okizu ‘get up (negative)’, oku,
okuru, and nagezu ‘throw (negative)’, nagu, naguru, and so on, in classical language, and it used tobe that the underlined sound in the examples had to be written out. This is the only reason these twogroups of verbs are differentiated in school grammar.
 Assigning Conjugation Lexically
As shown in Charts 2-3, there are only two types of regular verbs. The stem of one type ends witha vowel (Upper One-Row and Lower One-Row in school grammar), and the stem of the other typeends with a consonant (Five-Rows Conjugation in school grammar).
Here is a look at the verbs in Chart 2-3 in terms of consonants and vowels.
1.
2.
3.

4.

[preceding part]Ends with a consonantEnds with a consonantEnds with a vowel
Ends with a vowel
One consonant[succeeding part]
When begins with a consonant
When begins with a vowel
When begins with a consonant
When begins with a vowel[middle part]One vowel
None
None

This shows that, only when one consonant is followed by another, or one vowel is followed byanother at the morpheme boundary, a vowel appears between the consonants and a consonant
appears between the vowels respectively. In other conditions no action occurs at the boundary(middle part).
A simpler description is possible when one utilizes this singular manifestaton of the middle part.
In Chart 2-3, let us attach the middle part to the head of succeeding part and re-organize thesucceeding part as follows:-ana-(i)-azuni-anaide-inagara-imas-(u)-ru-reba-rare-(ru)-sase-(ru)-yō14Once we have done this, we establish the rule: When two consecutive consonants or two
consecutive vowels occur at a morpheme boundary, the second consonant or vowel respectively
must be deleted.
Here is what we obtain by applying this rule. (« » marks what has been
deleted.)
1. yom- + yō →yom-«y »ō→yomō
2. yom- + -ana(i) → yom-ana(i) → <no change>
3. oki- + -yō →oki-yō → <no change>
4. oki- + -ana(i) → oki -«a »ana(i) → okina(i)This way one only needs to remember the stem-ending affix, and there is no need to memorize thecumbersome conjugation table. While in school grammar one spends the same amount of effort
looking up every conjugation form, this approach allows lookup in stages. In 2. and 3. in theabove list, one does not have to do anything.
 Assigning Conjugation by Types
The aforementioned approach works with the contemporary common dialect, but it does not workwith other dialects, nor does it apply to various conjugation systems in historical dialects.
For example, one dialect shares yomanai ‘read (negative)’ with the common dialect, but it has
okiranai ‘get up, negative’ instead of okinai. Another dialect shares yomō ‘read, volition’ with thecommon dialect but instead of okiyō ‘get up, volition’ it has okirō.
In the former example, -ana(i)is replaced with -rana(i); in the latter example -yō is replaced with -rō. We are unable to explain
where r in -rana(i) came from, nor we know why r replaces y in -rō.
In a dialect where okuru is used instead of okiru ‘get up’ or in historical dialects, the conjugation
rule cannot be described by deletion of sounds at the morpheme boundary alone; stem exchange
needs to be taken into consideration.
Figure 2-1 is an attempt to use a flow chart to show how to designate conjugation. It is built on
the view that the process is based on the correlation between the form and the linguisticallymeaningful classification (distinction between consonant and vowel, difference in meaning, etc.).
Figure 2-1: Flow Chart for Designating Verb “Conjugation”-C bears the meaning of “negation”-C is the ending that begins with t~C- + -C ~

➡

Other
~V- + -V~

Other

Other

Insert a as the middle part
Euphonically changed form
(explained later)
Insert i as the middle part

Other
When -V~ is -aseWhen -V~ is -ō

No change
Insert r as the middle part
Insert s as themiddle part
Insert y as the middle part

Note: C designates Consonant, V designates Vowel, ~C- means that the preceding part ends with aconsonant, ~V- means that the preceding part ends with a vowel, -C~ means that the succeeding part
begins with a consonant, and -V~ means that the succeeding part begins with a vowel.
This approach is the same as the lexical approach to conjugation designation in that there is no needfor processing unless consecutive consonants or consecutive vowels occur at the morphemeboundary. The predominant feature of this flow chart is that it shows the complexity of processing
15

in stages by branching. More complex processing is required if more branching is shown for theword form. The closer the word form is to the line leading to the middle line where it is marked “nochange,” the simpler the processing is to generate it. Other than memorizing the stem-affix-ending(Chart 2-4), one needs only to remember to insert i between the two consecutive consonants, and r
between the two consecutive vowels at the morpheme boundary.
The only other things one needs
to remember are the few exceptional endings and affixes and how to process them.
If there is no branching of designation by exceptions, one only needs to go back to the middle line
for processing. In a dialect that has the form -(r)-ō instead of -(y)-ō, the processing is simpler withthis chart since there is no branching for -yō. In a dialect where the negative form -na-(i) is
replaced with -ana-(i), it becomes clear that the inserted a in the middle part was included in thecourse of processing the succeeding part -na(i).
The processing in the right column of the chart is also not limited to deletion only, and flexible
handling is possible.
Please note, however, that this chart is not equipped to handle euphonically changed forms, forms
which are generated when a preceding part that ends with a consonant is combined with an endingthat begins with t (-ta, -tara, -tari, -te, etc.), e.g., yonda and kaita. This is because in a euphonicallychanged form, the preceding part and middle part are fused. The initial sound t in the succeeding
part may also change to d.
_________________________________________________________________________
Chart 2-4: Examples of Stems, Affixes, and Endings_________________________________________________________________________
 Examples of Stems
 Stems ending in consonants (Five-Rows Verbs in school grammar)
yom- (yomu), tat- (tatsu), oyog- (oyogu), odorok- (odoroku)
waraw- (warau —delete w in wi, wu, wo after the conjugation is completed) Stems ending in vowels (Upper One-Row Verbs and Lower One-Row Verbs in school grammar)mi- (miru) oki- (okiru)ne- (neru) nage- (nageru) Affixes-ase- (causative)-are- (passive)-e- (potential)-mas- (politeness – takes special endings. They are exceptions.)
 Forms “conjugating” like adjectives when function aspreceding part , explained later.
-na- (~nai: negation) -ta- (~tai) -yasu- (~yasui) -niku- (~nikui)______________________________________________________________________
 Endings-u (ending for the so called conclusive form and adnominal form), -ō (u/yō),-una(prohibition)-e/o (ending for the command form. It shows up as e with the preceding part that ends with aconsonant, o with the preceding part that ends with a vowel)-ni (ni of purpose), -nagara, -ø (cessation. Hereafter, -ø denotes lack of a visible morpheme.)
 With the meaning of negation-naide, -zuni
 In the euphonically chaned forms (explained later)-ta, -tara, -tari, -te, -tewa, -tya, -temo
Chart 2-5: Euphonically Changed Form of Verbs～m- + -t～(e.g.) yom- + -ta →sin- + -ta →～n- + -t～
→ ～Nd～～b- + -t～
tob- + -ta→～g- + -t～
→ ～Id～
kog- + -ta →～k- + -t～
→ ～Id～
kak- + -ta →
16

yoNda
siNda
toNda
koIda
kaIta

～w- + -t～
kaw- + -ta → kaQta～t- + -t～
→ ～Qt～
tat- + -ta→ taQta～r- + -t～tor- + -ta→ toQta____________________________________________________________________
Chart 2-6: Rules of Generating Euphonically Changed Form____________________________________________________________________
 Succeeding Part The preceding part ends with a nasal ([m], [n]) or a voiced consonant ([b], [g]) → [t~] isvoiced to become [d~].
 The preceding part ends in another sound → <[t~] remains as is> preceding Part The preceding part ends with [k] or [g] → The ending of the preceding part changes to [i].
 The preceding part ends with another sound and the succeeding part begins with [t]→ The
ending of the preceding part changes to /Q/ The preceding part ends with another sound and the succeeding part begins with [d] →The ending of the preceding part changes to /N/.
_______________________________________________________________________
The consonant at the end of the preceding part determines which euphonically changed form isgenerated. (~s- is an exception. It has the regular conjugation.) It is not too much trouble tomemorize all the rules listed in Chart 2-5, but the rules can be learned separately for the preceding
part and the succeeding part as in Chart 2-6. Nasal and voiced sounds tend to affect the conditionof language phenomena. For instance, yon (‘four’) may be pronounced yo only when theimmediately following sound is a nasal or voiced. When the succeeding sound is voiceless, thegemminate consonant (sokuon) /Q/ appears. When the succeeding sound is voiced, the syllabic
nasal (hatsuon) /N/ appears. This phenomenon is widely seen in onomatopoeia. The chart
provides the learner with broader learning strategies than simple memorizeation of the specific rules
for euphonic changes in verb forms.
 Conjugation of Adjectives
Adjectives do not pose complex problems as verbs do, because they can be cleanly split into thepreceding part and the succeeding part with no middle part in between. The succeeding part
(endings) can be shown as follows:-i-kereba-ku-kute-kuteha (kucha)-kutemo-katta-kattara-kattariMorphologically, adjectives belong to a completely separate word type from verbs. There is noneed to group their endings with those of verbs. Etymologically, -katta, -kattara, and so on,contain the verb aru, but at present these words are completely fused with the rest bothmorphologically and in accentuation. In school grammar, there is the practice of creating the
middle part -kat- in order to obtain the common endings, -ta and -tara, with verbs, but thisunnecessary.
Please note that, with affixes that derive adjectives from verbs (affixes that attach to verbs but takeadjectival endings), such as -nai, -tai, and -yasui, the verb-type conjugation occurs in the front partand the adjective-type conjugation occurs in the rear part, with an affix in between.
Conversely, there are verb-type end-of-the-word affixes that are attached to adjectives, such as-garu.
 Conjugation of the Copula
The word da constitutes a class of its own, and it is not possible to extract the stem and ending bycomparing it with words in the same category. One must simply memorize the word as a paradigm.
With so-called na-adjectives, one must consider that morphologically the da part is an independent
word, i.e., the copula. (Darō is an auxiliary verb and nara is a conjunctive particle, and not a variantof da.)
17

da
de
data

na
dewa (ja)dattarani
demo
dattari Conjugation of Auxiliary Verbs
There is no conjugation pattern per se for auxiliary verbs. If the auxiliary verb is of theadjective-type, such as rashii (conjecture), it has the same conjugation pattern as adjectives.
→ 動詞活用の見分け方 How to differentiate verb conjugation (2-M), 活用 Conjugation (7-D),
活用とアクセント Conjugation and Accent (2-B)
 References
Kiyose, Gisaburo Norikura (1989) Nihongo bunpō shinron (New Study in Japanese Grammar).
Ofusha.
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō: keitairon (Japanese Grammar/Morphology). Mugi
Shobo.
Nakayama, Masahisa (1981) ‘Dōshi katsuyō no shurui to sono kijutsu-hō’ (Types of Verb
Conjugation and Their Description) in Kokugo to kokubungaku, 58-3.
_______________ (1984) ‘Dōshi no katsuyō’ “(Verb Conjugation) in Kenkyū shiryō nihon bunpō 2.
Meiji Shoin.
Hashimoto, Shinkichi (1948) Kokugohō kenkyū (Study of Japanese Grammar). Iwanami Shoten.
Block, B., Miller, R. ed., Eiichi Hayashi, supervisor of translation (1975) Burokku nihongo ronkō(Bernard Block on Japanese). Kenkyusha.
Muraki, Shinjiro (1991) Nihongo dōshi no shosō (Various Aspects of Japanese Verbs). Hituzi
Syobo.
Yanaike, Makoto (1995) ‘Onbinkei: sono kijutsu’ (Euphonic Forms and Their Description) inTsukishima Hirosi koki kinen kokugogaku ronshū. Kyuko Shoin.
(Yanaike Makoto)18 Verbs
 Basic Characteristics of Verbs
Typical and representative verbs express movements and actions. Because verbs express
movements, they have the grammatical function of forming the predicate of various clauses.
Japanese verbs alter their word form in connection with this function.
Japanese adjectives also change their form and serve as predicates, but the function is to express
attributes, and the main usage has to do with adnominal modification, as in atarashii hon ga
shuppan sareta ‘A new book has been published’. In contrast, it is not frequent that a verb is used
for adnominal modification as in taberu mono ga nai ‘There is no food to eat’. The main usage ofverbs is the formation of the predicate, as in ame ga fureba, undōkai wa chūshi da ‘If it rains, theathletic meeting will be called off’, and hageshii ame ga futta ‘A severe rain fell.’ Conjugation and Grammatical Categories
Verbs change the form and become the predicate of various clauses to form sentences. This typeof word form change is called conjugation. The verb kaku ‘write’, for instance, conjugates asfollows: kaitari (parallel construction form), kakinagara (adverbial form), kaki/kaite (suspendedform), kaku/kaita (adnominal form), kakeba/kaitara/kakuto (conditional form), kaitemo/kaitatte(adversative conditional form), kaku, kaita/kakō/kake (conclusive form). Each form may serve as
the predicate of the clause where it appears.
Verbs, when used as the predicate, possess grammatical categories such as affirmation/negation,tense, politeness, and modality. Verbs also possess the grammatical categories of voice and aspect,which are specific to verbs.
 Combining Ability of Verbs
The primary function of verbs is to form the predicate of a sentence. As the predicate, the verb has
the function of uniting adverbial components and integrating them into a sentence. The
components, kare wa, kōhii o, and oishisō ni in Kare wa kōhii o oishisō ni nonda ‘He drank his
coffee with relish,’ are all connected and bound to the verb nonda. This “case governance” is at
the very core of the verb’s ability to combine. This is a function with which the verb selects thenoun phrases with which it can combine in order to realize the movement or state it expresses. For
instance, waru ‘break/shatter’ requires a ga-case noun phrase and o-case noun phrase, as in X ga Y owaru ‘X breaks Y’. Okuru ‘give a gift’ requires a ga-case noun phrase, o-case noun phrase, andni-case noun phrase, as in X ga Z ni Y o okuru ‘X gives a gift of Y to Z’.
 Lexico-Grammatical Sub-Categories of Verbs
Verbs are classified into several grammatical sub-categories according to their behavior towardtense, aspect, voice, volition, command, and so on.
The ru-form (basic form) of one group of verbs (motion verbs) expresses the future (e.g., Ah,nimotsu ga ochiru ‘Look out! The package is going to fall’), and the other group (stative verbs) (e.g.,
Kono heya niwa tsukue ga aru ‘There are desks in this room’), expresses the present with the
ru-form. Motion verbs are able to express aspect (e.g., Kare wa wain o nonda/nonde ita ‘He
drank/was drinking wine’), but stative verbs do not possess this function (e.g., Tsukue no ue ni hon
ga aru/*atte iru ‘There is/*is being a book on the desk’).
With volition and command, there are volitional verbs that express will, command, and prohibition(e.g., kōen ni ikō ‘I will/Let’s go to the park’, kōen ni ike ‘Go to the park!’, kōen ni iku na ‘Don’t go
to the park!’), and non-volitional verbs such as komaru ‘be in a bind’ that cannot express will,command, or prohibition (e.g., *komarō, *unto komare, *sonna koto de komaruna). Further, there
are verbs that cannot express will and command but which can express prohibition (e.g., *odorokō,*unto odoroke, sonna koto de odoroku na ‘Don’t be surprised by such news’).
 Loss of Verb-Like Characteristics
Typically, verbs express movement and are capable of forming predicates. The verb aru ‘be/possess/ exist’ is atypical in that, by expressing a state, it does not possess aspect.
Morphologically, aru lacks the negative form, *aranai. In expressions such as bakagete iru
19‘ridiculous’ and togatte iru ‘pointy’, the verbs only appear in the teiru-form in the formation of thepredicate, and these verbs are used more in adnominal modification than in the formation of thepredicate. This makes these verbs very similar to adjectives. The verb tsureru ‘take someone
along’ has a limited usage that is built around its te-form (e.g., Kodomo o kōen ni tsurete iku ‘I willtake/take the child to the park’).
→ 活用 Conjugation (2-B), 文法カテゴリーGrammatical Category (2-B), 情態動詞 Stative Verb
(2-G)
 References
Miyajima, Tatsuo (1972) Dōshi no imi, yōhō no kijutsuteki kenkyū (Descriptive Study of the
Meanings of Verbs and Their Usage). Shuei Shuppan.
Takahashi, Taro (2003) Dōshi kyū shō (Verbs Chapter 9). Hituzi Syobo.
(Nitta Yoshio)20 Intransitive Verbs and Transitive Verbs
In Japanese there are intransitive verbs and transitive verbs that form morphological pairs (e.g.,
mawaru ‘something turns’ and mawasu ‘one turns something’). There are quite a lot of such pairs
among basic verbs, and learners commonly have difficulty acquiring them. The
intransitive-transitive correspondence can be sorted out morphologically into several patterns. At
some point the instructor may want to give instruction on this matter to help learners.
In sorting the paired patterns, it is effective to transcribe the verbs in rōmaji. The common
morphological traits in the following intransitive-transitive pairs may not be obvious if transcribedin kana. (In describing the corresponding pairs, I shall list the intransitive verb on the left and thetransitive verb on the right hereafter.)
Examples:
kakaru-kakeru (‘it takes/I spend’), agaru-ageru (‘go up/raise’), kabusaru-kabuseru (‘cover/cover),mazaru-mazeru (‘mix/mix’), ataru-ateru (‘hit/hit), kasanaru-kasaneru (‘overlie/overlay’),tomaru-tomeru (‘stop/stop’), kuwawaru-kuwa(w)eru (‘join/add’).
Here, I will modify the straightforward Rōmaji transcription a little. I will mark the initial partthat is common in both the intransitive and transitive verbs with “~”, and mark the boundary
between the stem and conjugating ending with “-“. This way, all the examples above can be writtenout as the “~ar-u/~e-ru” type. (The last example is considered “kuwaweru.”)
Paired intransitive and transitive verbs are sorted out in this manner and the patterns of pairs areshown on Chart 2-8 with examples. The patterns are divided into four major types. To establish
these four types, first we took out the shared part (signified by “—“) and the conjugatable ending,and checked whether there was -r- or -s- in the remaining part.
We have found that if there is either -r- or -s- in the stem minus the “—“, the intransitive verb
always has -r- and the transitive counterpart always has -s-.
_______________________________________________________________________
Chart 2-8: Paired Verbs with or without -r- and -s_______________________________________________________________________«A» Intransitive Verb Contains ~r- and Transitive Verb Contains ~s-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(A-1) [~r-u -- ~s-u]
utsuru – utsusu‘to transfer’kaeru – kaesu‘to go home – to give back’
kudaru – kudasu‘to go down – tolower’
naoru – naosu‘to heal – torectify’mawaru – mawasu ‘to turn’(A-2) [~re-ru -- ~su-ru]
kakureru – kakusu ‘to hide’koboreru – kobosu ‘to spill’
nagareru – nagasu‘(liquid) to run/flow’hazureru – hazusu ‘to come off – tounlatch’(A-3) [~r-u -- ~se-ru]
noru – noseru ‘to get onboard – to load’tōru – tōsu
‘to go through – to let
through’nokoru – nokosu ‘to stay behind – to leave behind’wataru – watasu‘to cross– to hand over’

kegareru – kegasu ‘to become filthy – to soil’
kowareru – kowasu ‘to break’
taoreru – taosu‘to topple over – to topple’
hanareru – hanasu ‘to separate’

niru– niseru ‘to resemble – to imitate’21

_________________________________________________________________«B» Intransitive Verb Contains –r-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(B-1) [~ar-u -- ~e-ru]
agaru – ageru ‘to rise – to hoist’
ataru – ateru ‘to hit’atsumaru – atsumeru ‘to gather’ukaru – ukeru ‘to pass (an exam) – to take (anexam)’
usumaru – usumeru ‘to become diluted –umaru – umeru ‘to be filled – to fill’
to dilute’osamaru – osameru ‘to fall into place – to store’
kakaru – kakeru ‘to cost – to spend’kabusaru – kabuseru ‘to cover’kimaru – kimeru ‘to be settled – to decide’sagaru – sageru ‘to lower’somaru – someru ‘to be dyed – to dye’takamaru – takameru ‘to heighten’tasukaru – tasukeru ‘to be saved – to save’
tamaru – tameru ‘to accumulate’magaru – mageru ‘to bend’mazaru – mazeru ‘to mix’
marumaru – marumeru ‘to roll’mitsukaru – mitsukeru ‘to be found – to find’mōkaru – mōkeru ‘to be lucrative – to make aprofit’(B-2) [~ar-u -- ~-u]kurumaru – kurumu ‘to wrap oneself – to wrap’

tsunagaru – tsunagu ‘to be connected – toconnect’matagaru – matagu ‘to mount – to straddle’

fusagaru – fusagu ‘to be plugged – to plug’____________________________________________________________________«C» Transitive Verb Contains –s------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(C-1) [~-u -- ~as-u]
ugoku – ugokasu ‘to move’
kawaku – kawakasu ‘to dry’doku – dokasu ‘to get out of theway – to remove’
naru – narasu ‘to ring’

tobu – tobasu‘to fly’heru – herasu ‘to decrease’(C-2) [~e-ru -- ~as-u]
areru – arasu ‘to go to ruin – to devastate’kogeru – kogasu ‘to scorch’
tokeru – tokasu ‘to melt’nigeru – nigasu ‘to run away – to release’makeru – makasu ‘to be defeated – to defeat’*taeru – tayasu (tayeru – tayasu) ‘to become
extinct – to exterminate’
haeru – hayasu ‘to grow’fueru – fuyasu ‘to increase’

kareru – karasu ‘to dry up’sameru – samasu ‘to cool down – to cool’nareru – narasu ‘to get used to – to break in’nureru – nurasu ‘to get wet – to moisten’moreru – morasu ‘to leak’hieru – hiyasu ‘to become cold – to cool’moeru – moyasu ‘to burn’(C-3) [~i-ru -- ~os-u]
okiru – okosu ‘to wake up – to wake someone up’
oriru – orosu ‘to get off – to unload’
horobiru – horobosu ‘to become extinct – to destroy’(C-4) [~i-ru -- ~as-u]
22

ochiru – otosu ‘to fall – to drop’
sugiru – sugosu ‘time passes – spendtime’ikiru – ikasu ‘to live – to make the most of’tojiru – tozasu ‘to close – to block’

nobiru – nobasu

michiru – mitasu ‘to fill up’‘to stretch’_____________________________________________________________«D» Neither –r- nor –s- Is Included-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(D-1) [~e-ru -- ~-u]oreru – oru ‘to break’kireru – kiru
‘to snap’
kudakeru – kudaku ‘to shatter’sakeru– saku ‘to tear’toreru – toru ‘to yield’
nukeru – nuku ‘to fall out – to pull out’yabureru – yaburu ‘to tear’wareru – waru ‘to crack’(D-2) [~-u -- ~e-ru]
aku – akeru ‘to open’
ukabu – ukaberu ‘to float’susumu – susumeru ‘to proceed’sodatsu – sodateru ‘to grow’tatsu – tateru ‘to stand up’chijimu – chijimeru ‘to shrink’tsuku – tsukeru ‘to attach’tsuzuku – tsuzukeru ‘to continue’
todoku – todokeru ‘to reach – to deliver’ narabu – naraberu ‘to line up’*sorou – soroeru (sorrow-u – sorowe-ru) ‘to match’kanau- kanaeru ‘to be fulfilled – tototonou – totonoeru ‘to be prepared – tofulfill’prepare’(D-3) [~e-ru -- ~-ru]
mieru – miru ‘is visible – to look’nieru – niru ‘to boil’______________________________________________________________________The majority of Japanese verbs fall into one of the 4 major types shown above. A few comments
are added below.
(1) Paired intransitive and transitive verbs tend to have the structural correspondence seen in koma
ga mawaru ‘the top spins” vs. koma o mawasu ‘one spins the top.’ However, a few pairs that haveother correspondences are included in the above types. Examples: senpai ni makeru ‘be outdone by
one’s senior’—sempai o makasu ‘outdo one’s senior member’; shiken ni ukaru ‘pass theexam’—shiken o ukeru ‘take the exam’.
(2) Some basic verbs do not fit into any of the above types, but this is explained from etymology
and historical changes.
kieru ‘the light goes out’ – kesu ‘one extinguishes the light’
deru ‘go out’ – dasu ‘one takes out something’neru ‘sleep’ – nekasu ‘one puts someone to bed’hairu ‘go in’ – ireru ‘ one puts something inaspect’(3) There are transitive-transitive verb pairs that show a similar correspondence found in
intransitive and transitive pairs.
[~ar-u -- ~e-ru] Type:azukaru ‘keep, take care of’ – azukeru ‘entrust’sazukaru ‘be endowed with’ – sazukeru ‘award’[~-ru -- ~se-ru] Type:miru ‘see’ – miseru ‘show’kiru ‘put on clothes’– kiseru ‘dress someone’abiru ‘pour, bathe’ – abiseru ‘pour’(4) One intransitive verb has two corresponding transitive verbs; one transitive verb has twocorresponding intransitive verbs. (There are just a few cases where two intransitive verbs having
23

two corresponding transitive verbs.)
 tsunagaru – tsunageru & tsunagu ‘join, link’
tokeru – tokasu & toku ‘melt, untie’
nukeru ‘come off, drop out’ – nukasu & nuku ‘skip, uncork, etc.’
kireru ‘be cut off, run out’ – kirasu & kiru ‘exhaust, cut’mureru ‘get musty’ – murasu & musu ‘steam’
doku ‘get out of the way’– dokasu & dokeru ‘remove’ okoru & okiru ‘happen’ – okosu ‘happen, cause’chijimaru & chijimu ‘shrink’ – chijimeru ‘shrink’
yasumaru & yasumu ‘calm down, rest’ – yasumeru ‘rest, halt’karamaru & karamu ‘get tangled’ – karameru ‘entwine’
yowamaru & yowaru ‘weaken’ – yowameru ‘weaken’ hagareru & hageru ‘come off, peel off’– hagu & hagasu ‘peel’
Each of the above group may be re-organized into one of the following types:
tsunagaru – tsunageru belongs to ( B-1) type,tsunagaru – tsunagu belongs to (B-2) type,okoru – okosu belong to (A-1) type,okiru – okosu belong to (C-3) type, and so on.
(5) There are some verbs that have the same form for both intransitive and transitive counterparts.
Some have very similar meaning in both forms, such as in mon ga tojiru ‘the gate closes’– mon otojiru ‘one closes the gate’. Other verbs do not share the same meaning. Example: akanbō gawarau ‘the baby laughs’ – hito no shippai o warau ‘laugh at someone’s failure.’ There are a few
cases in which the same verb may be used both intransitively and transitively.
 Kawa no suiryō ga masu ‘the water volume in the river increases’– Kawa ga suiryō o masu
‘the river increases its water volume’
Seki ga kawaru ‘the seating is changed’ – Seki o kawaru ‘move out of one’s seat toanother’ Kaisha ni tsutomeru ‘work for a company’– Shikai o tsutomeru ‘serve as an MC’
Shio ga hiku ‘the tide ebbs’– Sara o temae ni hiku ‘pull the plate toward oneself’(6) Whether the verb pair is in effect or not depends on the region, time period, and individual.
Some may find one verb in the pair to be unnatural. In the following examples the uses of theintransitive verbs will seem odd to many speakers, depending on their region:
Sentakumono ga hiru ‘the laundry gets dry’ – Sentakumono o hosu ‘hang out the laundry’Imo ga fukeru ‘the potato gets steamed’ – Imo o fukasu ‘steam potatoes’
Tamago ga yudaru ‘the egg gets boiled’ – Tamago o yuderu ‘boil eggs’
Hana ga ikaru ‘the flower gets arranged’ – Hana o ikeru ‘arrange flowers’
Kaki ga tsurusaru ‘the persimmon fruit gets hung out’ – Kaki o tsurusu ‘hang persimmons’Yasai ga itamaru ‘the vegetables get stir-fried’ – Yasai o itameru ‘stir-fry vegetables’(7) Some types have more pairs than others. Dominant types seem to keep expanding theirinventory. When a new word is temporarily created, these dominant types may work as templates.
Examples: nagusameru (tr.) ‘console someone’ → nagusamaru (intr.) ‘feel consoled’ (B-1) type;nagomu (intr.) ‘feel at ease’→ nagomeru (tr.) ‘put someone at ease’ (D-1) type.
→ 動詞 Verbs (2-B), 自動詞と他動詞の特徴 Characteristics of Intransitive and Transitive Verbs(2-M)
 References
Oshika, Tadahisa (1990) ‘Gendaigo dōshi no keishiki ni kansuru jakkan no seiri – ji/ta no
keishikiteki na tairitsu o tōshite’ (Some Sorting of the Forms of Verbs in Contemporary Japanese– Through the Formal Contrast between Intransitive and Transitive) in Yamanobe no michi, Vol. 33.
Okutsu, Keiichiro (1967) ‘Jidōka, tadōka oyobi ryōkyokuka tenkei – ji/ta-dōshi no taiō’(Intransitivization/Transitivization and Bipolarization Transformation – Correspondence between
Intransitive and Transitive Verbs) in Kokugogaku, Vol.70.
24

Sakuma, Kanae (1951) Gendai nihongo no hyōgen to gohō kaiteiban (Expressions and Grammarof Contemporary Japanese Revised Edition). Koseisha-Koseikaku.
Nishio, Toraya (1954) ‘Dōshi no hasei ni tsuite – ji/ta tairitsu no kata ni yoru’ (On Derivation of
Verbs: Based on the Contrasting Pattern of Intransitive and Transitive Verbs) in Kokugogaku, Vol.
17. Included in Nishio, Toraya, Gendaigoi no kenkyū (Study of Contemporary Japanese Lexicon).
Meiji Shoin.
Mizutani, Shizuo (1982) ‘Gendaigo dōshi no iwayuru ji/ta no hasei tairitsu’ (The So-Called
Derivation Contrast between Intransitive and Transitive in Contemporary Verbs) in Keiryō
Kokugogaku, 13-5.
(Hayatsu Emiko)25 Adjectives
 What Is an Adjective?
Typically, adjectives express attributes of people, events, and things, and also people’s senses andemotion. They perform the word change called conjugation, and function as adnominal modifiers
as well as the predicate and adverbial modifiers in sentences. As an adnominal modifier, an
adjective specifies an attribute of the modified noun, and oftentimes the tense differentiation has
been neutralized. As the predicate, it may predicate people’s attributes, events, and things, andmay predicate a temporary state of being. As an adnominal modifier, its adverbial form may
modify the movement and the manner of the change that the verb expresses, and may put aboundary on the degree of the concept of the state. Depending on the conjugation type, adjectives
are divided into i-adjectives and na-adjectives.
The main function of verbs is to express dynamic states of affairs such as movement and change,
while adjectives express static states. Semantically, adjectives may be classified into ones that
express attributes, senses and emotion, relationship and attitude, and so on. The ones that express
senses and emotion exhibit restriction on the use of person, where only a first-person noun can beused as the subject when such adjectives become the predicate in the non-past 言い切り iikiri(terminal) form.
 Sentence Structure Using Adjectives and Their Morphological Characteristics
Adjectives possess a system of case governance, although it is not as varied as that of verbs.
The
most prominent characteristic manifests when an adjective is combined with a case-ni noun.
Yasashii ‘gentle’, shinsetsuda ‘kind’, urusai ‘annoying, picky’, and nesshinda ‘enthusiastic’, forexample, all take nouns marked with ni, which denote a person, thing, or event that is the object of
the attitude expressed by the adjective. Likewise, tsuyoi ‘strong’, yowai ‘weak’, akarui ‘bright’,and kuwashii ‘knowledgeable’ each establishes a connection between the object and the ability or
characteristic that the adjective expresses. Toboshii ‘scarce’ and uttetsuke ‘perfectly suitable’
each establishes a connection to the criterion for evaluation of the content or purpose. Certain
expressions, such as tomodachi ni warui ‘cause the friend too much trouble,’ tomodachi ni sumanai‘feel bad about causing too much trouble to one’s friend,’ may be difficult to explain to learners
whose culture does not have an equivalent concept.
Case governance of adjectives creates various semantic connectioins when combined with case-ga
nouns. Atama ga itai ‘the head aches’, karada ga kayui ‘the body is itchy,’ each refers to the area
where the sensation occurs. Kizuguchi ga itai ‘the wound hurts’, taiyō ga mabushii ‘the sun isglaring’ each refers to the object that causes the sensation; inu ga kowai ‘is afraid of dogs’, umarekokyō ga koishii ‘miss the hometown’ each refers to the object toward which the emotion is directed,
and tenisu ga umai ‘is good at tennis’, engi ga jōzu da ‘is good at acting’ each refers to the object
for which an ability is demonstrated.
Adjectives are relativized because they possess the concept of stativity, and they are modified byexpressions of degree and used in expressions of comparison. In modification of degree,
adjectives are modified by adverbs of degree (e.g., totemo ureshii ‘very pleased’), by the adverbial
form of adjectives (e.g., osorosiku atsui ‘terribly hot’), and by formal nouns of degree (e.g.,odorokuhodo samui ‘astoundingly cold’). “A wa B yori (adjective)” ‘A is more (adjective) than B’
and “A wa ~ no nakade mottomo (adjective)” ‘A is the most (adjective) among ~’ are typically usedin constructing expressions of comparison. Hitoshii ‘is equal’, onajida ‘is the same’, sokkurida‘looks exactly the same’, etc., are combined with a case-ni noun or case-to noun to express that
there is little or no difference in the relative relationship.
Conversely, gyakuda ‘is the reverse’and hantaida ‘is the opposite’, etc., may be combined with a case-to noun to express that therelationship between the two objects or events is not equal.
It is not limited to adjectives, but the kotoni form of adjectives which express judgment/evaluation,such as tsurai ‘is a burden’, warui ‘bad’, benri na ‘convenient’, and fuben na ‘inconvenient’, may
function as a sentential adverb to foretell the judgment made by the speaker regarding the content of
26

the predication. Expressions such as saiwainimo ‘luckily’ and mezurashikumo ‘most unusually,’
may also function as sentential adverbs.
Adjectives possess fewer grammatical categories than verbs. They possess acknowledgment(affirmation/negation), tense, politeness, and modality. They do not possess voice or aspect, whichverbs of movement and change possess.
 Adjectivization
Although not recognized as a part of speech, there is a phenomenon called adjective-ness or
adjectivization. Togatta ‘pointed’ and magatta ‘crooked’ in togatta enpitsu ‘pointed pencil’ andmagatta hana ‘crooked nose,’ respectively, are past tense verbs, but the past form does not mark thetense. They are treated as equivalent to adjectives because semantically they express a state suchas “pointed” and “crooked,” and because structurally, this form only possesses the function as an
adnominal modifier.
→ 感情・感覚形容詞 Emotion/Adjectives of Emotion, 感情動詞 Verbs of Emotion (2-M)
 References
Nishio, Toraya (1972) Keiyōshi no imi: yōhō no kijutsu (Description of the Meaning and Usage of
Adjectives).
Shuei Shuppan.
(Koyano Tetsuo)

27 Nouns
Nouns depict people, things, and events, and serve as semantic constituents of sentences as the
subject, object, and so on, of what the sentence describes.
Semantically, nouns are classified into ones that represent people, concrete and abstract things,
events, and phenomena, time and physical space, and so on. There are also special nouns, such as
pronouns, which are void of lexical meaning and which have only a demonstrative or deictic
function, and quantifiers, which express quantity.
When a noun appears in a sentence in relation to the predicate, it may accompany case particles,
adverbs, or nothing at all. A noun may function as the subject, object, adnominal modifier,adverbial modifier, or as a circumstantial. A noun may also form a predicate, accompanying da,dearu, desu, and so on.
Nouns combine with verbs, adjectives, and other nouns, and assume various semantic roles asconstituent units of various situations. Their semantic roles include expression of the subject andobject of movements, states, beginning- and end-points of change, and attributes, as well as
temporal, spatial, and causal situations.
Nouns range from very noun-like nouns to ones that are close to na-adjectives, semantically andstructurally. Kenkō ‘health’ and byōki ‘illness’ are considered to form a pair of opposites
semantically, but structurally, kenkō may be used both as a noun and na-adjective, while byōki may
only be used as a noun. Benkyō ‘study’ may be used as a noun and also it forms a suru-verb, but
fubenkyō ‘lack of dilligence’ has the status of a na-adjective.
The noun ashi ‘foot/leg’ is a body part, and is used as the subject and object of a sentence.
Hadashi ‘barefoot’, on the other hand, no longer possesses the concreteness expressed by ashi, andits concept shifts more to stativity. Thus, hadashi is not easily used as a subject or object; its
function shifts to modifying the manner of movement and is used in the phrase, hadashi de.
Even when nouns represent concrete events and things, they may at times obtain predicationality inperforming a syntactic function. That is, at times, when a noun becomes the predicate, thesubstantiality of the noun is lost. Instead, the attribute that is given to the event or thing emerges
and the noun functions to predicate attributes. Ōkami is an animal and is qualified to be used as a
subject or object. When one makes a casual remark, Aitsu wa ōkami da ‘That guy is a wolf,’ōkami in this utterance no longer denotes the animal, wolf, but wolf-like characteristics. Thisutterance is considered to be a shortened form of ōkami no yōda ‘like a wolf.’
Nouns function as the predicate of a sentence by accompanying da, dearu, desu, and so on and form
so-called noun-predicate sentences. The basic structure of such sentences is A wa B da ‘A is B,’
and there are two kinds. One is a sentence of identification where A equals B, such as watashi wa
Suzuki desu ‘I am Suzuki.’ The other is a sentence of attribution where B expresses A’s attribute,
such as Suzuki san wa kōmuin desu ‘Ms Suzuki is a civil servant.’ In a sentence of identification A
and B can be switched and the relationship still holds: Suzuki wa watashi desu ‘Suzuki is me.’ In asentence of attribution A and B cannot be switched over as in *kōmuin wa Suzuki san desu.
Among the nouns, quantifiers are unlike other nouns and behave in a singular manner. Sannin in
Sannin no gakusei ga oshaberi shite iru ‘Three students are chatting’ describes the number of thestudents and appears in the position of adnominal modifier. Such function is seen in other nouns
as well, but the floating of quantifies as in gakusei ga sannin oshaberi shit eiru ‘There are three
students chatting,’ and the transposition of the quantifier as in gakusei sannin ga oshaberi shite iru‘Students – there are three of them – are chatting’ are grammatical phenomena that are specific toquantifiers.
→数量詞 Quantifiers (2-B), Case (2-D)
 Reference
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō, keitairon (Japanese Grammar:Morphology). Mugi
Shobo.
(Koyano Tetsuo)

28 Quantifiers Position of Numeral Quantifiers
Numeral Quantifiers (hereafter NQs) such as 5 satsu and 50 peeji appear in the x position as in x nohon o yonda, and hon o x yonda ‘I read x number of books’.
The former usage is called theadnominal usage of NQs, and the latter is called the adverbial usage of NQs.
Not all NQs have both usages. For example, 3000cc in 3000cc no kuruma o kau ‘buy a car of
3000cc has only the adnominal usage. Because Kuruma o 3000cc kau is unacceptable. Furthermore
5 do in Hashira ga 5 do katamuku, ‘the pillar tilts by 5 degrees’ only has the adverbial usage.
Because 5 do no hashira ga katamuku is unacceptable.
There are examples where the described quantity appears to be the same in both sentences, such as
in 5 satsu no hon o yonda and hon o gosatsu yonda ‘I read 5 books.’ However, 50 peeji no hon oyonda ‘I read a 50-page book’ and hon o 50 peeji yonda ‘I read 50 pages of the book’ do not mean
the same thing. In the former example, the NQ refers to the total number of pages in the book; inthe latter example, the NQ refers to the part of the total number of pages in the book.
In sum, there are instances where either the adnominal or adverbial usage is appropriate, but not
both. When both usages are acceptable, both NQs may not denote the same quantity. Thus, we haveto consider that adnominal NQs do not denote the same kind of quantity described by adverbial
NQs.
 Part of Speech of NQs
We can consider adnominal NQs as nouns. In 5 satsu no hon ‘five (volumes of) books,’ thequantifier is followed by no, and the no-phrase modifies a noun. This is equivalent to a noun
modifying another noun.
Adverbial NQs, such as 5 satsu in hon o 5 satsu yomu ‘read 5 books,’ looks like an adverb at firstglance. Let us consider the following usage examples.
(1) Watashi wa hon o 5 satsu to memo-chō o katta ‘I bought 5 books and a notepad.’In (1), hon o 5 satsu and memo-chō are coordinated. Coordinated phrases are syntactically of thesame type. Memo-chō is a noun phrase, and thus, hon o 5 satsu has to be a noun phrase. We haveto conclude that hon o 5 satsu in (1) and 5 satsu no hon are noun phrases.
However, there is an example that suggests that this analysis is not appropriate.
(2) Dansei ga kinō 5 nin to josei ga kyō 3 nin kita ‘Five men yesterday and 3 women today came.’
Adverbs of time, such as kinō and kyō, modify events. They do not normally appear in nounphrases. Therefore, if we consider dansei ga kinō 5 nin in (2) as a clause or a verbal phrase, theNQs in (2) may be adverbs.
There are still a lot of problems to consider as far as the part of speech of adverbial NQs areconcerned. Adverbial NQs may influence the aspect of the verbal phrase, which can be explained
more easily if we consider that the adverbial NQs are adverbs.
→名詞 Noun (2-B), 程度副詞 Adverbs of Degree (2-B), 副詞とアスペクト Adverb and Aspect(2-G)
 References
Okutsu, Keiichiro (1969) ‘Sūryōteki hyōgen no bunpō’ (Grammar of Quantitative Expressions) in
Nihongo Kyoiku, Vol. 14.
______________ (1983) ‘Sūryōshi idō sairon’ (Revisiting the Movement of Quantifiers) in Jimbun
Gakuho, Vol. 160.
Kamio, Akio (1977) ‘Sūryōshi no shintakkusu – nihongo no henkei o meguru – shiryō’ (Syntax ofQuantifiers – Concerning Transformation of Japanese) in Gengo, Vol 6-9.
Kitahara, Hiro’o (1997) ‘Ren’yō yōhō ni okeru kotai sūryōshi to naiyō sūryōshi’ (Individual
Quantifiers and Content Quantifiers in Adverbial Usage) in Kokugogaku, Vol. 186.
_____________ (1997) ‘Suryōshi no Senkōshi ga arawareru tōgoteki kaisō – hi-taikakusei nokasetsu kara no kentō’ (Syntactical Hierachy where the Antecedent of Quantifiers Appear –Examination from the Perspective of the Unaccusativity Hypothesis) in Gengo, Vol. 26-3.
29

_____________(1999) ‘Nihongo ni okeru dōshiku no genkaisei no kettei yōin – taikaku meishiku
ga sonzai suru dōshiku no asupekuto-ron’ (The Decisive Factors of the Telicity of Verb Phrases inJapanese – the Aspect of the Verb Phrases Where Accusative Noun Phrases Exist) in Kuroda
Shigeyuki & Nakamura Masaru, ed., Kotoba no kaku to shūhen – nihongo to eigo no aida (The
Nucleus and Peripheries of Languages– Between Japanese and English). Kurosio Publishers.
Mihara, Ken’ichi (1998) ‘Sūryōshi to “kekka” no gan’i’ (Quantifiers and the Implication of theResult) in Gengo, Vol. 2-6 -2-8.
(Kitahara Hiro’o)30 Adverbs of Manner
 Adverbs of Manner and Related Issues
In conventional studies on adverbs, all adverbs except for declarative adverbs (e.g., Asu wa tabun
ame darō ‘It will probably rain tomorrow, Zehi kite kudasai ‘Please do come’) and adverbs ofdegree (e.g., Kyō wa totemo samui ‘It is very cold today’) were grouped together as adverbs ofmanner.
This made the adverbs of manner a waste basket category, which was very cluttered.
At least, it will be appropriate to establish categories that can be tentatively called adverbs offrequency and adverbs of time, and treat them separately from adverbs of manner. Adverbs offrequency express how often events take place, as in Kanojo wa tabitabi kaigai ni dekakeru ‘She
frequently travels abroad’ and Kare wa mettani hon o yomanai ‘He rarely reads books.’ Adverbs oftime express how an event or situation occurs and develops within a temporal frame , as in Kare wa
zutto kenkō data ‘he was healthy all that time’ and Sugu itte kure ‘Please go immediately.’ It is notproductive to limit the function of adverbs too much in terms of part of speech when one studies
them.
 What are Adverbs of Manner?
Some representative examples of adverbs of manner are found in examples such as, Me ga giragira
hikatta ‘His eyes shone glaringly,’ kare no kata o hageshiku yusabutta ‘I shook his shoulders
violently,’ Otoko wa yukkuri tachiagatta ‘The man stood up slowly.’ Adverbs of manner take up
various aspects of the development, realization, and result of an event or situation and describe the“how,” thereby modifying and marking the limit. For instance, laughing generates sounds. The
adverb defines the way the action of laughing is conducted by referring to how the sounds come out.
The result is, for instance, Otoko wa geragera waratta ‘The man guffawed.’ That adverbs of mannerand those of frequency and time belong to different categories is evident from the fact that they can
co-occur, as in Kare wa mettani geragera warawanai ‘He rarely guffaws,’ and Kare wa zutto
geragera waratteita ‘He was guffawing for a long time.’
 Finer Breaking Down of Adverbs of Manner
Adverbs of manner have a high lexicality and are a motley group, even after separating out adverbs
of frequency and time. We need to break them down into further categories.
For instance, while it may be focusing on the semantics too much, consider the following: Otoko wa{jikkurito/satto} atari o mimawashita ‘The man looked around the surroundings{thoroughly/quickly}’ describes the speed of the movement; Onna wa {tsuyoku/karuku} te onigirishimeta ‘The woman squeezed her hands {firmly/lightly}’ refers to the force of the
movement; Poton to mono ga ochita ‘Something plopped down’ describes the sound that
accompanied the movement, and in Dōro o naname ni yokogitta ‘crossed the street diagonally,’ theadverb defines how the movement was carried out from the point of view of the trajectory. Of
course, each of the above adverbs is an adverb of manner which takes up a phase in thedevelopment of a movement.
There are adverbs that are different from the typical adverbs of manner mentioned above. For
instance, konagonani in Kabe ga konagonani kuzureta ‘the wall crumbled into rubble,’ andmapputatsu ni in Ki o mapputatsu ni otta ‘broke the tree into two halves,’ refer to the condition of
the subject or object as a result of the execution of the movement. These adverbs can tentatively
be called adverbs of result; they define the how thoroughly the movement is carried out. They cancoexist with adverbs that describe the development process of the movement, as in Ki o pokitto
mapputatsu ni otta ‘snapped the tree into two halves.’
A kun wa {wazato/kikitoshite} B kun o tataita ‘A {intentionally/exuberantly} hit B’ is an example
where the adverb defines the way the movement is carried out based on the attitude of the subject at
the time the event is realized. This type of adverbs is different from the ones in the previous
paragraph, and can tentatively be called adverbs focusing on the subject. If A beats B slowly (Ayukkuri tataku B), then B was beaten slowly (B yukkuri tatakareta.’ However, A exuberantly beatB (A kun wa kikitoshite B kun o tataita) does not translate into B was exuberantly beaten by A (B31kun ga A kun ni kikitoshite tatakareta).
→ 程度副詞 Adverbs of Degree (2-B), 陳述副詞 Declarative Adverbs (2-B)
 References
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics, ed. (1991) ‘Fukushi no imi to yōhō’(Meanings and Usages of Adverbs) in Vol. 19 of Nihongo kyōiku shidō sankōsho. Ministry ofTreasury Printing Bureau.
Nitta, Yoshio (2002) Fukushiteki hyōgen no shosō (Various Aspects of Adverbial Expressions).
Kurosio Publishers.
(Nitta Yoshio)32 Adverbs of Degree
 What are Adverbs of Degree?
Adverbs of degree are combined with words that express attributes and states, primarily i-adjectives
and na-adjectives, and their basic function is to express the intensity of attributes and states.
(1) Kono hon wa hijōni omoshiroi ‘This book is extremely interesting.’(2) Tashō kiken’na basho ‘a somewhat dangerous place.’
In addition, they may also be combined with nouns and adverbs of manner that express
characteristics and states.
(3) Kanojo wa sōtō {bijin/yarite/ōmono} da ‘she is quite a {beauty/go-getter/big shot}.’(4) Kare wa hijōni {otona/shinshi/kodomo} da ‘he is quite {mature/a gentleman/immature}.’(5) Sakuban wa wariai gussuri nemureta ‘I was able to sleep relatively soundly.’
When the adverb is combined with a noun, it sometimes requires no in between as in:(6) {Kanari/Nakanaka/Aru teido/Sōtō} no bijin da ‘She is {quite/quite/somewhat/quite} a beauty.’
Adverbs are not combined with words that express all-or-nothing attributes or characteristics:(7) *Hijōni {hitoshii/manmarui/onajida/muryōda} ‘Extremely{equal/perfectly round/the same/freeof charge}.
In addition, adverbs of degree may be combined with verbs of emotion and sensations, such as
kirau ‘dislike’, nikumu ‘hate’, yorokobu ‘rejoice’, kanashimu ‘ be saddened’, odoroku ‘be surprised’,komaru ‘be in a bind’, kandō suru ‘be touched’, and verbs that express gradual change, such as
futoru ‘gain weight’, yaseru ‘lose weight’, nobiru ‘stretch’, hirogaru ‘widen’, susumu ‘advance’,and atatamaru ‘warm up’.
(8) Tarō wa wagako no tanjō o taisō yorokonnda ‘Tarō rejoiced greatly at the birth of his child.
(9) Daietto no kekka daibu yaseta ‘Thanks to the diet, I lost considerable weight.’
 Various Adverbs of Degree
Examples of adverbs of degree are hijōni, taihen, totemo, taisō, kiwamete, hanahada, nakanaka,
zuibun, kanari, daibu, sōtō, wariai, kekkō, aru teido, tashō, sukoshi, chotto, motto, zutto, yori,sarani, harukani, issō, mottomo, ichiban. Amari, sahodo, son’nani, taishite, chittomo, sukoshimo,
and zenzen are examples that are combined with the negative form.
(10) Kyō wa amari atsuku nai ‘It is not too hot today.’Of the adverbs of degree listed above, zuibun, kanari, daibu, sōtō, wariai, kekkō, aru teido, tashō,sukoshi, chotto, and ones that are combined with the negative form, can also express quantities.
(11) Kyō wa kanari tabeta ‘I ate quite a lot today.’(12) Mikan ga sukoshi nokotteiru ‘Still some mandarin oranges are left.’Many of the adverbs of degree that express quantities are combined with nouns that express timeand space.
(13) Sukoshi {ue/hidari/oku/mae} da ‘It is a little bit {higher/to the left/farther back/to the front}.’
Some adverbs of degree are always involved in comparison.
(14) Tarō wa Jirō yori zutto se ga takai ‘Taro is much taller than Jiro.’(15) Tarō wa kurasu no naka de ichiban se ga takai ‘Taro is the tallest in the class.’
Adverbs of degree that express quantities can also appear in sentences of comparison and express
the difference between one state and the other.
(16) Tarō wa Jirō yori sukoshi se ga takai ‘Taro is a little taller than Jiro.’
Adverbs of degree, especially ones that express higher degree, tend to lose their effect fromfrequent use, and people look for new ways of expressing the magnitude. Thus, there is a large
turnover of expressions. To this day, younger people constantly create new expressions, while
many expressions go out of fashion.
→様態副詞 Adverbs of Manner (2-B), 陳述副詞 Declarative Adverbs (2-B)
 References
Kudo, Hiroshi (1983) ‘Teido fukushi o megutte’ (Discussion on Adverbs of Degree) in Watanabe
Minoru, ed., Fukushigo no kenkyū (Study of Adverbial Words). Meiji Shoin.
33

Nitta, Yoshio (2002) Fukushiteki hyōgen no shosō (Various Aspects of Adverbial Expressions).
Kurosio Publishers.
(Sano Yukiko)34

 Declarative Adverbs
If one is to classify adverbs into three categories, there are adverbs of manner and adverbs of degree,which express objective meaning of attributes and degree, and declarative adverbs, which express
subjective meaning of the speaker’s state of mind. There have been many different ways ofclassifying adverbs, and it is not obvious where declarative adverbs belong. The core ofdeclarative adverbs probably reside in the group of adverbs that express modality, such as ones that
express conjecture and judgment (e.g., tabun, osoraku, hyottoshitara, kitto, kanarazu, sazo), ones
that have to do with manner and speculation (e.g., dōmo), and ones that express volition and desire(e.g., zehi).
Many declarative adverbs co-occur with particular sentence-final forms, and are sometimes called
concordant adverbs because of this. For example, the sentence ends with an expression ofguessing/future in the following examples: tabun kurudarō ‘they will probably come,’ andhyottoshitara hana ga saku kamoshirenai ‘it just might bloom.’ Dōmo is followed by rashii andother similar expressions in verbal sentences, as in dōmo hontō no koto o shiranai rashii ‘It seems
he does not know the truth.’ Zehi is used in expressions such as zehi itte kudasai ‘I urge you to go,’and zehi kite kudasai ‘I urge you to come.’
The sentence final form does not always have strong correlation with the adverb. Tabun is often
used as follows: Tabun ikimasu, ‘I’ll probably go.’ It will mislead learners if one instructs learners
to always use the fixed tabun-darō formula.
Dōmo can be used to express a situation vaguely as in dōmo guai ga warui ‘it may not be very
convenient.’ Dōmo also goes hand in hand with rashii and yōda, but, *dōmo kuru darō does notwork. This is due to the difference in meaning between rashii and darō.
Declarative adverbs fundamentally possess the characteristics of modality expressions. Unlike
adverbs of manner, for instance, the sentence does not change its objective meaning with theattachment of a declarative adverb.
Declarative adverbs that express conjecture/judgment are not generally used much in questions andcommands (e.g., *asu tabun kimasuka, *asu tabun kite kudasai). When they are used in questions
and commands, the adverbs themselves do not become the object of the question or command.
Traditionally, the three categories of adverbs are based on Yamada Yoshio’s classification. In his
categorization, a declarative adverb must have the correlating sentence final form, and the category
includes such combinations as kesshite- nai (negation), mettani- nai (negation), moshi -nara(hypothesis). However, the problem is that negation and hypothesis are not in the realm ofmodality expressions.
There also is the problem that many adverbs do not belong to any of the three traditional categories.
Expressions such as saiwai ‘fortunately’ and ainiku ‘unfortunately’ do not have any fixed
corresponding sentence final form. They, therefore, cannot be included in declarative adverbs if
the criterion is to have this type of correspondence. They do express the speaker’s state of mind,
and possess the characteristics of declarative adverbs that are described above. These adverbs canbe defined as “adverbs of commentary and evaluation”, since they express the speaker’s comments
and value judgment, and sometimes they are included in declarative adverbs in a broader sense.
Adverbs such as yappari ‘after all’ and kekkyoku ‘finally’, which also express the speaker’s state ofmind, are sometimes included in declarative adverbs as well.
→ 様態副詞 Adverbs of Manner (2-B), 程度副詞 Adverbs of Degree (2-B)
 References
Nakau, Minoru (1980) ‘Bun fukushi no hikaku’ (Comparison of Sentential Adverbs) in Nichieigo
hikaku kōza 2 bunpō (Lectures on Japanese-English Comparison 2: Grammar). Taishukan Shoten.
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics, ed. (1991) ‘Fukushi no imi to yōhō’(Meanings and Usages of Adverbs) in Vol. 19 of Nihongo kyōiku shidō sankōsho (Reference Bookof Japanese Education Instruction). Ministry of Treasury Printing Bureau.
Morimoto, Junko (1994) Hanashite no shukan o arawasu fukushi ni tsuite (On Adverbs That
Express the Speaker’s Subjective View). Kurosio Publishers.
35

Kudo, Hiroshi (2000) ‘Fukushi to bun no chinjutsuteki na taipu’ (Declarative Types of Adverbs andSentences) in Nihongo no bunpō 3: modality. Iwanami Shoten.
(Morimoto Junko)36 Adnominals
Adnominals constitute the part of speech which shows no conjugation (no change of form) andwhich only modify nouns (taigen). This part of speech can be said to exist based on its absence ofconjugation, and accordingly includes words of various origins.
Major groups include words such as na-adjectives which have lost the ability to conjugate (e.g.,ōkina ‘big’, ironna ‘various’), demonstratives such as kono ‘this’, konna ‘this type of’, kano ‘that’,verb derivatives, such as aru ‘certain’, iwayuru ‘so-called’, arayuru ‘every sort of’, akuru ‘the next’,kitaru ‘the coming’, and kitarubeki ‘sure to come’.
However, it is at times difficult to decide if a word is an adnominal. Some only take nouns ofquantity as succeeding nouns, as in takadaka 50 nin ‘not much more than 50 people’, and wazuka 5nin ‘a mere 5 people’. Onaji can be considered either an adnominal or an irregular na-adjective.
Words such as chottoshita (kissaten) ‘not too shabby (a coffee shop)’, and akireta (keisatsukan‘outrageous (policeman)’ are verbs but can only be used to modify nouns in these usages.
Therefore, they may be considered adnominals here. (Please note that arifureta in arifureta mise‘commonplace shop’ can form the conclusive form, arifureteiru, and is not considered an
adnominal.) There are collocations of verbal origin, such as ~sameyaranu ‘still not calmed down,’
noppikinaranu ‘inescapable,’ and iishirenu ‘indescribable’ that function like adnominals.
Expressions such as rekisen no ‘seasoned’ and tōmen no ‘for the time being’ may be regarded as anoun + no construction, but the use of the “noun” part is quite limited (e.g., they cannot be
combined with ga). Therefore, the entire construction, with no attached, may be considered an
adnominal.
Adnominals such as ōkina and iwayuru do not have concordant relationship with the predicate,while expressions such as sashitaru ‘not serious’ and takaga ‘mere’ require a concordant
relationship with the predicate. That is, *sashitaru mondai ga aru or *takaga hon o otoshita does
not work. These adnominals must be presented as sentence patterns because they not only modify
nouns but also attach a feature that requires concordant relationship to the predicate.
→ 指示詞 Demonstratives (現場指示 point drection) (2-K), 指示詞 Demonstratives (文脈指示
context direction) (2-K), 否定との呼応 Correspondence with Negation (2-F)
 References
Muraki, Shinjiro (2002) ‘Dai san keiyoshi to sono keitairon’ (The Third Adjective and Its
Morphology) in Kokugo Ronkyū, Vol. 10.
Suzuki, Kazuhiko, et.al. (ed.) (1984) Kenkyū shiryō nihongo bunpō 4 shūjiku・dokuritsuku hen(Research Literature of Japanese Grammar 4: Modifying Phrases and Indepenent Phrases). Meiji
Shoin.
Miyajima, Tatsuo (1994) Goiron kenkyū (Study of Lexicology). Kurosio Publishers.
(Moriyama Takuro)37

 Conjunctions
 What are Conjunctions?
Conjunctions are the form that shows the semantic relationship of the content of what has beenpresented and what follows.
(1) Honpin wa tenkabutsu o shiyō shite orimasen. Desukara, anshin shite o-meshigari-kudasai.
‘There are no additives in this product. Therefore, you can eat it with peace of mind.’(2) Kodomo ga geemu o suru jikan wa zenkai chōsa yori fueta. Shōgakusei danshi dewa 39.7% ga
ichinichi 2 jikan ijō geemu o shite iru. Ippō, hogosha wa kodomo to geemu no sesshoku jikan ojūbun ninshiki shite inai. Kodomo ga geemu o 2 jikan ijō shite iru to kotaeta shōgakusei danshi no
hogosha wa 14.2% ni suginai.
‘The amount of time children spend on games has increased since the last survey. Thirty nine
point seven percent of male elementary school children spend more than 2 hours per day on games.
On the other hand, their parents do not have a good grasp of their children’s contact hours with
games. Only 14.2% of the parents of male elementary school children answered that their children
spent more than 2 hours on games.’
The conjunction, desukara, in (1) shows that the content of what comes after it can be surmised
from the immediately preceding content, ‘no additives are added’. The conjunction, ippō, in (2)shows that there is a contrast between the content in the latter part, ‘parents not having a good graspof their children’s contact hours with games’ and what directly precedes the conjunctive, ‘theamount of time children spend on games increasing.’
Conjunctions are used to express the relationship between one sentence and another, as in (1), andalso express the semantic relationship surmised from more than one sentence, as in (2). Some
conjunctions express the relationship between words (e.g., kuro matawa kon ‘black or navy’),
between phrases (e.g., gakkō de soshite shokuba de ‘at school and at workplaces’), between clauses(e.g., kaze o hiite aruiwa netsu o dashite ‘catch a cold or run a fever’). There are instances, as
shown in (3), where the conjunction is used to relate an utterance to a situation that is notverbalized.
(3) Kyōshitsu de gakusei ga sorotteiru no o kakunin shite“Dewa, jugyō o hajimemashō.”‘Having made sure that the students were all there,
Well then, let’s begin the class.’
Conjunctions are words that signal the start of a new semantic unit, and they show the relationshipbetween the new semantic unit and the content that has been understood by the speaker and listener
up to that point.
 Problems for Learners
Among the many usages of conjunctions, it is relatively easy to understand usages shown in theexamples in (1) and (2), where the semantic relationship between the preceding and succeeding
parts is clear. However, when the semantic relationship, either resultative or adversative, before
and after shikashi and dakara, is not readily obvious, as in (4) and (5) below, it is not only hard tounderstand but also hard to learn to use such conjunctions.
(4) Shikashi, kyō wa atsuidesu ne.
‘Anyway, it’s hot, isn’t it?’(5) A: Atarashii buchō tte ittai dare? ‘Who in the world is the new director?’
B: Minna ga shitte iru hito. ‘It’s someone whom everybody knows.’
A: Dakara, dare? ‘So, who is it?’Example (4) introduces a change of subject. Example (5) expresses irritation the speaker feels
toward the interlocutor’s non-understanding of the speaker’s utterance. Attention must be paid tosuch functions of conjunctions that express subtle nuances in conversation.
The function of conjunctions in discourse is also important.
(6) Sorede, jitsu wa, chotto onegai ga aru n desu ga.
38

‘Well, to tell you the truth, I have a small favor to ask.’(7) Nihongo wa hatsuon ga yasashii. Mata, bunpō mo tanjyun dearu. Hanasu dake nara
muzukashikunai.
‘The pronunciation of Japanese is easy. Also, the grammar is simple. Just speaking it is notdifficult.’
Sorede in (6) is used to preface the presentation of the main business. Mata in (7) is used tojuxtapose two points of discussion. This shows that conjunctions can be used effectively in
structuring discourse.
To use conjunctions of similar meanings properly, one must pay attention to the difference in speechstyle first. In formal greeting, desukara tends to be more appropriate than dakara; in relaxed
conversation it does not sound right if one uses daga instead of demo.
We must also pay attention that, depending on the conjunction, there is a limitation to the type of
expressions that can come in the sentence-final position in the succeeding part of the sentence.
(8) Satō san wa mada shigoto ga nokotteiru sōda.
{Dakara/*Sorede} sakini kaerō.
‘I hear Ms Sato still has work to do. So, let’s go home before she does.’→ 接続詞・接続表現 Conjunctions, Conjunctive Expressions (2-K), 接続表現とスタイル
Conjunctive Expressions and Style (2-M)
 References
Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed. (1995) Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (Grammar of
Synonymous Expressions of Japanese, Vol. 2). Kurosio Publishers.
Yokobayashi, Hisayo & Shimomura Akiko (1988) ‘Setsuzoku no hyōgen’ (Conjunctive
Expressions) in Gaikokujin no tame no nihongo bunrei/mondai shiriizu (Series in Usage
Examples and Questions for Foregners) Vol. 6. Aratake Shuppan.
(Hamada Mari)

39 Interjections
A broad definition of interjections is a form of words that are used independently in discourse.
Exclamations such as aa, waa, as well as expressions of greeting, response, hailing, and hesitation,
are also classified into interjections as far as the part of speech is concerned.
Exclamations express the speaker’s undifferentiated response. For example, oya, and waa express
the speaker’s surprise upon encountering something unexpected; aa is uttered when one
understands what is going on; aaa is an expression that comes out when some emotion slowly wells
up. There are many others. Some expressions are gender-specific.
Response expressions include hai, un, iie, among others, and the usage varies widely. For instance,
hai, often understood to mean ‘yes,’ also possesses the function of signaling the timing of someone
handing something to someone else: ‘here you go.’ Iya doesn’t limit its use to a negative response;
it can signal change of subject, for instance. Hee, which is primarily an expression of surprise, canintroduce new information, and is used in succession with an exclamation.
There are a wide variety of fixed expressions of greeting, and they correspond to protocols of
various sorts.
Everyday expressions can be divided into two major categories: ones used inmeeting and parting (e.g., konnichiwa, sayōnara) and ones for expressing gratitude and apology(arigatō, gomen). Dōmo has a wide range of application, and sumimasen is widely used to express
gratitude by way of apologizing for making the listener go to trouble for the speaker.
Time-specific expressions such as ohayō and kombanwa are often discussed as a problem inlearning Japanese. (Ohayō is traditionally limited to be used from pre-dawn through the morning,but the time range for its usage is expanding.) Cultural differences contribute greatly to deciding,to whom and on which occasion, and with which expression, one should greet someone.
Expressions of hailing typically are ones that evoke the attention of the listener, such as nee, oi,
mosimoshi, and are used in succession with anō (hesitation), yaa (greeting) and so on.
Hesitation is used to express the speaker’s intent for an utterance (or continuation thereof).
Sometimes they are used to monitor the thought process, and are used in succession withexclamations and expressions of response.
→ハイ・イイエ・エエ－応答 Hai, Iie, Ee –Response (2-K), アラ・マア－感動詞 Ara, Maa –Exclamations (2-K)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (2002) ‘Dōsa hatsudō no kandōshi saa, sore o megutte’ (Discussion on saa andsore, Interjectory Expressions Which Evoke Action) in Nihongo bunpō, Vol. 2-2.
Schiffrin, D. (1994) Approaches to discourse. Blackwell.
(Moriyama Takuro)40

 Particles
As a part of speech, particles are defined as words that are not independent, attach to various words,
and do not conjugate. They work in reverse word order from English prepositions, and aresometimes called postpositions. Their functions are various, and particles are divided into further
sub-categories. There are several theories on the classification, name, and membership ofindividual particles.
Some of the main particles include case particles, such as ga, o, ni, de, kara, made, to, and no,
coordinate particles, such as to, ka, ya (e.g., kōhii {to/ka/ya kōcha}), conjunctive particles, such as
to, ba, tara, kara, node, ga, keredomo, and nagara, focus particles, such as mo, sae, made, dake,bakari, shika, koso, sentence-final particles, such as ka, wa, yo, ne, and interjection particles, suchas ne and sa.
Of these, focus particles used to be called modal particles (kakari joshi) or adverbial particles (fukujoshi).
Recently they have come to be called focus particles because of their function of“focusing.” It remains to be seen how binding particle, wa, will be handled in the future. The form
no in Akai no o kudasai ‘Please give me the red one’ is sometimes called a “quasi-nominal particle”(juntai joshi), but it should be considered a formal noun, along with koto.
As evident from their membership, the same word form may be used as different types of particles.
For instance, in Tarō ga Hanako to kekkon shita ‘Taro married Hanako,’ to is used as a case particle,
whereas in Tarō to Hanako ga kekkon shita ‘Taro and Hanako got married’, it is used as acoordinate particle. As for made, it is used as a case particle in Tarō ga eki made itta ‘Taro went as
far as the station’, while it is a focus particle in Tarō made ga kesseki shita ‘Even Taro was absent’.
In the latter pair of example sentences, the two usages are considered semantically related.
Particles are relational words, and many of them are used to show the syntactic and semantic
relationship between the preceeding element and the other element. Based on this understanding,the particles are divided into three groups. (1) Particles that show the syntagmatic relationshipwith other constituents in the sentence (e.g., case particles, particles of parallel relationship,
conjunctive particles); (2) particles that show the paradigmatic relationship between an element andother similar elements (e.g., focus particles); (3) particles that show the subjective attitude of the
speaker (e.g., interjectional particles, sentence-final particles). Of these, interjectional particles andsentence-final particles in (3) are different from other particles in that they are not involved inconstructing the proposition. Rather, they possess modal functions. All particles share themorphological characteristics of being non-conjugating and dependent, but syntactically andsemantically heterogeneous forms coexist within the category of particles.
→ 格 Case (2-D), 並列を表す形式 Forms Signifying Parallel Relationship (2-J), 終助詞の用法
Use of Sentence-Final Particles (2-H), とりたて Focus (2-I), コト・ノ・トコロ－名詞節 Koto,
No, Tokoro – Noun Clauses (2-J)
 References
Okutsu, Keiichiro, et al. (1986) Iwayuru nihongo joshi no kenkyū (Study of So-Called Particles inJapanese). Bonjinsha.
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1951) ‘Gendaigo no joshi, jodōshi: yōrei
to jitsurei’ “Particles and Auxiliary Verbs in Contemporary Japanese: Usage and Examples) inKokuritsu kokugo kenkyūjo hōkoku 3. Shuei Shuppan.
Konoshima, Masatoshi (1983) Jodōshi, joshi gaisetsu (Introduction to Auxiliary Verbs andParticles). Ohfu.
(Sugimoto Takeshi)

41 Auxiliary Verbs
Of the words that are always used with other words and not independently (attached words), thosethat conjugate are called auxiliary verbs. The term ‘auxiliary verb’ is used in English grammarbooks, and it means that an auxiliary verb is a verb that assists the main verb by adding various
meanings. In this sense Japanese helping verbs, e.g., the te-form expressions built around verbs(~teiru, ~teoku, ~tekureru), may match the category of English auxiliary verbs in the original senseof the word.
Traditionally in school grammar, auxiliary verbs in current Japanese are usually classified intosemantic groups such as causative (seru, saseru), passive, potential, spontaneous, honorific (reru,
rareru), wish (tai, tagaru), polite (masu), negative (nai, nu, n), assertion, designation (da, desu),
past, perfective (ta), volition, inference (u, yō), negative volition and inference (mai), inference andsimilitude (yōda), presumption (rashii), manner, hearsay (sōda), and so on.
Some try to put darō and deshō into a separate category called auxiliary verbs of inference, andmitaida into a category called the auxiliary verbs of inference and similitude. Further, someconsider complex forms such as noda, kamoshirenai, and nakerebanaranai, equivalent to auxiliary
verbs (complex auxiliary verbs). Auxiliary verbs exhibit similar characteristics to closely related
words, such as helping verbs, word final affixes, and conjugated word endings. The scope andunderstanding of auxiliary verbs are far from being unified.
There are auxiliary verbs that connect only to verbs, such as (sa-)seru, (ra-)reru, tai, and masu, andthey function like suffixes. Then there are ones that can connect with verbs, adjectives, and thenoun+da construction, such as ta, yōda, sōda (hearsay), and darō, and they are involved in how todefine time and the speaker’s judgment. Da and desu, which are used to construct noun predicate
sentences, only connect with nouns and noun-equivalents (taigen). Because of this, some haveestablished a separate category for them called hanteishi. Auxiliary verbs range from having awell-developed system of conjugation (e.g., (sa)seru, (ra)reru) to having no conjugation (e.g., u, yō,mai) (non-conjugating auxiliary verbs). In particular, these non-conjugating auxiliary verbs goagainst the concept of auxiliary verbs, and the semantic and functional similarities and continuity
with sentence final particles, which do not conjugate and are placed at the end of the sentence,
should be re-examined.
In Japanese language education, auxiliary verbs are not taught as such. They are presented in thecontext of verb conjugation forms and expression patterns. Pedagogically, for practical purposes,
the conditional forms (tara, nara) of ta and da may be presented separately as conjunctive particles
that express condition. What follows is the conjugation of the verb miru as an example: misaseru(causative), mirareru (passive), mimasu (polite masu form), minai (negative), mita (past ta form),miyō (volitional), mitara (conditional), and so on. Expression patterns include miru beki da /nakereba naranai (obligation, duty), miru darōka / kamoshirenai (uncertainty), miru yōda / rashii,
misōda (judgment based on evidence), mirusōda (hearsay). Of these, the conjugated forms express
voice, affirmation/negation, and tense, while expression patterns handle modality. There isregularity in the order in which multiple auxiliary verbs are sequenced. In misase rare taku nakatta yō da ‘it seems he didn’t want to be forced to see’, the elements are strung, in general, from themore objective to more subjective modality expressions, in the order of voice(causative→passive→wish), affirmation/negation, tense, and modality.
In Japanese language education, it is necessary to sort similar expressions based on what the
speaker intends to express. It is essential that the instruction take a broad view of the sentence
final expressions as a whole, including helping verbs, complex forms, and expressions involving
sentence final particles, without limiting the instruction to the conventional framing of auxiliary
verbs.
→ヴォイス Voice (2-E), テンス Tense (2-G), モダリティ Modality (2-H)
 References
Kitahara, Yasuo (1981) Nihongo jodōshi kenkyū (Study of Japanese Auxiliary Verbs). Taishukan
Shoten.
42

Kindaichi, Haruhiko (1953) ‘Fuhenka jodōshi no honshitsu’ (The Essentials of Non-Conjugating
Auxiliary Verbs) in Kokugo Kokubun, 22-2-3. Included in Kindaichi, Haruhiko (2004) Kindaichi
haruhiko chōsakushū 3: Kokugogaku hen “The Works of Kindaichi Haruhiko #3: Study of Japanese
Language). Tamagawa Daigaku Shuppanbu.
Morita, Yoshiyuki & Matsuki Masae (1989) Nihongo hyōgen bunkei (Japanese Expression Patterns).
ALC.
Watanabe, Minoru (1971) Kokugo kobunron (Study of Japanese Syntax). Hanawa Shobo.
(Matsuki Masae)

43

C: Patterns
 Sentential Components
The components of sentences that are discussed most often include subject, predicate,supplementary components which accompany the predicate, modifying components, independent
components, and conjunctive components in complex sentence structure. In the sentence, Aa, ame
ga futta kara, zannen nagara undōkai ga asu ni enki sareru ‘Oh, since it rained, the athletic meeting
will regrettably be postponed until tomorrow’, aa is an independent component, ame ga futta kara
is a conjunctive component, undōkai ga is the subject (here, of the passive construction), ashita ni isa supplementary component to enki suru, and zannen nagara is a modifying component.
Depending on one’s intention, how one classifies the components differs. In school grammar,
supplementary components, such as ashita ni, are not separated from modifying components; they
are both discussed as adverbial modifying components.
Some scholars, such as Mikami Akira, do not recognize the subject, and propose that the subject be
broken down into the topic and the nominative case. This is because Japanese verbs do not show
agreement with grammatical person of the subject, and because Japanese allows sentences withmulti nominative cases, such as Zō wa hana ga nagai ‘An elephant has a long nose’ and subject-lesssentences, such as ~shiteiru watashi desu ‘here I am doing ~’, and Aki danaa, ‘Ahh, it’s autumn…’ .
Others propose that we must establish our own concept of subject gleaned from the observation ofcertain phenomena, such as the limitations on person with the sentence final form of volition andinvitation ~yō, with private predicates (e.g, Watashi ga/*Kimi ga/*Kare ga} ikō, ‘I’ll go,’ and{Watashi wa/*Kimi wa/*Kare wa} kanashii ‘I’m sad’), honorifics, the use of ~jishin, ‘self’, andthe way subjects appear in complex sentence structures.
Semantically, at the core of a sentence there are the predicate and noun arguments that bind with thepredicate. To this core, further components that modify by specifying temporal and spatial
circumstances, or manner, and so on, are added to complete a sentence. (Please note, however, that
it is difficult to determine how essential a nominative argument is. Also, adverbial modification,
as in samuku kanjiru ‘It feels cold,’ may become semantically essential enough to be qualified as arequired component.) The component of the core of the event concept thus established is called“propositional content” or “kotogara.” Sometimes complex sentence elements such as timeclauses, (e.g., ~suru ya inaya ‘no sooner than’ and conditional clauses (e.g., ~sureba ‘if …’), may
be added to the core.
Once one reaches the stage where the independence as a sentence is established, the sentence final
forms that express degree of certainty, such as ~ni chigainai ‘without doubt’ and components ofcomment and evaluation are appended to the structural components that express the content.
Components of comment include those that are related to the act of utterance, such as shōjiki ni ieba
‘to be honest’, and ones that show the basis for a judgment, such as Heya ga kurai kara, kare wa
inai ‘The room is dark, so he’s not there’. These are called “proposition-oriented” components.
When there is no overt form to express certainty at the end of a sentence, it can be construed thatpredication is the unmarked meaning. This is because the speaker’s attitude is manifested in thefact that the sentence has established its independence.
44

As for the aspect of communication, there are components that seek attention from the listener,
express hesitation, and sentence final forms, such as ne which shows the speaker is aware that there
is a listener, and so on. Which politeness level to choose from is determined at this stage. These
components are called listener-directed components.
The different levels of these components roughly correspond to the degrees of independence in acomplex sentence structure and the order in which related morphemes are arranged. However,when we examine individual forms, we cannot stack everything into strata so neatly. There arestill many problems to solve: the problems of how to fit tense and negation into place, how tohandle grammaticalized lexical forms, and so on. Surface morphological characteristics do notalways correspond with their meaning and function in the sentence structure.
 References
Nitta, Yoshio (1995) ‘Nihongo bunpō gaisetsu’ (Summary of Japanese Grammar) in Miyajima
Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous
Expressions) (Vols. 1 & 2), Kurosio Publishers.
Tokieda, Motoki (1941) Kokugogaku genron (Principles of the Study of Japanese).
Shoten.

IwanamiMikami, Akira (1960) Zo wa hana ga nagai (The Elephant Has a Long Nose). Kurosio Publishers.
Yamada, Yoshio (1936) Nihongo bunpōgaku gairon (Summary of the Study of Japanese Grammar).
Hobunkan.
Watanabe, Minoru (1971) Kokugo kōbunron (Study of Japanese Syntax).

Hanawa Shobo.
(Moriyama Takuro)45

 Basic Sentence Patterns
Basic sentence patterns are so called because they are basic. Whether a pattern is considered basic
depends on the frequency of usage, ease of acquisition, whether it exhibits basic word order among
the predicate and essential elements, whether it is the source of derivation and expansion, and how
useful it is in varied situations in daily life.
Interest in basic sentence patterns is mostly practical, and exists largely in Japanese language
education for foreigners and native speaking students. The study of basic sentence patterns
flourished during World War II, when Japan promoted Japanese language education in South East
Asia. After the war, some started to make an effort to logically describe basic sentence patterns aspart of grammar study.
One of the early descriptions of basic sentence patterns is Nihongo Renshūyō Nihongo kihon Bunkei“Basic Japanese Sentence Patterns for Japanese Practice” by Seinen Bunka Kyōkai. In this bookthree types of sentence patterns are described: patterns used in various situations (e.g., command,
permission, prohibition), patterns concerning the use of words (mostly dealing with theclassification based on the use of particles and auxiliary verbs), and patterns concerning sentence
structure (based on the structure of the subject, predicate, and so on).
Since then, a two-category distinction of structural sentence patterns and expressional sentence
patterns has often been used. Structural sentence patterns concern the structural aspect of patterns
and differentiate sentence types, such as simple, complex, and compound sentences, and handle theplacement of case components (e.g., ~ni ~ga arimasu, ~ga ~ni ~o agemasu). Expressional
sentence patterns concern the speaker’s intent of expression, such as request, invitation, andwarning, and the content of expression, such as cause and effect and temporal relationship.
Categories such as sentences of existence, statements, questions, and commands, also belong to
expressional sentence patterns. There has also been an attempt to develop integrated sentence
patterns, which comprehensively describe not only the structure and expressions but also intonation(e.g., Hanashikotoba no Bunkei “Sentence Patterns of Spoken Language” (1) & (2) by National
Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics).
Another attempt to describe patterns is to sort them by the hierarchy of sentences. In this line ofthinking, Mikami Akira advocates the following types of basic sentence patterns in his Kihon
Bunkeiron “Study of Basic Sentence Patterns”.
Tier 1 Patterns of Koto ‘Proposition’:‘What X is like’, and 3 other patterns.

X ga dō suru ka ‘What X will do’, X ga donna de aruka

Tier 2 Koto ‘Propositioin’+ Speaker: Three patterns according to the topic-declaration relationshipof topic-present, topic-omitted, and no-topic.
Tier 3 Koto + Speaker + Interlocutor:
exclamatory.

Four patterns: declarative, interrogative, imperative,

Tier 4 Koto + Speaker + Interlocutor + Situation: Two major patterns based on the condition oftransmission: regular style and polite style.

46

Yet another attempt is to situate the sentence in the ‘written discourse’ process, where patterns areseen as contributing to the creation of context in the text. Hayashi Shiro’s positional sentence
types are based on this view. His classification includes categories such as the ‘starting sentence
type,’ ‘following sentence type,’ and‘turning sentence type’ (see Kihon Bunkei no Kenkyū “Study of
Basic Sentence Patterns,” Bun no Shisei no Kenkyū “ Study of the Attitude of the Sentence” ).
In Japanese language education, the instruction commonly moves from more basic to less basic
sentence patterns. Especially at the beginning level, basic sentence patterns take up a significant
place in the instruction. Much care has to be taken as to what criteria are used to categorize thepatterns, which ones to include in the learning objectives, and the best sequence for learners to learn
them. Currently in Japanese language education the two-way distinction of structural sentence
patterns and expressional sentence patterns is commonly used. The Direct Method and Audio
Lingual Method often put emphasis on structural sentence patterns. More recently, teaching
methods that put emphasis on communication, such as the communicative approach, criticize theaforementioned learning methods for being overly grammar oriented, and there is a shift towardputting more emphasis on expressional sentence patterns.
 References
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics, ed. (1960) ‘Hanashikotoba no bunkei (1)taiwa shiryō ni yoru kenkyū’ (Sentence Patterns of Spoken Language (1) Study Based on
Documentation of Dialogs’) in Kokuritsu kokugo kenkyūjo hōkoku, #18. Shūei Shuppan.
______________________________________________, ed. (1963) ‘Hanashikotoba no bunkei (2)dokuwa shiryō ni yoru kenkyū’ (Sentence Patterns of Spoken Language (2) Study Based on
Documentation of Monologues) in Kokuritsu kokugo kenkyūjo hōkoku, #23. Shūei Shuppan.
Seinen Bunka Kyōkai (1942) Nihongo renshuyō nihongo kihon bunkei (Basic Japanese Sentence
Pattern for Japanese Practice)/ Kokugo Bunka Kenkyūjo Reprinted (1972) : Nihongo kyōikushi
shiryō sōsho (Histry of Japanese Education Document Series). Tōji Shobō.
Teramura, Hideo (1989) ‘Kōzō bunkei to hyōgen bunkei’ (Structural Sentence Patterns andExpressional Sentence Patterns) in Miyaji Yutaka, et al, ed., Kōza nihongo to nihongo kyōiku 1(Lectures on the Japanese Language and Japanese Language Education 1). Meiji Shoin.
Hayashi, Shirō (1960) Kihon bunkei no kenkyū (Study of Basic Sentence Patterns). Meiji Shoin.
_____________(1973) Bun no shisei no kenkyū (Study of the Attitude of the Sentence).
Shoin.

Meiji

Mikami, Akira (1958) ‘Kihon bunkeiron’ (Study of Basic Sentence Patterns) in Kokugo kyōiku notame no kokugo kōza 5 (Japanese Language Lectures for Japanese Language Education 5). Asakura
Shoten.
Reprinted (1975) : Mikami akira rombunshū (Collected Essays by Mikami Akira).
Kurosio Publishers.
(Sunakawa Yuriko)47

 Basic Word Order
The sequence in which sentential elements are arranged to create meaningful sentences is calledword order. There are largely two types of word order in Japanese: (1) the word order to configure
sentential components and (2) the word order to sequence sentential components.
(1) is for configuring case components and predicates. The rules are relatively strict so that
non-sentences such as *tarō-wa-ni- (instead of tarō-ni-wa) and *ika-naku-takatta (instead of ikitaku-nakatta ) would not occur. In configuring case components, the sequence goes as follows:tarō-ni (case particle) –wa (kakari particle) –ne (interjection). In some cases the case particles
and adverbial particles may change places, as in hanako-dake-ni/hanako-ni-dake ‘for Hanako only’.
In configuring the predicate, the sequence goes as follows: ika-se (causative) –taku (wish) –nakat(negative) –ta (past) –darō (inference) –ka (interrogative) –ne (asking for agreement). Reru, -teiru (passive), and -te shimau (aspect), -te yaru (giving and receiving) appear between the verb andwish, as in arui-te i-tai ‘want to be walking’. Auxiliary adjectives, yasui ‘have the tendency for’and “nikui ‘not inclined to,” adjectival predicates, and noun predicates come before the negative nai,
as in iki-yasuku-nai ‘not easy to go’, and utsukushiku-nakat-ta ‘was not beautiful’. The hearsay
sōda appears in the same position as inference. However, there are instances where the past andinference may change places, as in it-ta-rashii/iku-rashikat-ta ‘seems to have left/looked like[someone was] going’.
(2) In sequencing the sentential components, the restriction on the sequence of modifying
components and modified components is strict, so that *hon-bokuno (instead of bokuno hon) would
not occur. Among modifying components, longer components tend to come earlier than shortercomponents, but the restriction is not too stringent: both Tarō wa — kamisori de — hige o —zorizori to — sotta ‘Taro briskly shaved his beard with a razor’ and Tarō wa — zorizori to — hige o— kamisori de — sotta are both acceptable.
General rules are that interjections and conjunctions appear at the head of the sentence, wa of topic
precedes ga of subject, and the nominative case ga precedes o of object. We can surmise that thebasic sequence may be [haling/interjection → preparing situation/topic → subject → object →verb].
De of location, and also time expressions, are interpreted differently according to the position inwhich they appear. When the place is specified before the subject, it tends to be interpreted as thelocation where an incident occurred, whereas if the place is specified after the subject, it isinterpreted as the location the subject chose for an activity. Example: Kinō → Nakano-ku de →wakamono ga → asa hayaku kara → kōen de → haihin de → ie o → tsukurimashita ‘Yesterday →in Nakano Ward → young people → from early morning on → in the park → with discarded
material → a house → built’.
It is hard to place the case de before the de of location if it is the deof instrument, as in *haihin de→kōen de.
Of adverbs, modality adverbs tend to be placed at the head of the sentence or near the subject,
adverbs of manner come before or after the object, and adverbs of result come directly before the
verb.

48

Specific word order goes with specific types of sentences. For example, in sentences that express
transportation, the item to be transported tends to precede the destination, as in Tarō ga gakkō niiku ‘Tarō goes to school’, and Nimotsu o sōko ni hakobu ‘We carry the cargo to the warehouse’,
while in sentences of existence and production, the location tends to precedes the item in question,
as in Ekimae ni kōban ga aru ‘There is a police box in front of the station’, and Niwa ni koya otateta ‘I built a shed in the yard’. In sentences where there is a receiver, the receiver tends toprecede the item that changes hands, as in Hanako ni tegami o watasu ‘I hand the letter to Hanako’.
→文の成分 Components of Sentences (2-C), 格 Case (2-D)
 References
Saeki, Tetsuo (1975) Gendai nihongo no gojun (Word Order of Contemporary Japanese). Kasama
Shobo.
(Yazawa Makoto)

49Grammar D: Cases
 Case in Japanese What Is Case?
Cases express the syntagmatic relationship mostly between nouns, or phrases equivalent to nouns,
and the pivotal elements within the sentence that govern the nouns or noun equivalents. In
Japanese grammar study, there are several standpoints as to the range of grammatical features that
may be described as case. A broader definition takes the position that as long as a constituent has asyntagmatic relationship with other constituents in a sentence, it is a matter of case, even if theconstituent is not a noun phrase. Of those who take the position that the matter of case should be
limited to noun phrases, some include only instances in which the adverbial relationship with thepredicate is involved. Others include the adnominal relationship with other noun phrases as well.
Some limit the scope even more narrowly and place the core of case in the syntagmatic
relationships with the noun phrases that are arguments specified by the predicate, such as theunderlined arguments of kariru ‘borrow’ in Doyōbi ni daigaku de A-kun wa B-kun ni hon o karita‘On Saturday A borrowed a book from B’.
 Two Facets of Case
Two facets of cases are observed in noun phrases that bear a syntagmatic relationship with thepredicate. One is how the syntagmatic relationship is expressed (form of expression), and theother is how the syntagmatic relationship realized through a certain expression, represents asemantic relationship. The former facet of case is called the surface case, and the latter is called
the semantic (deep) case. The surface case is expressed, for example, by means of declension in
Latin, added particles in Japanese, and varying the word order in Chinese.
 Surface Cases in Japanese
Surface case markers to go with the predicate include the particles ga, o, ni, e, kara, to, de, yori, andmade. No works with nouns, and may combine with other case particles to indicate a variety ofrelations between nouns, as in e no, kara no, to no, de no, yori no, and made no.
 Semantic Cases in JapaneseNothing definite can be said about the criteria for abstracting the semantic cases that are expressedby certain forms, or about the types and numbers of semantic cases that have been classified.
Japanese semantic cases described below are thus tentative. Here are some examples: Otoko ga
hashitta ‘A man ran’ (agent of an action); To ga hiraita ‘The door opened’ (subject of a change);
A-kun ga B-kun o tataita ‘A hit B’, Kabin o watta ‘I broke a vase’, Mukashi no koto o omoidashita‘I remembered things from the past’ (patient); Hanataba o kanojo ni okuuta ‘I sent her a bouquet(counterpart as destination); Kaiin kara kaihi o atsumeta ‘I collected dues from the members’(counterpart as source); A-ko {to/ni} au ‘I will see A-ko’ (counterpart as fellow participant);mono-oto ni odoroite ‘started by a noise’ (cause); “Niwa ni deta ‘I went out into the yard’,Nihongo ni yakusu ‘translate into Japanese’ (destination); Heya {o/kara} tobidashita ‘I rushed out
50

of the room’ Tamago kara chigyo o kaeshita ‘I hatched young fish from eggs’ (source); Tsukue no
ue ni hon ga aru ‘There is a book on the table’ (place of existence); atari o samayou ‘wander in theneighborhood’ (locus of motion).
→格 Case (7-D), 動詞と格助詞 Verbs and Case Particles (2-D), 格助詞の用法 Usage of Case
Particles (2-D)
 References
Nitta, Yoshio (1993) Nihongo no kaku o megutte (On Case in Japanese). Kurosio Publishers.
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1997) Nihongo ni okeru hyōsō kaku toshinsō kaku no taiō kenkyū (Study of Correspondence between Surface Case and Deep Case inJapanese). Sanseido.
Ishiwata, Toshio (1999) Gendai gengo riron to kaku (Contemporary Language Theory and Case).
Hituzi Syobo.
(Nitta Yoshio)51 Ga and No of Subject in Adnominal Clauses
Case ga and also, at times, case no are used to express the subject of an adnominal clause.
Examples are: se {ga/no} takai hito ‘a tall person’, Tarō {ga/no} kaita ronbun ‘the thesis that
Taro wrote’, kasai {ga/no} okiru kikensei ‘the possible danger of fire starting’, ippan shimin{ga/no} shishō suru jiken ‘an incident in which general citizens get killed and hurt’, pan {ga/no}yakeru nioi ‘the aroma of bread being baked.’
In comparison with ga, no has several usage limitations. In the so-called external proposition(when the modified noun does not represent an argument of the adnominal clause predicate), wherean adnominal clause explains the content of a modified noun, no is not readily used. Especially,
when there is a conjunctive word, such as to iu and to no, connecting the adnominal clause and themodified noun, it is inappropriate to use no, as in doko no mise {ga/*no} oishii to iu chishiki ‘theknowledge about which shop sells good-tasting food’, kare {ga/*no} shisshoku shita to iu hanashi‘the story about his loss of the job.’
When the adnominal clause expresses a so-called internal proposition in which the modified noun
represents an argument of the adnominal clause, there are several situations where it is difficult torepresent the subject using no in the adnominal clause. First, it is harder to use no when there areother complements and adverbial components in between the subject and the predicate of theadnominal clause than when there are no such components. The longer the distance between thesubject and the predicate, the harder it is to use no in this structure. Example: Tarō {ga/*no}kyonen Nyuuyōku de kon’yakusha no tameni katta yubiwa ‘the ring which Taro bought for his fiancé
last year in New York.’ When the adnominal clause is in a complex sentence structure, it isdifficult to use no to present the subject of the subordinate clause within the sentence structure.
Examples: Tarō {ga/*no} katte kite Jirō {ga/no} ryōri shita gyuuniku ‘the beef which Taro bought
and which Jiro cooked,’ kodomo {ga/*no} kaze o hiitara nomaseru kusuri ‘the medicine which you
have the child take when s/he catches a cold,’ kodomo {ga/*no} iyagattemo tabesaseta hō ga ii
shokuhin ‘Food which you should make children eat even if they do not want to eat.’ There arealso instances where the case particle no is inappropriate because it can be confused with theso-called possessive no. Examples: tsuma ga shiriai ni kiita hanashi, ‘the story which my wife
heard from her acquaintance,’ musuko ga sensei ni moratta hon ‘the book which my son got fromhis teacher.’→連体修飾節 Adnominal Clause (2-J)
 References
Makino, Seiichi (1980) Kurikaeshi no bunpō (Grammar of Repetition). Taishukan Shoten.
Mikami, Akira (1972) Gendaigohō josetsu (Introduction to Contemporary Japanese Grammar).
Kurosio Publishers.
Inoue, Kazuko (1976) Henkei bunpō to nihongo: jo (Transformational Grammar and Japanese I).
Taishukan Shoten.
Shibatani, Masayoshi (1978) Nihongo no bunseki (Analysis of the Japanese Language). Taishukan
Shoten.
52

Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1992) Kiso nihongo bunpō kaiteiban (Basic Japanese
Grammar, Revised Edition). Kurosio Publishers.
(Takahashi Minako)53

 O and Ga of Object
Case particle ga expresses the object to which emotion and senses are directed when such emotion
and senses are expressed with adjectives. Examples: Inu ga hoshii ‘I want a dog,’ Hannin ga nikui‘I hate the culprit,’ Supōtsu ga suki da ‘I like sports,’ Tabako no kemuri ga kirai da ‘I dislike smokefrom cigarettes.’ Case particle o is sometimes used instead, though not as common, as in kanojo osuki da ‘I like her.’ When the predicate is a verb, the object is marked by Case particle o.
Examples: Inu o hoshigaru ‘One wants a dog,’ Hannin o nikumu ‘One hates the culprit,’ Supōtsu okonomu ‘One likes sports,’ Tabako no kemuri o kirau ‘One dislikes smoke from cigarettes.’
Even when the predicate is a verb, ga marks the object in the following examples. (1) mizu o (ga)nomitai ‘one wants to drink water’, eiga o (ga) mitai ‘one wants to see a movie’ (-tai is attached to
the verb to express desire); (2) Chūgokugo o (ga) hanaseru ‘one can speak Chinese’, gohan o (ga)taberareru ‘one is able to have a meal’ (potential); (3) nimotsu o (ga) tsunde aru ‘the luggage has
been loaded,’ kuruma o (ga) tomete aru ‘the car has been parked’ (auxiliary verb -te aru is
attached to the verb to express the resulting state). These verbs express action when used as single
verbs, but they carry stativity when combined with such suffixes as -tai, potential expressions, and-te aru.
However, in the instances described above, o tends to be used when the distance between the objectof the action and the predicate is far apart. In a sentence such as Shukudai o asu made ni zembu
yatteshimaitai ‘I want to get all the homework done by tomorrow,’ using o makes the meaning of
the sentence much easier to comprehend. If the object is a person, o is used to avoid the potential
ambiguity whether the person is the object or the subject. In Tarō ga suisen dekiru, it may beconstrued that Tarō is the subject. To make it clear that Tarō is the object, the sentence has to be
Tarō o suisen dekiru ‘We can recommend Taro.’
In the -te aru construction in (3), ga is used to describe the situation which the speaker is observing
right then and there, as in Hora, asoko ni posutaa ga hatte aru ‘Look, there is a poster pasted overthere.’ The principle at work here is the same as in sentences describing phenomena where ga isused, as in Ame ga futte kita ‘The rain started to fall.’ When there is no immediate situation, o isoften used, as in Yobō chūsha o shite aru ‘I have had an immunization shot’ and Ano hito ni nakōdoo tanonde aru ‘We have asked that person to be the marriage go-between,’ to indicate that the effectis being sustained.
→格助詞の用法 Usage of Case Particles (2-D)
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō, keitairon (Japanese Grammar: Morphology). Mugi
Shobo.
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1987) ‘Kakujoshi’ (Case Particles) in Nihongo bunpō serufu
mastaa shiriizu 3 (Japanese Grammar Self Master Series #3). Kurosio Publishers.
(Nakahata Takayuki)

54 Ni, De, and O of Location
Ni expresses the location of the subject (that is, case ga) when the predicate expresses existence, as
in Tarō wa kissaten ni iru ‘Tarō is at a coffee shop.’ When the predicate expresses motion, as in
Tarō wa gakkō ni itta ‘Taro went to school’ and ie ni nimotsu o okuru ‘send a package home,’ ni
expresses the destination of the motion of the subject (case ga) or object (case o). De, on the other
hand, expresses the location where an action or event takes place, as in Tarō wa kissaten de ocha ononda ‘Taro drank coffee at a coffee shop,’ Gakkō de kaji ga okita ‘A fire broke out at school.’Thus, ni is used when the emphasis is on existence, as in Shōgakkō ni pūru ga aru ‘There is a
swimming pool at the elementary school’ and Kono machi ni wa kōen ga ōi ‘There are a lot of parks
in this town,’ whereas de is used when the emphasis is on the occurrence of events, as in Shōgakkō
de undōkai ga aru ‘an athletic event will be held at the elementary school’ and Kono machi de wa
kōtsūjiko ga ōi ‘Many traffic accidents occur in this town.’ The difference between Tōkyō{ni/*de} sumu ‘reside in Tokyo’ and Tōkyō {*ni/de} kurasu ‘carry out day-to-day activities inTokyo’ lies in the nature of the verb; sumu puts the emphasis on existence, while kurasu puts
emphasis on activity.
In akichi {ni/de} gomi o suteru ‘dump the garbage {onto/at} a vacant lot,’ ni signals that the vacant
lot is the destination of the motion of the garbage, while de signals that it is the place where theaction takes place. Similarly, in kaisha {ni/*de} tsutomeru ‘work for a company,’ ni shows thattsutomeru is a verb that takes an argument indicating the destination of a motion, while in kaisha{*ni/de} hataraku ‘work at a company,’ de shows that the verb hataraku occurs with a phrase
indicating the location of activity.
One of the functions of o is to signal the pathway or a point in the pathway of an action, as in hashio wataru ‘cross the bridge’ and Nagoya o tsūka suru ‘pass Nagoya.’ Rōka o hashiru ‘run along thecorridor’ means that one runs right along the corridor, while rōka de hashiru ‘run in the corridor’
means that the corridor is the location where the action of running takes place, and does not mean
one makes a straight-line trajectory along the corridor.
Both ni and o may be used in yama {ni/o} noboru ‘climb the mountain,’ but ni emphasizes thearrival at the top, while o emphasizes the act of moving from the foot of the mountain to the top.
Thus, ni is the appropriate case when the destination is the focus, as in nikai {ni/o*} noboru ‘go up
to the 2nd floor.’ O is appropriate, but not ni, when the passage is the emphasis, as in nagai kaidan{*ni/o} noboru ‘climb up a long staircase.’→動詞と格助詞 Verbs and Case Particles (2-D)
 References
Noda, Hisashi (1991) Hajimete no hito no nihongo bunpō (Japanese Grammar for Novices).
Kurosio Publishers.
Teramura, Hideo (1982) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).
Kurosio Publishers.

55

Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1987) ‘Kakujoshi’ (Case Particles) in Nihongo bunpō serufu
mastaa shiriizu 3 (Japanese Grammar Self Master Series #3). Kurosio Publishers.
Morita, Yoshiyuki (1989) Kiso nihongo jiten (Dictionary of Basic Japanese).

Kadokawa Shoten.
(Hidaka Mizuho)56 O and Kara of Originating Point
Both case particles o and kara may express the originating point.
(1) Tanaka wa isoide heya {o/kara} deta ‘Tanaka left the room in a hurry.’(2) Fune ga kishi {o/kara} hanareta ‘The ship pulled away from the pier.’
Kara primarily expresses the starting point of motion or contiguity with an ending point, as insangai kara nikai ni oriru ‘go down from the 3rd floor to the 2nd floor.’ In contrast, o focuses on
the crossing of the boundary of the domain indicated by the preceding noun phrase.
This difference creates a specific division of labor listed below.
First, o cannot be used together with a noun phrase that is marked by ni that signifies the arriving
point.
(3) Sangai {*o/kara} nikai ni oriru ‘Go down from the 3rd floor to the 2nd floor.’
Conversely, it is difficult to use kara if the arriving point cannot be envisioned.
(4) Ekimae de basu {o/*kara} orita ‘Got off the bus in front of the station.’(5) Maiasa 7 ji ni ie {o/*kara} deru ‘Leave home at 7am every morning.’
Second, kara is used when the movement is conceived as continuous following the departure fromthe said starting point.
(6) Dorobō wa genkan {*o/kara} nigeta rashii ‘The thief apparently fled via the front entrance.’(7) Kamera ga kata {*o/kara} sagatte iru ‘The camera is dangling from her shoulder.’When a movement prior to reaching the starting point is observed, as in (6), the said starting point isalso called the waypoint.
Third, the starting point for an insentient subject is expressed with kara. O tends not to beappropriate.
(8) Kemuri ga heya {*o/kara} dete iru ‘Smoke is coming out of the room.’(9) Poketto {*o/kara} ame ga dete kita ‘Some candy came out of the pocket.’
Example (8) describes one cross section of a continuing state, and (9) describes one cross section of
on-going motion.
Neither example describes passage through a boundary, and o cannot be used.
O may be used with an insentient subject, however, if the focus is on protrusion past a boundary.
(10) Tonari no ie no ki no eda ga kakine o deteiru ‘Some branches of a tree in the house next door
are sticking out though our hedge.’→動詞と格助詞 Verbs and Case Particles (2-D)
 Reference57

Miyake, Tomohiro (1995) ‘O and kara’ in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi
hyōgen no bunpō: jō (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions I). Kurosio Publishers.
(Yamada Toshihiro)

58 Use and Non-Use of Ni of Time
Some of the nouns expressing time sound awkward if they are accompanied by ni, as in kyō {*ni/ø}Tarō to atta ‘I saw Taro today.’ Others sound awkward without ni, as in Ichigatsu tsuitachi{ni/*ø} hatsumōde o okonatta ‘conducted the first visit to the shrine on January 1st.’
Time expression nouns not occurring with ni have the time of speech as the reference point, and theexpressed time is relative to the time of speech. Examples: kyō, ashita, asatte, kinō, ototoi, konshū,
raishū, senshū, kongetsu, raigetsu, sengetsu, kotoshi, rainen, kyonen, ima, mukashi. Nouns oftime where the expressed time is absolute basically accompany ni, regardless of the time of speech.
Examples: ichigatsu, tsuitachi, 1ji 10pun, 2000nen, 21 seiki, Edo jidai. One sees that in newspapers
ni is not used in certain expressions, as in Shushō wa tsuitachi, kishakaiken o okonatta ‘The prime
minister held a press conference on the first of the month,’ but this is a convention specific towritten style. In speech the norm is to use ni.
In some instances it is appropriate either to use or not to use ni, as in Jiken no mikkago {ni/ø}hannin ga tsukamatta ‘Three days after the incident, the culprit was caught’; kodomo no koro {ni/ø}yoku kawa de asonda ‘I used to play in the river often when I was a child.’ “(The time of) the
incident” and “(the time when I was) a child” are absolute time, but the event or action that occurs
relative to such absolute time may or may not have to accompany ni. Seasons (haru, natsu, aki,fuyu), days of the week (nichiyōbi, kayōbi, etc.), times in the course of the day (AM, PM, morning,
noon, evening, late evening, night) are presumed within a certain year, certain week, or certain day,and thus, ni does not have to accompany them.
When the time of reference is not explicit in the sentence, not using a particle sounds a bit unnatural,
as in Fuyu {ni/?ø} ōyuki ga futta ‘There was a big snowfall in winter’; Nichiyōbi {ni/?ø} kyōkai eitta ‘I went to church on Sunday’; or Ban {ni/*ø} karee o tabeta ‘I ate curry in the evening’. By
inserting a noun that expresses relative time, the non-use of the particle becomes more appropriate,
as in Kyonen no fuyu {ni/ø} ōyuki ga futta ‘There was a big snow fall in winter last year’; Senshū
no nichiyōbi {ni/ø} kyōkai e itta ‘I went to church on Sunday last week’; and Kinō no ban {ni/ }karee o tabeta ‘I ate curry last evening’.
→名詞 Noun (2-B), 無助詞、格助詞の省略 Non-Use of Particles, Ellipsis of Case Particles (2-I)
 References
Noda, Hisashi (1991) Hajimete no hito no nihongo bunpō (Japanese Grammar for Novices).
Kurosio Publishers.
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1987) ‘Kakujoshi’ (Case Particles) in Nihongo bunpō serufu
mastaa shiriizu 3 (Japanese Grammar Self Master Series #3). Kurosio Publishers.
(Hidaka Mizuho)59 Ni and E of Destination
There are instances where ni and e are both appropriate to indicate the arriving point, as in hokkaidō
One may also use either ni or e with other verbs
ni itta / hokkaidō e itta, ‘went to Hokkaido.’that express the direction of the subject’s motion, as well as when an object moves in a certain
direction, as in umi {ni/e} dosha o suteru ‘dump sand and dirt into the ocean’; Okinawa {ni/e}tegami o okuru ‘send a letter to Okinawa.’
When the subject or object does not accompany a concrete movement, ni is used but not e. E is not
used in sentences where a counterpart or recipient of an action is specified, as in tomodachi {ni/*e}
au ‘meet with a friend,’ and haha {ni/*e} yakusoku suru ‘make a promise to my mother.’ E is not
appropriate when the sentence describes the state of the object after arriving at the destination, as in
kokuban {ni/?e} kami o hatta ‘pasted a piece of paper on the blackboard’ and kaban {ni/?e} hon oirete aru ‘have put a book in my bag.’
The prominent characteristic of e is that it indicates directionality. It is often replaced with ni, but
in some cases, as in noun modification construction, no replacement is possible. For instance,
Hokkaidō e no ryokō ‘a trip to Hokkaido,’ is appropriate, but *Hokkaidō ni no ryokō is not. When ni
is followed by to of quotation, Ie e to isoida ‘I hurried home’ is appropriate, but *Ie ni to isoida isnot. Further, one pattern, seen specifically in newspaper headlines and slogans, uses e to end aphrase, as in Shūgiin kaisan e ‘(the situation has moved toward) the dissolution of the House ofRepresentatives’ and Gomi wa kuzukago e ‘all trash: into the waste basket.’ In this pattern e isfavored over ni.
Neither ni nor e is common with verbs that express the manner and method of motion rather thanthe movement itself. With such verbs, neither gakkō ni aruita nor gakkō e aruita sounds
appropriate. One has to use made, as in gakkō made aruita ‘I walked to school.’ One can say,however, byōin {ni/e} hashitta ‘I ran to the hospital.’ This is because the emphasis is not on thephysical act of running, but the emphasis is on the concept of motion and its urgency. If the conceptof motion is prominent, either ni or e is appropriate.
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō, keitairon (Japanese Grammar: Morphology).
Shobo.

Mugi

Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1987) ‘Kakujoshi’ (Case Particles) in Nihongo bunpō serufu
mastaa shiriizu 3 (Japanese Grammar Self Master Series #3). Kurosio Publishers.
(Nakahata Takayuki)

60 Kara and De of Ingredient/Material
The case particle kara is used to express the raw material, as in budō kara wain o tsukuru ‘produce
wine from grapes,’ whereas de is used to express the material/ingredient(s) as in kami de mokei otsukuru ‘make a mock-up using paper.’ In either usage a verb expressing production appears in thepredicate position.
The difference between raw material and material/ingredient is whether the material undergoes
qualitative transformation in the production process.
Typically, when there is a qualitativechange, kara is used; when there is no qualitative change, de is used.
De covers a wider range of usage than kara, and it is possible to say budō de wain o tsukuru. Thisis because material in a broad sense includes raw material. When change in quality is not inquestion, it is possible to use de.
However, de cannot replace kara in situations where the predicate not only signifies production but
also logically implies change in quality, as in jagaimo {kara/*de} denpun o chūshutsu suru
‘extract starch from potatoes,’ kioku no danpen {kara/*de} mōsō o tsukuridasu ‘conjure up
delusions from fragments of memory.’
While one cannot say *kami kara mokei o tsukuru, but one can say ichimai no kami kara
fukuzatsuna mokei o tsukuru ‘create a complex mock-up from a single piece of paper.’ This isbecause kara may be used when the sentence expresses a big change from the source material to theend product, and when there is a sense of distance.
De may be used to express a secondary ingredient in the process of production, as in shio de aji otsukeru ‘season it with salt,’ and senryō de iro o dasu ‘use a dye to add color,’ but what kara marks
has to be something that constitutes the starting point of the production or what is at the core of the
product.
Kara and de can both express composing elements, but it is only one or the other that is appropriate
in a specific expression, depending on the lexical characteristic of the predicate. Example: Iinkai
wa 7 nin no iin {kara/*de} naru vs. Iinkai wa 7 nin no iin {*kara/de} kōsei sareru ‘The committee
consists of 7 members.’→動詞と格助詞 Verbs and Case Particles (2-D)
 References
Okabe, Hiroshi (2000) ‘Kakujoshi no tsukaiwake’ (Usage of Case Particles) in Kyoto Tachibana
Joshi Daigaku kenkyū kiyō, Vol. 26.
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1987) ‘Kakujoshi’ (Case Particles) in Nihongo bunpō serufu
mastaa shiriizu 3 (Japanese Grammar Self Master Series #3). Kurosio Publishers.
_______________________________ (1992) Kiso nihongo bunpō kaiteiban (Basic Japanese
Grammar, Revised Edition). Kurosio Publishers.
(Abe Shinobu)
61

 Ni, De and Kara of Cause
There are three case particles that express the cause or reason of a situation: ni, de, and kara. The
most common is de.
(1) Jishin de ōku no ie ga tōkai shita ‘Many houses were destroyed by the earthquake.’(2) Kaze de gakkō o yasunda ‘I missed school because of the cold.’
Ni often expresses the cause of a psychological state or natural state, or what started a psychologicalchange.
(3) Kare wa kaisha no rifujin na atsukai ni okotte iru
by his company.’‘He is angry at the unreasonable treatment(4) Kosumosu ga kaze ni yurete iru ‘The cosmos is swaying in the wind.’(5) Kyōju no Nōberushō jushō no shirase ni yorokonda ‘We were delighted at the news that the
professor had received the Nobel Prize.’
Ni also expresses a cause that immediately precedes and triggers a general change or action.
(6) Totsuzen osotta daijishin ni ōkuno ie ga tōkai shita ‘Many houses were destroyed in the greatearthquake that suddenly struck.’(7) Wagako no tanjō ni Tarō wa shūshoku o ketsui suru ‘The birth of a child of his own made him
decide to get a job.’
Please note that the noun expressing the trigger for the change or action must in itself have enoughconcreteness/materiality to express the incident.
(8) *Jishin ni ōkuno ie ga toukai shita.
De does not possess such nuance of a trigger, and simply expresses causes in general as in (1).
Kara expresses the ultimate cause of the change that ensues.
(9) Takibi no fushimatsu kara daisanji to natta ‘Carelessness with an open-air fire led to a great
disaster.’
De is appropriate for expressing the cause of a state.
(10) Takibi no fushimatsu {de/?kara} yama ga moeteiru ‘Carelessness with an open-air fire caused
the forest fire that is currently going on.’Kara expresses the ground for judgment, which is close to reason.
(11) Kono jinkotsu wa hana no katachi kara Jōmonjin to kangaerareru ‘Based on the shape of thenose, this human skeleton is seems to be that of a person from the Jomon Period.’
Complex forms expressing cause and reason include ni yotte, no seide, no okagede, no tame, ni
tsuki, to atte, yue (ni).
62

→格助詞の用法 Usage of Case Particles (2-D)
 Reference
Gengogaku Kenkyūkai, ed. (1983) Nihongo bunpō, rengoron (shiryō hen) (Japanese Grammar:
Study of Collocation: Literature Compilation). Mugi Shobo.
(Yamada Toshihiro)

63 Verbs and Case Particles

 Case Governance by Verbs
Verbs form the predicate of a sentence, and govern components that require and subordinate othercomponents. For a verb as the predicate, the combination (sentence pattern) of noun phrases andthe accompanying case particles is basically predetermined in order for the verb to complete themovement, state, or relationship it expresses. This function of verbs, with which they selectively
require the noun phrase combination that is necessary for the formation of a sentence, is called casegovernance by verbs (the valency of verbs). Verbs perform this function based on the types oflexical meaning that they possess. For example, shinu requires only a ga-noun to form a sentence,
as in Otoko ga shinda ‘A man died.’ In contrast, korosu ‘kill’ requires a ga-noun and an o-noun toform a sentence, as in Hannin ga otoko o koroshita ‘The culprit killed the man.’ A deviant
sentence is formed when shinu takes o or when korosu takes ni.
 Verb Types Based on Sentence Patterns
In Japanese language instruction, it is important to know which type (group) of verbs combines withwhich kind of noun phrase/case particle combinations.
The labels described in Chart 2-9, such as reciprocal action, adhesion, and giving, are used for theshared lexical meaning that is extracted from the verbs.
Examples: arasou ‘fight’, kekkon suru
‘get married’, kaidan suru ‘have a conference’(reciprocal action); oku ‘put down’, tsumu ‘pile’,sueru ‘lay’(adhesion); ataeru ‘give’, okuru ‘send’, uru ‘sell’ (giving). These labels are called
categorical meanings of words.
Chart 2-9: Examples of Patterns of Collocational Case Particle Combinations____________________________________________________________________________
[N ga] (Expressing the movement and change of a thing itself)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------abareru (otoko ga abarete iru ‘a man lashes out’), ikiru ‘live’, sawagu ‘make a noise’, naku ‘ cry’,warau ‘laugh’, teru ‘the sun/light shines’, hikaru ‘sparkle, glisten’, yureru ‘undulate’ : kareru‘wither’, kudakeru ‘break into pieces’, kireru ‘disconnect’, hageru ‘ peel off, go bald’, katamaru‘solidify’, tokeru ‘melt’, atatamaru ‘warm up’, sameru ‘cool off’, nigoru ‘become murky’, yurumu‘loosen’, midareru ‘become disordered’, magaru ‘bend’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________
 [N ga, N ni] (Psychological or physiological activity that requires a cause/reason)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------yowaru ‘be perplexed’ (A-kun ga B-kun no gōinsa ni yowatteiru ‘A is perplexed by B’s
stubbornness’), komaru ‘be in a fix’, yorokobu ‘be delighted’, obieru ‘be scared’, awateru ‘beflustered’, kurushimu ‘suffer’, odoroku ‘be surprised’, mairu ‘be defeated’ (haha ga atsusa ni mairu‘my mother succumbs to heat), (kanbyō ni ‘from tending a sick person’) tsukareru, ‘get worn out’,etc.
______________________________________________________________________________
 [N ga, N to] (Mutual action, mutual state)64---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------arasou ‘fight’ (Genji ga Heike to arasotta ‘the Genji fought with the Heike’), kekkon suru ‘getmarried’, kenka suru ‘quarrel’, rikon suru ‘get a divorce’, konyaku suru ‘get engaged’, kaidan suru
‘have a talk/conference’, to kōsai suru ‘have a friendly relationship with someone’, zureru ‘is out ofsync’ (kare no kangae wa jōshiki to zurete iru ‘his ideas are out of step with common sense’), au‘meet with someone’, etc.
_____________________________________________________________________________
 [N ga, N ni] (Directed at the other party)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ibaru ‘domineer’ (kare wa buka ni ibatte iru ‘he domineers over his subordinates’), hoeru ‘bark’,(kare ni) shitagau ‘obey (him)’, sakarau ‘disobey’, tsukusu ‘devote oneself’, tsukaeru ‘attend on’,amaeru ‘presume on someone’s goodwill’, tayoru ‘depend on’, (kare/gian ni) hantai suru ‘oppose(him/the bill)’, sansei suru ‘agree’, somuku ‘betray’, teikō suru ‘resist’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________
 [N ga, N o] (Conation toward others)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------arau ‘wash/clean’ (haha wa fuku o aratta ‘my mother washed/cleaned the clothes’), yurasu ‘shake,rock’, nigiru ‘hold, grab’, momu ‘crumple, wrinkle’, furu ‘shake’, naderu ‘pat’, osu ‘push’, tataku‘knock, slap’, keru ‘kick’, utsu ‘hit’, osaeru ‘hold down’: atatameru ‘warm’, hiyasu ‘cool’, oru‘break, fold’, katameru ‘solidify’, tokasu ‘dissolve’, kudaku ‘break into pieces’, sodateru ‘raise,grow’, tasukeru ‘help, rescue’, shizumeru ‘sink’, niru ‘boil’, midasu ‘disturb’ , yogosu ‘soil’, yaku
‘burn, broil’, etc.
____________________________________________________________________________[N ga, N o] (Passing through)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------noboru ‘climb’ (otoko ga yama o nobotta ‘a man climbed the mountain’), oriru ‘get off, go down’,korogaru ‘roll over’ (bōru ga rōka o korogaru ‘a ball rolls down the corridor’), wataru ‘go across’,
yokogiru ‘cross by’, tōru ‘pass by’, mawaru ‘go around’ (chikyū ga taiyō no mawari o mawaru‘Earth goes around the sun’): aruku ‘walk’ (kodomo ga hodō o aruku ‘a child walks on the
sidewalk.’), tobu ‘fly’, etc.
_____________________________________________________________________________[N ga, N ni] (Getting attached)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------haneru ‘splatter’ (doromizu ga zubon ni haneta ‘muddy water splattered on my pants’), tsuku‘attach’, hittsuku ‘attach, cling’, kakaru ‘hang’(fuku ga hangaa ni kakatte iru ‘Some clothes are
hanging on clothes hangers’), sasaru ‘stick’, ataru ‘hit, bump’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________[N
ga, [N kara] (Getting removed)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hazureru ‘unhook, come off’ (ude kara tokei ga hazureta ‘the watch came off the wrist’), hagareru‘peel off’, chigireru ‘get ripped off’, toreru ‘come off’, nukeru ‘pop/come/fall out), etc.
______________________________________________________________________________[N ga, N o, N ni] (Attaching something to something else)---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

65

oku ‘put down, place, lay’ (kodomo ga tsukue no ue ni hon o oita ‘a child put his books down on thedesk’), tsumu ‘pile’, (kōjō ni kikai o ‘a piece of machinery in the factory’) sueru ‘set down, install’,noseru ‘put on, load’, ageru ‘put, raise’, tsukeru ‘attach’, haru ‘paste’, (shorui ni han o ‘stamp the
paper’ ) osu ‘push, press’, sasu ‘stab, stick’, nuru ‘paint, smear’, kakeru ‘hang’, (uwagi o hangaa ni‘a jacket on a hanger’) tsurusu ‘hang’, (butsudan ni hana o ‘flowers on the Buddhist altar’) sonaeru‘offer’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________[N ga, N o, N kara] (Removing something from something else)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------hazusu ‘unhook, remove’ (otoko wa ude kara tokei o hazushita ‘the man removed his watch fromhis wrist’), toru ‘take, remove’, (ita kara kugi o ‘the nail form the board’) nuku ‘pull out’, hagasu‘peel off’, (eda kara kaki o ‘a persimmon from the branch’) chigiru ‘rip’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________[N ga/kara, N o, N ni] (Giving)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ageru ‘give’ (kodomo ga inu ni esa o ageta ‘the child gave food to the dog’), ataeru ‘give, endow’,(boku kara kanojo ni hanataba o ‘a bouquet from me to her’ ) okuru ‘give, send’, uru ‘sell’,megumu ‘bestow’, kasu ‘lend, loan’, yaru ‘give’, (kinjo ni miyagemono o ‘gifts to the neighbors’)
kubaru ‘distribute’, (kare ni shikin o ‘funds to him’) dasu ‘offer, spend’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________[N ga, N o, N kara] (Taking away)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(kaikei ga kaiin kara kaihi o ‘the treasurer from the members the membership dues’) atsumeru‘collect’, toru ‘take’, ubau ‘take away’, nusumu ‘steal’, azukaru ‘keep’, (kare kara kane o ‘moneyfrom him’) uru/eru ‘receive, gain’, etc.
______________________________________________________________________________[N ga, N o, N kara/ni] (Receiving)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(boku ga kare {kara/ni} hon o ‘I from him books’) morau ‘receive’, kariru ‘borrow, get a loan’,itadaku ‘receive’, tamawaru ‘be awarded with’, etc.
_____________________________________________________________________________→日本語の格 Case in Japanese (2-D), 格 Case (7-D)
 References
Gengogaku Kenkyūkai, ed. (1983) Nihongo bunpō, rengoron (shiryō hen) (Japanese Grammar:
Study of Collocation:Literature Compilation). Mugi Shobo.
Nitta, Yoshio (1986) ‘Kaku taisei to dōshi no taipu’ (Case System and Verb Types)in Jōhō Shori
Shinkō Jigyōkai, ed. Sofutowea bunshō no tame no nihongo shori kenkyū 7(Study of Japanese
Language Processing for Software Documents, 7).
Jōhō Shori Shinkō Jigyō Kyōkai Gijutsu
Center.

66

Muraki, Shinjiro (1991) Nihongo dōshi no shosō (Various Aspects of Japanese Verbs).
Syobo.

Hituzi(Nitta Yoshio)67 Usage of Case Particles
The usage of case particles, along with usage examples, is shown in Chart 2-10.
___________________________________________________________________________
Chart 2-10: Overview of the Usage of Case Particles[ga](1) Subject

inu ga hashitteiru ‘a dog is running’ginkō ga aru ‘there is a bank’(2) Object

umi ga sukida‘like the ocean’mizu ga nomitai ‘want to drink water’tebukuro ga ameru ‘be able to knit gloves’[o](1) Object

hankachi o tatamu ‘fold a handkerchief’ocha o nomu ‘drink tea’ryōri o tsukuru ‘prepare a dish’(2) Point of Origin

ie o deru ‘leave home’basu o oriru ‘get off the bus’(3) Area one passes throughsora o tobu ‘fly in the sky’ōdanhodō o wataru ‘cross the pedestriancrossing’kawa o oyogu ‘swim in the river’[ni](1) Location

tsukue no ue ni aru ‘is on the desk’ōsaka ni sumu ‘live in Osaka’(2) Arriving point

bijutsukan ni iku ‘go to the art museum’
gomibako ni suteru ‘discard in the trashcan’otona ni naru ‘grow up to be an adult’(3) The other party

tomodachi ni au ‘see a friend’sensei ni morau ‘receive from the teacher’haha ni sōdan suru ‘consult my mother’(4) Receiverwatashi ni wa wakaru ‘is obvious to me’
kodomo ni wa muzukashii
68‘is difficult

for a child’(5) Cause/Reasonōkina oto ni odoroku ‘is startled by a loudnoise’
samusa ni furueru ‘shiver with cold’(6) Direction

Tōkyō ni mukau ‘head for Tokyo’nanboku ni nagai ‘is stretchednorth-south’[de](7) Purpose

kenbutsu ni iku ‘go sightseeing’(8)

gozen 10 ji ni kaiten suru ‘the store opens
at 10:00am’

Time(1) Location

kissaten de au ‘meet at the coffee shop’
kawa de oyogu ‘swim in the river’(2) Instrument

naifu de kiru ‘cut with a knife’hikōki de iku ‘go by plane’(3) Material

ki de tsukuru ‘build with wood’(4) Manner

T-shatsu de shusseki suru ‘attend in a
T-shirt’hadashi de aruku ‘walk barefoot’(5) Causekaze de yasumu ‘be absent because of thecold’ōkina oto de me ga sameru ‘wake up by aloud noise’(6) Limit

gogo 7 ji de heiten suru ‘the store closes at
7:00pm’
100 do de futtō suru ‘boil at 100 degrees’(7) Unit of Measurement

hitori de sumu ‘live alone’
3 tsu de 100 en da ‘they are 3 for 100 yen’[e]Direction

shokuba e mukau ‘head for the workplace’[to](1) The Other Party

kazoku to iku ‘go with the family’
kodomo to kenka suru ‘quarrel with the69

child’haha to sōdan suru ‘consult my mother’(2) Object of Comparison

mukashi to chigau ‘different from the olddays’
watashi no to onajida ‘the same as mine’(3) Content

mukō to minasu,‘deem invalid’

onshi to yobu ‘call someone one’s mentor’[kara](1) Starting Point

Kansai Kūkō kara shuppatsu suru ‘leavefrom the Kansai Airport’shigatsu kara hajimaru ‘start in April’[yori](2) Raw Materialkome kara tsukuru ‘make from rice’(3) Material

shiken kekka kara handan suru ‘judge
from the test results’(4) Causefuchūi kara jiko o okosu ‘cause an
accident out of carelessness’(1) Object of Comparison

watashi yori umai ‘more skillful than I’(1) Point of Origin

Tōkyō yori kita da ‘farther north thanTokyo’
10ji yori hajimeru ‘starts at 10:00’[made]

Terminating Point

Kyūshū made dekakeru ‘go to Kyushu’
12ji made benkyō suru ‘study until 12:00’→Verbs and Case Particles (2-D), Compound Case Particles (2-D)
 References
Gengogaku Kenkyūkai, ed. (1983) Nihongo bunpō, rengoron (shiryō hen) (Japanese Grammar:
Study of Collocation:Literature Compilation). Mugi Shobo.
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1987) ‘Kakujoshi’ (Case Particles) in Nihongo bunpō serufu
mastaa shiriizu 3 (Japanese Grammar Self Master Series #3). Kurosio Publishers.
(Nakahata Takayuki)

70 Compound Case Particles
The usage of compound case particles, along with usage examples, is shown in Chart 2-11 below.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Chart 2-11: Overview of Compound Case Particles[ ] variants, N = noun__________________________________________________________________________«Ni taishite» [ni taishi, ni taishimashite, ni taisuru N, ni taishite no N]
Usage 1: Object — Explicitly shows that the object is a case ni object which the action does notdirectly affect.
(1) Gaishō no hatsugen ni taishite kinrin shokoku ga kōgi shita. ‘Neighboring countries protested
against the remark by the foreign minister.’Usage 2: Comparison — Compares and contrasts two events or things.
(2) A-Shi wa jinkō ga kyūzō shite iru. Kore ni taishite B-Shi wa gekigen shite iru. ‘The population
is rapidly growing in City A. In comparison, it is sharply dropping in City B.’__________________________________________________________________________«Ni totte» [ni tori, ni torimashite, nitotte no N]
Usage 1: Value judgment, viewpoint of evaluation — Expresses the standpoint of the subjective
value judgment or the viewpoint of the evaluation represented in the predicate.
(1) Haha wa sutenasai to iu keredo, watashi ni totte kono nuigurumi wa taisetsu na tomodachi na
no desu. ‘My mother tells me to throw it away, but to me, this stuffed animal is a dear friend.’
Usage 2: Viewpoint from which the relationship is viewed — Expresses the standpoint from which
the relationship is viewed.
(2) Yamashita sensei wa watashi ni totte oji ni atarimasu. ‘Prof. Yamashita is an uncle of mine.’__________________________________________________________________________«Ni tsuite» [ni tsuki ((2) only), ni tsukimashite, ni tsuite no N]
Usage 1: Object of the linguistic information — Expresses the object of the action that contains
linguistic information (e.g., hanasu, kangaeru, kenkyū suru).
(1) Watashi no chiisa na koro no omoide ni tsuite o-hanashi shimasu. ‘I am going to talk about mymemories from when I was a little child.’ Ni kanshite has almost the same meaning, but it sounds of written style.
 Megutte is used with multiple subjects where the object involves a long-lasting dispute or
struggle, as in ryōchi o megutte ‘concerning the territories,’

71

Usage 2: Quantitative Comparison — Expresses quantitative change with the preceding noun.
(2) Nyūjōryō wa ohitorisama ni tsuki 500yen desu ‘The admission fee is 500 yen per person.’____________________________________________________________________________«Ni tsuki» [ø]Usage 1: Reason — Often used in announcements toward an unspecific group of people throughindirect media, such as posters；explains the reason for the current situation.
(1) Kaisō-chū ni tsuki rinji kyūgyō itashimasu. ‘We will be temporarily closed due to remodeling.
 Cannot be used in the past tense.
See no tame.

Example: *Kaisō-chū ni tsuki rinji kyūgyō itashimashita.

______________________________________________________________________________«Ni yotte» [ni yori, ni yorimashite, ni yoru N, (ni yotte no N)]
Usage 1: Means/Method — Used with a volitional verb to express the means with which the said
action is conducted. Somewhat more formal than de.
(1) Intaanetto ni yotte shōbai o kakudai suru ‘expand one’s business through the use of theInternet.’
 When the source of information is the topic, ni yoruto or ni yoreba is used.
Example: Tenkiyohō ni yoreba asu wa ōyuki dasōda ‘According to the weather forecast,
there will be a heavy snow tomorrow.’
Usage 2: Cause, Reason — Expresses that the phenomenon in the main clause occurs due to anotherphenomenon that precedes it.
(2) Kabu no bōraku ni yotte A Bank wa ōkina higai o kōmutta. ‘Due to the heavy fall in stock prices,Bank A suffered great losses.
 Cannot be used when the two phenomena are simultaneous.
yotte kyūyō-chū da. (See de.)Example: *Kare wa byōki ni

Usage 3: Material, Building components — Same as de.
(3) Kishiritōru wa sanso to suiso to tanso ni yotte dekite iru. ‘Xylitol is made of oxygen, hydrogen,and carbon.’Usage 4: Change, Response — Expresses change and diversity that correspond to the change shownby the preceding noun.
(4) Gyūnyū wa hozon jōtai ni yotte wa shōmi kigen-nai demo kusatte shimau. ‘Depending on theway it is preserved, cow’s milk may go bad even before the expiration date.’

72

Usage 5: Agent in the passive construction — See the section on the case of the agent in the passive
sentence (2-E).
___________________________________________________________________________«O motte» [(o mochi), o mochimashite, o motte no N]
Usage 1: Appearance, Form — Stylistically formal. May be replaced by de.
(1) Kaitō wa bunshō o motte tsūchi itashimasu. ‘We will notify our response in writing.’
Usage 2: Juncture showing the beginning and ending — Used with verbs expressing the beginningand ending and expresses the period.
(2) Tōten wa honjitsu o motte heiten itashimasu. ‘The store closes its doors as of today.’De motte expresses the time of termination, but not the startup time. Example: *Shigatsu de mottehajimeru. De motte has a corresponding usage to almost all the usages of de.
___________________________________________________________________________«Ni kakete» [ni kake, ni kakemashite, ni kakete no N]
Usage 1: Spatial and temporal range — Expresses that a certain phenomenon occurs between two
terminal points.
(1) Sakuya mimei, Kantō chihō kara Tōkai chihō engan ni kakete tsuyoi jishin ga arimashita. ‘In theearly hours last night, there was a big earthquake spanning the coast of the Kanto and Tokai
regions.’ The preceding noun must express an expanse of a certain size. (cf. *3ji chōdo ni kakete.)___________________________________________________________________________«Ni watatte» [ni watari, ni watarimashite, ni watatte no N, ni watatta N]
Usage 1: Spatial and temporal range — Expresses that a phenomenon occurs throughout the range.
(1) Ame wa ikkagetsu ni watatte furitsuzuita. ‘The rain kept falling for one month.’__________________________________________________________________________«To shite» [to shimashite, to shite no N]
Usage 1: Qualification, Standpoint — Expresses the qualification or standpoint/position of theaction or state, often temporary.
(1) Zenkoku taikai ni gakuchō no dairi to shite sanka suru. ‘I will attend the national convention on
behalf of the president of the school.’(2) Kyōto wa furui machi to shite zen-sekaiteki ni yūmei daga, jissaini wa atarashii biru ga ōi.
‘Kyoto is famous worldwide as an old city, but in reality there are a lot of new buildings.’
73

(3) Chūgoku wa WTO no seishiki na kameikoku to shite shōnin sareta. ‘China has been recognized
as an official member nation of the WTO.’___________________________________________________________________________«O towazu» [o towanai N]
Usage 1: Absence of change in the face of diversity — Succeeds a noun that contains acounter-concept or multiple options, and expresses that the predicate holds true for any of thesituations.
(1) Kōji wa chūya o towazu tsuzukerareta. ‘The construction was carried on continuously night andday.’
Ni kakawarazu tends not to be used with a word that expresses the counter concept. Example:*chūya ni kakawarazu.
___________________________________________________________________________«Ni oite» [ni okimashite, ni okeru N]
Usage 1: Place of origin of an event — Expresses the place where an action or event occurs.
(1) Sotsugyōshiki wa dai hōru ni oite okonawaremasu ‘The commencement will be held in the big
hall.’
Notes:
The first set of criteria that should be used to decide whether the expression is a compound caseparticle is if it does not alter the said meaning and usage, and if it does not occur at the end of
the sentence. In Sono kashu wa ankōru ni ōjite mō ikkyoku utatta ‘The singer sang one moresong in response to the audience’s demand for an encore’, ni ōjita may also be used, andtherefore, it is not a compound case particle; it should be recognized as the te form of the verb.
On the other hand, ni ōjite in Kingaku ni ōjite ittei no wariai o henkin suru ‘reimburse a certain
percentage based on the amount of money’ cannot be rephrased, *henkin wa kingaku niōjita/ōjiteiru, etc., and is grammatically recognized as a compound case particle.
So-called bare adverbial forms (e.g., ni taishi, as opposed to ni taishite) sound somewhat formal
in terms of style, but the meaning remains the same. Considering that case particles originallyare function words that express the relationship between the noun and the predicate, the polite
form (e.g., ni taishimashite) might seem overly polite, yet its use in this function is quite
common.
The adnominal form (e.g., ni taisuru) as well as the adnominal particle form (e.g., ni taishite no)are both used at about the same frequency. However, when it follows a noun that does not
imply action (e.g. kōtai ‘antibody’, as in infuruenza {ni taisuru/?taishite no} kōtai ‘the flu
antibody’), the adnominal form is more acceptable.
_________________________________________________________________________

74

→Verbs and Case Particles (2-D), Usage of Case Particles (2-D)
 References
Morita, Yoshiyuki & Matsumoto Masae (1989) Nihongo hyōgen bunkei (Japanese Expressional
Patterns). ALC.
Yamazaki, Makoto & Fujita Yasuyuki (2001) Gendaigo fukugōji yōreishu (Usage Examples ofContemporary Compound Words). National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics.
Yamada, Toshihiro (2002) ‘Kakujoshi oyobi fukugō kakujoshi no rentai yōhō ni tsuite’ (On the
Adnominal Use of Case Particles and Compound Case Particles) in Gifudai Kokugo Kokubun, Vol.
29.
(Yamada Toshihiro)

75

Grammar: E

Voice and Related Topics

 Voice
Voice is a syntactic phenomenon where the verb and the noun that construct a sentence undergochange of form and alter their case relationships. That is, the verb, which has the pivotal role ofbeing the predicate of the sentence, displays a special form, and contrasts morphologically with thebasic form. The source of this morphological contraposition in the predicate, however, is theperspective as to what is expressed as the central theme of the sentence, and this concerns thefunction of communication. Thus, to discuss this grammatical phenomenon known as voice, onemust deal with both the characteristics of the verb forms and the swapping of syntactic relationshipon the one hand, and the functional aspect of communication on the other.
Voice is a grammatical category proper to verbal predicate sentences; it does not occur in adjectival
predicate sentences or nominal predicate sentences. The type of relationship seen in verbal predicate
sentences, such as Kō wa Otsu ni Eigo o oshieru ‘A teaches English to B’ vs. Otsu wa Kō ni (or Kōkara) Eigo o oshierareru/osowaru/narau ‘B is taught by / is taught by / learns English from B,’
shows that the contrast involved in voice is multi-faceted. That is, the lexical contrast between
oshieru ‘teach’ and narau ‘learn’, and also between oshieru and osowaru ‘gets instruction’, is incompetition with the active and passive forms of the shared verb, oshieru. The contrast seen inoshieru vs. narau is sometimes called lexical voice.
The contrasting relationship seen in the active (basic) sentence vs. the passive sentence, and in thebasic (non-causative) sentence vs. the causative sentence, is at the center of voice in Japanese.
The form of the predicate portion shows the contrasting relationship between suru vs. sareru, andsuru vs. saseru. The phonetic resemblance between -rare- and -sare-, which respectively
characterize the passive and the causative is significant. Also syntactically, in the causative andpassive contrasting relationship, transformational and derivational relationships are observed. In
both Tarō ga Jirō o nagutta ‘Taro hit Jiro’ and Jirō ga Tarō ni nagurareta ‘Jiro was hit by Taro’,the same incident is described from different perspectives; the difference between the sentences isthe contrast between the active and (direct) passive, which involves a transformational relationship,
whereas the contrast between active and indirect passive seen in Ame ga futta ‘Rain fell/It rained’
and Tarō wa ame ni furareta ‘Taro got rained on’ involves a derivational relationship. The final,
indirect passive example shows a double sentence structure, stating the situation from the viewpointof Tarō, who has no role in the previous, basic sentence. The difference between these twosentences arises from the concern as to how the incident relates to the parties involved, and what
type of syntactic contrast the difference signifies. It is not based on the concern as to whether
there is adversity involved (semantic consideration), or what type of verb (transitive vs. intransitive)
is used.
It is true that indirect passive expressions generally express adversity, and that
intransitive verbs form only indirect passive sentences. However, indirect passive formation
should be looked at separately from the issue of adversity. Beneficence, which is seen as the
opposing concept to adversity, is expressed with the expression -te morau, while -rareru excludes
the benefactive meaning and limits itself to adversity.
In the causative, the same contrast in the transformational relationship and the derivational
relationship is observed as in the passive. Example 1: Kare wa tagaku no shakkin ni nayande ita

76‘He was agonizing over his large debt’ and Tagaku no shakkin ga kare o nayamasete ita ‘His large
debt distressed him’ express the same situation but in two different forms. It is a contrast between
a non-causative sentence and a causative sentence. Eample 2: Musuko ga kaimono ni itta ‘The son
went shopping’ and Hahaoya ga musuko ni kaimono ni ikaseta ‘the mother let the son go shopping’
presents a contrast between a basic sentence and a causative sentence based on a derivational
relationship. The latter is a double structure sentence which is a statement from the viewpoint of
someone (the mother) who has no part in the former sentence. The contrast shown in Example 1
appears with verbs that describe human psychological conditions, such as yorokobu ‘be pleased’,kanashimu ‘be saddened’, iradatsu ‘be irritated’, odoroku ‘be surprised’, kandō suru ‘be impressed’,and shitsubō suru ‘be disappointed’, while the contrast in Example 2 appears with verbs that
describe physical and social activities of human beings, such as iku ‘go’, asobu ‘have fun’, neru
‘sleep’, and tatsu ‘stand up’. Psychological activities such as yorokobu and odoroku are notactions one initiates actively; they are conditions that a person experiences as they occur. It is
widely known that the causative form signifies permission and non-interference when the focus ison the will of the doer.
→受動文の種類 Types of Passive Sentences (2-E), 使役 Causative (2-E), 自動詞と他動詞
Intransitive and Transitive Verbs (2-B), ヴォイスの研究 Study of Voice (7-D)
 References
Shibatani, Masayoshi (2000) ‘Voice’ in Nihongo no bunpō 1, bun no kokkaku (Japanese Grammar 1:
Framework of Sentences). Iwanami Shoten.
Takahashi, Taro (1977) ‘Tachiba no toraekata ni tsuite’ (On How to Understand View Points) in
Kyoiku Kokugo, V. 51.
Muraki, Shinjiro (1991) ‘Voice no kategori to bun kōzō no reberu’ (Voice Categories and Levels ofSentence Structure) in Nitta Yoshio ed., Nihongo no voice to tadōsei (Japanese Voice andTransitivity). Kurosio Publishers.
_____________ (2000) “Voice” in Bessatsu Kokubungaku, Vol. 53.
(Muraki Shinjiro)

77 Types of Passive Sentences
Passive sentences are divided into the direct passive and the indirect passive.
 Direct Passive
A direct passive sentence can be formed by directly converting an active sentence. Example: inu
ga kodomo o tasuketa ‘a dog saved the child’ (active) →kodomo ga inu ni tasukerareta ‘the childwas saved by a dog’ (passive).
This is done with active sentences where the object is marked byo, as well as active sentences that include a component marked by ni (e.g. inu ga kodomo ni
kamitsuita ‘a dog bit a child’), and kara (e.g., inu ga kodomo kara bōru o totta ‘a dog took the ballfrom a child’). To form a passive sentence, the agent of the active sentence is removed from thesubject’s position, a component other than the original case ga is placed in the subject position
instead, and the -(r)areru is attached to the verb stem to form the predicate. The direct passive isalso called “the normal passive.”
There are direct passive sentences where the subject is inanimate. Examples: hashi ga kakerareta‘a bridge was built,’ biiru wa mugi kara tsukurareru ‘beer is made from barley,’ and kono chihō dewa doitsugo ga hanasareru ‘German is spoken in this region.’ This type of passive is called the“insentient passive” because the subject is insentient. In this type of passive, the agent often does
not come into question. If it is necessary to explicitly mention the agent, usually it is marked by ni
yotte, as in shi ni yotte hashi ga kakerareta ‘the bridge was built by the city.’ Indirect Passive
In the indirect passive, what is in the position of the subject is not a case component in the active
sentence from which the passive sentence is formed. Example 1: Karasu ga gomi o arashita‘Ravens tore into the garbage’ (active) →Jūmin (‘The residents,’ subject) ga karasu ni gomi oarasareta ‘The residents had their garbage torn into by ravens’ (passive). From this, backformation into an active sentence, such as *Karasu ga jūmin ni gomi o arashita, is not possible.
Example 2: Dareka ga e o sakini katta ‘Someone bought the painting first’ (active) →Ane wa
dareka ni e o sakini kawareta ‘My sister had someone buy the painting (before she could)’ (indirect
passive). First there was a situation which is described in the active sentence, where someonebought the painting. When the speaker understands that her/his older sister was affected by thesituation, the speaker comes up with the indirect passive sentence. Example 3: Haha ga genkan nokagi o kaketa ‘My mother locked the front door’ (active) →Chichi wa haha ni genkan no kagi okakerareta ‘My father was inconvenienced when my mother locked the front door’ (indirect
passive). First there was the situation where my mother locked the door. Once the speaker
understands that this situation inconvenienced his father, s/he comes up with the indirect passive
sentence. In the last two examples, the agents in the active sentences (“someone” and “my mother”)
do not directly affect the subjects in the passive sentences (“my older sister” and “my father”).
In other instances, part of the subject, what the subject owns, or the subject’s in-group member,becomes the object of the action, as in “(Hanako’s) foot” in Hanako ga jōkyaku ni ashi o fumareta‘Hanako had her foot stepped on by a passenger,’ “(Taro’s) wallet” in Tarō ga dorobō ni saifu onusumareta ‘Taro had his wallet stolen,’ and “(the mother horse’s) colt” in Hahauma wa
bokujōnushi ni ko o tsurete ikareta ‘The mother horse had her colt taken away by the rancher.’78

These are also indirect passive sentences, and are called “the owner passive.” Intransitive verbs,
such as shinu ‘die’and sawagu ‘become boisterous’ also form passive sentences, as in Aiken ni
shinareta ‘My dear dog died (and it caused me great pain)’, and Kankyaku ni sawagareta ‘The
spectators became boisterous (and it troubled the speaker)’. These are called the “intransitive verb
passive.”
The indirect passive often denotes that the subject suffers or is inconvenienced as a result, and isthus often called “the adversative passive,” as well as the “the third party passive,” because a third
party which does not show up in the original active sentence is the one who is inconvenienced.
Indirect passive sentences sometimes do not express adversity when the clause ends in the 中止形
chūshi-kei, continuative form, and not in the terminal from, as in Hahaoya ni te o hikarete mon okugutta ‘I went through the gate as my mother led me by the hand.’ Is It Insentient Passive or Indirect Passive?
Whether to use the particle o or the particle ga may make a difference in the type of passive
sentence one creates. Examples: Manshon ga taterareta ‘The condo was built’ vs. Manshon otaterareta ‘We had a condo built (near us)’. Manshon ga taterareta is a direct and insentientpassive sentence with an inanimate subject. It simply states the fact that a condo has been built.
Manshon o taterareta, on the other hand, is an indirect passive sentence that possibly has a person,
who does not appear in the sentence, in the position that accompanies ga. The subject who may beaffected by the construction of the condo exists elsewhere, and it is implied that the subject wasaffected by what happened.
Similarly, Chiji ni yotte kusudama ga warareta ‘The decorative paper ball was broken open by thegovernor’ is a direct passive sentence, and Chiji ni kusudama o warareta ‘The governor went andbreak open the decorative paper ball (e.g., before the ceremony started)’ is an indirect passive
sentence implying adversity. Kanojo ni yotte kadan ga tsukurareta ‘The flower bed was put in byher’ is a direct passive sentence, and Kanojo ni kadan o tsukurareta ‘She went and put in aflowerbed (on our land)’ is an indirect passive sentence implying adversity.
→ヴォイス Voice (2-E), 受動文の諸特徴 Various Characteristics of Passive Sentences (2-E), 受
動文の歴史 History of Passive Sentences (6-A)
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō, keitairon (Japanese Grammar: Morphology).
Shobo.
Teramura, Hideo (1982)
Kurosio Publishers.

Mugi

Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).
(Nakahata Takayuki)

79 Case of the Agent in Passive Sentences
The agent that takes ga in the active sentence shows up with ni in the passive counterpart.
(1) Tarō ga Hanako o aisuru ‘Taro loves Hanako’.
(2) Hanako ga Tarō ni aisareru ‘Hanako is loved by Taro’.
In the following instances ni is not used with the agent.
First, ni is not used with verbs that express the act of creating, such as tsukuru ‘make, create’, (keekio) yaku ‘bake (a cake), (e o) kaku ‘paint, draw (a picture)’.
(3) Yūmei na shefu {*ni/ni yotte} tsukurareta ryōri ‘the dish created by a famous chef.’
In this example, the agent in the passive sentence is marked by ni yotte, to avoid confusion with thereceiver of the thing that is created.
Ni yotte, which makes the style somewhat bookish, may mark the agent in a direct passive sentence.
Second, ni is not used with three-argument verbs which express the transference of things between
two people, such as watasu ‘hand over’, okuru ‘send’, and ataeru ‘give’.
(4) Sensee {?ni/kara} tegami o watasareta ‘I was handed a letter by the teacher.’In this example the agent in the passive sentence accompanies kara to show the source, so there isno confusion with the receiver (which would be marked by ni) of the item.
Kara is also used with the passive agent of verbs that express actions where there is no physicaltouching involved, such as hanashikakeru ‘strike up a conversation’, shōtai suru ‘invite’, aisuru‘love’. Ni may also be used in this situation.
(5) Mishiranu hito {ni/kara} hanashikakerareta ‘I was talked to by a stranger.’
De may be used with the agent of a passive sentence.
(6) Tatemono wa ikegaki de kakomarete iru ‘The building is surrounded by a hedge.’
Case de can be used in an active sentence, tatemono o ikegaki de kakomu ‘surround the building by
a hedge’, and in it de is close to the de of tool/means. This use of de is distinguished from the dethat is used to accompany the agent only.
The agent of indirect passive sentences is always marked by ni.
sentence structure.

Ni yotte cannot be used in this(7) Rinjin {ni/*ni yotte} sawagare, nerarenakatta ‘The neighbors
couldn’t sleep.’made a lot of noise and I→格 Case (2-D), 授受表現の諸特徴 Characteristics of Giving and Receiving Expressions (2-E)
 References

80Masuoka, Takashi (1987) Meidai no mondai (Questions of Proposition).

Kurosio Publishers.

Yamada, Toshihiro (2004) Nihongo no benefakutibu – te yaru, te kureru, te morau no bunpō(Japanese Benefactive – Grammar of te yaru, te kureru and te morau). Meiji Shoin.
(Yamada Toshihiro)81 Characteristics of Passive Sentences
What is expressed in the active sentence, Inu ga kodomo o tasuketa ‘The dog rescued the child’, andthe passive sentence, Kodomo ga inu ni tasukerarera ‘The child was rescued by the dog’, is thesame, but in the active sentence attention is drawn to the action of the dog, while in the passive
sentence, the focus is on the treatment of the child. Passive sentences put the focus on the object
which receives the action, and describe the situation, including the influence of benefit and damage.
The most prominent characteristic of the meaning that is expressed with passive sentences isadversity. The so-called adversative passive is generally represented in indirect passive sentencessuch as Tonari ni biru o taterareta ‘They built a building next to us (which has inconvenienced us)’,and Kodomo ni nakareta ‘The child cried (and I was not pleased),’ where the implication is thatsomeone was not a direct victim of the action but that the action had a negative impact on the
person. On the other hand, while direct passive sentences also sometimes have negative
connotation, as in Sensei ni shikarareta ‘I was chastised by the teacher’, and Hachi ni sasareta ‘I
was stung by a bee’, they may express positive impact as well, as in Sensei ni homerareta ‘I waspraised by the teacher’ and Minna ni aisarete iru ‘She is loved by everyone.’ Whether the impact
is annoying or beneficial depends on the meaning the verb itself possesses.
When the subject is insentient, there is no benefit or annoyance involved. This is called theinsentient passive. In insentient passive sentences, as in Sake wa kome kara tsukurareru ‘Sake ismade from rice’, Kinō gikai ga hirakareta ‘The congress was held yesterday’, and Jishin ga okiru toiwareteiru ‘It’s said an earthquakes will occur’, one does not have to specify the agent (i.e., the doerof the action of ‘make,’ ‘hold,’ and ‘say’). If there is a need to specify the agent, ni yotte is used,
as in Kono kyoku wa 15sai no shōjo ni yotte tsukurareta ‘This song was composed by a 15 year old
girl.’ If the agents are many and unspecified, ni is used, as in Kono hon wa ōzei no hito ni
yomarete iru ‘This book is read by many people.’ Sentences such as Jijitsu wa nazo ni
tsutsumarete iru ‘The truth is shrouded in mystery’ and Ie ga ki ni kakomarete iru ‘The house issurrounded by trees’ do not have a sentient agent. The active counterparts to these sentences (Nazoga jujitsu o tsutsunde iru, Ki ga ie o kakonde iru) do not seem natural. They work only in thepassive.
Passive clauses are convenient in complex sentences where the same subject is focused in bothclauses. (1) Ryōshin ga sodatete (active) ōkiku natta ‘My parents nurtured me, and I grew’,
sounds unnatural compared to (2) Ryōshin ni sodaterarete (passive) ōkiku natta ‘I grew, nurtured by
my parents’, because in (1), the subject of sodatete in the first clause and that of ōkikunatta in thesecond clause are not the same.
This is an example where a passive sentence (such as (2)) is
required to make coherent statement about the same subject. Conversely, the passive sentence, Mizu
wa wakasarete kara nomu, is not appropriate; it should be Mizu o wakashite kara nomu ‘One drinks
water after one boils it (active)’, where the agent in both clauses is the same.
Sometimes causative verbs, such as mataseru ‘make someone wait’ and tabesaseru ‘feed someone’,are made into the passive. This construction is called the causative passive. Examples:
Tomodachi ni mataserareta ‘I was made to wait by my friend’, Kiraina mono o tabesaserareta ‘I
was forced to eat what I didn’t like’. Group I verbs (Five-row verbs) have the causative passive
form (e.g., mataserareru) that is derived from the causative form with -aseru at the end (e.g.,82mataseru), as well as the causative form with -asu at the end (e.g.
forms are used commonly.

matasu→ matasareru).

Both→受動文の種類 Types of Passive Sentences (2-E), 受動文の歴史 History of Passive Sentences(6-A)
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō, keitairon (Japanese Grammar: Morphology).
Shobo.

Mugi

Teramura, Hideo (1982) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).
Kurosio Publishers.
(Nakahata Takayuki)

83 The Passive with Intransitive and Transitive Verbs
There are many verbs that occur in intransitive and transitive pairs, such as aku:akeru andtatsu:tateru.
When change to the insentient subject is involved, the intransitive passive and transitive passive aresimilar, in that the subject that makes the change is marked by ga in both cases.
(1) Mado ga {aita/akerareta} ‘The window opened/was opened.’(2) Ekimae ni biru ga {tatta/taterareta} ‘A building went up/was built in front of the station.’
The intransitive passive differs from the transitive passive in the following regards.
First, one cannot explicitly describe the agent in an intransitive sentence, but one can do so in thetransitive passive.
(3) Biru ga XXX Kensetsu ni yotte {*tatta/taterareta} ‘The building was built by XXX construction
company.’
When a natural phenomenon is involved, an intransitive verb may be used, providing the cause isexpressed with de. (Transitive passive sentences may not be used.)(4) Kaze de mado ga {aita/*akerareta} ‘The window opened because of the wind.’
Second, intransitive verbs cannot express the process of an event using the -teiru form, whiletransitive passive sentences can.
(5) Chakuchakuto biru ga {*tat/taterare}te iru ‘Buildings are steadily being built.’
Biru ga tatte iru only signifies the result of an action and does not co-occur with adverbs that
describe process, such as chakuchakuto.
When an intransitive verb occurs with a sentient subject, sometimes the intransitive sentence
expresses an action done willfully by the agent her/himself, and the transitive passive sentence
expresses an action performed willfully by someone else.
(6) Konna tokoro, hairitakute haittanjanai. Ireraretanda ‘I came into a place like this not because
I wanted to. I was forced to enter.’Intransitive verbs that express emotion, such as nayamu ‘be troubled’, gakkari suru ‘bedisappointed’, do not have transitive counterparts, and they sometimes semantically resemble theintransitive causative passive.
(7) Sō-on ni {nayande iru/nayamasarete iru} ‘I am troubled by the noise.’→自動詞と他動詞 Intransitive Verbs and Transitive Verbs (2-B), 授受表現の諸特徴 Various
Characteristics of Giving and Receiving Expressions (2-E)
 References84

Hayatsu, Emiko (1990) ‘Yū-tsui tadōshi no ukemi hyōgen ni tsuite – mu-tsui tadōshi no ukemi
hyōgen to no hikaku o chūshin ni’ (On the Passive Expressions of Transitive Verbs That Have
Intransitive Counterpart―Mainly in Comparison to the Passive Expressions of Transitive Verbs
That Have No Intransitive Counterpart) in Nihongogaku, May Issue.
(Yamada Toshihiro)85 Causative
Causative sentences have a predicate where the verb stem is suffixed by -(s)aseru, as in oya okomaraseru ‘cause the parent to suffer’, seito ni kokuban o misaseru ‘make the pupils look at theblackboard’. Causative sentences carry the meaning that someone works toward the realization ofa situation. The causative is classified into (1) the causative of instruction, (2) the causative of
permission, and (3) the causative of occurrence of a situation, all of which are based on the criteria
whether the causer intentionally starts up a situation, and whether the causee wishes for the situation
to happen.
 Semantic Types of Causative Expressions
In the causative of instruction (1), as in Kantoku ga senshu o hashiraseru ‘The manager makes theplayers run’, Hahaoya ga musuko ni sara o arawaseru ‘The mother makes the son wash the dishes,’
the causer recommends to or orders the causee to help realize a certain situation. In the causativeof permission (2), as in Chichioya ga musume o ryokō ni ikaseru The father lets his daughter go on
a trip’, Yukiko ga Hanako ni sukinadake fuman o iwaseru ‘Yukiko lets Hanako complain all she
wants,’ the causer gives permission and support to the causee, or does not interfere with the causee’s
effort, so that the situation which the causee wants to realize will come true. In the causative ofoccurrence of a situation (3), a certain situation occurs for one reason or another, despite the factthat the causer does nothing intentionally for it to occur, as in wasurete ite niku o kusaraseru ‘letthe meat rot because of negligence’, fukaku ni mo teki ni ten o toraseru ‘make the blunder of letting
the opponent score points’ This type of causative connotes that the causer was unaware of thedevelopment of the situation, that s/he was sorry that s/he was not effective in handing the situation,and that the causer feels responsible and regretful. When something that belongs to the subject isthe causee, as in me o hikaraseru ‘keep an eye out’, ashi o suberaseru ‘slip’, hyōjō o kumoraseru‘wear a gloomy look’, fuan o tsunoraseru ‘heighten one’s anxiety’, the occurrence of the situationis spontaneous, and can be considered a type of the causative of occurrence of a situation. In
addition to (1) through (3), a causative expression may describe the result deriving from a cause thattakes the subject position within the sentence, as in Kisei kanwa ga keizai o kasseika saseru‘Deregulation revitalizes economy’, Sono hitokoto ga kanojo ni taibu o omoitodomaraseru ‘Thatone word stops her from leaving the club’.
 Forms Marking Causees
A causee is marked by o or ni in a causative sentence. A causee is often marked by o when there isa force working to realize a certain situation by affecting the causee directly, regardless of thecausee’s wishes or will, as in heishi o senjō e ikaseru ‘make the soldiers go to the battlefield.’ O
must be used when verbs of emotion are involved (e.g., minna o warawaseru ‘make everyone
laugh’, oya o komaraseru ‘cause the parent to be distressed’, imōto o bikkuri saseru ‘surprise thelittle sister’), or when the causee is insentient (e.g., jitensha o hashiraseru ‘run the bicycle’, denki otentō saseru ‘turn on the light’, keikaku o seikō saseru ‘carry out a plan successfully’).
Triggering emotion, as in warau ‘laugh’, komaru ‘be troubled’, and bikkuri suru ‘be surprised’,occurs regardless of the causee’s will, and insentient objects do not possess volition. Naturally, no
consideration is given to their wishes.

86

The causee is marked with ni when a transitive verb that denotes volition is used in the causative
construction, as in kodomo ni shigoto o tetsudawaseru ‘make the child help with work’, senshu ni
genryō o saseru ‘make the players lose weight.’ One reason for the use of ni here is to avoid the
double o construction. In intransitive causative sentences, ni may be used, as in musume ni
ikaseru ‘let the daughter go’, Hanshin ni kataseru ‘let the Hanshin Tigers win’. This tends to occur
when someone works on the causee’s willingness to make a certain situation happen. Ni, insteadof o, is used in kodomo ni “itadakimasu” to iwaseru ‘have the child say, “Thank you for the meal”.’
This is because the speaker is trying to teach and persuade the child and bring out the child’s
willingness to do the act. In kodomo ni “maitta” to iwaseru, ‘make the child say, “I surrender”,’ ni
can be replaced with o. This is because the speaker has no respect for the child’s willingness.
 Forms of Causative Predicate
Giving and receiving expressions may be attached to the causative construction as auxiliary verbs.
Yasumasete morau ‘have someone help/permit her/him to take a rest’ and shashin o torasete morau‘have someone allow the speaker to take photos’ express the speaker’s desire to make something
happen. Ikasete kudasai ‘Please let me go’ and Mizu o nomasete kudasai ‘Please let me drink
water’ express the speaker’s request that something s/he desires be realized.
One of the causative forms has -(s)aseru suffixed to the verb stem, as in yomaseru ‘make someone
read’ and misaseru ‘make someone see.’ There is another form which has -(s)asu, as in yomasu‘make someone read’ and misasu ‘make someone see’. The use of the -(s)asu form is somewhat
restricted depending on the conjugated form ; it is not used much in the 中止形 chūshi-kee,
continuative form. Still, in the causative passive construction, this form is used just as often as theother form (e.g., tatasareru /tataserareru ‘is made to stand up’, motasareru /motaserareru ‘is madeto carry’).
→ヴォイス Voice (2-E), 使役と他動詞 Causative and Transitive Verbs (2-E), 自動詞と他動詞
Intransitive Verbs and Transitive Verbs (2-B)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1982) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I). Kurosio
Publishers.
Hayatsu, Mieko (2004) Shieki Hyōgen “Causative expressions” in Asakura nihongo koza 6 bunpō
II (Asakura Japanese Language Lectures 6: Grammar II). Asakura Shoten.
(Nakahata Takayuki)

87 Causative and Transitive Verbs
Causative sentences and transitive sentences may become semantically close. Examples: kodomo
o okisaseru ‘have the child wake up’ vs. kodomo o okosu ‘wake the child up’, jukensei o kyōshitsu
ni hairaseru ‘let the test takers enter the room’ vs. jukensei o kyōshitsu ni ireru ‘usher the test takers
into the room’. When there is a corresponding pair of intransitive and transitive verbs, as inokiru/okoru ‘happen’, ireru/hairu ‘let in/enter’, atsumaru/atsumeru ‘gather together/collect’,tōru/tōsu ‘go through/let [it] go through’, modoru/modosu ‘go back/put back’, oriru/orosu ‘getoff/unload’, the intransitive causative sentence and the corresponding transitive sentence bearsimilar meaning. This occurs only when the causee is sentient.
If the causee is insentient, thecausative construction sounds unnatural, as in shinamono o narabaseru ‘make the merchandise line
up’, kitte o atsumaraseru ‘have the postal stamps gather around.’ Only the transitive construction
may be used; shinamono o naraberu ‘lay out the merchandise’, kitte o atsumeru ‘collect stamps’.
This is because causative sentences contain the meaning of evoking the willingness in the causee
and having her/him act towards the realization of a certain situation.
Strictly speaking, there is a difference between a causative sentence and its counterpart transitive
sentence even when both are possible. Take Kodomo o furo ni hairaseru ‘have the child take abath’ and. Kodomo o furo ni ireru ‘bathe a child’, for instance. In the former sentence the causer
orders the child to initiate the act of bathing, while in the latter the speaker gives a bath to a smallchild. In jōkyaku o orisaseru ‘make the passenger get off the vehicle’ vs. jōkyaku o orosu ‘let thepassenger get off the vehicle’, the causer orders the passenger to get off the vehicle in the former,
and the driver or the conductor lets passengers get off the vehicle as part of their routine practice.
In a causative sentence, the causer urges the causee to act on the causer’s intent or wish, so that thedesired situation will occur. In a transitive sentence, the agent directly affects the other party.
Some transitive causative sentences and transitive sentences that use different transitive verbs may
be semantically close. Kisaseru (the causative form of the transitive verb kiru ‘put on clothes’) vs.
kiseru ‘put clothes on someone’, and misaseru (the causative form of the transitive verb miru ‘see’)‘make someone see’ vs. miseru ‘show’ are two examples. The causee is marked by ni. Compare
musume ni kimono o kisaseru ‘have the daughter wear kimono’ vs. musume ni kimono o kiseru ‘put
the kimono on the daughter,’ and seito ni nōto o misaseru ‘have the pupils look at the notes’ vs.
seito ni nōto o miseru ‘show the pupils the notes.’ The difference between the former and latter
sentences in these examples is of the same nature as in the previous examples; the reader canenvision that there is the actual touching of “the kimono” and “notes” by the agent in thetransitive sentences.
→使役 Causative (2-E), 自動詞と他動詞 Intransitive Verbs and Transitive Verbs (2-B)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1982) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I
Kurosio Publishers.

(Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).

Hayatsu, Mieko (2004) ‘Shieki hyōgen’ (Causative Expressoins) in Asakura nihongo kōza 6 bunpō
II (Asakura Japanese Language Lectures 6: Grammar II). Asakura Shoten.
(Nakahata Takayuki)
88 Spontaneity
Spontaneity refers to the phenomenon where emotion, thoughts, judgment, recognition, or
movements occur regardless of or in spite of the subject’s will.
Grammatical forms that express spontaneity include the use of the auxiliary verb -(ra)reru, as in
Mukashi no koto ga shinobareru ‘I reminisce the old days’, and the use of the suffix -eru of the
five-row verbs, as in Kare no ima no sugata o miru to nakete shimau ‘I cannot help crying when I
see what he is today.’Transitive spontaneous sentences usually occur with the cases …ni …ga, and have the first person
subject. Intransitive verbs, such as (eda ga) oreru ‘a branch snaps’ and (ito ga) kireru ‘thread
breaks’, also express situations that arise regardless of human intention. However, the subject of aspontaneous sentence is a noun phrase experiencing one’s own thoughts or movements, as in Ano
koro no koto ga (boku ni wa) natsukashiku omoidasareru ‘I fondly recall those days,’ while
intransitive sentences do not have this characteristic.
Spontaneous sentences basically express phenomena where thoughts, emotion, and movements
spring up for real. However, negative spontaneous sentences acquire stativity, as in dō kangaetemo
kare ga hannin da to wa omowarenai ‘I just cannot believe he is the culprit.’ There is a continuum
here where, at the other end there is a potential sentence that clearly expresses the speaker’s will tocarry out the action (e.g., Kare no namae ga dōshitemo omoidasenai ‘For the life of me, I cannot
remember his name’), and a sentence, such as Dō kangaetemo kare ga hannin da to wa omoenai ‘Icannot think he is the culprit, no matter how hard I try’ exists in between.
Verbs used for spontaneous sentences in the current standard Japanese are not as productive as they
were in classical language, as well as in some current dialects where spontaneous sentences may bederived from verbs of volition in general. In the current standard Japanese, only a limited group ofverbs that express emotion, thoughts, judgment, and recognition are used with the auxiliary affix-(ra)reru, and just a few verbs that accompany the affix -eru, such as warau ‘laugh’ and naku ‘cry’.
As far as style is concerned, spontaneous sentences are not common in spoken language, and theusage is fairly limited. In contemporary speech, spontaneity tends to be expressed analytically by
the use of adverbs such as omowazu ‘in spite of oneself’, shizen ni ‘spontaneously,’ and auxiliary
verbs, such as –te shimau ‘do something in spite of oneself’.
→ヴォイス Voice (2-E), 可能文の諸特徴 Various Characteristics of Potential Sentences (2-E)
 References
Adachi, Taro (1995) ‘Omoeru to omowareru – jihatsu ka kanō ka’ (Omoeru vs. Omowareru –Spontaneous or Potential?) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed. , Nihongo ruigi hyōgen nobunpō: jō (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions I). Kurosio Publishers.
Moriyama, Takuro & Shibuya Katsumi (1988) ‘Iwayuru jihatsu ni tsuite – yamagata shi hōgen ochūshin ni’ (On So-Called Spontaneity – With a Focus on the Dialect of Yamagata City) in
Kokugogaku, Vol. 152.
(Shibuya Katsumi)89 Forms Used in Potential Sentences
A potential sentence describes whether it is possible to realize an action when the agent willfully
tries to perform it. In the current standard Japanese, complementary distribution can be mapped
according to the conjugation types of verbs as follows.
(1) Five-Rows Verbs: Potential Verbs(e.g., yomeru)(2) One-Row Verbs & Ka Column Irregular Verbs: 未然形 Imperfective Form + Auxiliary Verb-rareru (e.g., mirareru)(3) Sa Column Irregular Verbs: Suppletive Form: dekiru(e.g., benkyō dekiru)

Please note that the distribution includes the following exceptions.
(2)’ With One-Row Verbs and Ka Column Irregular Verbs, the form similar to Potential Verb suchas mireru is widely used. This form is often referred to as ra-nuki ‘missing ra’ since it may be
produced by deleting ra from the standard Japanese form mirareru.
(3)’ With Sa Column Irregular Verbs, dekiru may not be used to replace suru and zuru in such
verbs as aisuru ‘love’, kanzuru ‘feel/sense’ and omonzuru ‘think highly of’ (e.g., *aidekiru,*kandekiru). Conversely, some potential expressions that use dekiru do not have the corresponding
Sa Column Irregular Verb expressions (e.g., eigo ga dekiru ‘is good at English’ vs. *eigo o suru ‘doEnglish’).
The phrase koto ga dekiru ‘is capable of doing ~’ may be used with all types of verbs as in kaku
‘write’/miru ‘see’/(kenkyū) suru ‘do (research)’.
Other expressions of potentiality include -uru and -eru, although expressions of probability such as
okoriuru ‘is likely to happen’ are more common. Forms expressing ease or difficulty, such as
yasui ‘easy to’, nikui ‘difficult to’, gatai ‘difficult to’, and also kaneru ‘unable to,’ carry a meaningthat is close to potentiality. Kaneru expresses a very similar meaning to that in a potential
sentence when it is in the first person affirmative (e.g., sonna basho ni wa ikikaneru ‘I couldn’t go
to a place like that’).
However, in negative sentences, it is exclusively used in second and third
person sentences to express probability and not possibility, as in aitsura wa sonna tokoro ni moikikanenai ‘They probably wouldn’t hesitate to go to a place like that.’
In various regional dialects there are a wide variety of potential forms (e.g., kakuniii –Tohoku
region, kakikiru –Kyushu region). Much care should be taken in Japanese language instruction
when the class is conducted in these regions.
→可能文の諸特徴 Various Characteristics of Potential Sentences (2-E)
 References
Shibuya, Katsumi (1995) ‘Kanō dōshi to suru koto ga dekiru – kanō dōshi no hyōgen’ (Potential
Verbs and suru koto ga dekiru – Expressions Using Potential Verbs) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta
Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō: jō (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions I).
Kurosio Publishers.
90

Teramura, Hideo (1982)
Kurosio Publishers.

Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).
(Shibuya Katsumi)91 Characteristics of Potential Sentences
Potential sentences whose predicates are composed of potential and auxiliary verbs, such as rareru
and dekiru, have the following semantic and structural characteristics.
 Semantic Characteristics of Potential Sentences
Semantically, potential sentences can be classified based on two criteria: (a) what makes therealization of the action possible or impossible, and (b) whether the sentence mentions if the action
has been realized.
First, potential sentences are classified into “ability potential,” “circumstantial potential” and soon, depending on the reason why the realization of the action is or is not possible.
(1) Boku wa eigo ga kakenai ‘I cannot write (in) English.’(2) Isogashikute tegami ga nakanaka kakenai ‘I am too busy and cannot get around to writing
letters readily.’
In Example (1), the reason for the speaker not to be able to write is because s/he does not have theability to write (in) English. In (2), it is not that the speaker does not have the ability to write aletter. What is preventing her/him from writing a letter is the busy schedule.
Second, one group of potential sentences express that what is possible has been actualized in thatthey include the realization of the action, while in the other group of potential sentences potentiality
remains latent, that is, they only express the possibility of realizing the action.
(3) Tarō wa kinō yatto shigoto o katazukeru koto ga dekita ‘Taro finally was able to finish the job
yesterday.’(4) Tarō wa kinō, sono shigoto o katazukeru koto ga dekita noni shinakatta ‘Taro had theopportunity to finish the job yesterday, but he didn’t.’
In (3) the sentence states that the job was actually done, while in (4) it simply states there was justan opportunity to do so. The latent potential predicate expresses the present tense using the -ru
form, and it is a stative predicate that does not collocate with -teiru. Latent potential predicates
express various degrees of permanence. When the predicate is highly stative it behaves almost
like an adjective.
(5) Kono pasokon wa ima aite iru kara tsukaeru ‘This PC is not in use now, so it’s OK to use it.’
(6) Kono pasokon wa deeta no shori ni tsukaeru “This PC is suitable for processing data.’(7) Kono pasokon wa tsukaeru ‘This PC is very useful.’
Sentence (5) simply states the temporary state of the PC. Sentences (6) and (7) explain thecharacteristics of the PC, and (7) in particular may collocate with an adverb of degree, such as
totemo ‘very,’ just like an adjectival sentence. Sentence (7) cannot be rewritten with ~koto ga
dekiru ‘be able to ~.’ Structural Characteristics of Potential Sentences
92

Next, the subject and object of the potential sentences can be classified into three structural patterns:~ga ~o, ~ga ~ni, and ~ni ~ga.
(8) Kare ga Suwahirigo {ga/o} hanaseru no wa yūmei na hanashi da ‘It’s a well-known fact that hecan speak Swahili.’(9) Kare {ga/ni} Suwahirigo ga hanasenai no wa iu mademonai ‘Needless to say, he cannot speak
Swahili.’
When dekiru is the predicate, however, the object must take case ga, except when the form is“Chinese-origin word + dekiru” as in kenkyū dekiru ‘can do research.’(10) Boku wa Eigo {ga/*o} dekinai ‘I am not good at English.’Sentences expressing ability often show the subject with case ni.
(11) Boku ni wa sonna koto totemo ienai ‘I just cannot say such a thing.’
 Differences between Potential and Spontaneous Verbs
There is a problem of differentiating potential and spontaneous expressions, such as mieru ‘visible’
vs. mirareru ‘able to watch/see’, and kikoeru ‘audible’ vs. kikeru ‘able to listen/hear.’ The
example below will clarify the difference.
(12) Saikin wa isogashikute terebi ga {mirarenai/*mienai} ‘I am so busy lately I cannot watch TV.’
Spontaneous verbs describe phenomena where events and situations come into one’s sight andhearing, whereas potential sentences presume that the subject intentionally initiates the action.
→可能文に用いられる形式 Forms Used in Potential Sentences (2-E)
 References
Shibuya, Katsumi (1995) ‘Kanō dōshi to suru koto ga dekiru – kanō dōshi no hyōgen’ (Potential
Verbs and suru koto ga dekiru – Expressions Using Potential Verbs) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta
Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō: jō (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions I.)
Kurosio Publishers.
Teramura, Hideo (1982)
Kurosio Publishers.

Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).
(Shibuya Katsumi)

93 Characteristics of Reciprocal Sentences What Is a Reciprocal Sentence?
The basic premise of reciprocal sentences is that they have the structure of [Verb (Nounx, Nouny) =Verb (Nouny, Nounx)]. For example, in [Hiroshi ga Yōko to kekkonshita = Yōko ga Hiroshi tokekkonshita ‘Hiroshi married Yoko=Yoko married Hiroshi’] and [Tarō wa Jirō to naguriatta =Jirō
wa Tarō to naguriatta ‘Taro had a fist fight with Jiro=Jiro had a fist fight with Taro’], the right andleft sides of the equation describe the same event.
In other words, the same situation will be
described if we interchange the case particles of the two components.
 Forms of Reciprocal Sentences(1) First, there are reciprocal verbs that form reciprocal sentences, such as rikon suru ‘get a divorce’,tatakau ‘fight’, kōsai suru ‘have friendly relations with’, kyōzon suru ‘coexist’, majiwaru ‘intersect,mingle’, hanmoku suru ‘feud’, chigau ‘differ’, kotonaru ‘differ’. Example: A shi ga B shi tokaidan shita ‘Mr. A had a discussion with Mr. B.’(2) Second, there is the form that adds the suffix au, as in Kare wa kanojo to kata wo dakiatta ‘He
and she held each other’. This form may occur with (o)tagaini, as in Hiroshi wa Yōko to(o)tagaini aishiatta ‘Hiroshi and Yoko loved each other’, and with a prefix ai to the verb, as in
Genji wa Heike to ai-nikumiatta ‘The Genji clan and the Heike clan hated each other’.
(3) Awaseru is suffixed to the verb, as in hitosashiyubi o oyayubi to kosuriawasete ‘rub the index
finger and the thumb together.’ Components of Reciprocal Sentences
When the reciprocal relationship is built around the ga phrase, the case relationship of the tworeciprocal components is expressed by the [N ga, N to] structure. This, however, does not occur
very often. There are also instances where there is a parallel construction the inside of the ga
phrase, as in Hiroshi to Yōko ga kata o dakiatta ‘Hiroshi and Yoko embraced each other,’ and wherea plural ga noun is used, as in Shinrōshinpu ga kata o dakiatta ‘The bride and groom embraced
each other.’ When the reciprocity is built around the o phrase, the [N o, N to] structure is used, as in
Kare wa uraji o omoteji to torichigaeta ‘He mistook the lining for the outer material.’
 Types of Reciprocal Sentences
There are at least two types of reciprocal sentences. One involves two (opposing) parties, as inHiroshi ga Yōko to kekkonshita ‘Hiroshi married Yoko’ and Tarō ga Jirō to kenashiatta ‘Taro andJiro quarreled with each other.’ The other type includes a collaborator, who is not essential to the
execution of the originally intended action, as in Tarō wa Jirō to hitotsukama no meshi o kutta ‘Taro
broke bread with Jiro’, and Tarō ga Jirō to (isshoni) aite o kenashiatta ‘Taro and Jiro trashed theother party’.
 References

94

Nitta, Yoshio (1998) ‘Sōgobun o tsukuru—“v+shiau” o megutte’ (Creating Reciprocal Sentences–Discussion on ‘V+Shiau’) in Handai Nihongo Kenkyū, Vol. 10.
Sadanobu, Toshiyuki (2000) ‘Ichirō wa Jirō to tachiagareru ka’ (Can Ichiro Stand Up with Jiro?) in
Nihongogaku, 19-5.
(Nitta Yoshio)95 Use of Giving and Receiving Expressions as Auxiliary Verbs
Of the giving and receiving verbs, three types are used as auxiliary verbs: 1. yaru, ageru,
sashiageru, 2. kureru, kudasaru, 3. morau, itadaku.
To express beneficence, Kobayashi ga Tanaka ni hon o kasu ‘Kobayashi loans a book to Tanaka’
may be rewritten in three ways.
(1) Tanaka ni hon o kashite yatta.
(2) Kobayashi ga hon o kashite kureta.
(3) Kobayashi ni hon o kashite moratta.
(1) is written from the perspective of Kobayashi , the agent, and (2) and (3) are written from theperspective of Tanaka, the recipient of the action. One may add Kobayashi ga to (1) and Tanaka
ga to (3) to describe the transactions from the objective point of view.
The contrast between (1) and (2) lies in the directionality of the transaction of “the book,” whether
it goes away from the speaker (centrifugal) or whether it goes toward the speaker (centripetal).
The difference between (2) and (3) is that (2) has the agent as the subject while the recipient of theaction is the subject in (3).
The basic meaning and function of giving and receiving auxiliary verbs is the expression of
beneficence.
(4) (To the husband) Gohan tsukutta? ‘Did you fix dinner?’(5) (To the husband) Gohan tsukutte kureta? ‘Did you fix dinner for me?’In (5) the act of fixing dinner is seen as beneficial. It indicates a stronger other-directedconsideration than (4).
Te ageru and te sashiageru, which are humble forms of te yaru ‘do something for someone as afavor’, are not used when one addresses someone who is socially superior.
(6) *(To a customer) Kirei ni tsutsunde agemasu ‘*I’ll wrap it neatly for you.’(7) *Sensei, o-nimotsu motte sashiagemashō ‘*Professor, I’ll carry your bag for you.’
One must use humble expressions instead: O-tsutsumi shimasu ‘I will wrap it for you’, O-mochi
shimasu ‘I will carry it for you’. (6) and (7) are appropriate when one is not talking directly to
one’s superior.
(8) (In one’s journal) Sensei no o-nimotsu o motte sashiageta ‘I carried the professor’s bag forher/him.’
Giving and receiving auxiliary verbs also assume the function of making explicit the subject andobject, which are often omitted in conversation and discourse.

96(9) Kinō, mukashi suki datta hito to battari atta no, totsuzen. {a. Hanashikaketa/b. Hanashikakete
kureta} node bikkuri shichatta ‘Yesterday I ran into someone I used to like, out of the clear blue. I
was caught by surprise because {a. I began to talk to him/b. he began to talk to me}.’In (9a.) it is likely that “I” was the one who initiated the talking, while in (9b.), because the formsuggests a movement toward the speaker (centripetal), the agent has to be “the person whom the
speaker used to like.”
Giving and receiving auxiliary verbs do not always express beneficence.
(10) Itsuka eraku natte yaru ‘I am going to be somebody someday.’(11) Tondakoto o shite kureta na ‘What you’ve done is causing me great trouble.’(12) Mise no mae de tattete moratte wa komarimasu ‘It’s great inconvenience that you are standing
in front of my shop.’Te yaru and te kureru are obviously non-beneficial from the context, and te morau is used in
idiomatic expressions, such as te moratte wa komaru, that do not express beneficence.
→授受表現の諸特徴 Various Characteristics of Giving and Receiving Expressions (2-E), 視点
Viewpoint (2-K), ヴォイスの研究 Study of Voice (7-D)
 References
Kuno, Susumu (1978)
Teramura, Hideo (1982)
Kurosio Publishers.

Danwa no bunpō (Grammar of Discourse).

Taishukan Shoten.

Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).

Yamada, Toshihiro (2004) Nihongo no benefakutibu – te yaru, te kureru, te morau no bunpō(Japanese Benefactive – Grammar of te yaru, te kureru and te morau). Meiji Shoin.
(Yamada Toshihiro)

97

 Characteristics of Giving and Receiving Expressions
Giving and receiving verbs express the transference of the object Z between the two parties, X and
Y. These verbs are used in patterns of X ga Y ni Z o…, or X ga Y kara Z o ….
When X is the source of Z, verbs such as ataeru, yaru, kureru, watasu, dasu, sazukeru, juyosuru,
are used. Yaru contrasts with ageru and sashiageru (humbling). Kudasaru is the honorific form ofkureru.
Ataeru differs from the yaru group in the following regard. The yaru group is used only when Z isbeneficial to the recipient Y. In contrast, ataeru does not have to connote beneficial meaning.
(1) Purezento o {yatta/ataeta} ‘Gave a gift.’(2) Songai o {*yatta/ataeta}‘Gave damage.’In subjective expressions which express the will of the first person subject, for instance, the yaru
group is used.
(3) Kore, kimi ni {yaru/ageru/*ataeru} yo ‘Here, I’ll give this to you.’(4) Kore, {sashiagemasu/*o-ataeshimasu} yo ‘I will give this to you.’
The kureru group and yaru group have different directionalities for the transference of Z when seenfrom the viewpoint of the speaker. On the uchi to soto scale of the speaker < what belongs to the
speaker < listener < what belongs to the listener < the third party, the yaru group is used for the
movement toward soto, which is away from the speaker (centrifugal) or transferenceence of a third
party. In contrast, the kureru group is used with the movement toward uchi, which is inward(centripetal).
(5) (Watashi ga) Tanaka kun ni purezento o ageta ‘(I) gave a gift to Tanaka.’(6) Tanaka kun ga (watashi ni) purezento o kureta ‘Tanaka gave (me) a gift.’
Unlike with the yaru and kureru groups, there is no limitation on directionality with other verbs,
such as ataeru and watasu.
When X is the recipient of Z, verbs such as morau, uketoru, and ukeru are used. The humble formof morau is itadaku.
The morau group expresses the transferenceence of the beneficial Z, the same as the yaru andkureru groups. Uketoru, on the other hand, does not connote beneficial meaning.
(7) Purezento o {moratta/?uketotta} ‘received a gift.’(8) Seikyūshō o {*moratta/?uketotta} ‘received an invoice.’
Uketoru is used with the transference of concrete objects while ukeru is used with the transferenceof something abstract.
(9) Seikyūshō o {uketotta/*uketa} ‘received an invoice.’98(10) Songai o {*uketotta/uketa} ‘suffered a damage.’Y, the source of Z, may also be marked by kara.
(11) Chichi {ni/kara} hon o moratta ‘received a book from my father.’
The kureru group and morau group depict the same phenomenon from the opposing perspectives as
far as voice is concerned.
(12) Boku ga ojisan ni purezento o moratta ‘I received a gift from my uncle.’(13) Ojisan ga boku ni purezento o kureta. ‘My uncle gave me a gift.’→ Expressions Using Giving and Receiving Verbs as Auxiliary Verbs(7-D)(2-E), Studies in Voice References
Ooe, Saburo (1975) Nichi-eigo no hikaku kenkyū – shukansei o megutte
Japanese and English – On Subjectivity). Nan’undo.
Kuno, Susumu (1978)(Comparative Study of

Danwa no bunpō (Grammar of Discourse). Taishukan Shoten.
(Yamada Toshihiro)

99 Expressions of Directionality
There are two types of Japanese verbs that are sensitive to the transference of concrete objects orsomething abstract.
The first type of verbs intrinsically contains the centripetal directionality toward the speaker or thecentrifugal directionality away from the speaker. Of the verbs that belong to this type, yaru andiku have a ga subject and express centrifugal transference. The speaker is marked by ga with theverbs morau and (kara) kiku, and these verbs are used to express centripetal transference.
Someone other than the speaker is marked by ga with kureru, yokosu and kuru, and these verbs
express centripetal transference toward the speaker.
(1) {Watashi ga kare ni ‘I to him’/*Kare ga watashi ni ‘He to me’} hon o yatta ‘gave the book.’(2)

a. Watashi wa sono hanashi o kare kara kiita ‘I heard the story from him.’b. *Kare wa sono hanashi o watashi kara kiita(3) {Imōto ga boku ni ‘My little sister to me’/*Boku ga imōto ni} tegami o yokoshita ‘sent a letter.’
These verbs basically assume the speaker’s perspective in subordinate clauses as well.
(4) Kare wa watashi ni tokei o {kureta/*ageta} koto o wasureta rashii ‘He seems to have forgottenthat he’d given me the watch.’
Verbs of the second type are not suitable for expressing centripetal directionality toward the speaker,
especially by themselves, when one wants to describe matters and phenomena. Such verbs include
those that express the transference of the agent itself, such as hikkosu ‘change residence, move’,chikayoru ‘move closer’, and those that express the transference of the object, such as okuru ‘send’,tsutaeru ‘relay, tell’, and hanashikakeru ‘initiate a conversation.’
When one describes a phenomenon using one of these verbs, the verb alone cannot express thetransference that has a directionality involving the speaker.
(5)*Kondo otonari ni hikkoshita Yamada desu
(6)*Jikka no haha ga boku ni kudamono o okutta
These sentences can be made grammatical by changing the verbals into hikkoshite kita and okutte
kita, or, depending on the verb, adding te kureru, to clarify the directionality toward the speaker.
Likewise, verbs that express the transference of the object, such as oshieru and kasu, cannot express
centripetal directionality toward the speaker by themselves. One must add te kureru, but not tekuru.
(7) Hitori no rōjin ga watashi ni michi o {?oshieta/*oshiete kita/oshiete kureta} ‘An old man
showed me the way.’
These verbs have counterpart verbs which have the recipient of the action as the subject, such as
osowaru ‘receive instruction’ and kariru ‘borrow.’

100Unlike the first type of verbs, such as yaru, verbs in the second type may be free from the limitation
on directionality when they are used in subordinate clauses or when they have an appropriate
modality at the end of the sentence.
(8) Kare wa watashi ni hanashikakete kō itta ‘He started to talk to me, and said the following.’(9) Haha wa watashi ni kudamono o okutta koto o wasureta rashii ‘My mother seems to haveforgotten that she sent me fruit.’→授受表現の諸特徴 Various Characteristics of Giving and Receiving Expressions (2-E), 受動文
での動作主の格 Case of the Agent in Passive Sentences (2-E), 視点 Perspective (2K)
 References

Kuno, Susumu (1978)

Danwa no bunpō (Grammar of Discourse). Taishukan Shoten.

Yamada, Toshihiro (2004) Nihongo no benefakutibu – te yaru, te kureru, te morau no bunpō(Japanese Benefactive – Grammar of te yaru, te kureru and te morau). Meiji Shoin.
(Yamada Toshihiro)

101



Naku(te), Naide and Zu(ni)The difference among naku(te), naide, and zu(ni) has to be looked at carefully only when they areaffixed with verbs. In other instances, the form naku(te) is used as in atsukunaku(te) (i-adjective),
kantan janaku(te) (na-adjective), and okane janaku(te) (noun+da).
There are some fixed forms that occur with verbs, such as naide+iru, aru, oku, iku, kuru, ageru,
morau, kureru, kudasai, hoshii (aux. verbs, examples (1)-(3) ), naku+naru, suru/saseru (examples(4), (5)).
(1) Itsumademo kizukanaide iru ‘Does not become aware for a long time.’(2) Wasurenaide kudasai ‘Please don’t forget.’(3) Koko de suwanaide hoshii ‘I’d rather that you don’t smoke here.’(4) Saikin nomanakunatta ‘I don’t drink these days.’(5) Musuko no keitai o tsukaenaku shita. ‘I made my son’s cell phone unusable.’In the classroom, it will be effective to instruct that naide is the basic form in the verbal clause in acomplex sentence, and that one must learn the conditions for use of nakute as an exception.
Naide can be used in most situations, and it is not a big problem if the sentence is not quite in thegroove.
(6) Genkō o {minaide/mizuni/*minakute} enzetsu shita ‘Gave a talk without reading the script.’(7) Basu ni {noranaide/norazuni/*noranakute} aruite tsūgaku shiteiru ‘I commute to school
without riding the bus.’(8) Mada {mitsukaranaide/mitsukaranakute/mitsukarazu(ni)}, sagashiteiru ‘I haven’t found it, andI am still looking for it.’
(9) Kaette {konakute/konaide/kozu}, shinpaida ‘He hasn’t come back, and I am worried.’(10) Sagasa{nakutemo/naidemo/*zunimo}, iidesuyo ‘You don’t have to look for it.’(11) Ima dekake{nakutewa/?naidewa/*zu(ni)} wa maniawanai ‘I won’t make it unless I leavenow.’
Nakute is more often used than naide in sentences containing cause and effect (Examples (8), (9))
and condition (Examples (10, (11)). Because of the principle that also applies to the te-conjunction,
the causal clause has to be of stative nature, or the predicate has to be something that the subject ofthe main clause cannot control willfully. (A volitional verb may be used when the subjects in thetwo clauses are different.)
Naku in the adverbial continual form may not be used in a verbal sentence, and zu is used instead(Example (12)).
(12) Benkyō mo sezu, shigoto mo sezu, nete bakari iru ‘He doesn’t study nor does he work; he justlies around.’102

It is said that zu(ni) is used in written style, but it is often used in idiomatic expressions inconversation, and zu is also used in the continual form in parallel expressions. It is not
appropriate to call zu(ni) simply bookish.
→テ節・Continual/Te-Clause, Continual Clause (2-J)


References

Suzuki, Hideo (1976) ‘Naku(te), naide, zu(ni) no yōhō ni tsuite’ “On the Usage of naku(te), naide,and zu(ni)” in Nagoya Daigaku Kyōyōbu Kiyō, Vol. 20.
Kitagawa, Chisato (1976) ‘Naku(te) to naide’ “Naku(te) and naide” in Nihongo Kyōiku, Vol. 29.
Hidaka, Mizuho (1995) ‘Naide to nakute to zuni – te-kei no yōhō o motsu dōshi no hiteikei’ (Naide,
Nakute, and Zuni – The Negative Forms of the Verbs That Have Usages with the Te-Form) in
Miyajima, Tatsuo & NittaYoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō : ge (Grammar of Japanese
Synonymous Expressions II). Kurosio Publishers.
(Kobayashi Noriko)103

Grammar G: Tense and Aspect Aspect
Aspect refers to a group of expressions of the “aspect” of movement, such as continuative. Basically,
aspect concerns only verbal predicates.
A narrower definition of aspect discusses whether the situation in question is a state or a movement.
Morphologically, whether to use the unmarked suru form or the shite iru form, which describes
state, is at the core of aspect. (Shite aru and shitsutsu aru also describe state.) In addition,
compound verbs, such as shihajimeru, may describe the beginning and ending aspects of an event,and also the te-form, such as shite kuru, describes temporal aspects of movements, such as thedevelopment of a movement. Aspect includes these expressions that describe the temporal aspectof situations themselves. To distinguish such a usage from others, this usage is sometimes called“aktionsart.”
Aspect also concerns the temporal relationship of events, such as “before and after,” and isconsidered to exist side by side with tense. In sudeni sono toki ni wa x shite iru ‘already will havedone x by that time,’ for instance, the validity of the fact that there has been a prior movement has
to be described by a stative expression. This type of expression is called perfective. Perfective isusually discussed within the framework of aspect, but it is also related to tense. In general,components referring to past time do not collocate with the ru-form, but in perfective expressions
using the teiru form, as in kyonen shinde iru ‘died last year,’ past adverbs may collocate with the
ru-form. In this particular example, kyonen indicates the time of the event, which expresses thatthe history of a preceding event is in effect in the present.
(Reichenbach (1947) proposes a system by which to explain such structure of time using the pointof speech (S), the point of reference (R), and the point of event (E).)→スル・シテイル形の意味 Meaning of Suru Form and Shite iru Form (2G), アスペクトの複合
動詞 Compound Verbs Describing Aspect (2-G), テオク・テアル Teoku and Tearu (2-G)
 References
Reichenbach, Hans (Ishimoto, Shin , transl.) (1982)
Symbolic Logic). Taishukan Shoten.

Kigō-ronrigaku no genri

Kindaichi, Haruhiko, ed. (1976) Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto
Shobo.

(Elements of(Aspect of Japanese Verbs).

Mugi

National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1985) ‘Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto totensu’ (Aspect and Tense of Japanese Verbs) in Kokuritsu Kokugo Kenkyūjo Hōkoku, No. 82.
Shueisha Shuppan.
Comrie, Bernard (Yamada Sae, transl.) Aspect. Mugi Shobo.
Kinsui, Satoshi, et al. (2000) Nihongo no bunpō 2: toki, hitei to toritate (Japanese Grammar 2:
Time/Negation and Focus). Iwanami Shoten.
(Moriyama Takuro)104

 Stative Verbs
Stative verbs describe state, as in aru ‘exist’ and iru ‘require’. In the narrow definition, stative
verbs describe state by themselves. In the broader definition, stative verbs include such a verb as
sugureru ‘ is superior’ on the ground that it does not describe movement. Teiru is suffixed to thistype of verbs to describe state.
Adjectival and nominal predicates, such as samui ‘cold’ and gakusei da ‘is a student,’ describe state,in that the predicate remains the same before and after it becomes the focus.
Verbs such as aru‘exist,’ iru ‘reqire,’ iru ‘be present,’ nomeru ‘capable of drinking, fit for drinking,’ and dekiru ‘able’describe the current state, and are used in expressions such as ima iru ‘need it now,’ and genzai iru‘currently needed.’ These are stative verbs in the narrow definition.
Non-stative verbs are generally grouped together as verbs that can describe movement. Verbs that
describe movement, such as taberu ‘eat’ and ochiru ‘fall,’ describe phenomena that occur within acertain period (temporarily localized events). However, they cannot describe events that are
temporarily localized within the time period of utterance. Generally, the suru form expresses
future when movement verbs (non-stative verbs) are used in the context of a specific time, as in:
Ima taberu yo (=not yet eaten. ‘I will eat now.’)
Cf. *Genzai ‘currently’ taberu.
To express future, the suru form is used as in the example above. To express the current status, onemust suffix a stative verb to the te-form to form the shite iru pattern (e.g., tabete iru ‘is eating’).
There are stative verbs that do not affix the stativized form (e.g., shitei ru), as in *itte iru ‘isneeding’, and there are also stative verbs that such affixation does not alter the meaning (e.g.,nezasu ‘be rooted) vs. nezashite iru ‘be rooted’). Verbs such as sugureru and bakageru are notused in the conclusive form (the suru form); they accompany teiru, as in sugurete iru ‘excel’, toexpress state. Please note: These verbs are sometimes called Class 4 verbs, based on Kindaichi’s
terminology (1950).
Potential verbs, such as hashireru ‘able to run,’ express the state of potentiality in the suru form,
while they express the resulted “state” in the (shi)teiru-form, as in hashirete iru ‘have come to beable to run.’ Many verbs have both the stative verb and movement verb usages.
→スル形・シテイル形の意味 Meaning of Suru Form and Shiteiru Form (2G), アスペクト
Aspect (2-G), 動詞 Verbs (2-B)
 References
Kindaichi, Haruhiko, ed. (1976) Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto (Aspect of Japanese Verbs). Mugi
Shobo.
Takahashi, Taro (1994) dōshi no kenkyū – dōshi no dōshi-rashisa no hatten to shōshitsu (Study ofVerbs –Development and Disappearance of What Makes Verbs Verbs). Mugi Shobo.

105

Terashima, Hideo (1984) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi II
Kurosio Publishers.

(Japanese Syntax and Meaning II).
(Moriyama Takuro)106 Meaning of Suru Form and Shiteiru Form
The suru form discussed here is the form that has not been stativized. Stativized forms include themost representative form shite iru, as well as shite aru, shitsutsu aru, etc. The shite iru form is themost widely used form that expresses stativization, and it can express both the on-going aspect andthe result. In contrast, shite aru expresses the result, and sitsutsu aru mainly expresses the processof change.
The suru form expresses the entire event as having a beginning and an ending, while the state which
the shite iru form describes is picked out as a slice of event out of a temporal continuum.
Illustration 2-3 shows the contrast.
Illustration 2-3: Relationship between the Observed Event and the Entire Event Movement (e.g., Suru Form)
Perception
Entire Event State (e.g., Teiru Form, etc.)
Perception…………Entire Event…………
__________________________________________________________________
Consider:(1) Watashi wa kare ga {taoreru/taorete iru} no o mita ‘I saw him {fall/lying}.’
If he falls while I watch, the suru form is used, and if my seeing is part of what has alreadyhappened, the shite iru form is used. Japanese tend to be rather particular about the circumstancesof the observer and what s/he observes.
If the observer discovers the body after it fell, taorete iru
is preferred over taoreta.
When there are multiple sentences, there is time progression when the sentences are movement
sentences. There is no time progression with a succession of stative sentences.
When the situation cannot be placed on a specific timeline, the perception of the movement aspect(expressed by the suru form) and the stative aspect (expressed by the shite iru form) are no longer
differentiated.
(2) Watashi wa maiasa asagohan o tabemasu ‘I eat breakfast every morning.’

107

When a habit is described, the teiru form can also be used, as in watashi wa maiasa asagohan otabete imasu. (The shite iru form gives the impression that it is more specific, whereas the suru
form sounds more general.)
The shite iru form describes general state, but it can express a variety of states, depending on thesituation that the verb describes.
First, when the verb describes ongoing process, it can describe the action that is going on.
There
are instances where the ongoing process also accompanies the realization of a situation. If theverb expresses accomplishment, the ongoing action may not always express the accomplishment of
it, as in the following examples.
(3) Ima, yoroi o kiteiru ga, mada kita to wa ienai ‘I am putting on an armor, but I haven’t quitefinished putting it on.’(4) Ima kodomo ni yoroi o kisete iru ga, mada kiseta to wa ienai ‘I am putting an armor on the child,but I haven’t quite finished putting it on him.’
Second, when verbs lexically include the meaning of change (i.e., verbs in which a situation
constructs a specific resulted state), the state of the result of the change (maintenance of the result,continuance of the result) may be described with the shite iru form.
(5) Engeki de ima kodomo ga yoroi o kite iru ‘Children now wear armor in dramas.’(6) Engeki de ima kodomo ni yoroi o kisete iru ‘We now have children wear armor in dramas.’
The shite iru form may be used to express the validity of a previously established situation,
regardless of the lexical meaning of the verb.
(7) Igo, ichido, kare wa yoroi o kite iru ‘Since then he has worn armor once.’(8) Izen, ichido, kare wa kodomo ni yoroi o kisete iru ‘Once before he had children wear armor.’
These examples show that there was an earlier precedent. (One may say they indicate past history.
The shita form may describe the immediate past in relation to the situation, and it also gives theimpression of “being there.” In contrast, past history is about events that are removed from thepresent, and it can express what has not been made clearly aware of until now.)
The shite iru form in this usage may describe connection among multiple points of time.
(9) Kare wa kyonen no kugatsu ni wa sudeni sotsugyō shite ita ‘By September of last year, he hadalready graduated.’
The expression of the state at a specific point of time (September of last year) indicates that there
was a preceding situation (graduation) prior to the specific point of time.
In order to negate the situation, the non-existence of the situation may be described as a state. The
negative expression for kita ‘came’ may be konakatta ‘didn’t come,’ but it can also be kite inai
‘hasn’t come.’ The former focuses on a specific time in the past while in the latter the
non-existence of the situation is described in relation to the present.
108

→アスペクト Aspect (2-G), 状態動詞 Stative Verbs (2-G), teoku & tearu (2-G), tsutsuaru, tekuru,
teiku—直前、変化の進展 Right Before and Progression of Change (2-G)
 References
Okuda, Yasuo (1977) ‘Asupekuto kenkyū o megutte – Kindaichi-teki dankai’ (Discussion on the
Study of Aspect: Kindaichi’s Stages) in Miyagi Kyoiku Daigaku Kokugo Kokubun, Number 8.
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1985) ‘Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto totensu’ (Aspect and Tense of Japanese Verbs) in Kokuritsu Kokugo Kenkyūjo Hōkoku, No. 82.
Shueisha Shuppan.
(Moriyama Takuro)109 Tsutsuaru, tekuru, and teiku: Immediate Past, Development of Change, Etc.
The three expressions, tsutsuaru, tekuru, and teiku, all express development of change (e.g., Haruni
natte kion ga shidaini {jōshō shitsutsu aru/jōshō shite kuru/jōshō shite iku} ‘spring has come andthe temperature is gradually going up’), however, the forms do not share the same basic meaning.
Tsutsuaru expresses the state where the subject or the object is in the process (progression) of
continuous and gradual change, as in Higai ga shidaini kakudai shitsutsu aru ‘the damage is
gradually spreading,’ Kyōkyūryō o herashitsutsu aru ‘we are in the process of decreasing theamount of supply.’ It is also used to express that an action is right before reaching the terminal
point , as in shin-kōsha ga kansei shitsutsu aru ‘the new school building is near completion,’ and isused to express the ongoing process as a state, as in wareware wa mizou no jōkyō o taiken shitsutsu
aru ‘we are experiencing an unprecedented situation.’ All examples show that the tsutsuaru form
expresses the action being in progress as a state by focusing on the minute by minute transition.
Thus, this expression is usually used for the minute by minute transition of a significant situation.
Kare wa karaoke de “Haru” o utaitsutsu aru ‘he’s now singing Haru in karaoke’ is not a usual
sentence, unless there is special significance to his singing in progress.
Kakete iru also expresses the aspect of “right before” the accomplishment, but tsutsuaru expresses
that the situation is concretely moving toward the emergence of an action. Tsutsuaru is bookish.
Tekuru and teiku (temporal usage) express the gradual development of change including the
viewpoint. Teiku is used when the viewpoint is set at the original state before change. When one
sets the viewpoint at the state after the change has occurred and sees the change from there, tekuru
is used.
Tekuru has other usages. It describes the beginning of a non-volitional phenomenon, as in Ame ga
futte kimashita ‘It has started to rain’ (occurrence of an event). (Shite iku is not used in this usage.)
It can also describe, along with tekuru and teiku, continuance from before and continuance into the
future, as in Mukashi kara koko de seikatsu o shite kimashita. Korekaramo koko de seikatsu oshite ikimasu ‘We’ve lived here since olden days. We’ll go on living here.’→アスペクトの複合動詞 Compound Aspectual Verbs (2-G)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (1983) ‘Dōshi no asupekuchuaru na sujō ni tsuite’ (On the Aspectual Origin of
Verbs) in Machikaneyama Ronso #17.
Terashima, Hideo (1984) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi II (Japanese Syntax and Meaning II).
Kurosio Publishers.
(Moriyama Takuro)110 Compound Aspectual Verbs
Productive compound verbs of aspect may be grouped into two major classes. One class expresses
only the temporal aspect, such as shikakeru, shihajimeru, shidasu, shitsuzukeru, shiowaru, and theother class expresses the accomplishment of a certain action, such as shitsukusu, shikiru, shitōsu.
Shikakeru has the least limitation on the lexical meaning of the verb, and can collocate withmovement verbs in general. It can be used to describe the pre-startup stage of the action, as innanika iikakete yameta ‘started to say something, but stopped,’ and it can also describe thepost-startup stage of the action, as in sudeni yarikakete iru ‘has already started to do.’Shihajimeru and shidasu express the startup stage of an action. Therefore, except for repetition,*koshō shihajimeru ‘*it starts to go out of order’ is ungrammatical. The collocational verb withthese expressions has to denote an ongoing process. In other words, if a verb can express thestartup stage of an action, it has ongoing process.
Shiowaru expresses the final phase of ongoing process, and is often used to focus on the terminal
phase and in a context when one action is done and before the next action begins. Semantically, it
requires a terminal point for the movement within the ongoing process. (Fundamentally,
psychological verbs do not require a terminal point.) Aishikakeru and aishihajimeru areappropriate but *aishiowaru is not.
In contrast, shitsuzukeru may be used both when there is ongoing process and when the result fromchange is maintained (i.e., where the subject maintains the resulted situation for a certain period oftime). Example: mado o aketsuzukeru ‘keep opening windows/keep the window open.’
In contrast to such compound verbs that express temporal phases, verbs such as shitsukusu, shikiru,shitōsu, shiōsu express the completion of the content of an action. Semantically, they are close to
shiowaru, which expresses the termination, but they may express the ultimate limit of degree, as intsukarekiru ‘get exhausted,’ and do not always express temporal phases. Naturally, there isconsiderable lexical limitation on their use, as in*tsukaretsukusu and *tabeōsu.
→アスペクト Aspect (2-G)
 References
Kageyama, Taro (1996) Dōshi imiron (Semantics of Verbs).

Kurosio Publishers.

Moriyama, Takuro (1983) ‘Dōshi no asupekuchuaru na sujō ni tsuite’ (On the Aspectual Origin of
Verbs) in Machikaneyama Ronso #17.
Terashima, Hideo (1984) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi II
Kurosio Publishers.

(Japanese Syntax and Meaning II).
(Moriyama Takuro)111

 Teoku and Tearu
Teoku and tearu cannot collocate with teiru, and morphologically they are grouped with teiru.
Teoku and tearu are grouped together because both connote that the action is done purposefully to
prepare for something. (This type of form is sometimes called Form of Intention.) Because theaction is purposefully done to prepare for something, the subject is usually a person, and basicallyverbs that express an intentional action collocate with them. (These forms may collocate with
non-volitional verbs, if the context includes condition or wish, as in Ichido, hashika ni kakatte oku
to men’eki ga dekiru ‘If one has had the measles once, one gains immunity from it’). Please notethat tearu has a usage where it constructs a relationship similar to the passive, and in that usage theobject becomes the subject (explained later).
Tearu expresses that there is purposefulness in the resultative phase of the action. That is, theaction has been completed for a certain purpose. It can be connected with expressions of existence(collocation with case ni), as in Tsukue no ue ni nomimono ga junbi shite atta ‘Some beverages
were put out on the desk.’ (Sarete atta may also occur in this usage.) It can also simply describe
validity of the effect of the action, as in Tappuri suimin o totte aru ‘I’ve had plenty of sleep.’(Mushibosi no tameni) hon o akete aru ‘Pages of the books have been opened (for airing)’ contrasts
with Hon ga akete aru ‘Pages of books are open’ in that the object and the subject have beenswitched over (especially when the state of the object is in focus).
Teoku does not express stativity. Semantically it indicates that there is a preparatory aspect to the
execution of the action, as in Ima no uchi ni ashita no junbi o shiteokō ‘I’ll get ready for tomorrow
now.’ That is, performing the action now will contribute to obtaining a desirable situation or
avoiding an undesirable situation later.
To clarify that a desirable situation is expected later, expressions such as kangaete okimasu ‘I willconsider it’, are often added to the context to indicate that the action will not be performed right atthat instant. Teoku is also used to describe an action to preserve the resulted state of the object, asin Okashi o todana ni shibaraku {?shimau/shimatte oku} ‘I will keep the sweets in the cupboard forthe time being.’→アスペクト Aspect (2-G), アスペクトの複合動詞 Compound Aspectual Verbs (2-G)
 References
Kindaichi, Haruhiko, ed. (1976) Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto (Aspect of Japanese Verbs).
Mugi Shobo.
Masuoka, Takashi (1987) Meidai no bunpō (Grammar of Proposition).
Moriyama, Takuro (1987) Nihongo dōshi jutsugobun no kenkyūPredicate Sentences). Meiji Shoin.

Kurosio Publishers.

(Study of Japanese Verbal(Moriyama Takuro)112

 Aspectual Forms of the Formal Noun System
Sometimes a formal noun collocates at the end of a verbal predicate to define an aspectual situation,
as in Kare wa ryōri o shite iru saichū da ‘He’s in the middle of cooking’ and Kare wa hon oyomihajimeta bakari da ‘He’s just started to read a book.’
Tokoro da and saichū da collocate with the teiru form, as in Kare wa sara o aratte iru tokoro da‘He’s in the middle of washing dishes,’ to pick out an instant from the ongoing process. They canalso specify the maintenance and continuance of a result, as in Danbō de mado o shimetei ru saichūda ‘We are keeping the windows shut because the heater is on.’ They are good for delineating thetype of state within a specific context.
Tokoro da differs from saichū da in that it can be combined with the teita form, as in Sō omotte ita
tokoro da ‘I was just thinking the same thing.’ (Teita tokoro da is used to describe the situation
objectively.)
When bakari da collocates with the ta form of a movement (non-stative) verb, as in Tatta ima,
shokuji no junbi o shita bakari da ‘I have just fixed a meal,’ it expresses the current state of theaction having just taken place. Usually there already exists a context in which the point in time isthe focus when, as in the example above, the time “immediately after” is picked out. Bakari da also
approximates the situation right before the action, as in Kaiten suru bakari ni natteiru ‘We are readyto open the store any time’ and also expresses what is to happen will be limited to the said situation,
as in kimochi ga aseru bakari de nanimo susunde inai ‘I feel rushed, but I have made no progress.’
Tokoro da also collocates with a movement predicate. When it collocates with the ta form, it
expresses the state that is immediately after, as in Kare wa nihon ni tsuita tokoro da ‘he just arrived
in Japan.’ Bakari da and tokoro da are used in a similar manner, but bakari da is used when timehasn’t lapsed very long after a situation occurs, as in Kare wa kyonen rainichi shita (bakari
desu/?tokoro desu) ‘He came to Japan just last year’, while tokoro da is generally used to express
the state immediately after a situation occurs.
Tokoro da may express the supposition of an unreal situation under a hypothetical condition, as in
Mō sukoshide shinu tokoro da ‘he almost died,’ Kare ga okuretara oite iku tokoro datta ‘Had hebeen late, we would have left without him,’ and may also express a specific situation of the subject,as in Hannin ga nigeru tokoro o tsukamaeta ‘we caught the culprit as he tried to escape.’
Ta koto ga aru, which expresses past experience from some time ago, and ta mono da, which
expresses past habitual actions, are also aspectual forms of the formal noun system.
→アスペクト Aspect (2-G), 最中・ウチニ・アイダ Saichū, Uchini, Aida (2-J), コト・ノ・ト
コロ－名詞節 Koto, No, Tokoro –Noun Clauses (2-J)
 References
Moriyama Takuro (1984) ‘-Bakarida/-tokoroda’ in Nihongogaku, 3-10.
Kobayashi Sachie & Aizaki Masaya, Yoshikawa Taketoki, ed., (2003)
wakaru (The Ultimate Book on Formal Nouns). Hituzi Syobo.

Keishiki meishi ga korede(Moriyama Takuro)113

 Verbs and Aspect
Verbs are divided into those which do not express movement (stative verbs in the broad sense), andthose which do (movement verbs). There are some verbs that do both.
How movement verbs
express aspect depends on the characteristics of the verb. There are several classes of movement
verbs.
Kindaichi (1950) pioneered in classification of Japanese verbs, where he looked at the shite iru
form. He categorized motion verbs into stative verbs (e.g., aru. Teiru is not affixed), punctual
verbs (e.g, shinu ‘die.’ The teiru form expresses the result), durational verbs (e.g., aruku ‘walk.’
The teiru form expresses that the action is ongoing), and Class 4 verbs (e.g., sugureru ‘excel.’ They
always occur in the teiru form). Okuda (1977) proposed that aspect should be understood bycontrasting suru and shite iru, and that one must see if the verb is about movement or if it is aboutchange, but that the length of time does not matter. He classified verbs into verbs of movement(e.g. kowasu ‘destroy’) and verbs of change (e.g., kowareru ‘fall apart’). The shite iru form of verbs
of movement expresses progression, while the shite iru form of verbs where the subject undergoeschange expresses the result. (Semantically reflexive verbs where the agent’s action also results inthe change in the agent, as in kami o kiru in the meaning of ‘get a haircut,’ have bothcharacteristics.)
Kudo (1995) advanced this proposition and classified verbs into internal-emotional verbs, stative
verbs, and external-motion verbs. She further classified external-motion verbs into
agent-movement and patient-change verbs (whose suru-form handles the reaching of the final limitof accomplishment as one entity), agent-change verbs (whose suru-form handles the termination
limit as an accomplishment of the expected change), and agent-movement verbs (whose suru-form
may handle the reaching of the starting limit or it may handle it as one entity.
As Moriyama (1988) points out, simple verb classification alone does not lead us to comprehensive
understanding of aspect. First, aspect is not determined by the lexical meaning of the verb alone.
The “nature of the situation” as a whole, which the verb expresses together with other nouns andadverbs, is involved in the aspectual phenomenon. For instance, hanauta o utau ‘hum’ and “Haru”
o utau ‘sing Haru’ differ from each other in that one does not have an ending point while the otherhas an anticipated ending point.
In these examples, one must see at which point shita shunkan‘the very moment one performed the action’ occurs, and if shite iru ga …shita kotoniwa natteinai‘is doing but is not yet done’ applies.
In addition to movement vs. change, the time structure (e.g.,continuousness, that is, the duration of the development and maintenance of the movement) is an
important factor. Consider Tarō wa {hanjikan kakatte/hanjikan}mado o akeru ‘it takes Taro half
an hour to open the window vs. Taro opens the windows for half an hour.’ There is a qualitative
difference in the duration between the first and second sentences. This difference corresponds tothe double meaning (ongoing action vs. maintenance of the result) of the sentence mado oaketsuzukeru ‘one keeps opening windows vs. one keeps the window(s) open.’
Given such observations, Moriyama (1988) typified the aspectual characteristics of active situations
into combinations of various features, such as continuousness (development and maintenance of the
movement), reversibility of the result, existence/non-existence of a terminal point, and developmentof change (analysis of temporal phases).

114

→アスペクト Aspect (2-G), 状態動詞 Stative Verbs (2-G)
 References
Okuda, Yasuo (1977) ‘Asupekuto kenkyū o megutte – Kindaichi-teki dankai’ (Discussion on the
Study of Aspect: Kindaichi’s Stages) in Miyagi Kyoiku Daigaku Kokugo Kokubun, Number 8.
Kindaichi, Haruhiko (1950) ‘Kokugo dōshi no ichi bunrui’ (One Classification of Japanese Verbs)
in Gengo Kenkyū, #15.
________________ ed. (1976)
Shobo.

Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto(Aspect of Japanese Verbs).

Mugi

National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1985) ‘Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto totensu’ (Aspect and Tense of Japanese Verbs) in Kokuritsu Kokugo Kenkyūjo Hokoku No. 82.
Shueisha Shuppan.
Moriyama, Takuro (1987) Nihongo dōshi jutsugobun no kenkyū (Study of Japanese Verbal Predicate
Sentences). Meiji Shoin.
Vendler, Z. (1967) Linguistics in philosophy.

Cornell University Press.
(Moriyama Takuro)115 Adverbs and Aspect
Adverbs that are involved with aspect have two types. One type modifies the aspect of movement,
and the other modifies state, such as adverbs of duration. Basically, the former does not collocatewith stative verbs, and can be called aspectual adverbs in the narrow sense. They can be generallyclassified into manner-of-occurrence adverbs, which modify the temporal aspect of the occurrenceof a situation; manner-of-progression adverbs, which modify the progressive aspect of the situation;manner-of-result and termination adverbs, which modify the result and the terminal aspect of asituation; determination-of-quantity adverbs, which defines the quantity of the situation. Adverbsof tense, which describe what happened previously, also take part in semantic interpretation.
Manner-of-occurrence adverbs, such as suguni ‘right away,’ totsuzen ‘suddenly,’ yōyaku ‘finally,’
yagate ‘eventually,’ define the starting point of a situation, describe circumstances of theoccurrence of the situation, and existence of the change since the occurrence of the situation. Manyof these adverbs collocate with the suru form of verbs. Even when they occur with the verb formshite iru, they do not signify progression (i.e., they refer to the past history that the occurrence took
place).
Manner-of-progression adverbs, such as yukkuri ‘slowly,’ hitotsu zutsu ‘one at a time,’ dondon‘steadily,’ shidaini ‘gradually,’ express the manner in which the situation progresses. (Dondon andshidaini, in particular, express the progression of the degree of change). The adverbs of repetition
that describe multiple occurrences of repeated situations are at a different level in that they describe
a collection of situations. However, they are included here because they modify the progressive
aspect. They all express the manner of progression, so the shite iru form here is interpreted todescribe progression. The shite iru form of subject-change verbs expresses result, as in mado ga
aite iru ‘the window is open’ (result). However, when a manner-of-progression adverb collocateswith it, it is dominantly interpreted to express progression, as in mado ga yukkuri aite iru ‘thewindow is opening slowly’ (in progress). Similarly, when tsugitsugito ‘one after another’collocates with geinin ga shindeiru ‘entertainers are dying,’ the sentence can describe progressionof multiple occurrences of a situation as a repetition, rather than result.
Manner-of-result and termination adverbs, such as konagonani ‘into smithereens,’ gararito‘drastically,’ describe the resulting change of a situation.
The shite iru form of verbs, which
describes the subject’s movement and change in the object, is interpreted mostly as describing
progression. When an adverb that expresses the resulted manner collocates with it, the resultative
aspect becomes dominant, as in Madogarasu o watteiru ‘They are breaking the window panes.
(progressive)→Madogarasu o konagona ni watteiru ‘They have broken the window panes intosmithereens (result).’ In the same vein, when adverbs that define the total amount of thephenomenon modify the terminal aspect of the phenomenon, they no longer single out the aspect ofongoing process for the predicate; they modify the terminal aspect instead, as in shi o kaite iru‘am writing a poem’ (progressive) →shi o kyūhon kaite iru ‘have written 9 poems so far’ (pasthistory).
Adverbs that are also involved with tense include izen ‘previously,’ sudeni ‘already,’ and kinō‘yesterday’ (the latter two are associated with the point of speech). They only construct past

116

history even when they collocate with the shiteiru form, as in Sudeni kare wa hon o kaite iru ‘He’s
already written books.’
When these adverbs collocate with the shite iru form, the interpretation of the meaning of theshiteiru form depends on the higher level adverb, as in Kare wa gyūdon o tabete iru ‘he’s eating abeef bowl,’ Kare wa gyūdon o yonhai mo tabete iru ‘he’s eaten as many as four beef bowls,’ Karewa mainichi gyūdon o yonhai mo tabete iru ‘Everyday he eats as many as four beef bowls,’ Kare wa
gakusei jidai mainichi gyūdon o yonhai mo tabete iru ‘In his student days he ate as many as four
beef bowls every day.’→アスペクト Aspect (2-G), 様態副詞 Adverbs of Manner (2-B)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (1984) ‘Asupekuto no kimarikata ni tsuite’ (On How the Meaning of Aspect is
Determined) in Nihongogaku, 3-12.
Nitta, Yoshio (2002)
Kurosio Publishers.

Fukushiteki hyōgen no shosō (Various Aspects of Adverbial Expressions).
(Moriyama Takuro)117

 Ta FormJapanese predicates possess contrast of tense between non-past (present and future) vs. past.
past form is called the ta form.

The(1) neru ‘sleep’ (future) – neta (past)aru ‘exist’ (present) – atta (past)
nete iru ‘is sleeping’ (present) – nete ita (past)
Some consider the contrast between the verbal forms suru and shita as aspectual contrast of
non-perfective vs. perfective (has not happened vs. has happened).
The ta form of stative predicates (stative verbs, adjectives, noun predicates) fundamentally
expresses past state.
(1) Mukashi koko ni ōkina biru ga atta ‘Once there was a big building here.’ (General statement)(2) (In response to a question, Tarō minakatta? ‘Didn’t you see Taro?’) Tarō wa kyōshitsu ni ita yo‘Taro was in the classroom.’ (Individual situation)
The ta form (shita form) of non-stative verbs (motion verbs, verbs of change) has the following
usages.
(a) Shita expresses past movement and change. The negative form is shinakatta.
(3) Wakaikoro wa yoku tetsuya shita ‘I used to stay up all night when I was young’ (Amari tetsuya
shinakatta ‘I didn’t stay up all night that much’). (General statement)(4) Kinō tetsuya shita ‘I stayed up all night yesterday’ (Kinō wa tetsuya shinakatta ‘I didn’t stay up
all night yesterday’). (Individual situation)(b) Mō …shita expresses that the movement or change has already taken place.
is mada …shiteinai.

The negative form

(5) A: Oyu, (mō) waita? ‘Has the water boiled (yet)?’
B: Un, (mō) waita yo.‘Yeah, it’s (already) boiled.” (Iya, mada waitenai‘No, it hasn’t boiled

yet.’)(c) Shita expresses the realization of a movement or change.
(6) Pitchaa, dai ikkyū, nagemashita. ‘The pitcher threw his first ball.’(7) Ore mo toshi o totta naa. ‘I’ve indeed aged.’
Some view usages (b) and (c) as a type of past (the past connected with the present), and others
view them as the present perfect.
The ta form also expresses the speaker’s psychological attitude, such as discovering, recalling,
looking back, counterfactual, and urging (the ta form of mood).
118

(8) A, atta. ‘Oh, here it is.’ (Discovery)(9) Sō ieba, asu wa yasumi datta ‘Speaking of which, tomorrow is a day off.’Kyō wa nanno hi dakke? ‘What holiday is it today, do you know?’ (Recalling)(10) Kono hon wa kinō kara koko ni atta ‘This book has been here since yesterday. (Looking back)(11) Sassato shigoto o sumasete ireba, imagoro wa asonde irareta noni ‘Had you finished yourwork promptly, you would be having a good time by now. (Counterfactual)(12) Sassato kaetta, kaetta ‘Shoo. Hurry home.’ (Urging)
There are many theories among researchers as to how to explain why there are so many usages of
the ta form. Currently there is no one definitive theory.
→テンス Tense (2-G), アスペクト Aspect (2-G), 動詞 Verbs (2-B)
 References
Inoue, Masaru (2001) ‘Gendai nihongo no ta’ (Ta in Contemporary Japanese) in Tsukuba Gengo
Bunka Forum ed., Ta no gengogaku (Linguistic Study of Ta). Hituzi Syobo.
Kinsui, Satoshi, et al. (2000) Nihongo no bunpō 2: toki, hitei to toritate (Japanese Grammar 2:
Time/Negation and Focus). Iwanami Shoten.
Kudo, Mayumi (1995) Asupekuto, tensu taikei to tekusuto (System of Aspect & Tense and Text).
Hituzi Syobo.
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1996) Keitairon, josetsu (Morphology: Introduction).
Terashima, Hideo (1984) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi II
Kurosio Publishers.

Mugi Shobo.

(Japanese Syntax and Meaning II).
(Inoue Masaru)

119 Ru FormJapanese predicates possess contrast of tense between non-past (present and future) vs. past. The
non-past form is called the ru form. The name comes from the fact that many non-past forms(same as the basic form) of verbs and verbal suffixes end with ru, as in kiru,-(ra)reru, (te)iru. The
ru form at times is limited to the suru form unaccompanied by the continuous aspect, teiru.
The ru form of stative predicates expresses the current state, the state up to the present, or the futurestate.
(1) Ima Pekin ni iru ‘I am currently in Beijing.’ (Current state)(2) Sakunen kara Pekin ni iru ‘I’ve been in Beijing since last year.’ (State up to the present)(3) Asu no imagoro wa Pekin ni iru ‘I will be in Beijing by this time tomorrow.’ (Future state)
The ru form (suru form) of non-stative verbs (action verbs, verbs of change) fundamentally
expresses future movement and change. It may express a situation that is realized in a place otherthan the place of speech (4), and it may also express a situation that is realized in the place ofspeech (5).
(4) Asu Tarō ga kuru/Asu wa kitto hareru ‘Taro is coming tomorrow/It will definitely be sunny
tomorrow.’(5) Sentō gurūpu ga mamonaku orikaeshi chiten o tsūka shimasu. Ima, tsūka shimashita ‘The
leading group will pass the halfway point shortly. It just passed the point.’
When the subject is in first person, the speaker may add a tone of confirmation of her/his intention.
(6) Kimi ga iku nara, boku mo iku yo ‘If you go, I’ll go, too.’
The ru form is used to describe the current situation in the following instances.
(a)The speaker’s thought and feeling at the time of speech.
(7) Boku mo sonohō ga yoi to omou ‘I, too, think that’d be better.’(8) Kyō wa kinō yori atatakaku kanjiru ‘It feels warmer today than yesterday.’(9) Nanika hen na oto ga kikoeru (hen na oto ga suru) ‘I hear some strange noises.’(b) The speaker her/himself’s speech act (Performative sentence).
(10) Supootsumanshippu ni nottori, seiseidōdō to tatakau koto o chikaimasu ‘I vow to compete
fairly by the spirit of sportsmanship.’(11) Pekin shiten e no tenkin o meizuru ‘I order you to transfer to the Beijing Branch.’(c) Simultaneous description of a phenomenon that is happening right in front of the speaker.
(12) (Stretching the freshly pounded rice) O, nobiru, nobiru ‘Wow it stretches.’120

(13) A, hikōki ga tonde iku ‘Oh, an airplane is flying away.’
The ru form is also used to describe current habits and events that generally take place without any
time limit (permanent attributes, laws, steps and procedure).
(14) Tarō wa maiasa 6ji ni okite sanpo suru ‘Taro gets up at six and takes a walk every morning.’(Habit)(15) Kare wa Eigo o jōzu ni hanashimasu ‘He speaks English proficiently.’ (Attribute)(16) Mizu wa 100do de futtōsuru ‘Water boils at 100 degrees.’ (Law)(17) Mazu tamanegi o mijingiri ni suru. Tsugini sono tamanegi o yowabi de yukkuri itameru ‘First,
mince the onion. Next, sauté the onion slowly on low heat.’ (Steps)
The suru form may be used to describe the feeling of wonderment and doubt about an existing
situation.
(18) (Watching the rain continuously falling) Yoku furu naa ‘It sure rains a lot.’(19) (Seeing that someone has shown up unexpectedly) E, nande ano hito ga kuru no?
Why is that person here?’‘What?

→テンス Tense (2-G), アスペクト Aspect (2-G), 動詞 Verbs (2-B)
 References
Onoe Keisuke (2001) Bunpō to imi I (Grammar and Meaning I). Kurosio Publishers.
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1983) ‘Nihongo dōshi no asupekuto totensu’ (Aspect and Tense of Japanese Verbs) in Kokuritsu Kokugo Kenkyūjo Hokoku, No. 82.
Shueisha Shuppan.
(Inoue Masaru)

121Grammar H: Modality
 Modality
A Japanese sentence consists of two parts, each of which has different semantic characteristics.
(1) Kitto kare wa isogashii n darō ne “No doubt, he is busy, don’t you think?
In (1), what constitutes the core of the meaning (“he being busy”) is expressed inside the sentence.
In contrast, the elements that appear outside the sentence, such as kitto at the beginning of thesentence and darō and ne at the end of the sentence, do not add anything to the content of thesentence. They express the subjective attitude of the speaker, such as her/his perception and way ofcommunication.
The part of a sentence that expresses the content of the matter is called proposition, and the part that
expresses the speaker’s attitude is called modality. In a Japanese sentence the proposition appears
inside the sentence, and modality wraps it around, as shown in (2).
(2)
proposition

modality

The proposition carries the objective meaning content of the sentence. The predicate is placed at
the center of the objective meaning, and various components are added to it to express a more
complex situation. Components at the proposition level include voice, which concerns theexpression of movements, aspect, which expresses movement process, and tense, which expresses
the temporal placement of events.
Typically, modality is defined as that which expresses the psychological attitude of the speaker at
the time of utterance. Sub-classes of modality include modality of evaluation, such as evaluationof the situation (e.g., chikoku shitemoii ‘it’s OK to be late’), modality of recognition, such as
expressing true/false judgment (e.g., tsukarete iru yōda ‘he looks tired’), modality of explanation,
which expresses the relationship to another sentence (e.g., Kasa o wasuremashita. Isoide ita ndesu. ‘I forgot my umbrella. I was in a hurry.’), and modality of communication which
expresses the way the speaker relates information to the listener (e.g., Kanojo nara asoko ni iru yo‘She’s over there, you see?’). Sentential types (expression patterns), such as declarative,
interrogative, imperative, and elements related to the attitudes of utterance, such as politeness, aresometimes considered modality.
Sometimes a modal form may lack part of its semantic requirement. For example, darō andkamoshirenai both express the speaker’s cognitive judgment. However, darō is a pure form ofmodality that expresses judgment at the time of speech, while kamoshirenai can specify the tense,
as in Kare wa korarenai kamoshirenakatta ‘He might not have been able to come,’ and thus, does
not meet the requirement of “at the time of the utterance.” This is a reflection of the fact thatmodality, which originally is a semantic concept, is highly grammaticized in Japanese.
→モダリティの副詞 Modal adverbs (2-H), モダリティと文体 Modality and Style (2-M)
122

 References
Nitta, Yoshio (1991)
Syobo.

Nihongo no Modaritii to Ninshō “Japanese Modality and Person.”Hituzi

Masuoka, Takashi (1991) Modaritii no Bunpō “Grammar of Modality.” Kurosio Publishers.
(Adachi Taro)123 Types of Interrogative Sentences
An interrogative sentence has the function of trying to get an answer from the listener, with thepremise that the speaker is unable to make judgment on the proposition in question. Interrogative
sentences can be classified from various points of view.
The most basic approach to the classification of interrogative sentences is to sort out the reasons
why the judgment is not attainable. Two main types are true-false questions and suppletive
questions (interrogative-word questions).
True-false questions are asked because whether the proposition is true or false is not known.
Examples: Asu, gakkō ni ikimasu ka? ‘Are you going to school tomorrow?’; Anata wa gakusei?
‘Are you a student?’ One can answer a true-false question with a yes/no answer.
The speaker asks a suppletive question because there is an unknown component in the proposition,and that the speaker is unable to make judgment. The speaker places an interrogative word in theplace of this unknown component, asking the listener to replace the interrogative word with theinformation on the unknown component.
Examples: Kyō wa nani o taberu? ‘What are we goingto eat today?’; Itsu ano hito ni atta no? ‘When did you see him?” “Eating something” and “having
met him” are presupposed, and the interrogative word expresses the focus of the question. To
answer a suppletive question one provides the information on what the unknown component is.
In addition to these two main types, there are alternative questions, which are placed in between thetwo main types as far as the characteristics are concerned. Examples are Chūka ni suru? Soretomo
washoku ni suru? ‘Shall we have Chinese food or Japanese food? and Jimusho wa ikkai desu ka,
nikai desu ka? ‘Is the office on the first floor or on the second floor?’ They are close to true-false
questions in that there is no interrogative word used, but they are also close to suppletive questionsin that one cannot answer choice questions with an yes/no answer.
There remains a question
whether this type constitutes one sentence, or whether it is a sequence of multiple sentences.
The second method of classification is to see whether the predicate at the end of a true-false
question is in the negative or affirmative. By this classification there are affirmative questions andnegative questions. A true-false question is designed to ask the listener whether the proposition istrue or false, and there is no logical difference between an affirmative and negative questions on thispoint. However, negative questions have their own characteristics.
In a sentence, Dare ka inai kanaa ‘Isn’t there anyone?’ the questioner strongly hopes that there issomeone. Konna koto itte okorarenai kanaa ‘I wonder if I would be reprimanded if I said such athing’ expresses the speaker’s strong uneasiness. One characteristic of negative questions is thatthe speaker’s emotion, such as desire and uneasiness, is strongly expressed.
Another characteristic of negative questions is that the questioner has some degree of prediction.
Ame, futteru? ‘Is it raining?’ is an affirmative question which is used when the speaker has no idea
whether it is raining or not. On the other hand, Ame futtenai? ‘Isn’t it raining?’ is a negative
question that the questioner asks when s/he predicts there is a strong possibility that it is raining,although s/he does not know whether it is actually raining. Negative questions anticipate theestablishment of judgment that is contrary to the sentence form. The form, nodewanaika, has asimilar function.
124

Third, ordinary questions are differentiated from the noka questions by the existence or
non-existence of no(da) at the end of the sentence. Noka questions do not simply ask whether the
proposition is true or false, or to fill in the (unknown) component; they demand explanation of thesituation in relation to the situation in which the question is asked, as in Kimi, tabako suu no? ‘Do
you smoke?’ and Oya, doko e itte kita no? ‘Oh? Where have you been?’ One may say, A, kimi mo
iku no? ‘Ah, are you going, too?’ in response to Watashi ga ikimasu ‘I’ll go,’ where one parrots theimmediately preceding utterance for verification. Suppletive questions often take the form of thenoka question. It is almost a requirement to use the noka question when one wants to ask for thereason, as in Naze kinō yasunda no? ‘Why were you absent yesterday?’ The noka question is
also used when the focus of the question is other than in the predicate, as in Tsukareta kara yasundano? ‘Were you absent because you were tired?’→モダリティ Modality (2-H), 疑問形式の用法 Usages of Interrogative Forms (2-H), ノダ－
説明のモダリティ Noda: Modality of Explanation (2-H)
 References
Nitta, Yoshio (1991)
Syobo.

Nihongo no modaritii to ninshō (Japanese Modality and Person).

Noda, Harumi (1997)

No(da) no kinō (Functions of No(da)).

HituziKurosio Publishers.
(Adachi Taro)

125 Usage of Interrogative Forms
The interrogative particle ka is combined with other forms to derive forms with various functions.
Such interrogative forms include darōka, dewa naika, and no dewa naika.
The speculation form darō and affix ka make up darōka. Darōka simply expresses that the
speaker is unable to make judgment, but that the speaker is not posing a question to the listener.
Darōka, as in Kare, ma ni au darōka to tsubuyaita ‘I murmured if he’d make it,’ is a monologicalexpression. Ka is often dropped in suppletive questions, such as Ima, nanji darō ‘I wonder whattime it is.’ Kana, as in Ima nanji kana ‘I wonder what time it is,’ has a similar function. These
sentences are called sentences of doubt.
Sentences of doubt only go so far as to express the internal doubt. Sometimes several possibilities
are expressed, as in Are darōka, kore darōka ‘I wonder if it’s that one or this one,’ or convincing
imagination is expressed, as in Kare, mō mokutekichi ni tsuita kana ‘I wonder if he’s arrived at thedestination.’
Sentences of doubt may be used in dialogue for the very reason that they do not pose a question to
the listener. In contrast to general questions, which are asked on the premise that the listener has
some kind of an answer, sentences of doubt (e.g., Ima nanji kana ‘I wonder what time it is’) areused in a situation where it is not known if the listener has an answer. They can also function aspolite questions, as in Anata wa Tanaka san deshōka? ‘I am wondering if you are Ms. Tanaka.’
Kana has the function of a question that the speaker gently poses to her or his subordinate, as in
Toshi wa ikutsu kana? ‘I am wondering how old you are.’ A sentence of doubt may be used toanswer a question when the precise answer is not known (e.g., Kono hashi, nan meetoru gurai aru
no? ‘Roughly how many meters long is this bridge?’ Saa, 30 meetoru gurai kana ‘Oh, I don’tknow, approximately 30 meters, perhaps?’)
Dewa naika, and no dewa naika are expressions formed from the joining of a negative form and theinterrogative particle.
Dewa naika confirms that the speaker and listener have the same understanding when the listener is
not aware of it. Soko ni aru janai ‘It’s right there’ directs the listener’s attention to what is in frontof her/him, and Hora, ichido atta koto aru ja arimasenka ‘Don’t you remember? We’ve met once
before,’ coaxes the listener to remember what s/he has forgotten. It can also confirm generally
understood knowledge, as in Kōhii o nomu to nemurenaku naru ja nai desuka ‘As you know, you
cannot sleep when you drink coffee.’ When one finds what s/he has lost, one may say monologically,
Nanda, koko ni aru janai ‘Hey, here it is,’ to express that the problem is solved.
No dewa naika is a form developed from the negative question of the type which one asks when one
anticipates that some kind of judgment will be presented. Basically, the speaker poses a question
based on her/his uncertain prediction or memory in anticipation for some kind of judgment.
Examples: Ame, futteru n janai? ‘Isn’t it raining? ; Moshikashite, watashitachi dokokade atta kotoaru n janai? ‘Haven’t we maybe met before somewhere?’
No dewa naika does not focus on getting an answer from the listener.
Rather it is often used tocommunicate the speaker’s prediction to the listener. In this function, it is used in response
sentences (e.g., Question: Kare, doko? ‘Where’s he?, Answer: Soko ni iru n janai? ‘Isn’t he126there?’). It may be used with an adverb of modality, as in Kitto kuru n janai? ‘Surely, he’ll come,won’t he?’ In text, it is frequently used to express one’s opinion without assertion, as in Kono
mondai wa tsugino yōni kaiketsu dekiru nodewanaika ‘We might be able to solve this problem inthe following manner.’ One’s opinion is further softened if one affixes a verb of thinking or
darōka at the end of the sentence, as in No de wa naika to omowareru ‘It is my speculation that…’
and No dewa nai darō ka’ My guess is that….’→疑問文の種類 Types of Interrogative Sentences (2-H), 確認表現 Expressions of Confirmation(2-H)
 References
Adachi, Taro (1999) Nihongo gimonbun ni okeru handan no shosō (Aspects of Judgment inJapanese Interrogative Sentences). Kurosio Publishers.
Miyake, Tomohiro (1993) ‘Haseeteki imi nit suite – nihongo shitsumon no ichi sokumen’ (OnDerivational Meaning – One Aspect of Japanese Questions) in Nihongo Kyoiku, Vol. 79.
(Adachi Taro)

127

 Expressions of Confirmation
When the speaker is not certain of something, s/he uses an expression of confirmation to ask thelistener to confirm or affirm. In Japanese this modality is expressed with affixes at the end of thesentence, such as darō, janaika, and ne. (Darō discussed here includes the polite form, deshō, andjanaika includes variations such as janai and janai desuka.)
Expressions of confirmation are divided into two main types. These two types correspond to thetwo different levels of the speaker’s sense of uncertainty about the object to be confirmed.
One type has the object to be confirmed as the semantic content (called proposition). This typeasks to confirm that the semantic content of the sentence is correct (true). This is called
confirmation of the proposition. Here are a couple of examples of this type using darō.
(1) “Kasa mottenai darō?” ‘You don’t have an umbrella, do you?’ “Aa” ‘No.’(2) Anata Kansai no hito dakara, sōiu ajitsuke suki deshō? ‘You are from the Kansai region, so you
like that type of flavor, don’t you?’
The other type has the listener’s knowledge as the object of confirmation. It asks the listener toconfirm that the listener has the knowledge of the semantic content of the sentence.
What thespeaker does not know is whether the listener in fact knows the semantic content of the sentence.
The speaker has already confirmed the semantic content of the sentence. This is different from thefirst type. This is called confirmation of the knowledge. Here are a couple of examples of thistype.
(3) Hora, watashi, konomae hikkoshi o shita bakari deshō ‘As you know, I’ve just moved lately.’(4) Sonna nonki na koto o itte iru baai janai darō ‘It’s not the time to be so easy-going, is it?’
By confirming the listener’s knowledge, the speaker activates the knowledge s/he assumes that s/heand the listener potentially share, as in (3), or the speaker demands that s/he and the listener havethe same understanding as the speaker, as in (4).
Janaika also expresses both confirmation of the proposition and that of the knowledge, although
there may be some morphological differences between the two functions, such as in the way
connection occurs.
(5) (Hyottoshite) kare wa konokoto o shiranakatta n janaika ‘(Just maybe) he didn’t know about
this, I wonder?’ [Confirmation of the proposition](6) (Hora miro, yappari) kare wa konokoto o shiranakatta janaika ‘(Didn’t I tell you?)know about this after all.’ [Confirmation of the knowledge]

He didn’t

Ne has the usage of confirmation of the proposition, but not confirmation of the knowledge.
However, it can express confirmation of the knowledge when it is made into the yo ne form, as in(8).
(7) Kore de ii desu ne ‘This is OK, I hope?’

128

(8) Kimi ni chanto itte oita yo ne ‘I made sure to tell you, didn’t I?’
Janaika and ne have a usage that can be included in expressions of confirmation in the broad senseof the word. In this usage, the confirmation does not work to change uncertainty into certainty, but it
asks the listener for some kind of agreement.
(9) Genkisō janaika/ne ‘You look good/don’t look good.’(10) Ii tenki da ne ‘Nice weather.’→疑問形式の用法 Usages of Interrogative Forms (2-H), 終助詞の用法 Usages of Sentence Final
Particles (2-H), 助詞 Particles (2-B)
 References
Tanomura, Tadaharu (1988) ‘Hitei Gimonbun Shōkō’ (Essay on Negative Questions) in
Kokugogaku, Vol. 164.
Miyake, Tomohiro (1996) ‘Nihongo no kakunin yōkyūteki hyōgen no shosō’ (Various Aspects ofExpressions Demanding Confirmation in Japanese) in Nihongo Kyōiku, Vol. 89.
(Miyake Tomohiro)

129 Volitional Expressions
A volitional expression is used to describe the speaker’s intention to perform an action which the
speaker hasn’t yet realized at that point, as in mō kaerō ‘let’s go home/I am going home,’ and it
involves the volitionality of the verb. In its basic use, a volitional verb expresses the decision to
execute an act. With a verb whose volitionality is weak, as in Mō wasureyō ‘Let’s forget about it/I
am going to forget about it,’ it expresses an intention to make an effort toward the realization of theact. Verbs with no volitionality do not form volitional expressions (e.g., *Eigo ga hanaseyō’).
Shiyō and suru are important volitional expressions. Mai expresses negative volitional meaning,as in nido to aumai ‘I intend never to see him again.’ Tsumori da, which is derived from a
volitional formal noun, is also one of the volitional expressions.
The volitional form, shiyō, basically expresses the speaker’s decision to execute an action. This isused monologically, as in Tsukareta naa. Mō kaerō. ‘I’m tired. I’ll go home,’ and in internal
speech act, as in Kyō wa ichinichi hon o yonde sugosō to omotta ‘I thought I’d spend all day reading
today.’ *Yōji ga aru node, shitsurei shimashō is ungrammatical in that the speaker cannot tellher/his decision to act on her/his will in a dialog with another person. Shiyō ka is a volitional form
turned into a question form, and expresses the speaker’s indecision, as in Kaerō ka. Soretomo
nokorō ka ‘Should I go home, or should I stay?’
The speaker does not intend to tell the listener of the speaker’s intention with the shiyō form, but the
speaker may use the form in dialog when the act affects the listener. Nimotsu, o-mochi shimashō I’ll
carry your bag,’ is appropriate, where the speaker offers to do an act that benefits the listener.
When the speaker wants to confirm whether the listener accepts the offer or not, shiyō ka is used, asin Nimotsu, o-mochi shimashō ka? ‘May I carry your bag?’
Suru is used when the speaker wants to notify the listener of the speaker’s intention to perform an
act. Watashi, mō kaeru ‘I’ll go home now’ is appropriate in a dialog, but is not natural in amonolog. *Watashi wa mō kaeru to omou does not work.
When the speaker who has theauthority to make the decision uses suru, as in kono an o saitaku suru ‘we will pass this resolution,’use of the suru form adds the nuance that the decision is final.
Suru is not generally used in monologs, but the speaker may use it in monologs to affirm
her/himself in her/his determination, as in Kondo attara hakkiri sasete yaru ‘I’ll settle it once andfor all next time we meet’ and Kondo koso katsu zo ‘I’ll definitely win next time.’
Tsumori da, which is derived from a formal noun of intention, expresses the plan that the speakerhas already made prior to the utterance. Watashi wa rainen ryūgaku suru tsumori da ‘I am
intending to study abroad next year’ notifies the listener of the speaker’s plan, but the speakercannot use this form to say s/he made up her mind to carry out the act at the time of speech.
→Modality (2-H), Invitation (2-H)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (1990)
Nihongo Kenkyū 2.

“Ishi no modaritii ni tsuite’ (On the Modality of Volition) in Handai

Nitta, Yoshio (1991) Nihongo modaritii to ninshō (Japanese Modarity and Person.) Hituzi Syobo.
130

(Adachi Taro)131 Invitation
Expressions of invitation are used when the speaker wants to involve the listener in what the
speaker is planning on doing or what the speaker is currently doing. Invitation involves thevolitionality of the verb, as with volitional expressions and expressions of action-requesting.
There are conjugative forms that express volition and action-requesting, such as the volitional formand command form, but there is no particular conjugative form of invitation.
Invitation isconsidered a function derived from questions using shinai ka, as well as the volitional expression
shiyō, or its interrogative form shiyōka.
Shinai ka is a form used to indirectly invite the listener to participate by asking the listener whether
the listener will perform the act or not. It functions as an invitation when the speaker’s action inquestion has already been mentioned. In Kore kara dekakeru n da kedo, kimi mo issho ni ikanai?
‘I am going out; won’t you come along?,’ the speaker is inviting the listener to participate in theaction that the speaker is planning on performing. Koko aiteru yo. Suwaranai? ‘Here’re empty
seats. Why don’t we sit here?’ may be used either when the speaker is inviting the listener to sit
next to her/him, or when the speaker and the listener are both looking for empty seats. As we haveseen, shinai ka is used widely as an expression of invitation. When the speaker’s action is not
pre-presented, it emphasizes the function of proposition, as in Kimi, rainen, ryūgaku shinai?
‘Would you like to study abroad next year?’
The volitional form of verbs, shiyō, on the other hand, is used when the speaker invites the listenerto join in what the speaker is about to do, as in Kore kara dekakeru n dakedo, kimi mo issho ni ikō ‘Iam going out now. Let’s go together.’ The speaker cannot invite the listener to sit next toher/him in Kono seki, aiteru yo. Suwarō ‘These seats are vacant. We’re going to sit here,’ unless
both the speaker and listener are looking for seats.
Shiyō tends to sound aggressive, since it expresses the speaker’s intent to pull the listener into the
speaker’s action. ?Sensei mo issho ni ikimashō ‘Professor, let us go together’ sounds a little curt
compared to Sensee mo issho ni ikimasen ka? ‘Professor, won’t you come with me?’ Conversely,shiyō is more appropriate when the speaker wants to forcefully engage the listener to act together, as
in Aitsu no koto nanka ki ni suru na. {Kaerō!/?Kaeranaika?}’Don’t worry about him. Let’s gohome/?Why don’t we go home?’
The volitional question, shiyō ka, does not work in ??Kimi mo isshoni ikō ka? because shiyō ka
does not work well when the speaker invites the listener to join in what the speaker has already
decided to do. It is appropriate for the situation where the speaker seeks consent from the listener
to execute an act together.
→モダリティ Modality (2-H), 意志の表現 Volitional Expressions (2-H)
 References
Adachi, Taro (1995) ‘Kan’yubun – shinai ka to shiyō to shiyō ka’ (Sentences of Invitation –Shinaika, shiyō, and shiyōka) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen nobunpō (jō) (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions I). Kurosio Publishers.

132

Higuchi, Fumihiko (1992) ‘Kan’yūbun – shiyō, shimashō’ (Sentences of Invitation – shiyō andshimashō) in Kotoba no Kagaku 5. Mugi Shobo.
(Adachi Taro)133

 Action-Requesting
The function of asking the listener to perform an action is called action-requesting. In a sentence ofaction-requesting, such as Soko ni suwarinasai ‘Sit there,’ the action has not been performed, andthe speaker wishes it to be performed.
Typically, expressions of action-requesting are made through the use of volitional verbs, as in
Kotchi ni koi ‘come over here,’ which asks that the action be realized. The speaker may direct thelistener to make an effort toward the realization of the action with verbs of weak volitionality, as in
Ano toki no koto o omoidashinasai ‘Remember what it was like at that time.’ Non-volitional verbs
cannot express action-requesting (e.g., *Kono hon ga yomero).
There are a wide variety of expressions of action-requesting. This is because action-requesting
inevitably puts a burden on the listener, and in order for the speaker to realize her/his intention of
making the listener perform an action, as expressed in her/his utterance, s/he must take a wide
variety of factors into consideration to choose the right form. Some of the factors include therelationship between the speaker and the listener, the amount of burden on the listener, and who
benefits from the action.
The most direct form to demand the execution of the action is the imperative, as in Koko ni iro ‘stay
here’ and Hayaku nenasai ‘Go to bed now.’ The imperative form shiro expresses a very strong senseof forcefulness, and is not suitable to use in daily conversation in a command that does not benefit
the listener, such as Mado o akero ‘Open the window.’ It is OK to use it when the command formis meant as an encouragement, as in Genki o dase ‘Cheer up! and Hayaku okiro. Chikoku suru zo‘Get up now. You’ll be late.’ Shinasai is more polite than shiro, and used often by a parent to achild, or the manager of an athletic team to players.
Expressions of request include giving and receiving verbs to state explicitly the gratitude thespeaker feels from the execution of the action involved. There are expressions of request thatbelong to the imperative group (e.g., Kotchi ni kite kure ‘Come over here,’ Kanojo o yonde kudasai‘Please send for her’) and those that belong to the question group (e.g., Chotto matte kurenai? ‘Can
you wait for a minute?’).
Expressions of request in the question group tend to be polite requests because the speaker gives thelistener the final authority to decide on the execution of the action. One may emphasize politenessfurther by adding deshō ka, as in Tetsudatte moraemasen deshō ka? ‘Would you please help me?’O…kudasai is used when the speaker gives permission to the action that the listener wishes toperform (e.g., O-hairi kudasai ‘Please come in’), or when the speaker is someone with authority
who wants to make a polite request (e.g., Dōzo furutte go-sanka kudasai ‘Do please join us.’
Expressions of wish, which is used to communicate that the speaker wants the action to be
performed, may also express action-requesting indirectly. In this usage, “leaving-unsaid”
expressions are often used at the end of the sentence to soften the explicit desire of the speaker (e.g.,
Tetsudatte hoshii n da kedo ‘It’d like it if you could help me, but...’)→モダリティ Modality (2-H), 疑問形式の用法 Usages of Interrogative Forms (2-H)

134

 References
Nitta, Yoshio (1991)
Syobo.

Nihongo no modaritii to ninshō (Japanese Modality and Person).

Hituzi

Maeda, Hiroyuki (1990) ‘-Te kudasai and o-kudasasi’ in Nihongogaku, 9-5. in Nihongogaku 9-5.
Miyazaki, Kazuhito et al. (2002) Modaritii (Modality.) Kurosio Publishers.
(Adachi Taro)135 Prohibition
Expressions of prohibition are used when the speaker orders the listener not to perform an action.
They are a type of expressions of action-requesting. However, they are somewhat different fromthe general expressions of action-requesting since the demand is not to act.
The most direct form of prohibition is suru na. This expression presupposes that the listenerunderstands that the speaker wishes the listener not to perform the act. The only difference
between this and other expressions of action-requesting is that the demand is for the act not to be
performed.
However, there is a difference in the degree of naturalness between expressions of prohibition andthose in action-requesting. The expression of prohibition, Ki ni suru na ‘Don’t worry,’ is natural,
but ??Ki ni shiro ‘Be worried’ feels unnatural. This is because of the difference in the degree ofdesirability in the realization of an action and the non-realization of an action. The realization of
the act of being worried is not desirable, while the non-realization of the same act is recognized as
being desirable.
Generally, action-requesting is a function that seeks the execution of an un-realized action at thetime of speech, while prohibition can occur not only at the time of speech when the action has notbeen performed, but it can also be directed to an action that has already been performed. Kare ni
attemo hanashikakeru na ‘Don’t talk to him should you see him’ is uttered when the speaker
preventatively prohibits the listener about an unrealized action, while ‘Urusai naa. Ima
hanashikakeru na ‘Don’t bug me. Don’t talk to me now’ is meant to stop the listener from the act
s/he is performing.
In contrast to using the direct prohibition form, suru na, it is common to express prohibition
indirectly in daily conversation by communicating that the action is not permissible (e.g., Sore ni
sawattewa ikenai yo ‘We’re not permitted to touch it’) and the action is not desirable (e.g.,
Sawattara dame ‘It’s not OK to touch it’).
→モダリティ Modality (2-H), 行為要求 Action-Requesting (2-H), 勧め Suggestion (2-H)
 References
Nitta, Yoshio (1991)
Syobo.

Nihongo no modaritii to ninshō (Japanese Modality and Person).

Hituzi

Murakami, Mitsuhisa (1993) ‘Meireibun – shiro and shinasai’ (Imperative Sentences: Shiro &Shinasai) in Kotoba no Kagaku, 6. Mugi Shobo.
(Adachi Taro)136

 Obligation and Permission

 Obligation
To express that a particular action is obligatory, nakereba ikenai and some other expressions areused.
(1) Yakusoku wa mamoranakereba ikenai ‘One must keep one’s promise.’(2) Kaigi ni ma ni au ni wa, 7ji ni ie o de nakereba ikenai ‘I must leave home at 7:00 in order tomake it to the meeting.’
This form has a wide variety of application, such as expressing moral obligation, as in (1), andphysical necessity as in (2).
Some other forms that have these functions are nakutewa ikenai, naito ikenai, nakereba naranai,and
nakutewa naranai. There is practically no difference in meaning among them, but naranai isslightly more formal than ikenai. In conversation, nakereba tends to change to nakya, andnakutewa into nakucha, and also the ending parts, ikenai and naranai, may be omitted.
Hitsuyō ga aru is an expression that is close in meaning to the aforementioned forms. It is used toexpress necessity in a particular situation that is described in (2), but it is not appropriate in asituation such as in (1).
Zaruoenai is another expression that requires discretion as to when to use it.
(3) Kōnetsu ga aru node shigoto o yasumazaruoenai ‘Due to high fever, I have no choice but beabsent from work.’
It is similar to nakereba naranai, but it expresses unavoidability rather than obligation, and may be
used when the situation is against the speaker’s will. Naiwake ni (wa) ikanai and shika nai have asimilar function.
Beki da may also be used in the same context as nakereba ikenai, but it only expresses that theaction is appropriate. It does not have the binding power that nakereba ikenai has.
(4) Yakusoku wa mamoru beki da ‘One should keep one’s promise.’ Permission
Temo ii is an expression of permission, which expresses that a certain action is permissible.
(5) Tanaka kun, mō kaettemo ii desu yo ‘Mr. Tanaka, you may go home now.’(6) Yasumi dakara, nanji ni kite kuretemo ii yo ‘It’s a day off, so you may come at any time.’(7) Eakon o kittemo ii deshō ka ‘Would it be OK to turn off the air conditioner?’137

When this form is used in a declarative sentence, it means permission to the listener’s action.
When it’s in a question form asking about the speaker’s action, it is a request for permission fromthe listener.
In (8), the speaker expresses his intention in a declarative sentence using temoii about the intentionof his action.
(8) Isogashii nara, boku ga yattemo ii yo ‘If you are busy, I can do it.’
There is a form te ii, which does not have mo in it. In many cases temo ii and te ii areinterchangeable, but te ii cannot be used with a question word as in (6). It also cannot express
intention as in (8).
Ii may be replaced by yoroshii and kamawanai.
(9) Haitte mo yoroshii desu ka ‘May I come in?’(10) Kono heya wa jiyūni tsukatte kamaimasen ‘You may use this room freely.’→モダリティ Modality (2-H), 助動詞 Auxiliary Verbs (2-B)
 References
Okuda, Yasuo (1999) ‘Genjitsu, kanō, hitsuzen (ge)’ (Reality, Potentiality, Inevitability II) in
Kotoba no Kagaku, #9. Mugi Shobo.
Takanashi, Shino (2002) ‘Hyōka no modaritii’ (Modality of Evaluation) in Miyazaki, Kazuhito, etal., Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 4: Modality (Selected Works in New Japanese Grammar 4).
Kurosio Publishers.
Moriyama, Takuro (2000) ‘Kihon johō to sentaku kankei to shite no modaritii’ (Basic Mood andModality as Relationship of Choice) in Moriyama, Takuro, et al., Nihongo no Bunpō 3: Modaritii(Japanese Grammar 3: Modality). Iwanami Shoten.
(Takanashi Shino)138 Expressions of Uncertainly
In a predication sentence when the speaker has the grasp of the situation as her/his own experienceor knowledge, the situation is expressed in the unmarked form (conclusive form) , as in Ame wa
mada futte iru ‘It is still raining,’ and Kare wa mō uchi ni kaetta ‘He has already gone home.’ Incontrast, when the speaker has not yet grasped the situation as her/his own experience or knowledge,
and when there is some uncertainty in the way s/he understands the situation, the situation isexpressed using a marked form (with the use of an auxiliary verb, for instance), as in Ame wa madafutte iru darō ‘I assume it’s still raining,’ or Kare wa mō uchi ni kaetta kamoshirenai, ‘He might
have already gone home.’ Expressions of Speculation
Darō is a form with which the speaker expresses that s/he understands the situation throughimagination and thought (=conjecture). With darō, it is possible to differentiate whether the
judgment on the validity of the proposition is established, and if it is, how certain the speaker isabout the judgment. If the judgment is not established (=doubt), the speaker can express theuncertainty by adding ka at the end, as in Ame wa mada futte iru darō ka ‘I wonder if it is stillraining.’ The degree of certainty may be expressed by adding adjectives, as in {Kitto ‘surely’/Tabun‘probably’/Osoraku ‘most likely’} ame wa mada futte iru darō.’ One characteristic of darō is thatit has a derived usage where the question form is used by the speaker to confirm the content of thelistener’s recognition, as in Asoko ni shingō ga aru darō? ‘You see a traffic signal over there, don’tyou?’ Even when an unmarked form is used, the meaning of speculation is evident at sentencelevel in such examples as Asu wa kitto hareru ‘It will definitely be sunny tomorrow’ (future
situation), (Tabun) aitsu ga hannin da ‘He (probably) is the culprit’ (judgment in a nominal
sentence), and Mō sukoshi ganbareba kateta noni ‘Had he tried a little harder, he would have won’(counter-factual conditional).
When darō is used in dialog, it can sound as if the speaker is arbitrary and dogmatic. The speaker
can avoid this by using the nodewa nai ka form, as in Tabun ashita wa ame ga furu n janai ka?
‘Probably it will rain tomorrow, I think.’ Nodewa nai ka, which originally is a form of negative
question, has come to be used to express uncertainty. It collocates with an adverb of degree, thesame as darō. Nodewa nai ka does not have the nuance of dogmatism because, unlike darō, it
maintains the characteristic of a question, presents judgment (a hypothesis) that is in the process of
formulating, and accepts the listener’s comments on it.
It can be information-providing or
information-seeking, depending on the use environment.
A verb of thinking, omou, may also function as an expression of the kind of uncertainty that darō
expresses. When the verb is in the suru form and when the first person subject is omitted, to omou
can be replaced by darō on the whole, as in Asu wa ame ni naru to omou ‘I think it is going to rain
tomorrow.’ However, where there is a marked modality form in the quoted clause, as in Asu wa ame
ni naru darō to omou ‘I think it will probably rain tomorrow’ and Asu wa eiga o mi ni ikō to omou
‘I think I will go see a movie tomorrow,’ it can only express the speaker’s judgment and intention,and not the meaning of uncertainty. Also, when to omou is used as an expression of uncertainty, itcannot be used in a monolog, as in (to oneself) Asu wa ame ni naru {*to omou/darō} naa ‘I think139

it’ll rain tomorrow’). This shows that to omou is an expression which objectivizes one’s own
thought content and communicates it to the listener.
 Expressions of Possibility
Darō judges the validity of the proposition through imagination and thought, whereas kamoshirenai
abandons the judgment on whether the proposition is true or false. Instead, it simply states that“there is a possibility” that the proposition is true. That is why it can be used in juxtaposing
contradicting propositions, as in Asu wa ame kamoshirenaishi, sō de nai kamoshirenai ‘It may or
may not rain tomorrow.’ In actual conversation, the necessity and effectiveness of the introductionof possibility are decided in relation to the context in question. In the example, Asu, o-jamashitemo ii desu ka? – Asu wa ie ni {*iru/inai} kamoshiremasen ‘May I come visit tomorrow? –I
may {*be/not be} home tomorrow,’ the speaker chooses the possibility that s/he may not be home inorder to decline the partner’s visit, although s/he may be home.
 Expressions of Inevitability
The forms ni chigainai and hazu da express that the proposition in question inevitably holds up.
When used in speculating about unknown information, as in Kare no itte iru koto wa tsujitsuma gaawanai. Kare wa uso o tsuite iru {ni chigainai/hazu da} ‘His story is not consistent. He must be
lying,’ the two forms are similar in meaning. However, hazu da can be used when the validity of
the content of the proposition is already established, as in Hontō nara, kare wa mō sotsugyō shite
iru hazu na no da ga ‘If everything has worked out, he should have graduated by now,’ and Madoga aite iru. Samui hazu da ‘The window is open. No wonder it is cold.’ The other form does nothave this function. Ni chigainai expresses the “conviction” that the content of the proposition
stands up when the validity of it is unknown, whereas hazu da fundamentally assumes that the
proposition holds up “as a matter of course” based on logic and laws.
→助動詞 Auxiliary Verbs (2-B), モダリティ Modality (2-H)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (1989) ‘Ninshiki no muudo to sono shūhen’ (Epistemic Mood and Its Periphery)in Nitta,Yoshio & Masuoka Takashi, ed., Nihongo no modaritii (Japanese Modality). Kurosio
Publishers.
Nitta, Yoshio (2000) ‘Ninshiki no modaritii to sono shūhen (Epistemic Modality and Its Periphery)in Moriyama, Takuro et al, Nihongo no Bunpō 3: Modaritii “Japanese Grammar 3: Modality.”
Iwanami Shoten.
Miyazaki, Kazuhito (2002) ‘Ninshiki no modaritii’ (Epistemic Modality) in Miyazaki, Kazuhito etal., Modaritii “Modality.”
Kurosiho Shuppan.
(Miyazaki Kazuhito)140 Evidence-Based Judgment
There are some sentence final forms of predication sentences that express that the said utterance isbased on some sort of evidence (the speaker’s observation and the ground for conjecture), as inKono hon wa kekkō omoshiroi {yō da/mitai da/rashii} ‘This book seems quite interesting’ andKono hon wa kekkō omoshirosō da ‘This book looks quite interesting.’ Of these, yō da and mitai daare almost the same semantically and functionally (but not stylistically), and yō da and rashii aresimilar in their usage in postulation.
 Yōda and Rashii
The main characteristic of yō da is that the speaker recognizes the establishment of the proposition
content through her/his observation. This characteristic is evident in examples such as Mita tokoro,
kare wa nakanaka ii kuruma ni notte iru yō da ‘From what I see, he seems to drive a rather goodcar,’ Kyō wa kinō yori sukoshi atatakai yō da ‘It seems a bit warmer today than yesterday,’ Anata no
kangae wa watashi to wa kanari chigatte iru yō desu ne ‘It seems that your thinking is quite
different from mine.’ If one replaces yō da with rashii in these examples, it either sounds
unnatural or it loses the nuance that it is what the speaker is saying based on her/his observation.
It is natural that the usage of so-called analogy derives from the basic usage of yō da, which
describes what the speaker observes, as in Ano hito no hanashikata wa marude okotte iru yōda ‘The
way that person talks is as if s/he is angry.’Yō da becomes close to rashii when the speaker’s observation and the content of the proposition are
not necessarily equivalent, and when some speculation is suspected, as in (looking at a puddle)
Dōyara ame ga futta {yō da/rasii} ‘Seems it’s rained.’ The use of yō da expands into the use of
postulation, but even then its characteristic to construct the content of the proposition based on
observation remains.
Rashii, on the other hand, basically expresses the postulation based on evidence. When theinformation comes from the outside, there is no restriction on the type of evidence. Rashii may
use what someone else says as evidence, as in Uwasa dewa, kare wa mamonaku tenshoku suru
rashii ‘I surmise from the rumor that he will change jobs soon.’ This is the so called usage ofhearsay.
 Sō daSō da differs from yō da and rashii morphologically in that it is affixed to the stem of verbs andadjectives (furi- ‘fall’, tanoshi-‘happy’) and possesses the negative forms, furisō {ni/mo} nai,
tanoshisō dewa nai, and the interrogative forms furisō ka?, tanoshisō ka?
The meaning of sōda differs greatly when it is affixed to a verb or when it is affixed to an adjective.
First, when affixed to verbs, there are two usages. One is to describe the observation ofindications themselves that foretell an event, as in Imanimo ame ga furidashisō da ‘It looks like it’sgoing to rain any minute,’ and Kono isu wa kowaresō da ‘This chair looks like it is going to break.’The other usage anticipates that some event will occur later, based on the observation of the current
situation, as in Kono shigoto wa ato 30pun gurai de katazukisō desu ‘It looks like this job will take141

another 30 minutes to finish,’ and Kono mama dewa, ano kaisha wa baishū sareru koto ni narisō da‘If things stay as they are, it looks like that company will end up being purchased.’
When sō da is affixed to adjectives, the basic function is to describe the characteristics and internal
condition of the subject as evident on the outside, as in Kono keeki, oishisō da na ‘This cake looks
delicious,’ and Kare wa saikin sabishisōda ‘He looks forlorn these days.’ Even when this form isaffixed to verbs, the temporal development does not matter if it is used in the semantic structure
where the characteristics of the subject are discussed; the meaning is similar to when it is affixed toadjectives, as in Kono naifu, kiresō da na ‘This knife looks like it cuts well,’ and Ano hito wa
supootsuman dakara yoku tabesō da ‘Since he’s a sport player, he is likely to eat a lot.’→助動詞 Auxiliary Verbs (2-B), モダリティ Modality (2-H)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1984) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi II (Japanese Syntax and Meaning II).
Kurosio Publishers.
Nitta, Yoshio (2000) ‘Ninshiki no modaritii to sono shūhen’ (Epistemic Modality and Its Periphery)in Moriyama, Takuro et al, Nihongo no Bunpō 3: Modaritii (Japanese Grammar 3: Modality).
Iwanami Shoten.
Kikuchi, Yasuto (2000) ‘Yōda and rashii’ in Kokugogaku, 51-1.
(Miyazaki Kazuhito)142 Hearsay
There are sentence final forms of predication sentences which express that the information that the
speaker tries to relay to the listener comes from a third party. These forms are classified into
epistemic type forms and quotation type forms.
Sō da is the most representative hearsay form in the epistemic type which conveys the speaker’s
knowledge obtained through hearsay. Rashii originally is used to express judgment based onevidence, but it also works as an epistemic type hearsay form when it uses hearsay informationfrom a third party as evidence. Sō da and rashii of hearsay are often interchangeable, as in Kiku
tokoro ni yoru to, chika wa madamada sagaru {sō da/rashii} ‘From what I hear, it looks like theland price will continue to go down for some time.’ However, sō da can only be used as a hearsay
form, while rashii is fundamentally a judgment form that is also used to express hearsay. What
separates the two forms is whether one collocates with an adverb such as dōyara, as in Masukomino hōdō dewa dōyara, hannin taiho ga chikai {*sō da/rashii} ‘According to the press, it seems thearrest of the culprit is close,’ and whether it can be used to deliver a message, as in Kare karadengon o tanomaremashita. Kyūyō ga dekita node okurete kuru {sō desu/*rashii desu} ‘I have amessage from him. He says that due to an emergency, he will be late.’
Epistemic type hearsay forms deliver the content of the speaker’s recognition based on hearsay,
whereas the basic function of quotation type hearsay forms is to relay a third party comment. In
daily conversation, tte and n datte are frequently used in this usage, as in Kare no okaasan no
hanashi dewa, kare wa ryokō ni deta {tte/n datte} ‘According to his mother, he’s gone on a trip, I
quote.’ Of the two, tte retains much of the quotation type characteristics. It can be affixed toerective forms, as in Otōsan ga hayaku kaettekinasai tte ‘Dad tells you to come home soon,’ and thesubject may be the source of information. Tte and n datte can also be used in questions. However,the difference between the two is whether the hearsay itself is the object of the question. With tte,
the speaker questions if the listener has heard from the third party (e.g., Kare mo kuru tte? ‘Did you
hear he was also coming?’ while with n datte, the speaker confirms with the listener what the
speaker has heard from the third party (e.g., Kare mo kuru n datte? ‘I heard he was also coming.
Did you?’).
There are a few other hearsay forms of quotation type. Datte is used to reconstruct the originalutterance (e.g., Kare, sorosoro kekkon shiyō kanaa, datte ‘He says: I am thinking of getting married
soon’). To no kotoda, and to iu koto da are used to relay messages and communicate informationon the circumstances obtained through hearsay (e.g., Kare wa kyūyō ga dekita node okurete kuru
{tono koto da/to iu koto da} ‘I am relaying his message that he’ll be late due to an emergency.’ To
iu expresses general remarks and hearsay based on legend (e.g., Koko wa mukashi numachi datta toiu ‘I’ve been told that once this place was a bog’). Toka is used to convey uncertain informationsuch as rumor and second hand information (e.g., Kono biiru ga ichiban urete iru n da toka ‘This isthe best selling beer, I hear’).
→助動詞 Auxiliary Verbs (2-B), モダリティ Modality (2-H)
 References

143

Moriyama, Takuro (1995) ‘Denbunkō’ (On Hearsay) in Kyōto Kyōiku Daigaku Kokubungakukaishi,
26.
Yamazaki, Makoto (1996) ‘In’yō, denbun no tte no yōhō’ (Use of tte of Quotation and Hearsay) in
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics, ed., Kokuritsu Kokugo Kenkyūjo Kenkyū
Hōkoku 17. Shuei Shuppan.
(Miyazaki Kazuhito)144 Noda: Modality of Explanation
Noda, and its variations, n desu, no, no dearu, are used at the end of a sentence or at the end of asubordinate clause. Typically, noda follows a situation or the preceding context and explains thecircumstance in which the situation or context came about or the meaning of it, as in (1) and (2).
(1) (Coughing) Sumimasen.

Kaze na n desu ‘Sorry, I have a cold.’(2) Shūshoku ga kimarimashita. Sennin kōshi ni nareru n desu ‘I’ve got a job. I’ll be a full time
instructor.’
Sometimes the circumstance in which a request or question is asked comes first, as in (3).
(3) Ryōgae shitai n desu ga, ginkō wa doko deshō ka ‘I’d like to exchange money, but where is therea bank?’Noda expresses the attitude of the speaker where s/he tries to have the listener recognize what isalready determined. In addition to explaining a situation or the preceding context, the speaker may
confess the truth which the listener was not aware of (4), or order the listener to perform what has
been decided (5).
(4) Jitsuwa, kakushite ita koto ga aru n desu ‘I must confess, I have hidden something from you.’(5) Sassato katazukeru n da ‘Get on with the cleanup.’Noda is also used to express the speaker’s attitude where s/he now acknowledges what has been
decided. In (6) the speaker recognizes the meaning of the situation or the preceding context, in (7)the speaker discovers what s/he hasn’t known before, and in (8), s/he acknowledges re-discovery.
(6) (Seeing a coughing person) Kawaisōni, kaze o hiite iru n da na ‘Poor fellow.
cold.’

I see he has a(7) Sōka, koko o magareba ii n da ‘Oh, I see, I turn here.’(8) Sōda, kyō wa shinbun wa konai n da ‘I remember.

They don’t deliver the newspaper today.’I will discuss problems that learners of Japanese encounter with noda.
problem of non-use of noda.

First, let us talk about theFirst, it is unnatural not to use noda in questions using naze and dōshite.
(9) Dōshite paatii ni {*ikimasen ka/ikanai n desu ka} ‘Why aren’t you going to the party?’
Second, another problem with non-use of noda occurs when one obviously tries to express thecircumstance and meaning of the situation and the preceding context.
(10) Denki ga tsuite imasu ne.
He must still be studying.’

Mada benkyō shite iru {??deshō/n deshō} ‘The lights are still on.

In addition, noda is frequently omitted in forms such as Kangaenaoshita hō ga {*iidewa naika/ii no
dewa nai ka} to omou ‘I’d think it’s better to reconsider.’145

Next, let us discuss inappropriate use of noda.
First, noda kara is used when the speaker wants the listener to acknowledge that the listener does
not have a good grasp of the situation, and when the speaker expresses her/his judgment based on
this recognition.
Inappropriate use of this form tends to sound rude.
(11) *Atama ga itakatta n desu kara, yasumimashita.
Second, when one uses noda simply to emphasize a feeling, it sounds unnatural.
(12) *Waa, oishii n desu.
In addition, mistakes occur with the wrong form (e.g., *samui na no) and first language interference(e.g., Hajimemashite. ??Watashi wa Chūgoku kara kita no desu).
→ノダ・ワケダ・カラダ・ハズダ—関連づけ Noda, Wakeda, Karada, Hazuda :Making
Connection (2-K), 否定の焦点 Focus of Negation (2-F)
 References
Saji, Keizo (1991) Nihongo no bunpō no kenkyū (dai 3 bu) (Study of the Grammar of Japanese: Part
III).
Hituzi Syobo.
Tanomura, Tadaharu (1990) Gendai nihongo no bunpō I: noda no imi to yōhō (Grammar ofContemporary Japanese I: Meaning and Use of Noda).
Izumi Shoin.
Noda, Harumi (1997) Noda no kinō (Function of Noda). Kurosio Publishers.
(Noda Harumi)146 Usage of Sentence Final Particles
Sentence final particles concern the speaker’s communication attitude as to how the speaker uttersthe sentence to the listener. Their function is often directed toward the listener, but some of themspecifically do not concern the listener. Major sentence final particles include yo, ne, ze, sa, naa,
na, zo, and wa.
Yo expresses that the speaker wants the listener to pay attention to the speech because the speaker is
not talking at the listener one-sidedly, that the speech concerns the listener as well. When the
speaker finds a purse on the street, the speaker may say, A, saifu ga ochiteru ‘Oh, here’s a wallet on
the ground,’ to the listener, but if the wallet is the listener’s, the speaker must say, Saifu ga ochiteru
yo ‘Look, (Your) wallet is on the ground.’Ne expresses that there is no contradiction between the speaker and listener in understanding or
recognition. In Kore de ii ne, ‘This is OK, isn’t it?’ the speaker confirms with the listener what the
speaker understands is correct. The speaker seeks agreement with the listener in Ii tenki da ne,‘Nice weather, isn’t it?’ The speaker answers, Eeto, sanji desu ne ‘Let’s see, it’s 3 o’clock, right?’ inresponse to the question, Ima, nanji desu ka? ‘What time is it?’ What the speaker is doing here is tomake sure her/his watch is correct or if her/his memory is correct first before answering.
Ze is used when the speaker notifies her/his thought one-sidedly to the listener, as in Mō kaeru ze‘I’m going home now.’ It is a very curt expression, and it does not sit well with a polite form
(e.g., ??Shio nara asoko ni arimasu ze ‘The salt is over there.’ Basically only male speakers use
this form.
Sa expresses the speaker’s certitude about the message s/he conveys to the listener, as in Shinpai
shinakutemo sono uchi kaette kuru sa ‘No need to worry. She’ll eventually come back.’ One canuse it to relay a story one has heard from a third party in a light-hearted manner, as in Kare, kyōkorarenai tte sa ‘I’ve been told he cannot come today.’
Naa, as in Kirei na hana da naa ‘What a pretty flower!’ and Yoku kita naa ‘So nice of you to come!,’is a sentence-final particle used monologically with an attributive expression to make the sentence
exclamatory. Sōda naa is used in dialog to indicate that the speaker has to think for a while before
answering a question.
Na signals that the speaker becomes aware of something, as in A, dareka kita na ‘Oh, someone ishere.’The basic use of zo is for the utterer to reflect in her/his mind on the newly recognized content, as in
Sakkino hanashi, hen da zo ‘About the story we’ve heard earlier, it is fishy.’ Mostly male speakers
use this form. When used in dialog, it has a function of forcing the listener to acknowledge thespeaker’s utterance, as in Mō kaeru zo ‘I’m going home.’
Wa with a rising intonation is mainly used by female speakers. It expresses the speaker’s
recognition of a situation monologically, as in (having recognized a friend) Ara, Tanaka san da wa‘Oh, that’s Ms. Tanaka.’ In dialog, it softens the outpouring of emotion and declaration of theintention, as in Ureshii wa ‘I am happy’ and Watashi, mō iku wa ‘I am leaving now.’147

→モダリティ Modality (2-H), 助詞 Particles (2-B)
 References
Ueno, Tazuko (1972)
Nihongo Kyoiku, 17.

‘Shūjoshi to sono shūhen’ (Sentence Final Particles and Its Periphery)Miyazaki, Kazuhito et al.
Kurosio Publishers.

in(2002) ‘Modaritii (Modarity) ’ in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 4.
(Adachi Taro)

148

 Modal Adverbs
Needless to say, the main means of expressions of modality are the predicate forms.
In addition,
Japanese abounds in adverbs that foretell, emphasize, define, and carry out the modal meaning of
the predicate forms (e.g., Dōzo irashite kudasai ‘Do please come,’ Tabun asu wa ame darō
‘Probably, it will rain tomorrow,’ Dōyara kare wa konai rashii ‘I gather, it looks like he’s not
coming.’). These adverbs are also important means of expression of modality. These adverbs arecalled modal adverbs. Adverbs of statement and sentential adverbs are similar concepts to modal
adverbs. Because adverbs of statement presuppose concord with specific, marked forms, they
include adverbs that agree with non-sentence final predicates such as mosi…naraba ‘if….’
Because sentential adverbs work within a sentence (but outside the proposition), they include
adverbs of evaluation such as ainiku ‘unfortunately’ and zannen nagara ‘regrettably.’ Various
arguments exist for and against including adverbs of statement and sentential adverbs in modal
adverbs.
Modal adverbs can be classified according to the pattern of modal meaning expressed by thepredicate forms. They are classified into three major groups: the action type, epistemic type, andquestion type. The action type includes ones that work together with modality of request (e.g.,dōzo and dōka) and modality of desire (e.g., zehi, semete, isso, dekireba, nantoka, dōshitemo).
The epistemic type includes ones that work with modality of speculation, inevitability andpossibility (e.g., sazo, masaka, kitto, tabun, osoraku, moshikasuruto), and modality of deduction
and hearsay (e.g., dōmo, dōyara, nandemo, kikeba). (Expressions such as tashika ni, gen ni, jijitsu,
and jissai, which work with unmarked forms, should also be included in adverbs of the epistemic
type.) The question type includes hatashite, ittai, naze, and dōshite.
The common function in all modal adverbs is to give advance notice of the modal meaning. Thereis a range as to which specific predicate forms can come after each adverb, but the possible modal
meaning of the said sentence is fairly restricted, and the listener can predict it to a certain degree
upon hearing the adverb.
Some of the modal adverbs have the function of emphasizing the modal meaning. Zehi in Zehi
kimi ni kite hoshii ‘I really want you to come’ and nantoka in Nantoka kotoshi-jū ni kekkon shitai ‘Iwant to get married, if it’s at all possible, by the end of this year’ express the speaker’s strong
feeling toward the realization of the situation. Masaka in Masaka sonna koto wa aru mai ‘It can’tbe true’ and ittai in Ittai dare ga konna itazura o suru no darō ‘Who in the world would play such a
prank?’ emphasize the denial of the situation and doubt.
Some modal adverbs define the modal meaning of the predicate form. In Asu wa{kitto/tabun/osoraku} ame darō ‘It will certainly/probably/most likely rain tomorrow,’ darō cannot
express the degree of certainty by itself. Kitto, tabun, and osoraku can differentiate the degree.
In some cases the adverb itself, not the predicate, seems to determine the modal meaning. For
instance, Kare wa asu kuru ‘He’ll come tomorrow’ and Aitsu wa chōnan da ‘He’s the oldest son’ areusually interpreted as the speaker describing what s/he knows. If we add tabun ‘probably’ and kitto‘definitely’ respectively to these sentences ‘Tabun kare wa asu kuru,’ and ‘Kitto aitsu wa chōnanda,’ they become sentences of speculation. Here the adverbs are acting on behalf of thepredicate to express the modal meaning.
149

→モダリティ Modality (2-H)
 References
Nakau, Minoru (1980) ‘Bun fukushi no hikaku’ (Comparison of Sentential Adverbs) in Nichiei
Hikaku Kōza 2 Bunpō “Japanese-English Comparison 2: Grammar.” Taishukan Shoten.
Morimoto, Junko (1994) Hanashite no shukan o arawasu fukushi ni tsuite (On Adverbs that
Describe the Speaker’s Subjectivity). Kurosio Publishers.
Kudo, Hiroshi (2000) ‘Fukushi to bun no chinjutsuteki na taipu’ (Declarative Types of Adverbs andSentences) in Moriyama, Takuro et al., Nihongo no Bunpō 3: Modaritii (Japanese Grammar 3:
Modality). Iwanami Shoten.
(Miyazaki Kazuhito)

150 Exclamatory Sentences
Exclamatory sentences express the surprise one feels with things and situations, as in Nantekawaii hana darō! ‘What a pretty flower!’ Exclamatory sentences in Japanese generally place
the event or thing (‘flower’) that evokes the emotion at the end of the sentence, and the attributeof the event or thing that evokes the emotion (‘pretty’) modifies the noun.
In the same situation, one may place the attribute that evokes the emotion at the end of thesentence, but Kono hana wa nante kawaii darō does not sit well. No or koto is needed at theend to make the sentence sound right, as in Kono hana wa nante kawaii n darō ‘How pretty thisflower is’ and Kimi ni aete nanto ureshii koto deshō ‘How happy I am to see you.’ Thecharacteristic of exclamatory sentences is that they are constructed around a noun.
There are three sentence patterns of exclamatory sentences in Japanese.
In the first pattern, the emotion that is evoked at the location of utterance is not yet well-formed
as an exclamatory sentence, as in Kirei na oto! ‘Beautiful sounds!’ and Kanojo no piano no
migotosa! ‘The wonderfulness of her piano!’ In this pattern, the noun at the center of theemotion is sometimes placed at the end of the sentence, or the adjective that expresses theattribute that evokes the emotion is nominalized.
The other two patterns involve the adverb, nanto. The second pattern has da at the end of thesentence to regulate the predicate. Example: Kare wa nante omoshiroi n da! ‘How interesting
he is!’ This pattern expresses the speaker’s emotion without intending to convey it to the listener,
and da cannot be in the polite form.
The third pattern expresses the sense of awe using darō (e.g., Nanto kawaii kodomo darō ‘Whata cute child!). In this pattern, the polite form of da may be used, and the pattern can also
convey the speaker’s emotion to the listener.
→モダリティ Modality (2-H)
 Reference
Adachi, Taro (2002) ‘Gendai nihongo no kantanbun o megutte’ (Discussion On Exclamatory
Sentences in Contemporary Japanese) in Hiroshima Joshi Daigaku Kokusai Bunkagakubu Kiyō
10.
(Adachi Taro)1151

Grammar I:

Topic and Focus

 Topic
A topic indicates what the sentence is about to describe.
wa, as in (1).

In Japanese it is typically expressed with

(1) Koko wa Shizuoka ken desu ‘This is Shizuoka prefecture.’
The topic is the presupposition for the sentence, and in principle it is placed early in the sentence. A
topic may be what is right there, what was in the previous context, or something the listener readily
recognizes.
Expressions that we cannot readily specify, such as nani, dareka, and shiranai hito, cannot be
topics.
A sentence that includes a topic is divided into two major parts: topic and exposition.
one may pause briefly right after the topic.

In speech,

In a sentence that includes a topic, the topic is the introduction, and what the sentence expresses isin the exposition. Thus, one cannot place prominence on the topic in speech.
Chart 2-12 lists ways of expressing the topic in Japanese in a broader sense of the word.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Chart 2-12: Ways of Expressing the Topic and Their Characteristics_____________________________________________________________________________
 Forms of Topic Characteristics
wa

Typical form of topic

Non-use of particle

Used in speech

to iu no wa, to wa, tte, etc.

Express the characteristics of the topic

nara, dattara, etc.

The topic is what the other party has brought up, andthe speaker mentions something that is related to it

to ieba, tte ittatte, etc.

What has been said previously is the topic, and the
speaker talks about something other than the topic(no koto) daga, (no koto) dakedo,
etc.

Function as an introduction to the topic not only of asentence but also of a paragraph, the text, anddiscourse.

Predicate of an implicit-topic
sentence

The predicate is the topic, and it highlights thenominative case -ga.

152

Non-use of particle in the above chart means that the topic is expressed without the use of a particle,
as in (2).
(2) Kore __, oishii ne ‘This is delicious.’
The predicate of an implicit-topic sentence takes up the position where sekininsha ‘the person in
charge’ does in (3) below.
(3) Dare ga sekininsha desu ka ‘Who is the person in charge?’→ハとガ－基本的な違い Wa and Ga: Basic Differences (2-I), ハとガ－有題文と無題文 Wa and
Ga: Topic-Present Sentence and Topic-Absent Sentence (2-I), ハとガ－顕題文と隠題文 Wa and
Ga: Explicit-Topic Sentence and Implicit-Topic Sentence (2-I), ハとガ－文の中と節の中 Wa and
Ga: In the Sentence vs. In the Clause (2-I), ッテとハ－主題のバリエーション Tte and Wa:
Variations of Topic (2-I), 無助詞、格助詞の省略 Non-Use of Particles and Ellipses of Case
Particles (2-I), トピック・コメント Topic and Comment (7-D)
 References
Iori, Isao, et al. (2001) Chūjōkyū o oshieru hito no tame no nihongo bunpō handobukku(Handbook of Japanese Grammar for Those Who Teach Intermediate and Advanced Classes).
3A Network.
Noda, Hisashi (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1.) Kurosio Publishers.
(Noda Hisashi)153

 Wa and Ga: Basic Differences
Differentiating wa, as in (1), and ga, as in (2), is considered one of the most difficult aspects ofJapanese language acquisition.
(1) Ano hito wa shachō san desu ‘That person is the company president.’(2) Ano hito ga shachō san desu ‘That person is the company president.’
Wa is a particle of topic, that is, it expresses what the sentence talks about. Ga is a case particle
like o and ni, and marks the subject of an action or state, namely, the nominative case.
In order to explain how to differentiate wa and ga, we need to examine the four points listed below.
(a) Topic-present sentence vs. Topic-absent sentence(b) Explicit-topic sentence vs. Implicit-topic sentence(c) In the sentence vs. In the clause(d) Comparison and Exclusion(a)Topic-present sentence vs. Topic-absent sentence

Most sentences are topic-present sentences that include wa, as in (3).
However, if the sentence
describes a one-time event or a temporary state, it becomes a topic-absent sentence as in (4).
(3) Watashi wa Kyōto ni sunde imasu ‘I live in Kyoto.’(4) Kinō Hokkaidō de jishin ga arimashita ‘There was an earthquake in Hokkaido yesterday.’(b)

Explicit-topic sentence vs. Implicit-topic sentence

When the predicate contains what the speaker wants to convey or ask, the topic is explicit and wa isused, as in (5). When the nominative case contains what the speaker wants to convey or ask, thetopic is implicit, and ga is used, as in (6).
(5) Kore wa nan desu ka ‘What is this?’(6) Dare ga sonna koto o ittandesu ka ‘Who in the world said such a thing?’(c)

In the sentence vs. In the clause

Unlike in a sentence, in principle wa does not appear in a subordinate clause. An item marked
with wa in an isolated sentence will take on ga marking when that sentence is embedded as asubordinate clause, as in (8).
(7) Watashi wa kōkōsei desu ‘I am a high school student.’(8) Watashi ga kōkōsei no toki, chichi ga nakunarimashita ‘My father died when I was a highschool student.’(d)Comparison and Exclusion154

Wa is used when there is contrast, as in (9), but ga is used when there is a meaning of exclusion, asin (10).
(9) Watashi wa kyōikugaku wa benkyō shimashita ga shinrigaku wa benkyō shiteimasen ‘I studied
pedagogy, but I haven’t studied psychology.’(10) Watashi no uchi de wa otōto ga ichiban se ga takai desu ‘In my family my younger brother isthe tallest.’→ハとガ－基本的な違い Wa and Ga: Basic Differences (2-I), ハとガ－有題文と無題文 Wa and
Ga: Topic-Present Sentence and Topic-Absent Sentence (2-I), ハとガ－顕題文と陰題文 Wa and
Ga: Explicit-Topic Sentence and Implicit-Topic Sentence (2-I), ハとガ－文の中と節の中 Wa and
Ga: In the Sentence vs. In the Clause (2-I), ハとガ対比と排他 Wa and Ga: Comparison andExclusion (2-I)
 References
Noda, Hisashi (1985) ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Nihongo bunpō serufu mastaa shiriizu 1 (Japanese
Grammar Self-Master Series 1).
Kurosio Publishers.
___________ (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1.) Kurosio Publishers.
Horiguchi, Kazuyoshi (1995) ~Wa~ no hanashi (Discussion on –Wa-).

Hituzi Syobo.
(Noda Hisashi)155 Wa and Ga: Topic-Present Sentence and Topic-Absent Sentence
There are topic-present and topic-absent sentences. In a topic-present sentence the nominative caseis marked by wa, as in (1). In a topic-absent sentence the nominative case is marked by ga.
(1) Watashi wa Kyōto ni sunde imasu ‘I live in Kyoto.’(2) Kinō Hokkaidō de jishin ga arimashita ‘There was an earthquake in Hokkaido yesterday.’Topic-present sentences and topic-absent sentences are differentiated by such factors as predicate
types, types of the nominative case nouns, and functions within discourse.
First, we will look at types of the predicate. A topic-present sentence is generated when thepredicate expresses a constant state of things or a repetitive phenomenon, as in (3). When thepredicate describes a temporary situation or a one-time event, a topic-absent sentence is generated,
as in (4).
(3) Yamada san wa mainichi, inu to sanpo shimasu ‘Ms. Yamada takes a walk with her dog everyday.’(4) Yuki ga futte kita yo ‘It’s started to snow.’
Regarding the types of nominative case nouns, when the nominative case is an indefinite noun, suchas dareka or nanika, the sentence has to be a topic-absent sentence, as in (5).
(5) Dareka ga ōgoe de sakende imashita ‘Somebody was shouting in a loud voice.’
If the referent of a nominative case noun is present right where the utterance takes place, or if it was
mentioned in the previous context, it is easy to generate a topic-present sentence with that noun as
the topic. Conversely, if the nominative case noun does not exist in the immediate environment or in
the previous context, the sentence tends to be a topic-absent sentence, as in (7).
(6) Kono isu wa totemo suwariyasui ‘This chair is very comfortable to sit in.’
(7) Ekimae ni pan’ya-san ga dekiru mitai desu ‘It looks like there will be a bakery in front of thestation.’Lastly, regarding the function in discourse, topic-present sentences have the function of continuingwith the previous topic. Topic-absent sentences set up a new topic or change the topic. In (8), a
topic is set up in the first topic-absent sentence, and the topic continues in the next topic-present
sentence.
(8) Konogoro kōen ni mita koto ga nai tori ga imasu. Sono tori wa, suzume yori sukoshi ōkikutekuchibashi ga akai desu. ‘Lately, there is an unfamiliar bird in the park. The bird is a little bigger
than a sparrow, and its beak is red.’→主題 Topic (2-I), 文章のまとまり Consistency of text: 結束性・一貫性 Cohesion and
Coherence(2-K), 旧情報・新情報（定・否定、既知・未知）Old Information vs. New
Information (Affirmative/Negative, Known/Unknown) (2-K)

156

 References
Noda, Hisashi (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1.) Kurosio Publishers.
(Noda Hisashi)157

 Wa and Ga: Explicit-Topic Sentence and Implicit-Topic Sentence
Sentences that include a topic are divided into explicit-topic sentences, where the topic is explicitly
specified with wa, and implicit-topic sentences in which the topic is not explicitly specified with wa.
(1) is an explicit-topic sentence, and (2) is an implicit-topic sentence.
(1) Ano hito wa shachō san desu ‘That person is a company president.’(2) Ano hito ga shachō san desu ‘That person is the company president.’
In (1) the speaker tells the listener that “that person” is a “president” and not a “director” oranything else. The topic is “that person” and it is marked explicitly by wa.
In (2), the speaker has chosen among candidates that “that person,” and not “this person” or anyone
else, is “the president.” This sentence is equivalent to (3) and its topic is presumed to be thepresident, but it is not explicitly specified in (2).
(3) Shachō san wa ano hito desu ‘The company president is that person.’In a topic-explicit sentence, such as (1), various components of a sentence can become the topic.
In (4) the case o component is the topic, and in (5) the case ni component is the topic.
(4) Sono shorui wa watashi ga motte imasu ‘I have those documents.’(5) Kono dōbutsuen ni wa panda ga imasu yo ‘There are pandas in this zoo.’
In a topic-implicit sentence the predicate is the topic, as in (2). The predicate of a topic-implicit
sentence frequently is a noun predicate, as in “shachō san desu” in (1), or a verb + noda/nda, as in(6).
(6) Dare ga sonna koto o itta n desu ka ‘Who in the world said such a thing?’
The topic-explicit sentence of (7) and the topic-implicit sentence of (8) are almost identical in their
meaning, and they are practically interchangeable. However, when the topic is something that ispresent in the immediate environment of the utterance, or when it is from the previous context, andwhen it is placed at the beginning of the sentence, as in (8), the sentence tends to be topic-implicit.
(7) Dazai Osamu ga umareta ie wa koko desu ‘The house in which Dazai Osamu was born is this.’(8) Koko ga Dazai Osamu ga umareta ie desu ‘This is the house where Dazai Osamu was born.’→ハとガ－基本的な違い Wa and Ga: Basic Differences (2-I)
 Reference
Noda, Hisashi (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1.) Kurosio Publishers.
(Noda Hisashi)

158

 Wa and Ga: In the Sentence vs. In the Clause
There are big differences in the usage of Wa vs. Ga whether they are used in simple sentences orcomplex sentences, or whether they are used in clauses.
When the clause is highly subordinate, the wa of topic is fundamentally not used.
(1)
Hypothetical clauses: -tara, -(re)ba, -toTemporal clauses: -toki, -maeni, -atode
Manner clauses: -yōni, -hodo
Adnominal clauses: Watashi ga katta kamera, etc.
Noun clauses: -koto, -no, -ka
While wa is used in (2), which is a sentence, wa is no longer possible in a clause as in (3).
(2) Watashi wa kōkōsei desu ‘I am a high school student.’(3) Watashi ga kōkōsei no toki, chichi ga naku narimashita ‘My father passed away when I was ahigh school student.’
Wa represents the topic for the entire sentence, and cannot express the topic within a clause.
In (4) at first glance, the wa of topic appears in the toki clause. However, wa is actually outside
the toki clause, as shown in (5).
(4) Watashi wa kōkōsei no toki, tenisubu deshita.
(5) Watashi wa [kōkōsei no toki, tenisubu deshita] ‘I was in the tennis club when I was a highschool student.’
When the nominative case of the main sentence and that of the subordinate clause in a complex
sentence are the same, generally the nominative case becomes the topic and marked by wa.
On the other hand, when the degree of subordination is low, as in (6), the wa of topic shows up as it
does in simple sentences and in the main sentence of complex sentences.
(6) Parallel construction clauses: -ga, -keredo, -shi
Quotational clauses: -to
In (7), for instance, there is topic wa in the quotational clause.
(7) Watashi wa kono shōsetsu wa omoshiroi to omoimasu ‘I think that this novel is interesting.’
Further, kara and no of reason have a mild degree of subordination, and wa does not show up
readily, but it does occur.

159

→ハとガ－基本的な違い Wa and Ga: Basic Differences (2-I)
 Reference
Noda, Hisashi (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1.) Kurosio Publishers.
(Noda Hisashi)160

 Wa and Ga: Comparison and Exclusion
Wa has the function of expressing comparison, as in “kyōikugaku wa” and “shinrigaku wa” in (1),while ga can express exclusion, as in “otōto no hō ga” in (2).
(1) Watashi wa kyōikugaku wa benkyō shimashita ga shinrigaku wa benkyō shite imasen ‘I studied
pedagogy, but I haven’t studied psychology.’(2) Watashi no uchi de wa otōto ga ichiban se ga takaidesu ‘In my family my younger brother is thetallest.’Wa of contrast is typically used in a sentence of contrast, where two clauses are contrasted using ga,
keredo, and so on, as in (1). What are contrasted often belong to the same category, such as“pedagogy” and “psychology,” and the predicates are often in contrast, such as “benkyō shimashita”
and “benkyō shite imasen.”
When there is no contrast, o is used as in “kyōikugaku o” in (3), but in a sentence of contrast, wa ofcontrast shows up, as in (1).
(3) Watashi wa kyōikugaku o benkyō shimashita ‘I studied pedagogy.’
Wa of contrast may be used when the other party in the contrast does not appear in the sentence, as
in “shinirgaku wa” in (4). Especially in negative sentences, this use of wa is frequent when thereis hardly any meaning of contrast.
(4) Watashi wa shinrigaku wa benkyō shite imasen ‘I haven’t studied psychology.’
Typically, ga of exclusion is used in sentences of comparison, as in (2), and it is used in forms suchas X yori Y no hō ga, XYZ no naka de(wa), and X ga ichiban. If the pattern is not one of thecontrastive patterns, wa shows up as in “otōto wa” in (5), but with a pattern of contrast, the ga of
exclusion is used as in “otōto ga” in (2).
(5) Otōto wa se ga takai ‘My little brother is tall.’→ハとガ－基本的な違い Wa and Ga: Basic Differences (2-I)
 Reference
Noda, Hisashi (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo Bunpō Sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1.) Kurosio Publishers.
(Noda Hisashi)161 Tte and Wa: Variations of the Topic
In addition to the particle wa, the tte form is another from used to present the topic of a sentence.
Unlike wa, the tte form may make not only a person or object but also an utterance and expression
into the topic. Further, it has the following three characteristics shown in (a) through (c).
(a) Tte asks about the meaning and content of what has been chosen as the topic, and defines andexplicates its meaning.
(1) “Hokasu” tte dō iu imi desuka? ‘What does hokasu mean?’(2) Mō aitakunai tte, dō iu koto? ‘What do you mean, you don’t want to see me anymore?’(3) Kurōn ningen tte, onaji ningen ga takusan dekiru no? ‘Do cloned humans mean that there will
be many of the same person?’In speech tte is used often.
form may be used.

There is also the form to iu no wa, and in written language the to wa(4) NGO to wa “hi-seifu soshiki” no ryakugo de aru ‘NGO is the initialism for “non-governmentalorganization”.’
Tte asks what the topic designates as the object, or confirms what it is when the designated object
is not clear. It also describes the designated object.
(5) A: Yamada san kara denwa ga atta yo ‘Mr. Yamada called.’
B: Yamada san tte, dono Yamada san? ‘Which Mr. Yamada?’
A: Eibunka no Yamada san da yo ‘Mr. Yamada of the English Department.’(6) Koko de no Eigo to iu no wa, Igirisu eigo dewa naku, Amerika eigo no
Koto de aru ‘What I am referring to here as English is not British English but American English.’Tte describes the characteristics and nature of what is picked out as the topic.
(7) Hataraku tte, taihen na koto na n da na ‘Working is serious business.’(8) Jinsei to wa kibishii mono da ‘Life is hard.’
Tte is used often in utterances where the speaker, having made a new discovery or realization about
the characteristics and nature of the topic, describes the topic with awe and wonder, or joy ordisappointment, or when the speaker re-evaluates the situation.
(9) (Having eaten sea urchin) Uni tte, oishii! ‘Sea urchin is delicious!’(10) (Having witnessed a heartless remark or act by the other party) Kimi tte, sonna ni tsumetai hito
data no ka ‘I didn’t know you were such a cruel person.’162

(11) (Having heard criticism from the other party on the speaker’s inadequacies) A, baka desu ne,
watashi tte ‘Oh, I am a fool.”→ 主題 Topic (2-I)
 References
Niwa, Tetsuya (1994) ‘Syudai teiji no tte to in’yō’ (Tte of Topic-Presentation and Quotation) in
Jimbun Kenkyū 46, (Volume 2).
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1992) Kiso nihongo bunpō (kaiteiban) (Basic Japanese
Grammar, Revised Ed.). Kurosio Publishers.
Morita, Yoshiyuki & Matsumoto Masae (1989) Nihongo hyōgen bunpō – yōrei chūshin: fukugōji no
imi to yōhō (Japanese Expressional Patterns – Usage Example-Based: Meaning and Usage ofCompound Words). ALC.
Group Jamashii ed. (1998) Kyōshi to gakushūsha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapanese Sentence Pattern for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
Fujita, Yasuyuki (2000) Kokugo in’yō kōbun no kenkyū (Study of Japanese Quotational Sentences).
Izumi Shoin.
(Takahashi Minako)

163

 Focus
The function of “focus” is to pick out various components (X) in sentences so as to imply othercontrasting components of the same category paradigmatically, and show how X is related to theseother components. This X is the focus.
(1) Tarō dake kuru ‘Taro alone will come.’
In Sentence (1), dake indicates that, in addition to “Taro’s coming,” “coming” is limited to Taro.
What is implied is that “those other than Taro are not coming.” “Dake,” which expresses
exclusion, focuses on “Tarō.”
Case particle ga and phonological prominence may express focus on the prefixed component in thesense of “exclusion,” but usually focus is shown by so called particles including dake (a) andadverbs (b). The relationship among components when focus occurs is varied: Limitation,
prominence, exemplification, unexpectedness, accumulation, and so on.
(a) Particles: dake, nomi, bakari, shika, koso, nado, nazo, nanka, nante, kurai, demo, datte, sae,sura, made, mo, wa.
(b) Adverbs: tada, tan ni, moppara, hitoeni, masani, masashiku, hokademonaku, tokuni, kotoni,
toriwake, waketemo, nakanzuku, nakanimo, omoni, shutoshite, tatoeba, mushiro, dochiraka to ieba,
isso, iwanya, mashite, sukunakutomo, semete, tatta, wazuka, takadaka, takaga.
What becomes the focus may vary: nouns, adverbs, predicates, case component + predicate
combinations, entire sentences. The word group in (b) may be suffixed to the focus as in (2) and(3), show up in the focus as in (4), or may appear at the end of the sentence, away from the focus, asin (5).
(2) Sōsō [nonbirito] bakari shiteirarenai ‘I shouldn’t be so [relaxed].’ (Adverb)(3) Shigoto rashii shigoto wa naku, tada [kyaku kara no denwa o toritsugu] dake da ‘There’s noreal work. I only [answer phone calls from clients].’ (Case component + Predicate)(4) Kare wa ben ga tatsu. [Ude mo ii.] ‘He has a way with words.
sentence)

He [is competent, too].’ (Entire(5) Komugiko wa [hanryō] o tsukau dake de, nokori hanbun wa ato ni nokoshite okimasu ‘We will
only be using [half] the flour. We will save the other half for later.’ (Noun)
Please note that the words in (a) and (b) may be used for other functions than focusing in sentences.
For example, dake in(6) Kome no meshi ga tabetai dake taberareru. ‘You can eat as much boiled rice as you want.’
affects the entire phrase, “tabetaidake.” Its function is to create an adverbial phrase that expresses
the quantity of “kome no meshi.” Its function is not focus. Wa of focus is wa of contrast, as in (7).
The typical wa of topic, which does not concern someone else as in (8), is not wa of focus.
(7) Sūgaku wa sukida ga, rika wa kiraida ‘I like math, but I don’t like science.’164

(8) Hajimemasite. Watashi wa Tanaka Hanako to mōshimasu ‘How do you do?
Tanaka Hanako.’

My name is→助詞 Particles (2-B), モダリティの副詞 Adverbs of Modality (2-H)
 References
Kudo, Hiroshi (2000) ‘Fukushibun to bun no chinjutsuteki na taipu’ (Adverbial Sentences andDeclarative Types of Sentences) in Moriyama, Takuro et al. Nihongo no Bunpō 3 Modaritii(Japanese Grammar 3: Modality). Iwanami Shoten.
Numata, Yoshiko (2000) ‘Toritate’ (Focus) in Kinsui, Satoshi et al., Nihongo n bunpō 2 toki, hitei
to toritate (Japanese Grammar 2: Time, Negation and Focus). Iwanami Shoten.
(Numata Yoshiko)165

 Sae and Made: Focus of Unexpectedness
Both sae and made express that the component X (focus) shows unexpectedness and extremenesscompared to others in the same category. Both also allow the reader to analogize that others in thesame category as X naturally will behave the same as X, given the degree of extremeness that X
demonstrates. This is called the focus of unexpectedness. Sae and made are interchangeable in(1).
(1) Tarō {sae/made}yatte kita ‘Even Taro came.’
This type of focusing may indicate that the development of a situation, intensity of a situation,
attributes, and the intensity of attributes of people and things, are unexpected.
(2) Kioku sōshitsu de jibun no na {sae/made} wasureta ‘Because of amnesia, he even forgot his
name.’(3) Kodomo no kuse ni, kare wa riron butsurigaku {sae/made} rikai suru ‘Despite the fact that he isa child, he even comprehends theoretical physics.’
It is indicated that, in (2) the degree of his illness, and in (3) the extraordinary nature of his attribute,are unexpected.
Made differs from sae in the following point. Sae only lets the reader analogize that, if X is Y, allothers are naturally Y as well. On the other hand, made indicates that it is established that others
are Y, and made can only be used to add X to all others.
(4) Yūshō kōho datta kare ga shosen ni {sae/*made} yaburete shimatta ‘He had been the top
choice for the championship, but he didn’t win even the first match.’
In (4), “the first match” is X. “The chance of him losing to someone” is higher in subsequent
matches. If he loses the first match, there will be no more matches. Therefore, one cannot add“the first match” to the remaining matches. For this reason, sae sound appropriate, but made isunnatural.
Made cannot be used unless there is continuity between X and the others. The unexpectedness ineach of the components in the others starts at zero and the degree of unexpectedness gradually
increases, culminating in X. Sae does not necessarily require such continuity.
(5) Shirōto ni {sae/?made} wakaru fudōsan tōshi ‘Real estate investment that even non-experts
understand’
Made is somewhat unnatural in (5) because the continuity that should exist between experts andnon-experts (=X) is not obvious.
Made is used when the context looks at the progression of a situation that has been arrived at fromthe accumulation of actual events or the degree of progression. Conversely, sae is used in a context
where such consideration is irrelevant or unattainable.
In a negative sentence, sae and made may call for different interpretations.

166

(6) Oya ni sae hanasanakatta ‘I didn’t even talk to my parents.’
In (6) “my parents” are included in those “whom I didn’t talk to.” In (7), in addition to meaning
what (6) does, it has a second meaning of “not bothering to talk to my parents.” Such difference
becomes evident from the context. Sae is unnatural in (8).
(7) Oya ni made hanasanakatta ‘I didn’t bother to talk to my parents.’(8) Tanin no fūfugenka ni {?sae/made} kuchi o dasanai ‘do not stick one’s nose into someone else’s
marital quarrel.’→とりたて Focus (2-I)
 References
Kikuchi, Yasuto (2003) ‘Gendaigo no kyokugen no toritate’ (Extreme Focus in Contemporary
Japanese) in Numata, Yoshiko & Noda Hisashi ed., Nihongo no toritate – gendaigo to rekishiteki
henka, chiriteki ihen (Focus in Japanese – Contemporary Japanese and Historical Change &Geographical Change). Kurosio Publishers.
Nakashishi, Kumiko (1995) ‘Mo to made to sae, sura – igaisei o arawasu toritate joshi’ (Mo, Made,and Sae/Sura — Particles of Focus that Express Unexpectedness) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta
Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (jo) (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous ExpressionsI). Kurosio Publishers.
Numata, Yoshiko (2000) ‘Toritate’ (Focus) in Kinsui, Satoshi et al. Nihongo no bunpō 2 toki, hitee
and toritate “Japanese Grammar 2: Time, Negation, and Focus.” Iwanami Shoten.
Mogi, Toshinobu (1999) ‘Toritateshi made sae ni tsuite – hitei to no kakawari kara’ (Particles ofFocus Made and Sae: How They Relate to Negation) in Nihongo to Nihon Bungaku (Japanese
Language and Japanese Literature), 28.
(Numata Yoshiko)167

 Demo and Mo: Focus of Unexpectedness
In addition to focusing on accumulation, demo and mo, as well as sae and made, focus on
unexpectedness, which is an expression that X, which is the focus, is unexpectedly and extremely Y,
compared to others in the same category.
(1) Kare wa mōjū {demo/mo/sae/made} jiyūni ayatsureru ‘He can handle even fierce animals withease.’Mo and demo differ from sae and made in that they require a context that indicates X is an extreme
element. Especially in an example such as (2), mo can be interpreted to focus on accumulation; itis hard to think that this use of mo is focus of unexpectedness without further information.
(2) Tarō to {demo/mo/sae/made} nakayoku asonda ‘I played happily even with Taro.’
Demo of unexpectedness is continuous with demo which is used to form reverse conditional clauses.
Demo in (1) suggests the meaning of condition or exemplification which can be paraphrased, mōjūno baai demo ‘even in the case of fierce animals’. If expressions that lead into conditional clauses,
such as tatoe, are inserted, mo, sae, and made cannot be used, but demo is still appropriate.
(3) Kare wa tatoe mōjū {demo/*mo/*sae/*made} jiyūni ayatsureru.
Further, it is not possible to decide whether demo is used to focus on unexpectedness or reverse
condition in the following examples.
(4) Kinō wa ame demo undōkai o kekkō shita ‘We went ahead and held the athletic meet although it
rained.’(5) Tatoe imakara demo osokunai ‘It is not too late if we start now.’
Another characteristic of demo is that, unlike mo and others, it does not focus on the predicate, as
shown in (6).
(6) Hito no ashi o fundemo ayamari {*demo/mo} shinai ‘He doesn’t so much as apologize when hesteps on someone’s foot.’
When demo and mo focus on an interrogative word, it encompasses all components in the same
category, and mo expresses total negation, and demo expresses total affirmation. This is always
the case with nani.
(7) Kanojo wa {nani mo shiranai/nandemo shitte iru} ‘She knows nothing/knows everything.’
Datte also expresses unexpectedness and is used in colloquial expressions. Datte may be replaced
by demo in many instances, but it is not readily used in expressing situations that are alreadyestablished, or in expressing request and desire, as in “semete sore dake demo ‘Can I at least do…?’(8) Kinō wa ame {?datte/demo} undōkai o yatta yo ‘We held the athletic meeting in spite of rain.’(9) Semete hinto dake {*datte/demo} oshiiete yo ‘Give me at least a clue.’→Focus (2-I)
168

 References
Kikuchi, Yasuto (2003) ‘Gendaigo no kyokugen no toritate’ (Extreme Focus in Contemporary
Japanese) in Numata, Yoshiko & Noda Hisashi ed., Nihongo no toritate – gendaigo to rekishiteki
henka, chiriteki ihen (Focus in Japanese – Contemporary Japanese and Historical Change &Geographical Change). Kurosio Publishers.
Sadanobu, Toshiyuki (1995) ‘Shinriteki purosesu kara mita toritateshi mo・demo’(Particles of Focus, mo & demo, as Seen from Psychological Process) in Masuoka, Takashi et al. ed.,Nihongo no shudai to Toritate (Topics and Focus in Japanese). Kurosio Publishers.
Numata, Yoshiko (1995) ‘Gendai nihongo no mo – toritate-shi to sono shūhen’ (Mo inContemporary Japanese: Particles of Focus and Their Periphery) in Tsukuba Forum, ed., Mo nogengogaku (Linguistic Study of Mo).
Hituzi Syobo.
Tanba, Tetsuya (1995) ‘Sae, demo, datte nit suite’ (On Sae, Demo, and Datte) in Jimbun Kenkyū,
47-7.
Hasunuma, Akiko (1997) ‘Datte to demo – toritate to setsuzoku no sokan’ (Datte & Demo:
Relationship between Focus and Conjunction) in Himeji Dokkyo Daigaku Gaikokugogakubu
Kiyo,10.
(Numata Yoshiko)169

 Demo and Nanka: Focus of Exemplification
The particle of focus demo focuses on a certain situation as an example, and it may also indicatethat there are other options to choose from.
(1) Doraibu demo shimasu ka ‘How about a drive or something?’
In (1), going for a drive is the focus, but the implication is that anything will be fine as long as it isin the same category of activity as going for a drive.
Demo expresses exemplification only when the speech act and modality contain conative function
to the listener, and when the end of the sentence is not definitive.
(2) Uta demo utatte kudasai ‘How about singing a song for us, or something?’(3) Kissaten no mae de demo machiawase o shiyō ‘Let’s meet in front of a coffee shop, orsomething.’(4) Kono basho ni izakaya demo hiraku nodarō ka ‘I wonder if they are opening a pub or something
here.’The meaning of exemplification does not hold up if the sentence is definitive, such as describing
the past.
(5) *Doraibu demo shimashita.
Nanka is also a focus particle which focuses on a certain event or object to imply that there is more.
(6) Uchi no kagi nanka ni suzu o tsukeru to benri da ‘It’ll be useful if we put a bell on our house
key, for instance.’
Nanka may change to nado in formal style. In (6), keys other than that of the house, such as thatof a bicycle, and a car key, are implied. Nanka, which implies things that the listener can guess,functions almost like a particle of parallel construction.
Demo and nanka also have a usage where something else other than focus is suspected but not
identifiable.
(7) Kagyō o tsuide, isha ni demo naru ka ‘I might as well take over the family business and becomea doctor, or something.’(8) Tanaka san nanka gakusei jidai kara tosshutsu shite yūshū datta ne ‘Mr.Tanaka, for one, has
always stood out from the rest since he was a student, as I recall.’(9) Kochira no burausu nanka ikaga deshō ‘How would you like this blouse, for example?’
These sentences utilize exemplification as a means of euphemism, avoiding being restrictive.
Nanka may be replaced with demo only when the utterance and modality are conative toward thelistener, and when there is an implicit component.

170

(10) Murakami Haruki no hon {demo/nanka} yondemitara dō darō ka ‘Why not try reading a bookby Murakami Haruki, or something?’→デモとモ－意外性のとりたて Demo and Mo: Focus of Unexpectedness (2-I)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (1998) ‘Reiji no fukujoshi demo to bunmatsu seiyaku’ (The Adverbial Particle of
Exemplification, Demo, and Sentence Final Constraint) in Nihongo Kagaku, 3.
Hasunuma, Akiko (1997) ‘Datte to demo – toritate to setsuzoku no sōkan’ (Datte & Demo:
Relationship between Focus and Conjunction) in Himeji Dokkyo Daigaku Gaikokugogakubu
Kiyo,10.
(Nakanishi Kumiko)

171 Nanka and Nante: Focus of Low Rating
Nanka and nante express that the speaker considers what is in focus is of low value and is out of therange of consideration.
(1) Nattō {nanka/nante} taberarenai yo ‘I can’t eat (something like) natto.’(2) Nattō {nanka/nante} dokodemo kaemasu yo ‘You can buy natto just about anywhere.’(3) Nattō ni {nanka/nante} mayoneezu wa kakenai yo ‘I don’t put mayonnaise over natto.’
In (1) through (3), the speaker describes “nattō” as something of low rating, and paradigmatically
implies things that are of higher rating (e.g., fried lobster, steamed scallops), that is, the speaker
would consider something else worth scrutinizing, but natto is so low rating that it is easy to give a[low] evaluation without scrutiny. Nanka may change to nado in formal style.
Nanka and nante are almost always interchangeable semantically, except in the following three
usages.
(a) Nante cannot precede a case particle.
(4) Otōto {nanka/*nante} ni makenai zo ‘I am not going to be beaten by my mere young brother.
(5) Watashi {nanka/*nante} ga tsukuru sakuhin wa zenkokutaikai de wa nyūsenshinai darō ‘Aproduction prepared by someone like me wouldn’t win in the national contest.’(b) Nante cannot split a 用言 yōgen inside a clause when the entire clause is the focus.
(6) Yasui kudamono {nanka/*nante} dato, amami ga tarinai n desu yo ‘There is not enoughsweetness in, say, cheap fruit.’(7) Kōkōsei ga gakkō nimo ikazu Shibuya de jōhō kōkan shitari {nanka/?nante} shite iru n desu yo‘High school students exchange information in Shibuya instead of going to school.’(c) When nante contains [nado + to-quotational clause], it is not interchangeable with nanka.
(8) Watashi o mama {*nanka/nante(=nado to)} yobanaide ‘Don’t ever call me Mama.’(9) Ikitakunai {?nanka/nante(=nado to)} omotte imasen ‘I am not at all thinking I don’t want to go.’(10) Minna de jugyō o saborō {*nanka/nante (=nado to iu)} koto ni natta n da ‘Somehow we
ended up deciding to ditch class together.’(11) Paatii ni raamen {*nanka/nante (=nado to iu)} tabenikui ryōri wa dasanaide kudasai ‘Don’t
serve such a hard-to-eat dish like ramen, of all things, at the party.’(12) Jitensha ni norenai {*nanka/nante (=nado to wa)} shiranakatta naa ‘I didn’t know you
couldn’t ride a bicycle, of all things.’
In summary, nante is used in two ways: It is used with to that leads a quotational clause, as in (c), or
it is used without it.

172

→とりたて Focus (2-I), ナンカとクライ－低評価のとりたて Nanka and Kurai: Focus of Low
Rating(2-I)
 References
Numata, Yoshiko & Noda Hisashi ed., Nihongo no toritate – gendaigo to rekishiteki henka, chiriteki
ihen (Focus in Japanese – Contemporary Japanese and Historical Change & Geographical Change).
Kurosio Publishers.
Numata, Yoshiko (2000) ‘Toritate’ (Focus) in Kinsui, Satoshi et al., Nihongo n bunpō 2 toki, hitei
to toritate (Japanese Grammar 2: Time, Negation and Focus). Iwanami Shoten.
(Nakanishi Kumiko)173 Nanka and Kurai: Focus of Low Rating
Kurai expresses that the speaker thinks it is obvious that what is in focus is of low rating.
(1) Aisatsu kurai kichinto shinasai ‘At least greet properly.’
In (1) [the parent] has in mind a series of what a child should be able to do, on the gradable scale ofsimpler to more difficult, such as greeting to keeping tidy appearance to cleaning one’s own room,and so on. Greeting is at the bottom of the scale, and the child should be able to at least do that.
The implied corollary is that the child is not expected to do all other things.
The focus particle nanka may also express that the speaker considers what is focused is of low
rating.
(2) Nisemono no daiya no yubiwa nanka hoshikunai ‘I don’t want a diamond ring if it’s a fake.’
In (2), the gradable scale of fake diamond to genuine ruby to genuine diamond, etc., is implied, andthe speaker considers fake diamond to be low rating, but it does not have to be the worst. The low
rating expressed with nanka simply represents the speaker’s feeling that fake diamond is of low
rating and is out of the question to her. The speaker, thus, paradigmatically implies that genuine
diamond is an object for consideration to her.
Nanka and kurai are both focus particles of low rating, but they are often not interchangeable.
(1) Aisatsu {*nanka/kurai} kichinto shinasai.
(2) Nisemono no daiya no yubiwa {nanka/*kurai} hoshikunai.
Kurai basically is used in affirmative sentences, and nanka in negative sentences is notinterchangeable with kurai in many cases.
(3) Chūkosha {nanka/*kurai} hoshikunai ‘I don’t want car if it’s used.’
Nanka and kurai are of the same meaning and interchangeable only in affirmative sentences where
there is a context that, since X (the focus) is low rating, there is no dispute about Y.
(4) Nisemono no daia {nanka/kurai} ima suguni demo kaeru sa ‘I can buy a fake diamond any time,
like right now.’
Kurai is often used when the speaker feels that the reality is contrary to her/his prediction or
expectation, and when the speaker tells the listener about this discrepancy. (The utterance often
takes the form of conative utterance, such as advice and command.) It is not interchangeable withnanka in this usage.
(5) Mada hanashite inai no ka. Kazoku ni {*nanka/kurai} byōjō o hanasu beki da yo ‘Haven’t you
told your family yet? You should at least tell your family about the status of your illness.’→ とりたて Focus (2-I), ナンカとナンテ－低評価のとりたて Nanka and Nante: Focus of Low
Rating (2-I)
 References
174

Numata, Yoshiko & Noda Hisashi ed. (2003) Nihongo no toritate – gendaigo to rekishiteki henka,
chiriteki ihen (Focus in Japanese – Contemporary Japanese and Historical Change & Geographical
Change). Kurosio Publishers.
Numata, Yoshiko (2000) ‘Toritate’ “Focus” in Kinsui, Satoshi et al., Nihongo n bunpō 2 toki, hitei
to toritate (Japanese Grammar 2: Time, Negation and Focus). Iwanami Shoten.
(Nakanishi Kumiko)175 Dake and Shika: Focus of Limitation
Dake and Shika both possess the function of limitation. When we compare (1)a and (1)b, dake andshika seem to have the same function at the simple sentence level.
(1) a.

Tarō wa wain dake nomu ‘Taro drinks wine only.’b.

Tarō wa wain shika nomanai ‘Taro only drinks wine.’

In a context shown below, only one of them is appropriate.
(2)

A: Aisukōhii arimasu ka ‘Do you have iced coffee?’
B: Sumimasen.

Hotto shika oitenai n desu ‘I am sorry, all we carry is hot coffee.’

B’: Sumimasen. #Hotto dake oite iru n desu
coffee.’‘I am sorry, it is our policy to have only hot

There are instances when dake and shika are used simultaneously, as in (3).
(3) Kyō wa, hirugohan dake shika tabete inai ‘I have had only lunch today.’We must examine each context and contemplate the speaker’s intention as to why s/he chooses a
specific form.
The differences between dake and shika … nai are listed in (a) through (c).
(a) Dake is used with the antecedent in a conditional sentence to express the component of thesufficient condition, but shika … nai does not have this function.
(4) Sore dake areba jūbun da ‘If we have that much, it will do.’(5) *Sore shika nakereba jūbun da.
(b) Shika … nai is not readily used in expressions of demand and request. It requires a specificcontext.
(6) Kodomo dake wa tasukete kudasai ‘If no one else, please at least spare the children.’(7) #Kodomo shika tasukenaide kudasai ‘Please spare no one but children.’(c) Shika may be suffixed to a rounded number or an indefinite quantity, but dake sounds unnaturalin this usage.
(8) Kyō wa okane o ikuraka shika mottenai ‘I am carrying only a little money today.’(9) ?Kyō wa okane o ikuraka dake motte iru. ‘I am carrying just a little money today.’
The differences shown above indicate the speaker’s intention to use one or the other and thedifference in grammatical levels of dake and shika. Dake is used when the speaker wants to limit
the category to what is discussed in the particular context. The explicitly expressed component isobvious to the speaker. That is why rounded numbers and indefinite quantities are not appropriate.
176

On the other hand, the speaker uses shika when s/he acknowledges the realized situation
quantitatively, and wants to express that the reached quantity does not meet her/his estimate or
expectation which s/he had before the situation was realized. Thus, shika may be used with rounded
numbers and indefinite quantities, but it is not readily used in sentences that express a sufficientamount, demand or request. When dake and shika are used simultaneously, together they express
both limitation and insufficiency.
→とりたて Focus (2-I), ダケとバカリ－限定のとりたて Dake and Bakari: Focus of Limitation(2-I)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1991)

Nihongo no shintakusu III (Japanese Syntax III).

Kurosio Publishers.

Sadanobu, Toshiyuki (2003) ‘Gendaigo no gentee no toritate’ (Focus of Limitation in Contemporary
Japanese) in Numata, Yoshiko & Noda Hisashi ed., Nihongo no toritate – gendaigo to rekishiteki
henka, chiriteki ihen (Focus in Japanese – Contemporary Japanese and Historical Change &Geographical Change). Kurosio Publishers.
Yamanaka, Mieko (1993) ‘Gentee to hitee’ (Limitation and Negation) in Nihongo Kyoiku,79.
(Sawada Mieko)

177 Dake and Bakari: Focus of Limitation
Both dake and bakari express limitation. In (1), dake and bakari express that “in that cage there
was no other component than what was the explicit component, i.e., the lion.”(1) A: Sono ori ni wa nani ga imashita ka ‘What was in that cage?’
B:a) Raion dake imashita ‘There were only lions.’b) Raion bakari imashita ‘There were only lions.’

The noun “lion” represents a species in Example (1). The difference between B-a) and B-b)
becomes clear when we use a noun that represents individuals.
(2) A: Sono kyōshitsu ni wa dare ga imashita ka ‘Who was in the classroom?’B:a) Tarō dake imashita ‘There was only Taro.’b) Tarō bakari imashita ‘There were all Taros.’

In (2) B-a), dake may express that there were multiple Taros, but usually it means there was only
one Taro. On the other hand, bakari, as in B-b), means there were a number of people all of whomwere named Taro.
(3) Saikin, karee dake tabete iru ‘Lately I’ve been eating curry only.’(4) Saikin, karee bakari tabete iru ‘Lately I’ve been eating lots of curry.’
Sentence (3) means that the speaker has not been eating anything but curry. Sentence (4) may
mean that the speaker eats curry frequently but that s/he may also eat other things. That is, theprimary meaning of bakari is not to limit the category to “not eating anything but curry.” The
speaker’s emphasis is on describing that, upon reflecting on recent days, s/he has eaten curry often
and too much. The secondary effect that this expression brings up is that components that are incontrast to the explicit component (i.e., possible components other than the explicit component tobring about the phenomenon) were few or non-existent in the observed range. Restrictive
interpretation seems to derive as a result of describing a repeated phenomenon.
(5) Konogoro, ame bakari furu ne ‘It rains a lot these days.’(6)?Konogoro, ame dake furu ne.
In (5) and (6), dake is unnatural since it is used to limit the category, but bakari is natural because
the speaker uses bakari to first describe her/his observation of a certain situation, and, based onher/his experiential knowledge, s/he goes on to describe the phenomenon that s/he judges to be“more than usual.”→とりたて Focus (2-I), ダケとシカ－限定のとりたて Dake and Shika: Focus of Limitation(2-I)
 References

178

Kikuchi, Yasuhito (1983) ‘Bakari, dake’ in Kunihiro, Tetsuya, ed., Imi bunseki (Semantic Analysis).
Tokyo Daigaku Bungakubu Gengogaku Kenkyūshitsu.
Sadanobu, Toshiyuki (2001) ‘Tansaku to gendai nihongo no dake, shika, bakari’ (Exploration andDake, Shika and Bakari in Modern Japanese) in Nihongo bunpō 1-1 (Japanese Grammar 1-1).
Numata, Yoshiko (1992) ‘Toritateshi to shiten’ (Particles of Focus and Viewpoint) in Nihongogaku,
11-9.
Yamanaka, Mieko (1993) ‘Nihongo no gentei hyōgen’ (Expressions of Limitation in Japanese) in
KANSAI LINGUISTIC SOCIETY, 13. Kansai Gengo Gakkai.
(Sawada Mieko)

179 Quantifier + Wa & Mo
In an affirmative sentence, the form, quantifier + wa, implies that the minimum quota has been
established, but the established quantity is not explicit.
(1) 10nin wa kita ‘At least 10 people came.’
In a negative sentence, the interpretation is different depending on whether the form, quantifier +wa, is outside or inside of the negated scope.
(2) 10nin wa konakatta.
[Interpretation 1] Within the scope of negation; the number of people didn’t reach 10.
[Interpretation 2] Outside the scope of negation; at least 10 people didn’t show up. That is, when
the form is outside the scope of negation, the interpretation is the same as with an affirmative
sentence.
The form, quantifier + mo, differs from the form, quantifier + wa, in that the former describes
explicitly the established quantity when the sentence is affirmative. Mo adds the meaning that theestablished quantity is unexpectedly larger than the speaker’s expectation and prediction.
(3) 10nin mo kita ‘As many as 10 people showed up.’
In a negative sentence, the interpretation differs whether the form, quantifier + mo, occurs outside
or inside the scope of negation, same with the form, quantifier + wa.
(4) 10nin mo konakatta.
[Interpretation 1] The form is inside the scope of negation. The quantity was smaller than what the
speaker had expected or predicted. The speaker had expected that at least 10 people would show
up but the actual number was less than 10.
[Interpretation 2] The form is outside the scope of negation. The speaker expresses that
unexpectedly the number of people who didn’t show up was larger than expected or predicted. S/he
hadn’t expected that as many as 10 people wouldn’t show up. The sentence says that the actual
number of those who didn’t show up reached 10. The sentence expresses unexpectedness that the
number exceeded speculation, same as in the affirmative sentence.
The relationship between the forms quantifier + wa/mo and negation is important.
→数量詞 Quantifiers (2-B)
 References
Ijima, Masahiro (1995) ‘Sūryōshi to wa, mo’ (Quantifiers and wa & mo) in
Tsukishima Hirosi Hakushi Koki Kinenkai ed., Tsukishima Hiroshi hakushi koki kinen kokugogaku
ronshū (Anthology Commemorating Dr. Tsukishima Hiroshi’s 70th Birthday). Kyuko Shoin.

180

Sadanobu, Toshiyuki (1995) ‘Shinriteki purosesu kara mita toritateshi mo, demo’(Particles of Focus, mo & demo, as Seen from Psychological Process) in Masuoka, Takashi et al. ed.,Nihongo no shudai to toritate (Topics and Focus in Japanese). Kurosio Publishers.
Yamanaka, Mieko (1991) ‘Mo no gan’i ni tsuite sono 2 – sūryōshi + mo o chūshin ni’ (Implicationof Mo: II – With a Focus on Quantifier + Mo) in KANSAI LINGUISTIC SOCIETY, 11. Kansai
Gengogaku Kenkyūkai.
(Sawada Mieko)

181

 Zero Particle and Ellipsis of Case Particles
In speech, particles often do not show up, as shown below.
space.)(ø indicates absence of particle in the(1) (To Ms. Hayashi) Hayashi san ø kono kaban ø kau? ‘Ms. Hayashi, are you going to buy thisbag?’Such absence of particle has two functions.
One function appears, as in (1), at the beginning of a sentence, and it replaces wa. The difference
between wa and zero particle is that the latter does not indicate comparison. Especially when thesubject is first or second person, zero particle happens more often than wa. Conversely, when thecontext is comparative, it is not common to leave out the particle.
(2) A: Rei no paatii ni iku? ‘Are you going to that party we’ve talked about?’
B: Boku {wa/?ø } iku.

Tsuma {wa/?ø } ikanai ‘I am.

My wife isn’t.’

Ga of exclusion does not easily become a zero particle.
(3) A: Dare da, garasu o watta no wa? ‘Who (was it that) broke the glass?’
B: Boku {ga/?ø } warimashita ‘I did.’
The other function shows up elsewhere in a sentence, as “kono kaban ø” in (1).
of a case particle (o, in this example).
Of the case particles, ga, o, ni (direction), and e may be omitted.
to, kara, and made cannot be omitted.

It is an omission

Ni (the other party, location), de,(4) Kondo Oosaka {ni/e/ø} ikō ‘Let’s go to Osaka next time.’ (Direction)(5) Kono ken wa kare {ni/*ø} tanomō ‘I’ll ask him to take care of this matter.’ (The other party)(6) Kare wa jiko {de/*ø} shinda ‘He was killed in an accident.’ (Cause)(7) Kare wa Chūgoku {kara/*ø} kita ‘He came from China.’
Such non-use of particle is grouped together as ellipsis of particles. However, in the first example
there is a positive reason for the absence of particle, and thus, it is not appropriate to call it ellipsis.
(This is sometimes called the ø-marker case.) In written language absence of particles do notnormally occur.
→Topic (2-I), Characteristics of Spoken Language (4-B)
 References
Iori, Isao, et al. (2001) Chūjōkyū o oshieru hito no tame no nihongo bunpō handobukku (Handbookof Japanese Grammar for Those Who Teach Intermediate and Advanced Classes). 3A Network.

182

Noda, Hisashi (1996). ‘Wa to ga’ (Wa and Ga) in Shin Nihongo bunpō sensho 1 (New Anthology ofJapanese Grammar 1). Kurosio Publishers.
(Iori Isao)183

 Te / Continuative-Form Clauses

 Formation of the Te/Continuative-Form ClausesThis clause is also called the なかどめ nakadome (continuative-form) clause, where the predicate
is formed by the te form or so called “Renyokee” (adverbial form). Clauses formed by the te form
and those by the adnominal form are essentially used in the same way. The adverbial form clauses
are stylistically archaic, and are used in written language. They are not used much in spoken
language.
 Usages of the Te/Continuative-Form Clauses
Te/Continuative-form clauses have the following usages.
(1) They express the manner in which the main situation is realized.
Kare wa, ashi o nagedashite, hito no hanashi o kiiteita ‘He was listening to someone’s talk with his
legs stretched out.’(2) They express the means/method with which to realize the situation.
Boku wa jitensha ni notte, gakkō made kita ‘I rode my bike to school.’(3) They express events that occur in succession.
Kare wa asa 6ji ni okite, 7ji ni ie o deta ‘He got up at 6am and left the house at 7am.’(4) They express the cause of the occurrence of the main situation.
Tsumetai nomimono o nomisugi, kare wa onaka o kowashita ‘Due to having too much cold drink, he
got a diarrhea.’
Ame ga furazu, kanbatsu ga okita ‘Due to lack of rain, a drought occurred.’(5) They express events in parallel construction relationship.
Ani wa ki ga yasashikute, otōto wa ki ga tsuyoi ‘The older brother is gentle, and the younger brotheris strong-willed.’
It is not the te/continuative form that generates the specialization of meaning. Rather, thesemantics of what comes before and after the form contributes to how the meaning is expressed.
 Characteristics of Each Usage
Manner: When manner is expressed, the subject in both clauses are the same, and the subject inthe te/continuative-form clause must be omitted (e.g, *Kare wa koshi o ukashite, kare wa soto omiteita ‘He was in a half rising posture from his chair while he was looking out the window.’)
When this form expresses manner, the passive may be used, as in Kare wa haha ni te o hikarete,heya o deteitta ‘He went out of the room as his mother led him by his hand,’ but the form does notoccur with aspect or negation, nor politeness or tense. The stative predicate is not used in this usage.
184

Shinagara also expresses manner. A shinagara-clause is created with the verb which expresses the
subject’s movement, as in Kare wa, rikkyō o watarinagara, shita o mita ‘He looked down as he wasgoing across the overpass.’ This type of verbs basically express sequence when they are used in
the te/continuative-form clause, as in Kare wa, rikkyō o watatte, shita o mita ‘He went across theoverpass and looked down.’
Sequencing: The subject of the main clause and that in the te clause are often the same, as in Karewa pen o oite, tachiagatta ‘He put down the pen and stood up,’ and Boku wa kare ni atte, jijō okiita ‘I met him and asked what had happened.’ In some instances the two clauses have different
subjects, as in Doa ga aite, otoko ga sugata o arawashita ‘The door opened, and a man appeared.’
Verbs used in the te/continuative-form clause that express sequence are motion verbs, and many arevolitional verbs.
Cause: When the sentence expresses cause, the subject of the main clause and that of thesubordinate clause may be the same or different, as in Boku wa myōni irairashite nemurenakatta ‘I
was agitated for unknown reasons, and couldn’t sleep,’ and Ooame ga furi, ie ga takusan
nagasareta ‘Due to heavy rain, many houses got washed away.’ Node, which explicitly expresses
the reason, can make what happens later as the reason, as in Asu hito ga kuru node, heya no sōji oshita ‘I cleaned my room since I’ll have a guest tomorrow.’ It is not possible to express the cause
in the te/continuative-form clause in this manner (e.g., *Asu hito ga kite, heya no sōji o shita’).
Parallel Construction: The predicate tends to be the te form rather than the adverbial form inparallel construction. Motion predicates occur, but stative predicates are more common.
→ナガラ・ツツ Nagara and Tsutsu (2-J), 従属節の階層性 Hierarchy of Subordinate Clauses(2-J)
 References
Suzuki, Shigeyuki (1972) Nihongo bunpō・keitairon (Japanese Grammar: Morphology). Mugi
Shobo.
Nitta, Yoshio (1995) ‘Shite-kee setsuzoku o megutte’ (On Conjunction Using Shite Form) in
Fukubun no kenkyū (jo) (Study of Complex Sentences I). Kurosio Publishers.
(Nitta Yoshio)185

 Kiri, Mama and NariKiri, mama, and nari are affixed to the ta form of verbs to express “as is,” as in Suwatta{kiri/mama/nari} tachiagarō to shinai ‘He continues to stay sitting, and wouldn’t stand up.’ The
former clause expresses that the result of the movement or function continues to exist, and the verb
fundamentally has to be an instantaneous verb. The action or function in the two clauses must be
performed by the same subject.
Ta kiri is often followed by the nai form or a negative expression, and it expresses that the situationin the first clause has not had any development (e.g., Ame wa 3kagetsu mae ni futta kiri, ichido mo
futteinai ‘It rained 3 months ago, and hasn’t rained at all since then,’ Ichido tegami o dashita kiri,sono hito no koto o wasureta ‘I wrote to the person once, and totally forgot about him’). Ta mama
generally expresses that the situation in the latter clause occurs while the situation in the former
clause continues to exist, that is, it expresses an attendant circumstance (e.g., Tatta mama taberu‘eat while standing up,’ Gurasu o motta mama arukimawaru ‘walk around while holding a glass’).
Kiri cannot replace mama in this usage. Ta nari is an older expression. Instead of ta nari, ta kiri orta mama is used. (Regarding the ru form, it generally expresses the meaning of “at the same time,
immediately” as in Ie ni kaeritsuku nari, beddo ni taorekonda ‘As soon as I got home, I collapsedon the bed.) Ta kiri explains the situation in question, and volition, desire, and command do notshow up readily in the latter clause (e.g., *Itta kiri kaette kuruna). With ta mama, utterances suchas the following are possible: Asa wa futon ni haitta mama kōhii o nomitai ‘I’d like to drink coffee
while staying in bed in the morning,’ Kyō wa suwatta mama utainasai ‘Sing while staying seatedtoday’).
Mama is affixed to adnominals, noun+ no, adnominal form of na-adjectives, adjectives, verbs, andthe ta-form, ru-form, and nai-form of the passive and causative auxiliary verbs (e.g., sono mama ‘asis,’ hadashi no mama ‘without one’s shoes on,’ kenkōna mama de nagaiki suru ‘live long whilestaying in good health,’ utsukushii mama shinitai ‘want to die while staying beautiful,’ omou
mama ni ikitai ‘wants to live as one wants,’ iwareru (ga) mama ni suru ‘do as someone tells’). It
also appears in forms such as mama no, mama o, mama ni, mama de, mama da. Kiri is affixed tothe ta form of verbs and passive and causative auxiliary verbs. It also appears in the forms, sorekiri and ta kiri da.
→従属節の階層性 Hierarchy of Subordinate Clauses (2-J), ナガラ・ツツ Nagara and Tsutsu(2-J)
 References
Group Jamashii, ed. (1998) Kyoshi to Gakushusha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapananese Sentence Patterns for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
Miyake, Tomohiro (1995) ‘-Nagara, -ta mama, to -te’ (-Nagara, -Ta mama, and -Te) in Miyajima,
Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (ge) (Grammar of Japanese
Synonymous Expressions II). Kurosio Publishers.
(Kawagoe Nahoko)186 Ba, To, Tara, and Nara: Conditional
Conditional expresses the cause and effect relationship between one event and another event that ispredicted to become the first event’s result. The basic conditional forms are ba, to, tara, and nara.
They form the following types of conditional sentences.
 Hypothetical Condition
The first group of conditional sentences expresses hypothetical conditions in which both thecondition and the result are yet to be realized. All four forms may be used in this type.
(1) Kusuri o nome ba, netsu wa sagaru darō ‘If you take the medicine, the fever will probably go
down.’(2) Ano saka o noboru to, Fuji san ga miemasu yo ‘If you climb that slope, you’ll see Mt. Fuji.’(3) Shigoto ga owattara, denwashimasu ‘Once I’m done with my work, I’ll call you.’(4) Asu shigoto ga aru nara, kyō wa mō kaere ‘If you have work tomorrow, go home for the day.’
Ba is suitable for expressing the necessary condition for realizing the situation in the main clause,
and it expresses that “if one does X, the situation in the main clause will be realized.” Thus, bacannot be used when the speaker tells the listener about an occurrence of an unwanted situation.
(5) *Osake o nomisugire ba kanzō o warukusuru yo.
To presents the situation where “If X occurs, Y inevitably occurs.” Tara may also be used in (1)and (2). Generally, tara and nara are used when the main clause expresses command/request andvolition/desire. Ba is also possible in this usage if the conditional clause has a stative predicate.
(6) Kono hon, hoshikere ba, ageyō ‘If you want this book, I’ll give it to you.’(7) Jikan ga nakere ba, asu kitekudasai ‘If you don’t have time [now], please come tomorrow.’
Ba becomes nara in a nominal predicate sentence.
(8) Asu ame nara, shiai wa chūshi da ‘If it rains tomorrow, the match will be canceled.’
Only nara can reverse the temporal relationship between the condition and result, as in (4). Thenara conditional sentence does not convey what will happen if the condition is realized.
Rather,it expresses the speaker’s judgment/evaluation/attitude toward the situation that s/he has confirmed.
(9) Pasokon o kau nara, ano mise ga yasui ‘If you are to get a PC, that shop has a good price.’This usage of nara may express the topic.
(10) Wain nara aka ga ii ‘As for wine, I’d like red wine.’
Some hypothetical conditions are used right after the situation, which constitutes the condition, has
occurred.
(11) Koko made kure ba, mō anshin da ‘We’re safe now that we’ve come this far.’187

Especially nara may express the speaker’s judgment toward the other party’s utterance that has
been just made.
(12)

Tonari no ie ni dorobō ga haittanda yo ‘A burglar broke into our neighbor’s house.’

Otonari ni haitta nara, otaku mo abunai ne ‘Yours may be next if your neighbor’s house
was broken in.’(13) Shimbun wa? Shimbun nara, koko ni aru yo ‘Where’s the newspaper?
here.’The newspaper is Counter-Factual Condition
The second group of conditional sentences expresses counter-factual condition, where neither thecondition nor the result occurred. Ba, tara, and nara are used with this group.
(4) Kusuri o nome ba, netsu ga sagatta noni ‘Had you taken the medicine, the fever would havegone down.’(15) Musuko ga ikiteita nara, kotoshi hatachi desu ‘If my son were alive, he would be 20 this year.’
The function of expressing counter-factual condition is unique to conditional sentences. This typeof condition is not readily expressed with to. This indicates that, of the 4 forms, the ability to
express condition is the weakest with to. Also, the condition may be factual with nara.
(16) Ame ga furu nara, kasa o mottekita noni ‘I would have brought an umbrella, had I known it
was going to rain.’ General Condition
The third group is general condition, which expresses the cause and effect relationship that is not
limited to any specific point in time. Usually this type is expressed with ba or to.
(17) Osake o nome ba, ketsuatsu ga agaru ‘If you drink, your blood pressure will go up.’(18) Teekiatsu ga chikazuku to, tenki ga waruku naru ‘When a low atmospheric pressure approaches,
weather turns bad.’
When an event repeats more than once, the relationship is that of habit or repetition.
(19) Jikan ga are ba, eega o {miru/mita mono da} ‘When I have/had time, I go see/used to go see amovie.
(20) Chichi wa osake o nomu to, kao ga akakunaru ‘When my father drinks, his face turns red.’ Factual Condition
The fourth group is factual condition, where for both the condition and the result there is a factual
condition that has occurred once before. To and tara are used for this group to express thesituation that triggers the result.
(21) Doa o akeru to, kōto o nuida ‘When he opened the door, he took off his coat.
188

(22) Doa o akeru {to/tara}, kaze ga haittekita ‘When I opened the door, the wind came in.’(23) Doa o akeru {to/tara}, Chichi ga tatteita ‘When I opened the door, my father was standing
there.
(24) Hon o yondeiru {to/tara}, denwa ga natta ‘I was reading a book, when the phone rang.’
Unlike to in (21), tara is not used for the same subject’s volitional continuous action. Tara may be
used if the speaker relates orally what s/he directly experienced.
(25) Futon ni haittara, sugu nechatta yo ‘As soon as I got into the futon, I fell asleep.’(26) Satō sensei ni shitsumon shitara, oshietekuremashita ‘I asked Prof. Sato, and she answered myquestion.’
Except for nara, all conditional clauses may function as an introductory remark to an utterance or averb that expresses thought.
(27) Omoeba, mukashi wa yoku nonda ‘Come to think of it, I used to drink a lot.’(28) Hakkiri iu to, sore wa machigai da ‘If I may, to be frank, that is a mistake.’(29) Kangaetemitara, kare wa mada hatachi da ‘Come to think of it, he’s only 20 years of age.’
Conditional clauses may also 接続語化、複合格助詞化、form complex expressions that express
当為.
→条件節の周辺形式 More Related Forms of Conditional Clauses (2-J), 勧め Suggestion (2-H),
義務・許容 Obligation and Permission (2-H)
 References
Masuoka, Takashi, ed. (1993) Nihongo no jōken hyōgen (Conditioinal Expressions in Japanese).
Kurosio Publishers.
Hasunuma, Akiko (2001) ‘Jōken hyōgen’ (Conditioinal Expressions) in Serufu mastaa shiriizu 7(Self Master Series, 7). Kurosio Publishers.
(Maeda Naoko)

189

 More Related Forms of Conditional Clauses
In addition to to, ba, tara and nara, there are other conditional forms.
Tewa is used in conditions where undesirable events and negative results occur. It may also be
used with hypothetical conditions, general conditions, and counter-factual conditions. The formchanges to dewa when affixed to a noun.
(1) Mainichi rensyūshinaku tewa, jōzuni naranai ‘Your skills won’t improve unless you practice
every day.’(2) Kimi ni sō iware tewa, kaesu kotoba mo nai ‘I don’t know how to respond to what you say.’(3) Ningen wa hitori dewa ikiteikenai ‘A human being cannot live all by her/himself.’(4) Kimi ga inaku tewa, kitto shippaishiteita yo ‘I would surely have failed without you.’
The main clause for the tewa clause can only be a declarative sentence. No imperative or
volitional sentences are possible.
When tewa relates a factual event, it expresses the repetition of the action or phenomenon.
(5) Asonde bakari itewa, chichi ni shikarareta ‘I used to play a lot, and my father would scold me.’(6) Shiroi nami ga arawaretewa kieteiku ‘White waves keep appearing and disappearing.’
Kagiri attaches to a stative predicate and states the result that occurs within the scope and situationof the circumstance.
(7) Ikiteiru kagiri, go’on wa wasuremasen ‘I won’t forget your kindness as long as I live.’(8) Jibun de minai kagiri, zettaini shinjinai ‘I won’t believe it unless and until I see it with my own
eyes.’
Shinai kotoniwa is also used to describe hypothetical conditions that bring about undesirable results,
and constructs sentences which argue for the realization of the situation raised in the condition.
(9) Mainichi rensyūshinai koto niwa, jōtatsushinai ‘Your skills won’t improve unless you practice
every day.’
The above example is sayint that “it is desirable to practice every day”.
With shiyō mono nara, the condition is a situation that the speaker wishes not to happen. The
speaker expresses that an unwanted result will occur, and that s/he does not wish the condition to
become reality. The effect of this form is hyperbolic.
(10) Himitsu o hito ni hanasō mono nara, tada dewa okanai zo (i.e., don’t tell anyone) ‘If you tell
the secret to others, I will make sure you won’t be unscathed.’
Shite miro also expresses that the speaker wishes the hypothetical condition to not become reality.
It is used in conversation.

190

(11) Uso no shinkoku o shite miro, suguni kokuhatsu sareru zo ‘If you submit a false claim, you’ll
immediately be procecuted.’(12) Otōto ga jisatsu demo shite miro, omae o isshō yurusanai kara na ‘Should my younger brotherkill himself, I won’t forgive you the rest of my life.’
Shitaga saigo presents in the main clause the inevitable result of the situation described in thecondition. The resulting event is emphasized and exaggerated. It may express a hypothetical or
factual condition.
(13) Himitsu o shitta ga saigo, omae mo nakama ni haittemorau ‘Once you know the secret, you’regoing to have to join our group.’(14) Meejin ga tsukuru ryōri wa, ichido ajiwattaga saigo, shōgai wasurerarenai oishisa da ‘Once
you’ve tasted food prepared by a master chef, you won’t forget the delicious taste of it all your life.’(15) Ie o deta ga saigo, nidoto modoranakatta ‘Once he left home, he never came back.’
Baai and toki primarily express a temporal relationship. When they are made the focus by thefunction of wa, and when they connect hypothetical events, the clauses become closer toexpressing a hypothetical condition.
(16) Moshi jiko ga okotta baai ni wa, sumiyakani ninanshite kudasai ‘Should an accident occur,
please evacuate promptly.’(17) Renraku ga nai baai wa, keisatsu ni tsūhō shimasu ‘If they don’t contact us, we’ll report thepolice.’(18) Shōgakusei ga kono norimono ni noru baai ni wa, hogosha no kyoka ga hitsuyō desu ‘We need
the guardian’s permission if an elementary school child boards this vehicle.’(19) Ame ga futta toki wa chūshi desu ‘If it rains, [the event] will be cancelled.’
When the condition precedes the result, as in (16), (17) and (19), the baai construction may bereplaced by the ba, tara, or to construction. The nara constructioin may replace the baai
construction in (18).
When a temporal expression becomes the focus by the function of wa, it will contain theimplication that “such a result will not be obtained in situation other than what is given.” Thisimplication overlaps with the characteristic of hypothetical conditions, and makes the baai form
close to a conditional form. The expression below, which meets the requirements of a conditional
expression semantically and syntactically, also is close to a conditional form.
(20) Shiken ga owatta hito wa, kaettemoii desu ‘Those who have finished the exam may leave.’→バ・ト・タラ・ナラ－条件 Ba, To, Tara and Nara: Conditional (2-J), とりたて Focus (2-I)
 Reference

191Group Jamashii, ed. (1998) Kyoshi to Gakushusha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapananese Sentence Patterns for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
(Maeda Naoko)

192

 Temo, Tatte and Tokoro: Adversative Condition
Adversative conditional expressions negate the conditional relationship described as in (1). (2)and (3) are examples of adversative conditional sentences. Adversative condition expresses thatthe expected result will not be obtained because the condition does not work effectively, or thepredicted result will be obtained even if necessary conditions are not met.
(1) Shujutsu sureba, byōki wa naoru darō ‘If one has an operation, he will probably get well.’(2) Shujutsu shite mo, byōki wa naoranai darō ‘Even if he has an operation, he probably won’t get
well.’(3) Shujutsushinakute mo, byōki wa naoru darō ‘Even if he doesn’t have an operation, he willprobably get well.’Of the forms of adversative condition, temo, tatte and tokorode, temo has the broadest application.
(4) Shujutsu shinakutemo, byōki wa naotta darō ‘You would have gotten well had you not had an
operation.’(5) Arattemo, arattemo, kono shimi wa torenai ‘This stain wouldn’t come off no matter how hard I
wash.’(6) Osake o nondemo nomanakutemo, kaihi wa onaji desu ‘The fee is the same whether you drink
or not.’(7) Ame ga futtemo kaze ga fuitemo, shinbunhaitatsu no shigoto wa yasumenai ‘Rain or wind, I
can’t take a break from delivering newspapers.’(8) Itsu denwashitemo, kare wa rusu da ‘He’s never home every time I call him.’(9) Sensei ni kiitemo, wakaranakatta ‘I asked my teacher, but she didn’t know the answer.’(2) and (3) are examples of adversative condition, and (4) is an example of counter-factual
condition. Adverbs such as tatoe, yoshinba, and karini may collocate in such constructions. (5)through (7) are examples of parallel condition where the condition is repeated more than once.
Parallel condition expresses that the same result will be obtained either way. (8) is an example
where an interrogative word comes before temo, and it expresses that no matter what happens, theresult will inevitably be the same. (9) is an example of factual condition, and it expresses a factthat happened once in the past (i.e., one asked the teacher but the teacher did not know the answer).
Tatte is the colloquial equivalent of temo, and temo in (2) through (8) may be replaced with tatte.
Temo in (9), which expresses factual condition, cannot be replaced by tatte.
Tokorode is affixed only to the ta form of verbs, and it is not affixed to adjectives or nominal
predicates. It is not used for parallel condition or factual condition.
(10) Isoida tokorode maniawanai darō. ‘We won’t make it even if we hurry.’(11) Shiken ga yasashi {*katta tokorode/kutemo/ku(t)tatte} gōkaku dekinai darō ‘Even if the exam
is easy, I probably won’t pass.’
193

(12) Tatoe ame {*datta tokorode/demo/datte} shiai wa kekkō saremasu ‘Even if it rains, the match
will be carried out.’
Tokorode is used when the speaker expresses that the effort to obtain the expected outcome will be
waisted because the condition will not work effectively, or to express that the speaker downplays
the significance of the obtained outcome even if the conditioin worked favorably.
(13) Shujutsu shita tokorode, byōki wa naoranai darō ‘Even if he has an operation, he won’t get
well.’(14) Shippaishita tokorode, nantoka naru sa ‘Even if I fail, it’ll somehow work out.’
Tokorode cannot be used to express desirable results or to express objective evaluation without
being judgmental.
(15) Shujutsushina {*katta tokorode/kutemo/kutatte} byōki wa naorimasu yo ‘Even if you don’t
have an operation you will get well.’(16) Shigatsu ni nat {*tta tokorode/temo} hadazamui hi ga tsuzuku deshōcomes, the cold spell will continue.’‘Even when April

Further, tokorode differs from temo and tatte in that it does not form idiomatic expressions, such asshitemo ii/shitatte ii, or it does not collocate with expressions of hope, volition and command at theend of the sentence (e.g., Hantaisare {*tatokorode/temo/tatte} ryūgakushitai(desire)/shiyō(volition)/shinasai (command).)→バ・ト・タラ・ナラ
条件 (2-J)
 References
Maeda, Naoko (1994) ‘-Temo/tatte/tokorode/tokoroga’ in Nihongogaku, 13-9.
Miyazaki, Shigeko (1984) ‘-Ta tokorode/-ta tokorodewa’ in Nihongogaku, 3-10.
(Hasunuma Akiko)194

 Kara, Node and Te: Cause and Reason
Both kara and node express the cause that brings about the result.
(1) Natsu wa atsui {kara/node}, hana ga sugu kareru ‘Because it’s hot in summer, flowers wither
quickly.’(2) Kusuri o nonda {kara/node}, netsu ga sagatta ‘Because I took my medicine, the fever went
down.’
They also express the ground for the speaker’s judgment that appears in the main clause, and thereason for the speaker’s attitude (e.g., command and wish).
(3) Heya no denki ga tsuiteiru kara, mada naka ni hito ga iru nodarō ‘The lights in the room are on,so there still must be some people inside.’(4) Kaze o hiku kara, uwagi o kinasai ‘Put on your jacket, or you’ll catch a cold.’(5) Kekkonkinenbi nanode, hayaku kaeritai ‘I want to go home early because it’s our wedding
anniversary.’
Kara (polite equivalent node) in some instances is not interpreted as expressing cause or reason.
(6) Sugu modoru kara, koko de matteite ‘I’ll be back soon. Please wait here.’(7) Sugu chikaku da kara, chotto yotteikō ‘It’s nearby. Let’s stop by.’
(8) Dō medaru de ii kara, hyōshōdai ni agaritai ‘I would want to stand on the podium ,even if I
only had the bronze medal.’
The main clause expresses desire or intent, and the reason clause with kara expresses theinformation that will facilitate the realization of such desire or intent, or it expresses a situation thatgets things in motion. There are idiomatic expressions using kara that are used as an introduction
to a strong expression of the speaker’s desire or intent.
(9) Onegaida kara, ii ko de ite ne ‘Please do me a favor and be a good girl.’(10) Ichido de ii kara kyabia o tabetai ‘If I can eat caviar only once…’
Kara and node express almost the same meaning, but node goes better with polite expressions.
(11) Zutsū ga shita node kesseki shimashita ‘I was absent because I had a headache.’In polite expressions, shimashita kara fits better than kara.
Semantically, kara and node are similar.
node.

There are grammatical differences between kara andFirst, kara is affixed to the conclusive form, while node is affixed to the adnominal form.
(12) Miseenen da {kara/na node}, sake wa nomenai ‘I can’t drink because I am a minor.’

195

Second, only kara may be affixed to darō/deshō, mai, and no.
(13) Asu wa hareru darō kara, supōtsu taikai no sankasha wa kyonen yori fueru to omou ‘I predictthat there will be more participants in the athletic meeting than last year, because the weather will
be good tomorrow.’(14) Taiinshita bakari nanda kara, muri shinai de ‘Don’t strain yourself, since you just got out of
the hospital.’
Third, particles may be affixed to kara to form expressions such as kara ka, kara koso, and karaniwa.
Fourth, kara may accompany da to form a predicate, and can also be used in cleft sentences.
(15) Naze yasunda no?

Isogashikatta kara desu ‘Why were you absent?

Because I was busy.’(16) Yasunda no wa isogashikatta kara da ‘The reason I was absent was because I was busy.’
In (15) and (16) the non-polite form is prefixed to kara.
In addition, kara has a usage where it is used like a sentence final particle, and this usage is not
simple ellipsis. It urges the listener to act cooperatively and with understanding.
(17) Jaa, ittekuru kara ‘I am leaving now.’(18) Jikan dōri ni konakattara yurusanai kara ‘I won’t forgive you if you don’t come on time.’
The te form may also express cause and reason.
(19) Gōkaku dekite, ureshii ‘I am happy to have passed the exam.’(20) Osokunatte, sumimasen ‘I am sorry to be late.’(21) Yōsho wa takakute kaenai ‘Foreign books are too expensive to buy.’(22) Itazura o shite chichi ni shikarareta ‘I got scolded by my father for my mischief.’
The te form expresses the sequential relationship between events. When the proceeding event
occurs as the inevitable result of the preceding event, the te form is interpreted as the cause orreason.
The te form is more suitable than kara or node in expressing the cause of emotion in themain clause, as in (19) and (20). Te form is also used to express the situation which the speakercannot control or which is considered inevitable.
→ 理由を表す節の周辺 Expressions Related to Clauses of Reason (2-J), テ節・
continuative-form clausesTe/Continuative-Form Clause (2-J)
 References
Shirakawa, Hiroshi (1995) ‘Riyu o arawasanai kara’ (Kara That Does Not Express Reason) in
Nitta,Yoshio ed., Fukubun no kenkyū (jo) (Study of Complex Sentences I). Kurosio Publishers.

196

Hasunuma, Akiko et al. (2001) Serufu mastaa shiriizu 7: joken hyōgen (Self Master Series 7:
Conditional Expressions). Kurosio Publishers.
(Maeda Naoko)

197

 Expressions Related to Clauses of Reason
In addition to kara, node and te, the following forms also express cause and reason.
Nodakara is a compound made of noda and kara, but is widely different from kara in its
characteristics. It does not occur when the main clause is a declarative sentence.
(1)*Okane ga nai nodakara, ikanakatta.
Nodakara expresses the cause of the speaker’s attitude, such as her/his judgment, evaluation,
emotion, command and desire, emphasizing unexpectedness, reproach, deservedness, and so on.
(2) Isogashiindesukara, denwashite konaide ‘I am busy.

Don’t call me.’(3) Wakaindakara, jibun no yume ni chōsen shitai ‘I am young.
chance.’I want to give my dream a

Monodakara and monode express that the event which the speaker subjectively considers importantcauses an unexpected and undesirable result. They are used in speech, and a declarative sentenceappears in the main clause.
(4) Amarini yasui monodakara, tsui kaisugita ‘They were so incredibly cheap that I couldn’t help
buying too many of them.’(5) “Dōshite chikoku shita no?” ‘Why were you late?’“Sumimasen.

Atama ga itakatta mondesu kara.” ‘I am sorry.

I had a headache.’

There are expressions where kara is affixed to various particles.
(6) Jikan ga nai karaka, sanka shinakatta ‘He didn’t participate, perhaps because he didn’t havetime.’(7) Shirōto da karakoso, dokusōteki na hassō ga dekiru ‘He can come up with innovative ideas
precisely because he is an amateur.’(8) Chichi ga shinda karaniwa, watashi ga tsugu shika nai ‘Now that my father is dead, the only
thing left for me is to take over his business.’(9) Eigo ga dekinai kara to itte, kaigai shutchō o kotowaru koto wa dekinai ‘Just because I can’t
speak English, I cannot excuse myself from an overseas business trip.’Kara ka speculates, but not asserts, the reason. Kara koso emphasizes that the reason in questionis special (e.g., it is the only reason, contrary to common sense, paradoxical). Kara niwa expresses
the situation that becomes the ground for the speaker’s attitude or judgment. Kara to itte is used
when the cause and effect relationship itself is negated.
Ijō(wa) and ue wa express the ground which prompted the speaker’s attitude, such as judgment,
evaluation, command and intent.

198

(10) Hoka ni yaru hito ga inai ijō, watashi ga yaru shika nai ‘Since there is no one else to do it, I
don’t have a choice but do it.’(11) Chōsen suru ijō wa, minna no kitai ni kotaeru yō ganbatte kure ‘If you are to take the challenge,
I encourage you to do your best to meet everyone’s expectation.’(12) Kanojo ni kotowarareta ue wa, shōgai dare tomo kekkon shinai tsumori da ‘Now that I got
rejected by her, I have resolved not to marry anyone the rest of my life.’(13) Taifū no tameni, hikōki no tōchaku ga okureta ‘Due to the typhoon, the arrival of the airplane
has been delayed.’(14) Jiko ga hassei shita tame, dōro wa futsū to natta ‘Due to the occurrence of an accident, theroad was blocked.’
Sentences of conation, intent, or desire do not appear in the main clause, but such sentences may
apper in the main clause in formal announcements and notices.
(15) Esukareetaa setchi kōji no tame, kaidan o goriyō kudasai ‘Because the escalators are underconstruction, please use the stairs.’(16) Tenkō fujun no tame, ressha unkō o chūshi shimasu ‘Due to the inclement weather, we are
stopping the operation of the trains.’
As with kara, tame has a predicate form, tame da, and a form with a particle affixed, tame ka.
Sei de and okage de, same as tame ni, express objectively the cause and effect relationship between
the situations in question. However, sei de expresses the cause of an undesirable result, while
okage de expresses the cause of a desirable result.
(17) Benkyō shinakatta sei de, shiken ni ochita ‘I failed the exam because I hadn’t studied.’(18) Sensei ni oshiete itadaita okage de, konna ni nihongo ga jōzu ni narimashita ‘My Japanese has
gotten this good, thanks to your tutelage.’
When the speaker sarcastically thanks for the undesirable result, okage de may be used.
(19) Kimi ni tetsudatte moratta okage de, jikan ga nanbai mo kakatte shimatta yo ‘Thanks to yourhelp, I ended up spending a whole lot more time.’
Bakari ni expresses the cause of an undesirable, negative result.
result would not have happened had it not been for the cause.

The implication is that the bad(20) Eigo ga hanasenai bakari ni, haji o kaita ‘I was humiliated just because I couldn’t speak
English.’The form shitai bakari ni expresses the result which is brought on by the only desire the speakerhas.
(21) Mago ni aitai bakari ni, isoide kitaku shita ‘I hastened home just to see my grandchild.’199

When there is a word that is measurable in the main clause, dake ni and dake atte are used toexpress that the underiable result was obtained because the degree of the word was extreme.
(22) Haiku wa mijikai dake ni muzukashii ‘Haiku is difficult because of its brevity.’(23) Yokozuna dake atte, hijōni tsuyokatta ‘The yokozuna was very strong, as had been expected.’(24) Zenkai shippaishita dake ni, shōnin shikane masu ‘Because you failed last time, I am notwilling to approve.’
Amari ni is used with an expression whose degree is measurable, and it expresses that anundesirable result has occurred because the degree of the situation was extremely high.
(25) Kanashimi no amari ni, byōki ni natta ‘Because the grief was so severe she became ill.’(26) Kitaku o isogu amari ni, jiko o okoshita ‘Because he was in such a hurry getting home, hecaused an accident.’
It is a somewhat formal expression.
→カラ・ノデ・テ－原因・理由 Kara, Node, and Te: Cause and Reason (2-J), とりたて Focus(2-I)
 ReferenceGroup Jamashii, ed. (1998) Kyoshi to Gakushusha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapananese Sentence Patterns for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
(Maeda Naoko)

200 Noni, Kuse ni and Mono noNoni, kuse ni, and mono no express factual adversative condition, similar to nimo kakawarazu.
However, there is a considerable difference in nuance between nimo kakawarazu and noni, kuse ni
and mono no.
(1) Mainichi rensyū shiteiru {noni/kuse ni/mono no} chittomo jōtatsu shinai ‘Despite I practice
every day, I don’t get better at all.’In usage groups, noni and kuse ni belong to the same group, but mono no belongs to the group withga and keredo.
Noni expresses facts in both the first and second clauses, and expresses the speaker’s sense of
unexpectedness, surprise, and regret when s/he encounters the reality that conflicts with her/his
prediction.
(2) Kinō wa ii tenki datta noni, kyō wa ame ga futteiru ‘The weather was fine yesterday, but it israining today.’(3) Fugōkaku da to omotteita noni, gōkaku shita ‘I thought I’d failed the exam, but I passed.’(4) Isshōkemmee benkyō shita noni, zannen desu ‘I studied very hard. I am disappointed.’(5) Doryoku sure ba, gōkaku dekita noni ‘Had I tried hard, I would have passed.’
Kuse ni overlaps partly with noni. It expresses that the speaker downplays the value of a series ofsituations, and expresses reproach, contempt, and teasing toward the person involved in suchsituations. The subject must be someone or an organization that has the ability to takeresponsibility. The subject in both clauses is usually the same.
(6) Shitte iru {kuseni/noni} shiranai furi o shiteiru ‘He knows it, but pretends that he doesn’t.’(7) Otoko {no kuseni/nanoni} mesomeso suru na. ‘You’re a man. Don’t whine.’
Kuseni can be replaced with noni most of the time, but the reverse is not true.
(8) Mada chiisai {noni/*kuseni} taihen reegi tadashiku, kanshin na kodomo da ‘She’s such a smallchild but very courteous. She’s an impressive child.’(9) Haru {nanoni/*no kuseni} fuyu no yōna tenki da ‘It’s spring but the weather is wintery.’(10) Sekkaku ojiisan ga kattekureta {noni/*kuseni} kono ko wa “arigatō” saemo iwanai (twodifferent subjects) ‘His grandpa took the trouble of buying it for him but he wouldn’t even say,“Thank you.”’
Mono no is used when the speaker accepts what the first clause expresses, and then expresses thedevelopment of the situation counter to the first clause. It is used to describe a development that
goes from positive to negative (or vice versa), where the evaluation is reversed between the firstclause and the second clause.

201

(11) Keeki wa kaifuku ni mukatte wa iru mono no, aikawarazu takai shitsugyōritsu da ‘The
economy is recovering but the unemployment rate is still high.’(12) Wazuka de wa aru mono no, keeki wa kaifuku ni mukatte iru ‘Although at a very slow rate theeconomy is recovering.’(13) Kanjita tōri ni kakeba ii mono no, sore ga nakanaka muzukashii ‘All I have to do is to write
what I feel, but it’s not easy to do so.’(14) Kuchi ni dashite wa iwanai mono no, kokoro no naka wa sazo tsurai koto darō ‘He doesn’t talkabout it, but he must be in agony inside.’
Mono no is close in its usage to ga and keredo, and in the above examples they are interchangeable.
However, the reverse is not true. In an objective predication of a comparative relationship, and in
an introduction as in (16), ga and keredo may not be replaced by mono no.
(15) Kyonen wa Yōroppa ni itta {ga/keredo/*mono no}, kotoshi wa Tōnan Ajia e itta ‘I went toEurope last year, but this year I went to South East Asia.’(16) Hanashi wa kawaru {ga/keredo/*mono no} Miyazaki san ga kekkon suru sōda ‘To change thesubject, I hear Ms. Miyazaki is getting married.’Mono no and noni differ in that noni always expresses the speaker’s sense of unexpectedness andincongruity against her/his expectation, while mono no does not.
(17) Bukka wa takai {mono no/ga/keredo/*noni} Nihon no seikatsu wa tanoshii desu ‘The cost ofliving is high, but life in Japan is enjoyable.
In terms of the collocation constraint at the end of the sentence, there is a different tendency
between noni and kuseni vs. mono no.
(18) Rokuni Nihongo mo dekinai {noni/kuseni} ryūgaku {shita/suruna/surundesu ka}‘Your English was not good, and yet you went and studied abroad.
Your English is not good, so don’t go study abroad.
Your English is not good, but are you going to study aborad?’Ryūgaku {*suru kamoshirenai/*shiyō/*shiro/*shite kudasai/*shimasu ka}.
(19) Nihongo wa mada yoku dekinai mono no, Nihon ni ryūgaku {shita/surukamo shirenai}‘My Japanese was not yet very good, but I studied in Japan.
My Japaaanese is not yet very good, but I may study in Japan.’Ryūgaku {??shiyō/*shiro/*suruna/*shite kudasai/*shimasuka/*surundesu ka}.
→ ガ・ケレド－逆接・前置き Ga and Keredo: Adversative Conjunction and Preface (2-J), ナガ
ラ・ツツ Nagara and Tsutsu (2-J)
 References
202

Ikegami, Motoko (1997) ‘Noni・Nagara, Monono・Keredomo no Tsukaiwake ni tsuite’“Differentition between Noni & Mono, and Monono & Keredomo” in Hokkaido Daigaku Ryugaku
Sentaa Kiyo 1.
Ogata, Rie (2003) ‘Monono’ in Yoshikawa, Taketoki, ed., Keeshiki meeshi ga kore de wakaru(The Ultimate Book on Formal Nouns). Hituzi Syobo.
Watabe, Manabu (2001) ‘Setsuzoku joshi no goitekina imi to bum’myakuteki na imi – kuseni tononi no kijutsu to bunseki o megutte’ (Lexical Meaning and Contexual Meaning of Conjunctive
Particles: Description and Analysis of Kuseni and Noni) in Nihongo Kagaku, 10.
(Hasunuma Akiko)203 Tameni, Yōni ,and Noni: Purpose
Tameni, yōni, and noni express the purpose of the event in the main clause.
Tameni is suffixed to a noun, and also is used to express the purpose of the action of the predicate in
the subordinate clause when the predicate is a willful action, and when the subject in the mainclause is the same as that in the subordinate clause. The ni in tame ni may be omitted.
(1) Sekai no heewa no tame ni, Kokuren de hatarakitai ‘I want to work for the United Nations
toward world peace.’(2) Kuruma o kau tame ni, arubaito o shita ‘I took a part time job in order to buy a car.’
Tameni is also used in expressions of need, use, usefulness, as well as purpose and reason forexistence.
(3) Mizu o shōdoku suru tame ni, enso o shiyō suru ‘We use chlorine to disinfect water.’(4) Tori no hane wa tobu tame ni aru ‘Birds’ wings are for flying.’
Tame may form adnominal clauses, be affixed to particles, and be used as predicates.
(5) Ringo no kawa o muku tame no kikai ‘A gadget for paring apples.’(6) Ryūgaku suru tame ka, Eigo no benkyō ni hagende iru ‘He’s studying English earnestly, perhaps
to prepare for study abroad.’(7) Oya o anshin saseru tame nimo, shuzutsu o uketai ‘I want to have a surgery partly to put myparents at their ease.’(8) Shujutsu o uketa no wa, oya o anshin saseru tame da ‘I had a surgery because I wanted myparents to feel at ease.’
Tameni wa, which is a focused form with wa, may not express a one-time past occurrence of anevent. It expresses generally necessary conditions.
(9) Kyōshi ni naru tame ni wa, menkyo ga hitsuyō da ‘One needs licensure to be a teacher.’(10) Kodomo ga hon o yomu yōni naru tame niwa, mazu oya ga hon o yomanakereba naranai ‘Inorder for children to acquire the habit of reading books, the parents must read first.’
When the subject of the subordinate clause and that of the main clause are different, or when thepredicate of the subordinate clause is stative, that is, when the purpose is something the subject ofthe main clause has no control over, yōni is used. The ni in yōni may be omitted.
(11) Akambō ga okinai yō, chiisai koe de hanashita ‘We spoke in a low voice so that the baby
wouldn’t wake up.’(12) Minna ni kikoeru yōni, ōgoe de hanashita ‘We spoke in a loud voice so that everyone could
hear.’

204

(13) Shihatsu densha ni maniau yōni, mezamashi dokee o 4ji ni setto shita ‘I set the alarm clock at 4
o’clock so that I could make the first train in the morning.’
This type of purpose which yō ni expresses is the situation that occurs after the main clause occurs.
In this usage, it is more a result than a purpose that yō expresses. Thus, the yō ni clause does notcontain interrogative words.
(14)*Nani ga dekiru yō ni benkyō shite iru no ka.
(15) Hayaku kuru yō ni itta ‘I told them to come early.’(16) Ame ga furu yō ni inotta.

‘I prayed for rain.’In the above examples, the yō ni clauses respectively express the content of the utterance and prayer
and also the purpose and result of the act of telling and praying.
There is limitation as to what can become the predicate of the main clause when noni is used.
used only to express necessity, usage, and usefulness.

It is(17) Pasokon o kau noni 20man en wa {hitsuyō da /kakaru /tsuiyashita }. ‘In order to buy a PC,{one needs/it costs/I spent }200,000yen.’(18) Kono naifu wa ringo no kawa o muku noni tsukau ‘I use this knife to pare apples.’(19) E wa gaikokujin to komyunikeeshon suru noni {yakudatsu/kōkateki da/ii/tsugō ga ii} ‘Picturesare {useful/effective/good/convenient} for communicating with foreigners.’
These predicates fundamentally require Case ni.
Noni may be focused when used with wa and mo.
(20) Kono nabe wa yuderu noni mo, musu noni mo tsukaeru ‘This pot is good for both boiling andsteaming.’
Shini expresses why something/someone gets transported.
(21) Eega o mini, Shinjuku e itta ‘We went to Shinjuku to watch a movie.’→ト・カ・ヨウニ－引用 To, Ka, and Yōni: Quotation (2-J)
 Reference
Maeda, Naoko (1995) ‘suru tame (ni), suru yō (ni), shini, surunoni’ in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta
Yoshio ed., nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (ge) (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions
II). Kurosio Publishers.
(Maeda Naoko)

205

 Ga and Keredo: Adversative Conjunction and Preface
Conjunctive particles such as ga and keredo (kedo, keredomo) connect the confirmed fact in the firstclause with the second clause that has some contrasting meaning. Kedo(mo), keredo(mo) arecolloquial. Of the two, kedo is casual, and keredo(mo) is polite.
(1) Ano mise wa, sukoshi takai ga totemo oishii ‘That shop is a bit pricy, but their food is delicious.’(2) Jikan wa aru ke(re)do, okane ga nai ‘I have the time, but I have no money.’(3) Koronda ga, kega wa shinakatta ‘I fell, but didn’t get hurt.’(4) Sensei ni kiita ke(re)do, wakaranakatta ‘I asked the teacher, but she didn’t know the answer.’
In (1) and (2), the second clause expresses a contrasting situation from the first clause, and in (3)and (4), the second clause presents a result that is not predicted in the first clause. In all instances,
the second clause negates the implication in the first clause. In that regard, all the sentences
express adversative conjunction.
This type of adversative conjunction differs from what noni expresses. Noni points out overtly thediscrepancy between the prediction based on a cause and effect relationship and the actual outcome.
Ga and keredo may be used as long as there is a simple contrast between the implication in the firstclause and the outcome in the second clause. Noni is unnatural not only in (1) and (2), but in (3)and (4) as well.
(5)?Koronda noni, kega wa shinakatta.
(6)?Sensei ni kiita noni, wakaranakatta.
Ga and keredo also have the usage of prefacing.
(7) Asoko ni takai biru ga arimasu ga, are wa nan desu ka ‘There is a tall building over there.
What is it?’(8) Oo san kara omoshiroi shiteki ga arimashita kedo, donata ka goiken wa arimasen ka ‘Mr. Oh
has pointed out an interesting issue. Any response?’
In these examples, the main topic that the speaker wants to address (ask about) is in the second
clause, and the first clause simply is an introduction to the second. Ga and kedo express thesentiment that it is not the first clause that contains the real message; it leads to the real message inthe second clause.
That the real message is in the second clause applies to the usage of adversative conjunction as well.
Especially in the usage of contrast, the first and second clauses seem to have parallel construction,
but actually the weight of the argument is different in the two. Compare (2) and (9).
(9) Okane wa aru ke(re)do, jikan ga nai ‘I have money alright, but I don’t have the time.’ [The main
point is that there is no time.]→テモ・タッテ・トコロデ－逆条件 Temo, Tatte, and Tokorode: Adversative Condition (2-J)

206

 References
National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics (1951) Kokuritsu kokugo kenkyūsho
hōkoku 3: gendaigo no joshi・jodōshi – yōho to jitsurei (Report of the National Institute forJapanese Language and Linguistics 3: Particles and Auxiliary Verbs in Contemporary Japanese –Usage and Examples). Shuei Shuppan.
Satake, Kuniko (1986) ‘Gyakusetsu no setsuzokushi no imi to yōhō’ (Meaning and Usage ofAdversative Conjunctives) in Miyaji, Hiroshi, ed., Ronshū nihongo kenkyū (Anthology of Study ofJapanese). Meiji Shoin.
Nishihara, Suzuko (1985) ‘Gyakusetsuteki hyōgen ni okeru 3 tsu no pataan’ (Three Patterns ofExpressons of Adversative Conjunction) in Nihongo Kyōiku, 56.
(Shirakawa, Hiroyuki)

207 Parallel Construction Forms
The representative parallel construction forms are the te form (adverbial form), tari, and shi.
(1) Ano mise wa, yasukute, hayakute, oishii ‘That shop is cheap, quick, and delicious.’(2) Nichiyōbi ni wa, ongaku o kiitari, hon o yondari, sampo o shitari suru ‘On Sundays I listen tomusic, read books, and take a walk, among other things.’(3) Kare wa, wakaishi, hansamu dashi, atama ga ii ‘He’s young, good looking, and, on top of it,
smart.’
These examples all display a series situations with equal weight.
sequenced differs from one example to the next.

However, how the situations are

To sum them up in comparison with the parallel expressions of nouns,“te, te, …” corresponds to “A to B to …”“tari, tari …” corresponds to “A ya B ya …”“shi, shi …” corresponds to “A mo B mo.”
 Te, Te
Parallel construction using the te form (adverbial form) lists events of concern and is the mostneutral method of sequencing.
(4) Sono kudamono wa marukute, omokute, naka ga akai ‘The fruit is round, heavy, and red inside.’(5) Asu wa, sentaku o shite, sōji o shite, kaimono o suru ‘Tomorrow I will do the laundry, clean thehouse, and go shopping.’
This is equivalent to “A to B to…” for nouns.
(6) Reezōko no naka ni wa, tamago to gyūnyū to hamu to retasu ga aru ‘There are eggs, milk, ham,and lettuce in the refrigerator.’
In (6) everything in the refrigerator is listed. Similarly, in (5), everything the speaker will dotomorrow is listed.
When the list is partial, “tari, tari” is used.
When the affixed predicate is in the noun+da form or a na-adjective, the adverbial form instead of
the te form is used.
(7) Kanojo wa bijin de, sunao de, atama ga ii ‘She’s pretty, good-natured, and smart.’
 Tari, TariThis form presents a list of examples.

208

(8) Sentaku o shitari, sōji o shitari, kaimono o shitari suru ‘I do the laundry, clean the house, and go
shopping, among other things.’
Unlike the parallelism with the te form, tari is attached to the last item on the list (…tari, …tari, …)
and the sentence ends with suru.
(8)’ *Sentaku o shitari, sōji o shitari, kaimono o suru.
This is equivalent to the parallelism with nouns of “A ya B ya….”(9) Sentaku ya, sōji ya, kaimono (nado) o suru. “I do the laundry, house cleaning, and shopping(among other things).’
It differs from “te…, te…” in that it forms a partial list, and not an exhaustive list.
 Shi, Shi
This form list items in the same category cumulatively.
(10) Sentaku mo suru shi, sōji mo suru shi, kaimono mo suru ‘I do the laundry, AND vacuum thehouse, AND do shopping.’
As seen in this example, mo is often used in the predication of events and situations.
This listing is equivalent to the parallel construction used with nouns, “A mo B mo….”(11) Sentaku mo, sōji mo, kaimono mo suru.

I do the laundry, also house cleaning, also shopping.

What is in common between the two is the sentiment that “it is not only A but also B,” and “A aswell as B.”→テ節・中止節 Te/Continuative-Form Clauses (2-J)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1992) Teramura hideo rombunshu I nihongo bunpōhen (Teramura Hideo
Anthology I: Japanese Grammar). Kurosio Publishers
Moriyama, Takuro (1995) ‘Heiretsu jūtsugo kōbunkō’ (Study on Parallel Predicate Construction) in
Nitta, Yoshio ed. Fukubun no kenkyū (jo)(Studies on Complex Sentences I). Kurosio Publishers.
(Shirakawa Hiroyuki)

209 Saichū, Uchini, and Aida
Saichū, uchini, and aida construct complex sentences by forming temporal relative clauses where
they express a time period in which a situation is established. Other forms, such as tochū, are also
used to form temporal relative clauses of duration.
Saichū expresses that another situation occurs right when the preceding situation is going on, as in
Shokuji shiteiru saichū ni denwa ga kakattekita ‘I was right in the middle of having dinner when thephone rang.’ Saichū ni is the form used frequently. Saichū connects with other elements in suchforms as noun + no saichū and the teiru form of verbs + saichū.
It may be affixed to an adjective,
as in Isogashii saichū ni ojama shimasu ‘Pardon me for interrupting right when you are busy.’ Itdoes not connect easily to the masu form of verbs. Sanaka is used in almost the same way assaichū, but it has a special usage, where it expresses that a situation is at its peak, as in atsui sanaka‘in the midst of the heat,’ ōyuki no sanaka ‘in the midst of a heavy snow.’ In this usage, saichū isnot appropriate. Massaichū emphasizes the sense of immediacy of the situation.
Saichū expresses that a situation is interrupted by an unexpected event, and is not appropriate foruse in other situations.
(1) Haha ga denwa shiteiru {aidani/*saichū ni}, shokuji no yōi o shita ‘I prepared the meal while
my mother made a phone call.’
Uchini expresses that the situation in the succeeding clause occurs while the preceding situation
continues to exist. The forms of continuance include noun + uchini, the conclusive form ofi-adjectives + uchini, the adnominal form of na-adjectives + uchini, and the ru form/te iru form/
negative form of verbs + uchini.
Uchini may be affixed to the masu form, but it does not connect easily to the desu form.
clause with the uchini clause tends to be a volitional expression of action-requesting.
(2) Wakai uchi ni, iroiro benkyō shiyō.
young.’The main‘I will/Let us study a variety of things while I am/we are

When the sentence strongly suggests that something be done before the situation in the main clauseis over, uchi ni may be replaced with mae ni.
(3) Sensei ga {konai uchini/kuru mae ni} shukudai o yatte shimaō ‘I will/Let’s finish the homework
before the teacher comes.’
Uchini in this example expresses that the proceeding action can only be performed within the time
period mentioned.
In this usage, the affirmative and negative forms of a verb occur in succession,
as in hanashi ga owaruka owaranai (ka no) uchini ‘the talk barely ended, when …,’ and it
expresses that one situation is immediately followed by another.
Aida also occurs as aida ni and aida(ni) wa. The connecting forms include noun + no aida,conclusive form of i-adjectives + aida, the adnominal form of na-adjectives + aida, the ru and teiru
forms of verbs + aida. The past forms of i-adjectives, na-adjectives, and verbs may also occur
with aida. Aida is sometimes affixed to the masu form, but it does not connect readily to the desu
form. Fundamentally, aida expresses the continuance, repetition, maintenance of the result and state,210

of the situation in the main clause. Aida ni tends to be used to express the situation in the mainclause only once.
(4) Kare wa sensei ga setsumei shite iru {aida/*aida ni} zutto soto o mite ita ‘He was looking out
the window all the while the teacher was explaining.’(5) Ryūgaku shite iru {aida ni/*aida} ichido Hokkaidō e itte mitai ‘I’d like to visit Hokkaido once
while I am doing study abroad.’
The main clause to occur with the aida ni clause may contain continuance or repetition of thesituation, but maintenance of the result or adjectival state do not appear readily.
(6)*Haha ga dekakete iru aida ni {mado o shimete iru/sabishikatta}.
There are instances where aida ni and uchi ni are interchangeable, as in Terebi o mite iru {uchini/aida ni} nemuku natte kita ‘I got sleepy while watching TV.’ When there is a strong sense thatthe result must be obtained during the aforementioned period, aida ni is not readily used.
(7) Atsui {uchi ni/*aida ni} tabete kudasai ‘Please eat it while it is still hot.’
Aida ni (wa) may be used when the proceeding situation is a state, as in (8), and when a predicate of
movement with wa of contrast follows, as in (9).
(8) Kenkō de irareru aida wa shiawase da ‘I am happy as long as I am healthy.’(9) Kyōgi o okonatte iru aida wa ii tenki datta ga, kyōgi ga owatte kara ōame ni natta ‘The weather
was good while the game was on, but after the game was over, it started to rain hard.’→とき・折・頃・際 Toki, Ori, Koro/Goro, and Sai (2-J), マエ（ニ）・アト（デ）・テカラ (2-J)
 References
Gurūpu Jamashii (ed.) (1998) Kyōshi to gakushūsha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapanese Sentence Patterns for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
Iori, Isao, et al (2001) Chū-jōkyū o oshieru hito no tame no nihongo bunpō handobukku (Handbookof Japanese Grammar for Those Who Teach Intermediate and Advanced Classes). 3A Network.
Teramura, Hideo (1983) ‘Jikanteki genkai no imi to bunpōteki kino’ (Meaning of Temporal Limit
and Grammatical Function) in Watanabe, Minoru, ed., Fukuyōgo no kenkyū “study of sub-content
words.” Meiji Shoin. Included in Teramura Hideo rombunshū I: nihongo bunpō hen (Teramura
Hideo Anthology I: Japanese Grammar) Kurosio Publishers.
(Shioiri Sumi)

211

 Ya Inaya and Ga Hayaika
Both ya inaya and ga hayaika construct temporal relative clauses, and express that the proceeding
action immediately follows the preceding action. They are affixed to the suru form of verbs.
They are both written style forms. They do not occur with the masu form.
(1) Sono otoko wa keikan no sugata o miru {ya inaya/ga hayaika} ōawatede nigedashita ‘As soon
as the man saw a policeman, he fled in a great hurry.’Ya inaya may also appear in the following form: Tegami o miru ya, nani mo iwazuni dete itta ‘Assoon as he saw the letter, he left without saying a word.’
Both ya inaya and ga hayaika catch the moment right after an action is performed. Thus, they are
not readily used with the te iru form of aru/dekiru verbs that do not indicate the beginning andending of an action, nor are they used with movement verbs that involve process, such as asobu andbenkyōsuru.
(2) Nihongo ga {*dekiru ya inaya/*dekiru ga hayaika} Nihon e ryūgaku shita.
(3) Nihongo o benkyō {shita ato sugu/*suru ya inaya/*suru ga hayaika} Nihon e ryūgaku shita ‘Iwent to Japan to study right after I studied Japanese.’If the action involves process, these forms express the beginning or ending.
(4) Nyūsu o {miru ya inaya/miru ga hayaika}, soto e tobidashita ‘As soon as he watched the news,
he ran out.’
Both forms focus on the fact that there is little time realizing the before and after events. Thus, themain clause is a declarative sentence, and sentences requesting action and volitional sentences do
not occur easily. See (5). The main clause cannot include interrogative words. See (6).
(5) Ie e {kaettara sugu/*kaeru ya inaya/*kaeru ga hayaika} denwa shite kudasai ‘Please call me assoon as you get home.’(6) Nani o {tabeta ato/*taberu ya inaya/*taberu ga hayaika} kimochi ga waruku natta n desu ka‘What did you eat to make you sick?’
With ya inaya, the main clause may have both volitional and non-volitional actions, while ga
hayaika does not have non-volitional actions in the main clause.
(7) Gakkō ni {tsuku ya inaya/tsuku ga hayaika}, repōto o kakihajimeta ‘As soon as I got to school I
started to write my term paper.’(8) Gakkō ni {tsuku ya inaya/*tsuku ga hayaika}, ame ga furidashita ‘As soon as I got to school it
started to rain.’
Ta totan(ni), ta(ka) to omou to (omottara, omoeba), and nari also form temporal relative clausesthat express the meaning of “immediately after.”(9) Tatta totan(ni) memai ga shita ‘As soon as I stood up, I got dizzy.’212

(10) Saikin wa samukunatta ka to omou to, mata atatakaku nari, kion no henka ga hageshii‘Recently, as soon as it gets cold, it starts to warm up. The temperature changes drastically.’(11) Musuko wa watashi no kao o miru nari nakidasihta ‘My son started to cry as soon as he saw
my face.’
None of these forms readily form sentences asking for an action or volitioinal sentences, nor dothey include interrogative words. Ta(ka) to omou may be affixed to continuous actions.
(12) Kare wa sakki made benkyō shite ita ka to omou to, mō terebi no mae de waratte iru ‘He wasstudying just a while ago, and now he is laughing in front of the TV set.’→マエ（ニ）・アト（デ）・テカラ Mae(ni), Ato(de), and Tekara (2-J)
 References
Gurūpu Jamashii (ed.) (1998) Kyōshi to gakushūsha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapanese Sentence Patterns for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
Iori, Isao, et al (2001) Chū-jōkyu o oshieru hito no tame no nihongo bunpō handobukku (Handbookof Japanese Grammar for Those Who Teach Intermediate and Advanced Classes). 3A Network.
(Shioiri Sumi)

213

 Adnominal Modificatioin Clauses

 Classification by Structure
Adnominal clauses may be classified by the relationship with the modified noun.
(1) In examples such as iriguchi ni tatte iru hito ‘the person who is standing in the doorway,’ karega oshiete kureta uwasa ‘the rumor which he told me,’ watashi ga mita jōkei ‘the scene that I saw,’and sofu ga naku natta toshi ‘the year in which my grandfather died,’ there is a case relationshipwhere the modified noun is the complement of the predicate in the modifying clause (i.e., Sono hito
ga iriguchi ni tatte iru ‘The person is standing in the door way,’ Kare ga sono uwasa o oshietekureta ‘He told me the rumor,’ Sono toshi ni sofu ga nakunatta ‘My grandfather died in that year’).
This type of relationship between the modifying clause and the modified noun is called the “internal
proposition.” In contrast, when there is no such relationship between the modified noun and thepredicate in the modifying clause, the relationship is called the “external proposition.” The external
proposition can be further classified into sub-types.
(2) Sofu ga naku natta yokutoshi ‘the year after my grandfather died’ and Tarō ga shimbun o yonde
iru tonari ‘next to where Taro is reading a newspaper.’can be rephrased as “aru toshi ni sofu ga
naku natta. Sono yokutoshi ‘My grandfather passed away in a certain year. [It is] the year after that’,”and Tarō ga aru ichi de shinbun o yonde iru. Sono ichi no tonari ‘Taro is reading a newspaper in acertain position. [It is] the position next to it.’ The modified nouns yokutoshi and tonari are in a
relative relationship with the respective hidden complements, (aru) toshi and (aru) ichi, of thepredicates of the modifying clauses.
(3) In kare ga kaisha o yameru rashii to iu uwasa ‘the rumor that he’s quitting the job’ and kodomo
tachi ga sakkaa o tanoshinde iru jōkei ‘the scene where children are enjoying soccer,’ “the rumor”
and “the scene,” which are nouns with a certain content, become the modified nouns, and themodifying clauses respectively explain the content of each noun.
 Internal Proposition
For the type discussed in (1), it is important to have an unambiguous semantic relationship between
the modified noun and the modifying clause, expecially the predicate of the modifying clause, inorder for the expresson to work.
(1) ?Shokudō e itta yūjin (when the speaker means that the speaker went to the cafeteria with thefriend).
(2) ?Purezento o moratta hito (when the speaker received the present from the person).
Unlike sentences, this type of adnominal clauses has various constraints on their components. For
example, the predicate of an adnominal clause may not accompany a sentence-final particle orcertain types of modality expressons (e.g., *taihen omoshiroi ne eega, *suguni kopii shiro kono
shorui, ?raishū nyūka suru sō na shinamono). Topics do not appear in the modifying clause. For
example, in watashi wa suki na sake, wa expresses contrast.

214 External Proposition
In the type described in (2), the following types of nouns are modified.
Temporal nouns: mae ‘before’, ato ‘after’, zenjitsu ‘the previous day’, yokujitsu ‘the following day’,yokunen ‘the following year’, etc.
Spatial nouns (i.e., positional, locational): mae ‘front’, ushiro ‘back, behind’, yoko ‘side’, tonari‘next’, ue ‘above’, shita ‘below’, etc
In Type (3), the following types of nouns are modified.
Nouns of linguistic expressions and thought: uwasa ‘rumor’, shitsumon ‘question’, iken
‘opinion/view’, hōkoku ‘report’, shiteki ‘pointing out/suggestion’, yosō ‘prediction’, kangae‘thought’, ishi ‘intent’, kesshin ‘resolution’, tegami ‘letter’, denwa ‘telephone’, kiji ‘article’, etc.
Nouns of events, phenomena: dekigoto ‘happening’, jiken ‘incident’, jijitsu ‘fact’, jōtai‘state/condition’, shigoto ‘work/job’, kekka ‘result’, keikō ‘trend/tendency’, etc.
Nouns concerning scenes, visual media: jōkei ‘scene’, kōkei ‘sight’, e ‘picture’, shashin ‘photo’, etc.
There is a correlation between the semantic characteristics of the modified noun and thecomponents and the type of predicate that can appea in the modifying clause. There is also a
correlation between the semantic characteristics of the modified noun and the presence or absenceof an expression (such as to iu and to no) that connects the modifying clause and the modified noun.
When the modified noun is a noun, such as shitsumon ‘question’, iken ‘opinion/view’, or shiteki‘pointing out/suggestion’, and when an utterance or thought is quoted in the modifying clause, to iu
or to no has to be used to connect the two.
When a noun that expresses an event or phenomenon becomes the modified noun, the use of theintermediary to iu is optional.
(3) Kono deeta wa machigatte iru {to iu/tono} shiteki ‘the suggestion that the data is inaccurate.’(4) Kare ga sagi o shite ita (to iu) jijitsu ‘the fact that he has committeed fraud’ Classification by Function
Let us compare pasokon ni kuwashii hito ‘a person who is well-versed in PCs’ and pasokon ni
kuwashii Tarō ‘Taro, who is well-versed in PCs.’ In the former, the modifying clause, pasokon ni
kuwashii, has the function of limiting the referent in amongst the modified collective noun, hito,
while in the latter, the modified noun Tarō is a noun that can be identified in itself, and themodifying clause does not have the function of limiting the referent of the modified noun. Modified
clauses may be classified by such functional differenes into restrictive modifying clauses andnon-restrictive modifying clauses. Modifying clauses have a different function other than limiting
the referent when they occur with proper nouns (which identify the referent without the help of amodifying clause), nouns that represent unique existences ( e.g., Earth, Japan), nouns that
accompany determiners such as kono, and generic nouns.

215

→ Ga and No That Mark the Subject of Adnominal Clauses (2-D)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1992) Teramura hideo rombunshū I (Teramura Hideo Anthology I).
Publishers.
Okutsu, Keiichiro (1974) Seisei nihon bunpōron (Generative Japanese Grammar).
Shoten.

Kurosio

Taishukan

Takahashi, Taro (1994) Dōshi no kenkyū – dōshi no dōshi-rashisa no hatten to shōshitsu (Study ofVerbs – Development and Disappearance of What Makes a Verb a Verb). Mugi Shobo.
Masuoka, Takashi (1997) Fukubun (Complex Sentences).

Kurosio Publishers.

Inoue, Kazuko (1976) Henkei bunpō to nihongo, jō (Transformational Grammar and Japanese I).
Taishukan Shuppan.
(Takahashi Minako)

216

 Koto, No, and Tokoro: Noun Clauses
Clauses that support the predicate are called complement clauses.
that occur with such formal nouns as koto, no, and tokoro.

Among them are noun clauses

In (1), there is a noun clause with the formal noun (koto), ame ga furidashita koto ni, whichfunctions as the complement clause to the predicate, kizuita. A noun clause appears as acomplement clause for (2) and (3), with no and tokoro, respectively.
(1) Tanaka wa ame ga furidashita koto ni kizuita ‘Tanaka noticed that it had started to rain.’(2) Ten’in wa otoko ga hashitte nigeru no o mita ‘The shop clerk saw a man run away.’(3) Keesatsu wa dorobō ga ie o deta tokoro o tsukamaeta ‘The police caught the thief as he cameout of the house.’
Noun clauses that accompany koto and no appear as complement clauses for a wide variety ofpredicates. In many cases koto and no are interchangeable.
(4) Satō wa sono hi kaigi ga atta {koto/no} o omoidashita ‘Sato remembered that there was a
meeting that day.’(5) Kantoku wa pitchaa o kaeru {koto/no} o tameratta ‘The manager hesitated to replace thepitcher.’
Depending on the predicate of the main clause, there are instances where only koto is appropriate
and where only no is appropriate. When the predicate of the main clause has the meaning of“aiming at the realization of a certain situation”, only koto is appropriate (e.g., teian suru ‘propose’,
inoru ‘pray’, meirei suru ‘order’, yakusoku suru ‘promise’).
(6) Iinchō wa tōhyō o enki suru {koto/*no} o teian shita ‘The committee chairman proposed topostpone the vote.’(7) Ryōshin wa kodomo ga sukoyakani sodatsu {koto/*no} o inotte iru ‘The parents are praying that
their child will grow up healthily.’
When the predicate of the main clause expresses direct sensation (e.g., miru ‘see’, mokugeki suru
‘witness’, kiku ‘hear’) or actions that are directly related to specific situations (e.g., matsu ‘wait’,
tetsudau ‘assist’, jama suru ‘bother’), only no is appropriate.
(8) Suzuki wa jitensha ga kaze de taoreru {no/*koto} o mita ‘Suzuki saw a bicycle blown down by
wind.’(9) Sensei wa seetotachi ga shizumaru {no/*koto} o matta ‘The teacher waited for the pupils tocalm down.’
Tokoro is used when the predicate of the main clause express witnessing (e.g., mikakeru ‘catch sightof someone ‘, mokugeki suru ’witness’, dekuwasu ‘run into’) or capture (e.g., tsukamaeru ‘arrest’,osou ‘assault’, satsuei suru ‘take a picture’).

217

(10) Chijin wa Yamada ga dekakeru tokoro o mikaketa ‘An acquaintance caught sight of Yamada’s
leaving home.’(11) Gōtō wa jūnin ga neitta tokoro o osotta ‘The burglar assaulted the residents just as they had
fallen asleep.’Tokoro and no may be interchangeable in some instances.
(12) Shufu wa hannin ga kenjū o suteru {tokoro/no} o mita ‘The housewife saw the culprit discard
the gun.’Among the complement clauses with no, there are ones that focus on a complement word of thepredicate using the “…no wa…da” form. Example (13) focuses on the complement word “konohon”, and in (14) the focus is on “watashi” in relation to the predicate “kaita.”(13) Imōto ga kureta no wa kono hon da ‘This is the book that my younger sister gave me.’(14) Kono e o kaita no wa watashi da ‘It is I who painted this picture.’→ト・カ・ヨウニ－引用 To, Ka, and Yōni: Quotation (2-J)
 References
Kudo, Mayumi (1985) ‘No , koto no tsukaiwake to dōshi no shurui’ (Differentiation between No
and Koto and the Verb Types) in Kokubungaku kaishaku to kanshō (Japanese Literature:
Interpretation and Appreciation). 50-3
Kuno, Susumu (1973) ‘Tokoro setsu’ (Tokoro Clause) in Kuroda, Shigeyuki & Nakamura Masaru,ed., Kotoba no kaku to shūhen – nihongo to eigo no aida (The Nucleus of Language: Between
Japanese and English). Kurosio Publishers.
Noda, Harumi (1995) ‘No to koto’ (No and koto) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed.,Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (ge) (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions II). Kurosio
Publishers.
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Noriyuki (1992) Kiso nihongo bunpō (kaiteiban) (Basic Japanese
Grammar, Revised Ed.). Kurosio Publishers.
(Abe Shinobu)

218 To, Ka, and Yōni: Quotation
Clauses that supplement the predicate are called complement clauses. There is a type ofcomplement clauses that accompany the quotation forms and question forms such as to, ka, andyō(ni) at the end of the clause.
In (1), the complement clause accompanying to (kōcha ga nomitai to) shows up to complement thepredicate (itta). In (2) and (3) the complement clauses with ka and yō show up to complement
their respective predicates.
(1) Imōto wa kōcha ga nomitai to itta ‘My little sister said she wanted to drink English tea.’(2) Yamada wa kaigi ni dare ga kuru ka shitte iru ‘Yamada knows who is coming to theconference.’(3) Tenchō wa hisho ni kinko o akeru yō shiji shita ‘The store manager instructed the secretary to
open the safe.’
Clauses that contain quotation forms are called quotation clauses. To is the most important form toconstruct quotation clauses. It is used with a wide variety of predicates that express activities
related to expresson and thought (e.g., iu ‘say’, omou ‘think’, kangaeru ‘think’).
(4) Shushō wa ōgata genzei o jisshi suru to meigen shita ‘The prime minister declared that he would
implement large scale tax cut.’(5) Shachō wa risutora ga hitsuyō da to kangaete iru ‘The president thinks restructuring isnecessary.’
To is also used as a direct quotation form for the content of an utterance.
(6) Otto ga “Chotto kitemiro yo,” to itta ‘The husband said, “Come over here.”’(7) Seito ga “Are wa nan desu ka,” to kiitekita ‘A pupil asked [me], “What is that?”’Further, to may form a pattern of case o + quotation clause, as in (8). Sentences (8) and (9) mean
practically the same thing.
(8) Ooku no hito wa A o hannin da to omotte iru ‘Many people think A is the culprit.’(9) Ooku no hito wa A ga hannin da to omotte iru ‘Many people think A is the culprit.’
Ka is used when an interrogative expression is the complement clause.
(10) Watashi wa sono hi dare to atta ka omoidasenai ‘I cannot remember whom I met that day.’
When the complement clause is an “either…or…” clause, forms such as …ka…ka and …kadōka
may be used.
(11) Asu kuru ka konai ka oshiete hoshii ‘I want you to tell me whether you are coming or nottomorrow.’(12) Sono keiyaku o toreru ka dōka ga jūyō da ‘The key is whether we get the contract or not.’219

Ka (dōka) may or may not accompany a case particle.
use the particle or not.

Usually, it is up to the speaker whether to(13) Nani o kau ka (o) kangaete iru ‘I am wondering what to buy.’(14) Kimochi ga tsutawaru kadōka (ga) fuan da ‘I am nervous if I can convey my feeling.’
Predicates that take interrogative expressions as their complement clauses include those that are
involved in exchanging information and possession, such as shiru ‘know’, wakaru ‘comprehend’,tazuneru ‘inquire’, kangaeru ‘think’, and oshieru ‘teach/tell’, and also those that express theimportance of information, such as jūyō da ‘important’, and mondai da ‘that’s a problem.’Yō(ni) , like to, is used to form a quotation clause, but the scope of usage is relatively narrow.
use is limited to when the predicate of the main clause expresses command, request, andsupplication.

The(15) Taichō wa buka ni mihari ni tsuku yō meirei shita ‘The commaner ordered his subordinates tostand guard.’(16) Ikkoku mo hayaku byōki ga naoru yō ni inotte iru ‘I pray for your quickest recovery.’
When iu appears with yō(ni), it expresses instruction and request.
(17) Joshu ni kopii o toru yō itte oita ‘I’ve told my assistant to make a copy.’→コト・ノ・トコロ－名詞節 Koto, No, and Tokoro – Noun Clauses (2-J)
 References
Kuno Susumu (1973) Nihon bunpō kenkyū (Study of Japanese Grammar). Taishukan Shoten.
Fujita, Yasuyuki (2000) Kokugo in’yō kōbun no kenkyū (Study of Japanese Quotative Construction).
Izumi Shoin.
Maeda, Naoko (1995) ‘To to yō ni’ (To and yō ni) in Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed.,Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (ge) (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous Expressions II).
Kurosio Publishers.
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Noriyuki (1992) Kiso nihongo bunpō (kaiteiban) (Basic Japanese
Grammar, Revised Ed.). Kurosio Publishers.
Moriyama, Takuro (1988) Nihongo dōshi jutsugo-bun no kenkyū (Study of Japanese Verbal
Predicate Sentences). Meiji Shoin.
(Abe Shinobu)

220Grammar K: Discourse and Text
 Consistency of Text: Cohesion and Coherence
When we read a sequence of sentences, we usually sense that there is a certain semantic consistency.
This unit of consistency is called text.
Text has semantic consistency, which has two types.
The first type is brought about by grammatical means.
(1) Watashi wa Wagahai wa Neko de Aru ga sukida. Kono hon wa Natsume Sōseki no debyuu
saku de aru ‘I like Wagahai wa Neko de Aru. This book is Natsume Soseki’s debut work.’(2) A: Tarō wa kesa 6ji ni okita yo ‘Taro got up at 6am this morning.’
B: Tsuri ni itta no kai? ‘Did he go fishing?’
In (1), the reason why the first and second sentences make up text is because kono hon correspondswith Wagahai wa Neko de Aru.
The text is constructed by means of the demonstrative kono. In(2), the reason why (2)A and (2)B make up the text is because (2)B lacks Case ga, which is its
argument, and its identification depends on (2)A. When the text is composed by grammaticalmeans, it is considered to have cohesion.
The second type of text is put together by induction.
(3) A: Tarō wa kesa 6ji ni okita yo ‘Taro got up at 6am this morning.’
B: Ame ga furanakya ii kedo na ‘I hope it won’t rain.’(3)B does not lack argument, nor does it include other components such as a demonstrative. To
understand that (3)A and (3)B together have semantic consistency, one needs the knowledge of thisJapanese folk belief that, when someone who is not an early riser gets up early, it will rain. That is,the consistency is created not grammatically but through inference based on some encyclopedic
knowledge. When the text is formed by pragmatic means, the text is considered to have coherence.
The study of both cohesion and coherence is important in understanding text, but to study coherence
is more difficult than that of cohesion, since the study of coherence involves examining thesituation.
The study of cohesion centers round the study of grammatical means (cohesion devices) that bringabout cohesion. In Japanese, demonstratives, some nouns, ellipses of the argument of thepredicate, conjunctive expressions, and modality of explanation, such as noda, are considered
cohesion devices.
(4)Harii Pottaa wa sekaiteki besuto sera da. Sakusha wa kono hon ga ureru made Porutogaru deeigokyōshi o shite ita sōda ‘Harry Potter is a world-wide best seller. It is said that the author
taught English in Portugal until this book became popular.’

221

The reason why the second sentence and the first sentence in (4) form the text is because the noun,
sakusha “the author,” inevitably requires “a certain book.” (Please note that sakka ‘writer’ does notpossess this characteristic.)→結束性 Cohesion (7-D), 指示詞 Demonstratives (Anaphora）(2-K), 名詞句の省略・繰り返し
Ellipsis and Repetition of Noun Phrases (2-K)
 References
Iori, Isao (1998) ‘Tekisuto gengogaku no rironteki wakugui ni kansuru ichi kosatsu’ (A Study of the
Logical Framework of Text Linguistics) in Hitotsubashi daigaku ryugakusee sentaa kiyo, First
Issue.
Halliday, M.A.K. & Hassan, R. (Ando, Sadao et al. transl.) (1997) Tekisuto wa dono yō ni kōseesareru ka – gengo no kessokusee (Cohesion in English). Hituzi Syobo.
(Iori Isao)222

 Deixis
Some words change their reference from situation to situation.
(1) A: Kimi, ashita hima kai ‘Are you free tomorrow?’
B: Aa, boku wa ashita hima dayo ‘Yeah, I am free tomorrow.’(2) A: Sono hon, omoshirosō dane ‘That book looks interesting.’
B: Aa. Kono hon wa omoshiroi yo ‘Yeah, this book is interesting.’“Kimi” in (1)A and “boku” in (1)B are the same person, B. Similarly, “sono hon” in (2)A and“kono hon” in (2)B are the same book. This characteristic where the reference changes fromsituation to situation is called deixis. Mikami Akira explains deixis as “the characteristic of signe
to change as the situation changes.” Words that possess this characteristic are called deictic words.
Deixis is determined with “now, here, and me” at the center. For instance, ashita ‘tomorrow,’ is a
deictic word which means “the day after the day the utterance is made (now)”, while yokujitsu ‘thefollowing day’ is not a deictic word. Incidentally, whether ni can be affixed or not is related to thedeictic nature of the word.
(3) a. Ashita {*ni/ø} watashi wa kikoku suru ‘I will leave for my home country tomorrow.’b. (Sono) yokujitsu {ni/ø} watashi wa kikoku shita ‘I left for my home country the followingday.’“Kotchi” and “sotchi” used on the phone, as in (4), are deictic words, and they mean “place closer
to the speaker” and “place closer to the listener” respectively.
(4) Kotchi wa yuki da kedo, sotchi wa dō? ‘It’s snowing here; how about over there?’First and second person pronouns are also deictic words, as evident in (1).
Some demonstratives are deictic words, and others are not.
They are deictic when they present
deixis to the speaker and listener, as in (2) and (4), while they are not deictic when they present
anaphora as in (5).
(5) Kinō sushi o tabeta. Sono sushi wa umakatta ‘I has some sushi yesterday.
delicious.’

The sushi was→指示詞 Demonstratives (Deixis) (2-K)
 References
Mikami, Akira (1953) Gendaigohō josetsu (Introduction to Contemporary Grammar).
Publishers.

Kurosio

Levinson, S.C. (Yasui, Minoru, et al. transl.) (1990) Eigo goyōron (Pragmatics). Kenkyūsha
Shuppan.
(Iori Isao)223

 Demonstratives (Deixis)
The use of demonstratives may be divided into two major categories, deixis and anaphora. Deixis
requires that the reference exists where the utterance occurs.
(1) Mori: Hayashi san, sono kaban doko de katta no? ‘Mr. Hayashi, where did you buy that bag?’Hayashi: Kono kaban wa Shibuya de kattanda ‘I bought this bag in Shibuya.’
Smell and sound are not visible, but they are treated as being present at the place of speech, anddeixis may be applied.
(2) Daidokoro kara shitekuru kono nioi wa nandarō
kitchen?’‘What is this smell that’s coming from the

There are usages which are formally anaphora, but are treated as deixis that point to an element thatexists at the place of the utterance.
(3) Utoutoshite me ga sameru to onna wa itsunomanika tonari no jiisan to hanashi o hajimete iru.
Kono jiisan wa tashikani mae no mae no eki kara notta inakamono de aru (Natsume Sōseki,
Sanshirō) ‘I dozed off, and when I woke up, the woman had been talking to the old man next to her.
This old man was a rustic who got on at a couple of stations back.’
There are two usages of deixis. The first usage is when the speaker and listener are in two separate
locations, as in (4). Mikami Akira calls this the contrasting type.
(4) A: Sono yubiwa kirei ne ‘That ring is pretty.’
B: Kono yubiwa wa kyonen Wakō de katta no ‘I bought this ring at Wako last year.’This is a typical deictic usage.
the listener is marked with so.
(5)

Ko

What is close to the speaker is marked with ko and what is close toSo・

S: Speaker
H: Listener・S

H

When the speaker and listener are side by side, the points of view are not in contrast, and ko, so, anda represent near, middle and far, respectively from the speaker (or listener).
(6)

A
So

S, H

Ko

224

Mikami Akira calls this the fusion type. Usually, ko (near) and a (far) are used but so is not used
often except in a situation such as the following .
(7) (In a taxi) Soko de tomete kudasai‘Please stop over there.’

Demonstratives form such parts of speech as pronouns, adnominals, and adverbs. Chart 2-13
shows the demonstratives sorted by the commonality of ko, so, and a, rather than by part of speech.
Based on this method of categorization, the demonstratives are sometimes called “ko-so-a.”Chart 2-13: Classification of Demonstratives_______________________________________________________________________KoSo
A Adnominal
Individual kono
sonoano
Attribute
konna
sonna
anna
 Pronoun
Object
kore
sore
are
Personkoitsusoitsuaitsu
Location
koko
soko
asoko
Direction
kotchisotchiatchi
 Adverbkōsōaa→直示 Deixis (2-K), 指示詞 Demonstratives (Anaphora) (2-K)
 Reference
Kinsui, Satoshi & Takubo Yukinori, ed. (1992) ‘Shijishi.’ Nihongo kenkyū shiryoshu 1-7(Literature for Study of Japanese, 1-7: Demonstratives).
Hituzi Syobo.
(Iori Isao)225

 Demonstratives (Anaphora)
Anaphora is a usage of demonstratives which, unlike deixis, the reference (antecedent) exists within
the sentence and not in the location of the utterance.
When the antecedent appears before the demonstrative, it is called anaphora, and when theantecedent appears after the demonstrative, it is called cataphora. In cataphora, always ko is used.
In anaphora it is important to distinguish dialog from text (written discourse). In dialog, thedistinction between a and so becomes an issue. In principle, the speaker decides which to use
based on her/his knowledge of the antecedent.
First, what the speaker knows is marked by a. Especially when the listener also shares theknowledge, as in (1), or when it is in a monolog, a is always used.
(1) A: Kinō Hayashi ni atta yo. {Aitsu/*Soitsu} aikawarazu genkidatta yo ‘I saw Hayashi
yesterday. The guy looked good as usual.’
B: {Aitsu/*Soitsu} mattaku genkida na ‘That guy is just so full of energy.’(2) Mata ano mise de sushi o tabetai naa ‘I’d love to eat sushi at that shop again.’
When the speaker has the knowledge but (the speaker assumes that) the listener does not know, so isused, as in (3)A.
(3) A: Gakusee jidai no yūjin ni Hayashi tte yatsu ga irunda kedo, {?aitsu/soitsu} omoshiroi yatsu
nanda ‘I have a friend named Hayashi from my student days, and he’s an interest guy.’
B: {*Ano/Sono} hito, shigoto wa nan nano?

‘What’s his job?’

In this instance, a may be used if it is a monolog.
(4) A: Gakusee jidai no yūjin ni Hayashi tte yatsu ga irunda kedo, aitsu, omoshiroi yatsu datta naa‘I had a friend named Hayashi from my student days, and he was an interesting guy.’
When the speaker does not have the knowledge of the component, as in (3)B and (5), so is always
used to identify it.
(5) Tokkyū ni maniattara, {*are/sore} ni notte ikō ‘If we can make the express, let’s take it.’
In 文章, the contrast between ko and so becomes an issue. In 文章 the listener becomesinsignificant, and a, which relies on the listener’s knowledge, is not usually used. Here we limit
our discussion to the usage of koto and no in designative anaphora (where the entire antecedent isthe designated object).
First, kono and sono express the speaker’s understanding of the respective antecedents.
Kono indicates that the speaker views the antecedent in relation to the discussion topic of the text.
Sono indicates that the speaker sees the antecedent from the point of view of adding textual
meaning.

226

Kono suggests that the relationship between the antecedent and the discussion topic of the text is a
close one. Sono, on the other hand, suggests that the speaker looks to the attribute of theantecedent within the text (textual meaning). Textual meaning is the type of attribute that theantecedent has, as in (6), where “kinō seekyō de tabeta” is the attribute of “sono zenzai.”(6) Kinō seekyō de zenzai o tabeta. Sono zenzai wa umakatta ‘I ate zenzai at the co-op (cafeteria)
yesterday. The zenzai was delicious.’
In 文章, when the semantic relationship among the sequential sentences is that of resultative
conjunction, usually kono is used. The usage of kono is classified into three major types: ①thereis paraphrasing, ②the antecedent (e.g., “jiko” in (8)) and the topic of the text are closely related, ③
the antecedent is far away.
In Type ①, the antecedent (kōcha ‘English tea’) may be replaced be another expression (nomimono,‘beverage’), as in (7). In Type ②, the antecedent (jiko ‘accident’) has a close relationship with the
topic of the text, as in (8). (Discussion on Type ③ is omitted.)(7) Watashi wa kōcha ga sukida. {kono/*sono} nomimono wa itsu mo tsukare o iyashite kureru ‘Ilike English tea. The beverage always heals my fatigue.’(8) Sakuya Tōmei de jiko ga atta. {Kono/?Sono} jiko de 3nin ga shinda ‘There was an accident on
Tomei Freeway last night. Three people were killed in the accident.’
Sono is used often where the semantic relationship among the sequenced sentences is contrastive oradversative. In this type of anaphora, it is not easy to omit sono or to replace wa with ga.
(9) Ken wa mukashi Kokutai no suiee senshu datta. {?Kono/Sono} Ken ga dekishishita to wa
shinjirarenai. ‘Ken used to be a swimmer in the National Athletic Meet. It is hard to believe that[a swimmer such as] Ken died from drowning.’→指示詞（deixis）Demonstratives (Deixis) (2-K), 旧情報・新情報 Old Information, New
Information (2-K)
 References
Iori, Isao (1997) ‘Wa to ga no tsukaiwake ni kakawaru ichi yōin’ (One Factor Involved in
Differentiating Wa and Ga) in Kokugogaku, 188.
Kinsui, Satoshi & Takubo Yukinori, ed. (1992) ‘Shijishi’ in Nihongo kenkyū shiryo 1-7(japanese
language study literature collection 1-7: demonstratives). Hituzi Syobo.
(Iori Isao)227

 Cleft Sentences
In a cleft sentence the word order is altered to place a certain component in a specific position, sothat the component gets special attention (English example: It is Mary who owns the house.) O.
Jespersen named this structure cleft sentence because the sentence is split into two clauses. Many
languages including Japanese possess this sentence structure. X no wa Y da, and X no ga Y da are
two types of cleft sentences in Japanese. A sentence with normal word order, Yamashita Kōen dekare ni atta ‘I met him in Yamashita Park,’ may be re-written into cleft sentences, Kare ni atta no{wa/ga}Yamashita Kōen da ‘Where I met him was Yamashita Park,’ or Yamashita Kōen de atta no{wa/ga} kare da ‘It was him whom I met in Yamashita Park.’ The components, Yamashita Kōen andkare, which normally are placed before the predicate , come after the predicate ‘atta (met)’, andthese components respectively turn into the predicates of the cleft accompanied by da.
X no wa Y da and X no ga Y da differ structurally and semantically. Both structures use
nominative and accusative nouns and nouns of time and place, etc. in the Y position. However,
only X no wa Y da allows subordinate clauses such as kara and tame, and also expressions such as
hajimete and nidome (e.g., Tarō ni atta no {wa/*ga} kikitai koto ga atta kara da ‘The reason I saw
Taro was because I had something I wanted to ask him about’). Also, only in X wa Y da the nounin the Y position may accompany a case particle (e.g., Kare ni atta no {wa/*ga} Yamashita Kōen deda ‘Where I met him was in Yamashita Park’).
X no wa in X no wa Y da expresses presupposed information which the speaker shares with thelistener, and the most important information which the speaker wants to convey (=focus) is in the Yda part (e.g., Anata ga waruinja nai. Warui no wa kono watashi da ‘You are not to blame. Who
is to blame is I’). On the other hand, X no ga Y da may work in two different ways. In the firstcase, Y da is presupposed, and X no ga is the focus (e.g., Hito no kachi wa yōshi ja nai to
wakatteiru ga, yahari kini naru no ga yōshi de aru ‘I know the person’s value doesn’t depend on theappearance, but what gets my attention is the appearance’). In the second case, sometimes Y da,and sometimes X no ga Y da as a whole, become the focus (e.g., Ano sensō o ikinobita no ga igai
nimo karada no yowai otōto datta ‘Who survived the war surprisingly was my little weaklingbrother’).
The syntactic structure and information structure of cleft sentences have been the major topics ofstudies in the past, but recently the various functions of cleft sentences in discourse are becoming to
be discussed.
→基本語順 Basic Word Order (2-C)
 References
Kumamoto, Chiaki (1989) ‘Nichiei no bunretsubun ni tsuite’ (On Cleft Sentences in Japanese andEnglish) in Saga Daigaku Eibungaku Kenkyū, 17.
Nishiyama, Yuji (2003) Nihongo meishiku no imiron to goyōron (Semantics and Pragmatics ofJapanese Noun Phrases). Hituzi Syobō.
Noda, Hisashi (1996) Wa to ga (Wa and Ga). Kurosio Publishers.
228

Declerck, Renaat (1988) Studies on copular sentences, cleft and pseudo-clefts. Leuven University
Press.
(Sunakawa Yuriko)229

 Ellipses and Repetition of Noun Phrases
Noun phrases are frequently omitted in Japanese.
component.)(1) ø Hayashi desu.

Dōzo yoroshiku(The expression in brackets [] is the omitted[Watashi wa] ‘[I am] Hayashi. Nice to meet you.’(2) ø Hayashi san desu ka? [Anata wa] ‘[Are you] Mr. Hayashi?’(3) Hayashi san wa shumi ga ōi. Ø Ima maishū shamisen kyōshitsu ni kayotteiru sōda [Hayashi
san wa] ‘Ms. Hayashi is a person of many interests. I hear [Ms. Hayashi] goes to a shamisen classevery week.’(1) and (2) differ greatly from (3). In (1) and (2), the reference is evident without anata wa. (Theversion with the “omission” is the standard form.) However, in (3), that Hayashi san is omitted in
the second sentence is not obvious without the first sentence. That is, the fact that Hayashi san isomitted in the second sentence in (3) creates cohesion. In general, the omission of the first andsecond person components do not contribute to cohesion, while the omission of the third personcomponents creates cohesion.
As we have seen, the first and second person components do not necessarily get “omitted.” Rather,
they “manifest” when they become necessary to express contrast, for example.
As evident in (3), in principle, third person components also are to be omitted rather than repeated.
However, when the preceding sentence is a phenomenon-descriptive sentence and when theproceeding sentence is an attribute- descriptive sentence, the component is not omitted readily, andit has to be repeated.
(4) Hayashi san wa kinō asa hayaku dekaketa. {Hayashi san wa/?ø} tsuri dōkōkai no kaiin de aru‘Mr. Hayashi left home early yesterday morning. Mr. Hayashi is a member of the fishing club.’
It is important to note that repetition is used to specify the content of an event, as in (5).
instance, generally an emphatic sentence structure is used in the second sentence.

In this(5) Kesa JR Chūō Sen de jiko ga ari densha ga okureta. Jiko ga atta no wa Nakano Eki no kōnai‘There was an accident on the JR Chuo Line this morning and the trains were delayed. Where theaccident occurred was inside the Nakano Station.’→文章のまとまり－結束性・一貫性 Consistency of Text: Cohesion and Coherence (2-K), 結束
性 Cohesion ((7-D), 談話研究 Studies in Discourse (4-B)
 References
Kuno, Susumu (1978) Danwa no bunpō(Grammar of Discourse). Taishukan Shoten.
Shimizu, Yoshiko (1995) ‘NP-wa to ø (NP)-wa’ (NP-wa and ø (NP)-wa ) in Miyajima, Tatsuon &Nitta Yoshio, ed., Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (ge) (Grammar of Japanese Synonymous
Expressions II). Kurosio Publishers.
(Iori, Isao)230

 Use and Non-Use of Pronouns
The frequency of the use of pronouns is not very high in Japanese.
person pronouns are not used.

Generally, first and second(1) {?Watashi wa/ø} Hayashi desu. Dōzo yoroshiku ‘I am Hayashi. Nice to meet you.’(2) {?Anata wa/ø} Hayashi san desu ka ‘Are you Mr. Hayashi?’
Pronouns are used when contrast and exclusion are expressed.
(3) Kondo no paatii, {Boku wa/?ø} iku kedo, kimi wa dōsuru? (Contrast) ‘I am going to the party,
but how about you?’(4) Buchō: Kondo no kaigi dare ka detekurenai ka.
‘Director: Can anyone go to the upcoming conference?’
Tanaka: {Bokuga/?ø} demasu (Exclusion)‘Tanaka: I will go.’When a second person pronoun is not appropriate because of the listener-orientatedness constraint,often the listener’s name or job title is used.
(5) (To Mr. Hayashi) {?Anata/Hayashi san} mo isshoni shokuji o shimasen ka ‘ Mr. Hayashi, would
you dine with us?’(6) (To Tanaka, the director) {*Anata/Buchō} mo isshoni shokuji o shimasen ka ‘Director, would
you dine with us?”
The listener-orientatedness constraint is less strict with third person pronouns than with first andsecond person pronouns, but third person pronouns are not readily used in the following situations.
1) The reference is a superior of the speaker.
(7) A: Hayashi Sensee wa ashita gakkō ni korareru kana? ‘Will Professor Hayashi come to school
tomorrow?’
B: {*Kare/*Kanojo/Sensee} wa shutchō da yo ‘The professor’s on a business trip.’2) The reference is not specified.
(8) A: Kinō, Yamada kun ni atta yo ‘I saw Yamada yesterday.’
B: Ett, dare {*Kare/Sono hito} ‘Huh?

Who is that person?’

The use of pronouns in Japanese is not mandatory.

Often the noun is repeated.

(9) Anemusume no Eeko no koe de, Ayuta wa toko o hanareta. Sem’men shite, chanoma de jochū
no kyūji de ōisogi de yūshoku o gochisō ni naru to, Ayuta wa ōzee no iru ōsetsuma e haitteitta.
Ayuta wa terekusasa kara fukigen ni muttsuri shiteita. …Dare ni nani o hanashikakeraretemo, kare231

wa mijikai henji shika shinakatta. (Inoue Yasushi, Asunaro Monogatari) ‘Ayuta left [his] bed
upon hearing the older daughter Eiko’s command. [He] washed up, and after [he] ate [his] dinner ina hurry in the family room as the maid waited on [him], Ayuta went into the guest room where a lotof people had gathered. Ayuta was glum and moody because [he] felt self-conscious. He only
returned a short response to anyone who tried to start a conversation with [him].’→名詞句の省略・繰り返し Ellipses and Repetition of Noun Phrases (2-K)
 References
Suzuki, Takao (1973) Kotoba to bunka (Language and Culture) in Iwanami Shinsho Series.
Iwanami Shoten.
Takubo, Yukinori (1997) ‘Nihongo no ninshō hyōgen’ (Expressions Involving Person in Japanese).
in Takubo, Yukinori, ed., Shiten to gengo kodo (Viewpoint and Linguistic Action). Kurosio
Publishers.
(Iori Isao)232

 Hai, Iie, and Ee: Responses
Response forms in the broad sense may be divided into two groups: 1) back-channeling as theexpression of listening comprehension, and 2) responding to the sentence.
For example, in Anone, (hai), kyō ne (hai) ikimasu ne (hai) ‘Say, (yeah?), today (yeah?), I’ll go(yeah),’ the hai inserted in the middle of the sentence signals that the listener is successfully
following the speaker. There are personal differences, but when there is a sentence-final particle(particle of interjection) such as ne, which is directed to the listener, or when silence occurs in the
middle of the utterance, some sort of monitoring expression, such as hai, un, or a nod, is expectedon the part of the listener within a certain amount of time. Otherwise, the listener is signaling thatthe communication is not being successful.
In the meantime, hai at the end of a sentence signals affirmation, and its function is different fromthat of back-channeling. Response in the narrow definition is the expression of the listener’s
reaction to the information which the speaker imparts in a cohesive chunk.
Response forms express the declaration of the listener’s attitude toward the speaker’s demand in thecase of action-requesting (e.g., Matte kudasai ‘Please wait’→Wakarimashita ‘OK’, Ii desu yo‘Sure’, *Sō desu ne), and the declaration of access to the information if exchange of information is
involved (e.g., Samui desu ne ‘It’s cold’→ *Wakarimashita, *Ii desu yo, Sō desu ne ‘Indeed’).
When access to information is expressed, the response varies depending on how well the listenerknows the information. In Japanese, if the information is new to the listener, s/he must express
that s/he had no knowledge of the information in question up until now. This is done in using
expressions such as: hee (acknowledging the receipt of the new information by expressing surprise),a, sō desu ka, hontō (confirmatory introduction via a question), fūn (expressing that the listener isassessing her/his knowledge, naruhodo (the listener has completed her/his assessment of her/his
knowledge), and so on.
In contrast, hai and un are used to express that the listener already knows the said information.
(To express yes or no, in the standard dialect, one says, Shirimasen ka? ‘Don’t you know?’ →Hai,
shirimasen ‘No, I don’t’.) In this type of response, there may be added expressions, such as Hai,sō desu ‘That’s correct’, and Iie, chigaimasu ‘That’s not correct’. They vary according to the partsof speech as well. Usually these expressions are used when the predicate is a noun. Otherwise,
the predicate may be repeated, or some other expressions, such as Sonna koto wa nai ‘That’s not so,’are used.
When the listener wants to reserve her/his answer, s/he often makes a vague acknowledgment, suchas maa ‘well…’, or responds in question forms, such as Dō deshō ne ‘I am not sure…’.
→アノ・エート・マア－フィラーAno, Eeto, and Maa: Fillers (2-K)
 References
Horiguchi, Junko (1997) Nihongo kyoiku to kaiwa bunseki (Japanese Education and Conversation
Analysis.) Kurosio Publishers.

233

Sadanobu, Toshiyuki, ed. (2002
Kurosio Publishers.

‘Un to so no gengogaku’ (Linguistic Study of Un and So).

(Moriyama Takuro)234

 Ara and Maa: Interjections
Interjections are independent words that express the speaker’s undifferentiated response when andwhere the utterance takes place. They are categorized into 3 main groups: “broadly-definedemotion-change type” (expressing change in emotion), “broadly-defined display of on-going
thinking type” (appearing in environments such as on-going thinking), and “action execution
coupling type” (working together with actions in the real world).
The “broadly-defined emotion-change type” is divided into two groups: expressions of the welling
up of inner feelings, such as aa, and expressions triggered by encounters with events and situations.
The latter includes the type that expresses the speaker’s probing of the encountered abnormal
situations, such as oya, e, and are (rising intonation possible), the type that expresses astonishment,such as waa, ō, maa, and kyaa (rising intonation not possible), and the type that expresses value
judgment, such as yatta, shimeta, and yoshi. Within the last type, there are differences in usage
depending on the degree of astonishment. Among ō, waa, and kyaa, the latter two express
stronger astonishment than ō.
Some expressions in the “broadly-defined display of on-going thinking type” have commonality
with fillers and response expressions. Eetto, which expresses that the speaker is in the middle ofthinking, may be used as a filler as well. Expressions in this group include those that are related toproblem solving thought process, such as doredore (signaling the start of a probe), hahaa(expressing that the solution is getting closer), naruhodo (understanding obtained), fūn (expressingthat the speaker is calculating her/his position in the understanding of the matter), and hate(expressing that there is an unsolved problem). They also include those that are related to working
out pertinent information, such as sōsō, and aa (recalling information, also changing the subject).
All of these expressions function as monitors in information processing, and used according to their
specific functions.
The “action execution coupling type” works in conjunction with the realization of the action in thereal world. They include encouraging shouts, such as yokkorasho, yoisho, otto, ei, and sore, as
well as expressions to encourage actions, such as saa (starting up an action).
Interjections express undifferentiated emotion, and are rarely uttered consciously. Their function
differs from language to language (e.g., waai in Thai is uttered when the speaker feels pain), andthey constitute a very important component in natural conversation. The use of interjections is an
important component to acquire in Japanese language learning.
→感動詞 Interjections (2-B), アノ・エート・マア－フィラーAno, Eeto, and Maa: Fillers (2-K)
 References
Moriyama, Takuro (1996) ‘Jōdōteki kandōshi kō’ (Examination of Emotional Interjections) in
Gobun, 65. Osaka Daigaku Kokugo Kokubungaku Kai.
_______________(2002) ‘Dōsa hatsudō no kandōshi saa, sore o megutte’ (Discussion on Saa andSore, Interjection of Initiation of Action). Nihongo Bunpō, 2-2.
(Moriyama Takuro)235 Ano, Eeto, and Maa: Fillers
We do not always transmit the content of our communication without hitches and glitches. We
grope for words, and let out our voice to secure our turns in conversation. Sometimes we stoptalking in the middle of an utterance. In these circumstances, we utter expressions such as anō,and eeto. These are called fillers.
Fillers help us secure our turns in conversation, and help prevent others from butting in. When the
speaker does not use fillers properly, the infringement on the speaker’s right to speak may result.
Attention must be paid on this matter in Japanese language instruction.
Fillers are used at the beginning of a sentence, or at a juncture within the sentence between
independent phrases, that is, where an interjectory particle (usage of sentence-final particles asinterjections) occurs.
Some forms are lexically undifferentiated, such as aa, ū. They usually express that the utterer is in
the process of thinking and that s/he will resume talking shortly. These expressions are uttered tosignal that the state of tension continues, and is uttered with flat intonation.
Those that are lexically established and used most frequently include anō, eetto, etc.
Anō signals that the utterer wants to call to the other party or to start up a conversation. Eetto
expresses that the utterer is in the process of deciding how to put her/his thinking into words, whatto think, or how to answer. Eetto may be used in a monolog. It may take the form, ūnto. Eetto
has a nuance that the thinking that is going on is private, while the form ee in flat intonation is usedin utterances made in public to signal that the speaker has something to say.
→ハイ・イイエ・エエ－応答 Hai, Iie, and Ee: Responses (2-K), 会話のしくみ Mechanism ofConversation (4-B). 談話分析 Discourse Analysis (7-C)
 References
Sadanobu, Toshiyuki, ed. (2002) Un to sō no gengogaku (Linguistic Study of Un and Sō). Hituzi
Syobo.
_________________ & Takubo Yukinori (1995) ‘Danwa ni okeru shinteki sōsa monitaa kikō –shinteki sōsa hyōshiki eeto to anō’ (Psychological Monitoring Mechanism in Discourse: Eeto andAnō as Mechanism of Psychological Manipulation in Discourse) in Gengo Kenkyū, 108.
(Moriyama Takuro)236

 Conjunctives and Conjunctive Expressions“Conjunctive expressions” appear at semantic junctures in sentences, part of a sentence, and pauses
in discourse, to express the semantic relationship between what has been presented and what is tocome.
(1) …kono yōni, okashi wa watashitachi no seekatsu ni kakasukoto ga dekinai sonzai ni nattekita
nodesu.
Kokomade wa okashi no rekishi ni tsuite nobemashita. Kokokara wa genzai ninki no aru
okashi ni tsuite shōkai shimasu. Genzai wa kenkō būmu no eekyō de dochiraka to ieba assarishita
mono ga kōhyō desu.
‘As I have mentioned so far, sweets have come to be an essential part of our life.
So far I have discussed the history of sweets. Now I am going to talk about what sweets
are popular currently. Currently, because of the influence of heightened health concerns, relatively
light sweets are popular.’
The underlined part in (1) summarizes the content so far and announces in advance how the speaker
will develop the content.
This part expresses the semantic relationship between the previous
paragraph and the succeeding paragraph, and functions as a conjunctive expression as a whole.
The underlined part may be replaced with a conjunctive, tokorode, or an idiomatic expression, sorewa sō to shite, and so on. This shows that such expressions indicate the relationship among
semantic units.
Conjunctive expressions sometimes include conjunctive particles as in Ame ga futtekita kara kaerō‘Let’s go home, since it’s started to rain’, Kyōto e itta toki, mimashita ‘I saw it when I went to
Kyoto’, and adnominal continuative clauses, as in tanoshiku utai, odoru ‘sing and dance joyously.’
They are explained elsewhere in this book, in the section on complex sentences.
There is an unlimited number of what we may call conjunctive expressions. There are frequently
used idiomatic expressions, such as sore wa sōto ‘putting it aside’, and hanashi wa kawarimasu ga‘to change the subject’, in addition to conjunctive particles. It would be difficult even to compose
a comprehensive list of conjunctive particles.
For example, the conjunctive particle, dewa, has acontracted from, ja(a), and a form that accompanies a demonstrative word, sore dewa.
Dakarahas a corresponding polite form, desu kara. The number of forms will be enormous if one is toconsider all these factors.
For the time being the most representative conjunctive forms are listed in Chart 2-14, along with themeaning and classification.
Many of the conjunctives and conjunctive expressions were derived from different parts of speech
and became idiomatic expressions or 転用 ten’yō (use in a different category) in fairly recent times(e.g., -shita tokoro de →tokorode, sore+case particle kara →sorekara). Currently, new usages
continue to be created mostly in young people’s language. An example is the use of the adverb, ato,
as a conjunctive expression to mean addition.

237

(2) Raamen hitotsu. Ato, gyōza mo ichininmae onegai shimasu ‘One ramen, please.
order of gyōza, please.’Also, an

To iu ka in Nishida wa kinben to iu\ka, kusomajime da ‘Nishida is hard working, or rather, he’sserious to a fault’ is its original use. Recently however, it is 転用 ten’yō to revise the other party’s
utterance or for the speaker to change the subject, as in(3) A: Warui to omou nara, ayamare ‘If you think you’re wrong, apologize.’
B: Te iu ka, omae ga sakini ayamare yo ‘Or rather, you apologize first.’(4) (While eating silently, all of a sudden)
Te iu ka, kono sarada, oishii ne ‘I just thought, this salad is delicious.’→接続詞 Conjunctives (2-B)
 Reference
Sakuma, Mayumi (1990) ‘Setsuzoku hyōgen (1) (2)’ (Conjunctive Expressions (1) & (2)) in
Teramura Hideo et al. ed., Keesu sutadii nihongo no bunsho・danwa (Japanese Text and Discourse:
Case Studies). Ohfu.
(Hamada Mari)

238

 Old Information and New Information (Definite vs. Indefinite,

Known vs. Unknown)

Whether a component of a sentence is old information or new information (known vs. unknown)
depends on the context.
The first ojiisan is new information, and the second ojiisan is old information in (1).
(1) Mukashi mukashi, aru tokoro ni ojiisan ga imashita. Aru hi, ojiisan wa shibakari ni ikimashita‘Once upon a time, there lived an old man. One day the old man went firewood gathering.’
Please note that whether the information is old or new is not related to whether the information is
first mention or not.
For example, (2) and (3) appear in newspaper articles and each sentencestarts out the article respectively. In (2), Kobuchi Keezō Shushō is new information, while in (3) itis treated as old information.
(2) Kobuchi Keezō Shushō ga 29 nichi, Amerika e tatta ‘Prime Minister Kobuchi Keizo left for
America on the 29th.’(3) Kobuchi Keezō Shushō wa 4 ka, Mie Ken, Ise Shi o otozurete, Ise Jingū o sanpai shita ‘Prime
Minister Kobuchi Keizo visited Ise City in Mie Prefecture, and paid respect at the Ise Shrine on the
4th.’
The distinction between new and old information depends on whether (the speaker knows if) the
listener is aware of the reference. If the speaker thinks the listener is aware of the reference, theinformation is old; if the speaker thinks the listener is not aware, the information is new.
The most important phenomenon that is involved in determining the distinction between new andold information is whether the information is marked by wa or ga.
In principle, if the speaker deems the information old, wa marks it, and if the speaker deems theinformation new, ga marks it.
That is why in (1) ga is used when the information appears thefirst time, and wa is used subsequently.
When the reference is unknown to the speaker it is considered new information, as seen in the useof an interrogative word as the subject in (4).
In (4), the sentence minus the interrogative word is
old information. Thus, when the old information is the subject, it is marked by wa, as in (5).
(4) Dare ga kono hon o kaita ndesuka ‘Who wrote this book?’
New information

old information(5) Kono hon o kaita no wa dare desu ka ‘Who was it that wrote this book?’
Old information

new information

As stated above, when the noun phrase is repeated within the text, usually wa is used. When thesemantic relationship between the sentences is contrastive and adversative, ga is used, as in (6).
This is because the relationship is a marked relationship, and the said noun phrase is treated as new
information within the text.

239

(6) Tanaka wa kenkō ga jiman no otoko datta. Sono Tanaka {?ha/ga} kyūbyō de shindeshimatta‘Tanaka was a man who was proud of his good health. That same Tanaka died suddenly of acuteillness.’
Definite vs. Indefinite is a distinction similar to new information vs. old information.
Definite or indefinite is determined by whether (the speaker presumes) the listener is able to specify
the reference or not. If (the speaker thinks) the listener is able to specify the reference, it isdefinite. If not, it is indefinite. Shirani hito in (7) is indefinite, and Tarō in (8) is definite.
(7) Sakki shiranai hito ga uchi ni kita ‘An unfamiliar person came to the house earlier.’(8) Sakki Tarō ga uchi ni kita ‘Taro came to the house earlier.’
Only definite noun phrases may become the topic.

This is why wa cannot be used in (7) and (9).

(9) Kinō shiranai hito {*wa/ga}kimashita. ‘An unfamiliar person came yesterday.’
There is a certain correspondence between the definite vs. indefinite distinction and the distinction
between old and new information. What is indefinite is always new information (see (7) and (9)),
but it must be noted that what is definite may be old information ((3)) or new information ((2), (8)).
Expressions of existence are also concerned with the distinction between new and old information.
(10) Tsukue no ue ni hon ga arimasu (Sentence of existence) ‘There is a book on the desk.’(11) Hon wa tsukue no ue ni arimasu (Sentence of location) ‘The book is on the desk.’
Sentences of existence (e.g., (10)) are used to specify objects and persons that exist in certain
locations. The ga noun phrases that appear in this type of sentences are considered new
information. On the other hand, sentences of location, such as (11), specify the location of objects
or persons. The ga noun phrases that appear in this type of sentences are considered oldinformation.
→指示詞（anaphora）Demonstratives (Anaphora) (2-K),
Basic Differences (2-I)

ハとガ－基本的な違い Wa and Ga:

 References
Kuno, Susumu (1973) Nihon bunpō kenkyū (Study of Japanese Grammar). Taishukan Shoten.
Takubo, Noriyuki (1987)‘Goyo bunseki (2)’ (Error Analysis II) in Nihongogaku,

6-5.

Noda, Hisashi (1984) ‘Yudaibun to mudaibun’ (Topic-Present Sentences and Topic-Absent
Sentences), in Kokugogaku, 136.
(Iori Isao)240

 View Point
View point originally is a style of empathy where the audience takes the view point of a character ina play and sees the world through the character. Kuno (1978) analogized this concept to thecamera angle and introduced it into the study of syntax. View point is also called empathy. Makino(1995) interpreted the spatial concept of Uchi (inside) and Soto (outside) metaphorically anddefined the view point of a person in Uchi as subjective, and the view point of a person in Soto as
objective. In Japanese we always have to decide which view point to take, Uchi or Soto. Japanesepeople tend to lean toward the Uchi view point. When we observe grammatical phenomena, there
are a great number of sentence structures where someone who expresses the Uchi viewpoint isdesignated the grammatical person. We call this type of person, Uchi person, and the opposing
argument, Soto person. Both Uchi person and Soto person are fluid concepts. They are moresensitive to fluid human relationship than to linguistic context, and differ from the grammaticalconcept of person of Indo-European languages. In this chapter, let us examine the grammar that
requires Uchi person.
It is well known that the speaker sees the transaction from the receiver’s point of view with kureru,
a “giving” verb in the giving and receiving group of verbs.
(1) Tarō wa X ni chokoreeto o kuremashita ‘Taro gave X chocolate.’
In (1), X has to be a Uchi person to Taro. If X is the self, her/his father, or friend, they meet therequirement. If X is someone the speaker does not know (i.e., a Soto person) kureta cannot be
used. What is interesting is that if X is the speaker’s wife, she is a Uchi person, but if she is an
ex-wife, she is a Soto person. Even though it is the same person, one can no longer use kureta in
the latter case.
The subject of passive sentences is usually a Uchi person.
(2) X wa Nyūyōku de bōkan ni saifu o hittakurareta ‘X got his purse snatched by an assailant in
New York.’
In (2), one cannot plug in someone like a passer-by in X’s place, because a passer-by has no Uchi
relationship with the speaker. Usually it has to be someone in the Uchi relationship with the speaker,
such as herself/himself, the mother, a friend, etc. Conversely, in (3), which is an active sentence,
X is a Soto person, not an Uchi person.
(3) Bōkan ga Nyūyōku de X no saifu o hittakutta ‘An assailant snatched X’s purse in New York.
Jibun is a reflexive pronoun that designates the subject of a sentence, and the designated person has
to be a Uchi person. Thus, X in the following sentence cannot be a Soto person.
(4) X wa jubun no kuruma de tsūkin shite imasu ‘X commutes in his/her car.’
If X is the protagonist of a novel and if the reader has enough sympathy toward him, jibun may be
used this way, but jibun usually can only be used with the speaker’s Uchi person.
Similarly, tsumori can only be used when the person who has the intention is the speaker’s Uchi
person. Thus, X in (5) cannot be a Soto person if the speaker has no sympathy toward him/her.
241

(5) X wa raishū kyūka o toru tsumori desu ‘X is planning to take a vacation next week.’
In summary, there are Uchi view point and Soto view point, and they form a continuum.
former presents subjective expressions, and the latter presents objective expressions.

The→授受表現の諸特徴 Various Expressions of Giving and Receiving (2-E), 方向性表現
Expressions of Direction (2-E)
 References
Kuno, Susumu (1979) Danwa no bunpō (Grammar of Discourse). Taishukan Shoten.
Makino, Seiichi (1995) Gengo bunkagaku: bunpō o bunka de kiru (Study ofCulture: Disecting Grammar with Culture). ALC.

Language and(Makino Seiichi)

242

Grammar L: Honorifics
 System of Hearer-Oriented Expressions
Hearer-oriented expressions are divided into two major groups. One group is called honorifics andexpresses the speaker’s respect and polite attitude. At the other extreme end is what is calledvulgar language. Vulgar language expresses cajoling and contempt toward the person in
discussion. In Japanese language education vulgar language is not generally included in the learning
objectives. Honorifics are more important in the instruction. If not vulgar language, however, it isimportant that students learn not only honorifics which put a certain distance between theinterlocutors, but also friendliness toward the other party and expressions of camaraderie.
Expressions of friendliness usually use the plain form for the predicates.
(1) Ima, kore, yonderunda ‘I’m reading this now.’(2) Konban, nani taberu? ‘What shall we eat tonight?’
This style is used toward people with whom you are totally at home, such as family members andpersonal friends.
Honorifics are classified into hearer-oriented honorifics and topic-oriented honorifics.
Hearer-oriented honorifics express politeness and respectfulness toward the listener, andtopic-oriented honorifics express respect toward the person who appears as a sentential component
in the sentence.
Hearer-oriented honorifics have polite style and courteous style. Polite style, also called thedesu/masu style, uses the noun/adjective + desu from and the verb + masu form in the predicate in
the main clause.
(3) Tōkyō wa ima nanji desu ka ‘What time is it now in Tokyo?’(4) Ano mise no raamen wa oishii desu yo ‘The ramen at that shop is delicious.’(5) Itsumo ano mise de kaimono shimasu ‘I’ll shop at the usual store.’
Usually, polite style is introduced first in Japanese language instruction because this style is usedfrequently by an adult when s/he talks with neighbors whom the speaker only knows by sight,
station clerks, shop clerks and so no.
The main form of courteous style, also dubbed super polite style, is gozaimasu (=arimasu).
Mairimasu, itashimasu, orimasu, and de gozaimasu are also used in this style, and they are used asfollows.
(6) Semmenjo wa 4kai to 5kai ni gozaimasu ‘Restrooms are on the 4th and 5th floors.’(7) Mada kagi o omochi de gozaimashitara, gohenkyaku o onegai itashimasu ‘If you still have thekey, please return it to us.’(8) Rokkai de Hokkaidō bussanten o kaisai itashite orimasu ‘The Hokkaido Product Fair is being
held on the 6th floor.’
243

Topic-oriented honorifics consist of respectful language and humbling language.
Respectfullanguage promotes the subject of the sentence, and the forms include o+ adverbial form of verbs +ni naru, and special verb forms such as irassharu (=iru, kuru, iku), nasaru (=suru) and so on.
The form that is the same as the passive form is also used.
(9) O yomi ni narimashitara, kochira ni okaeshi kudasai.
done reading.’

Please return [it] to us when you are

Humbling language is expressed mainly with the o+adverbial form of verbs+suru form. It consistsof expressions to promote the person other than in the position of the subject of the sentence, andspecial expressions for humbling the subject of the sentence, such as mōshimasu, itashimasu, andorimasu. (10) is an example of the former type expression, and (11) is an example of the latter
type expression.
(10) Uketori wa Tanaka san ni owatashi shimashita ‘I handed the receipt to Mr. Tanaka.’(11) Satō to mōshimasu ‘I am Sato.’→尊敬語 Respectful Language (2-L), 謙譲語 Humbling Language (2-L), 丁寧語・丁重語
Polite Style・Courteous Style(2-L), 待遇表現の運用 Proficiency in System of Hearer-Oriented
Expressions (2-L)
 Reference
Kikuchi, Yasuto (1997) Keigo (Honorifics) in Kōdansha gakujutsu bunko (Kodansha Academic
Pocketbook Series). Kodansha.
(Ohso Mieko)

244 Respectful Language
Respectful language is a category of honorifics, and expresses respect for the person in the subject
position in a sentence. It is, thus, also called subject-oriented respectful language. The form iso+adverbial form+ ni naru.
It is important to differentiate this form from the o+adverbial
form+suru form, which is what is called humbling language.
(1) Kono waapuro, otsukai ni narimasu ka ‘Will you be using this word processor?’(2) Kachō wa sakihodo odekake ni narimashita ‘Our section chief left a while ago.’
Verbs such as kuru, iku, iru, and taberu have their own specific respectful forms that are usedinstead of the formula, o+adverbial form+naru.
(3) Yamada Sensee wa asu wa daigaku ni irasshaimasen ‘Prof. Yamada won’t be coming to/go to/beat the university tomorrow.’(4) Ojōsama wa 3ji ni keeki o meshiagarimashita ‘Your daughter ate cake at 3 o’clock.’
Irassharu is the respectful form for kuru, iku and iru, and may be interpreted as one of the threepossibilities depending on the situation of the sentence. See (3). Below is the list of specificrespectful forms.
kuru, iku, iru→

irassharu & oide ni naru

kureru→kudasaru

yuu→

ossharutaberu, nomu→

meshiagaru

shitteiru→

gozonji da

miru

→

goran ni naru

neru

→

oyasumi ni naru

Please note that the conjugation of irassharu, ossharu, kudasaru, and nasaru is slightly irregular(e.g., irassharu→irasshaimasu, irasshai).
The subject of a sentence and the listener are not always the same person.
the person in the subject position while using casual style to the listener.

One may pay respect to(5) Yamada Sensee wa kenkyūshitsu ni irassharu kana ‘I wonder if Prof. Yamada is in his office.’
Other than the o+adverbial form+ni naru form, the same form as the passive form, reru/rareru, isused to express respect. In Tokyo area, people seem to think that the (ra)reru form is not as
respectful as the o+adverbial form+ni naru form (along with special forms), however, in someregions the (ra)reru form is the primary respectful form.
(6) Kono pasokon, tsukawaremasu ka ‘Will you be using this word processor?’

245

The respectful forms of adjectives are o+adjective and o+te from+irassharu.
Chinese origin use go, in principle, instead of o.

Na-adjectives of(7) Oisogashii desuka/Oisogashikute irasshaimasu ka ‘Are you busy?’(8) Okiree desune/Okiree de irasshaimasu ne ‘[You are] pretty.’(9) Gorippa desu/Gorippa de irasshaimasu ‘[You are] admirable.’
The respectful form of noun+da is noun+de irassharu.
(10) Sensee de irasshaimasu ka ‘[Are you] the/a professor?’→待遇表現の体系 System of Hearer-Oriented Expressions, (2-L), 謙譲語 Humbling
Language(2-L)

 Reference
Kikuchi, Yasuto (1997) Keigo (Honorifics) in Kōdansha gakujutsu bunko (Kodansha Academic
Pocketbook Series). Kodansha.
(Ohso Mieko)

246 Humbling Language
What has been called humbling language is divided into two major groups. One basically takes
the form of o+adverbial form+suru, and the other consists of several verbs such as itasu (=suru),
mōsu (=iu), mairu (=iku/kuru) and oru (=iru).
Rather than the humbling attitude toward the person in the subject position, the former groupexpresses respect toward the person/persons appearing in the position other than the subject position.
This is why the former is dubbed “recipient-respectful expression.”(1) Sensee kara o-kari-shita hon desu ‘This is the book I borrowed from the professor.’(2) (Sensee no) Okaban, o-mochi-shimashō ka ‘Professor, may I carry your bag?’(3) Sensee ni hon o o-kaeshi-shimashita ‘I returned the book to the professor.’(4) Sensee o eki made o-okuri-shimasu ‘I’ll take the professor to the station.’
These expressions depend on the verb which takes Case ni or Case o with the person in a position
other than the subject position. For example, the subject of the verb kaeru ‘to go home’ cannot
express humility by saying *okaerishimasu, because the verb kaeru only takes the subject.
The o suru form may not work with many verbs even when the verb can have the object of respect
in a position other than the subject position.
For example, Sensee no osenaka o onagashishitaThe‘I washed the professor’s back’ works, but *Sensee no osenaka o oaraishita is inappropriate.
o suru form may or may not be appropriate or natural with the same verb, depending on the way it
is used.
(5) Ano kata no puropōzu o o-uke-shiyō to omotte imasu ‘I am thinking of accepting the proposal
from that person.’(6) *Sensee no otsukurininatta shiken o oukeshimasu.
In terms of learning strategies, students do not have a choice but learn situations whererecipient-respectful expressions are frequently used.
Recipient-respectful expressions include, along with o suru, special forms such as mōshiageru(=(ni) iu) and itadaku (=morau).
Next, let us discuss the group that includes mōsu (=iu), mairu (=iku/kuru) and so on.
expresses the subject’s humbling attitude as the label indicates.

This group(7) Kotoshi no 3gatsu ni Oosaka e hikkoshite mairimashita ‘We moved to Osaka in March of thisyear.’(8) Genzai, IT kanren no shigoto o shite orimasu ‘Currently I am working in the IT industry.’
These verbs are often used with a subject that is not human as well.
(9) Kono erebeetaa wa ue e mairimasu ‘This elevator goes up.’247

(10) Tōkyō wa ame ga futte orimasu ‘It is raining in Tokyo.’
These forms, along with gozaimasu, can be said to form what is called courteous style, or superpolite style.
Courteous style is even more formal than polite style, whose basic forms are desu and masu.
Courteous style is often used by employees when they interact with customers in hospitality
industry such as hotel and restaurant business. It is hearer-oriented honorific language.
(11) Oheya wa 7kai de gozaimasu ‘Your room is on the 7th floor.’(12) Achira ni gozaimasu erebeetaa o goriyō kudasaimase ‘Please use the elevator over there.’
In courteous style, the masu form is used even in adnominal clauses, as in (12). Gozaru is neverused in contemporary language, and mairu and itasu would sound unnatural if the style of the mainclause is not in courteous style.
(13) Korekara mo seishin seii, shokumu ni torikunde mairu shozon de gozaimasu node, nanitozo
yoroshiku onegai mōshiagemasu ‘We are determined to continue to do our utmost best to perform
our duties, and ask that you give us your support.’
Even when the subject is considered the speaker’s senior, oru is used in TV and radio news, as
follows:(14) Shushō wa tsugino yōni itteorimasu ‘The Prime Minister says the following.’
This is because in contemporary Japanese the politeness or courtesy toward the listener has become
more important than the respect toward the person who is spoken of in the sentence.
In summary, it must be noted that there are two types of humbling language.
→待遇表現の体系 System of Hearer-Oriented Expressions (2-L), 尊敬語 Respectful Language(2-L), 丁寧語・丁重語 Polite Style and Courteous Style (2-L)
 Reference
Kikuchi, Yasuto (1997) Keigo (Honorifics) in Kōdansha gakujutsu bunko (Kodansha Academic
Pocketbook Series). Kodansha.
(Ohso Mieko)

248 Polite Style and Courteous Style
Both polite style and courteous style express the speaker’s consideration toward the listener.
Polite style expresses the politeness toward the listener, and courteous style expresses an evenhigher degree of politeness toward the listener.
Polite style consists of desu and masu style, and appears at the end of a sentence in thenoun/adjective + desu and adverbial form + masu forms.
(1) Koko wa sekai ichi no kūkō desu ‘This airport is the best in the world.’(2) Kono kūkō wa yūmei desu ‘This airport is famous.’(3) Kono kūkō wa atarashii desu ‘This airport is new.’(4) Kono kūkō no soba ni hoteru ga arimasu ‘There are hotels near this airport.’
Subordinate clauses are usually in plain style in polite style sentences.
(5) Watashi ga saikin mita no wa Furansu eega desu ‘What I saw recently was a French movie.
(6) Minna ga neteiru toki ni shigoto o suru hito ga imasu ‘There are people who work while
everyone else is sleeping.’(7) Atama ga itakatta node, ichinichijū uchi ni imashita ‘I had a headache, so I stayed home allday.’
Adults use polite style when they talk to station clerks, shop clerks, and neighbors whom they only
know by sight. This is why it is normally the practice that polite style is introduced first in Japanese
language instruction. However, when the speaker uses polite style to people whom the speaker hascome to know well, it gives the impression to the listener that the speaker is aloof, and it mightcause some damage to the relationship. It is important that the learner knows when to use which
style, polite or plain.
The most representative form of courteous style is gozaimasu (=arimasu). This and otherexpressions that are also used in humbling language, such as mairimasu (=ikimasu/kimasu),
orimasu (=imasu), itashimasu (=shimasu), de gozaimasu (desu), and mōshimasu (=iu), constitutecourteous, or super polite, style, which is very formal.
(8) Achira ni erebeetaa ga gozaimasu ‘There is an elevator over there.’(9) Oheya ni go-annai itashimasu ‘I will take you to your room.’(10) Oshokuji no goyōi ga dekite orimasu ‘Dinner is served.’
Courteous style usually appears in the masu form, and gozaru or de gozaru is not used incontemporary Japanese. Mairu, itasu, and oru have limited use in these conclusive forms.
are usually used in the masu form in subordinate clauses.

They(11) Ichibansen ni mairimasu densha wa Tōkyō iki de gozaimasu ‘The train arriving at Platform 1 isTokyo bound.’249

(12) Nani ka goyō ga gozaimashitara, oyobi kudasai mase ‘Please give us a call if you needanything.’(13) Kyō, minasama ni Tōkyō o go-annai itashimasu no wa watakushi, Noda Aiko de gozaimasu‘The guide who is showing you Tokyo today is I, Noda Aiko.’
Currently, it is presumed that courteous style is used most often in hospitality industry, such as inhotels, inns, and restaurants. Courteous style is also used in TV and radio news, and also inannouncements that are broadcast to an unspecified large number of people as in air planes andtrains.
→待遇表現の体系 System of Hearer-Oriented Expressions
Language(2-L)(2-L), 謙譲語 Humbling Reference
Kikuchi, Yasuto (1997) Keigo (Honorifics) in Kōdansha gakujutsu bunko (Kodansha Academic
Pocketbook Series). Kodansha.
(Ohso Mieko)

250 Proficiency in Hearer-Oriented Expressions
It is difficult even for native speakers of Japanese to be proficient in using hearer-oriented
expressions. However, human relationship is important in social life. Hearer-oriented language
is a linguistic means to maintain smooth relationship in society. It concerns one’s consideration
toward those with whom one exchanges words. Hearer-oriented language can be said to be alubricant in social life. Plain style is used when the speaker does not have to be overly attentive,
such as with family members and close friends. Plain style expresses familiarity and camaraderie
toward the interlocutor. Polite style is used when one speaks to someone whom the speaker meetsfor the first time, people whom the speaker speaks with just occasionally in everyday life, such as
shop clerks, station clerks, and those with whom the speaker must be careful not to cause any
friction.
The first priority is to learn to use plain and polite style properly.
Often times, polite style is introduced first in Japanese language instruction. If the speaker insists
on using polite style once s/he has gotten to know the interlocutor, the speaker could very well givethe impression that s/he is aloof.
It is necessary to learn to use plain and polite style aptly.
Those who need to know courteous style probably are people who work in hospitality industry suchas hotels, department store, restaurants, and so on. As employees in the industry, they must use
courteous language in order not to offend their customers. The more expensive the services they
offer, the more important the speech style is.
Social factors, such as hierarchy, familiarity, Uchi and Soto relationship, and social statues, are thefirst measures for the evaluation of the proficiency in topic-oriented honorifics. Topic-oriented
honorifics are used to talk about someone who is the speaker’s senior, someone whom the speakerhas met for the first time, and someone who is outside the speaker’s group.
(1) Takahashi san ga irashitete, achira de omachi da yo ‘Mr. Takahashi is here, and is waiting overthere.’(2) Hirai Buchō wa mō okaeri ni narimashita ‘Director Hirai has already gone home.’
The criteria described above do not always mesh with one another. When one talks about one’s
own company president to someone from one’s client company, the hierarchy and Uchi/Sotorelastionship do not mesh. One’s own company president is one’s senior but s/he belongs to one’s
Uchi.
One can consider one’s president as a Uchi person and speak about her/him accordingly.
However, if both one’s own president and the president of the client company are present in a
non-business situation, things are not all that cut and clear.
It is important to be able to use honorifics, but it is equally important to evade honorifics. One
must learn to form sentences where the object of topic-oriented honorific expression is not in thesubject position, as in (3). Also, one needs to learn to stop the sentence half way through, as in(4).
(3) A: Buchō wa mō kaeraretandesu ka ‘Has the director gone home?’
B: Iie, mada okaban ga gozaimasu kara. ‘No. His bag is still here.’(4) Buchō wa ima, chotto…. ‘The director is not available at the moment….’
251

The recent trend in the use of honorifics has been that consideration is given more toward someone
who is in front of the speaker than to someone who is not.
→待遇表現の体系 System of Hearer-Oriented Expressions (2-L), 尊敬語 Respectful language(2-L), 謙譲語 Humbling Language(2-L), 丁寧語・丁重語 Polite Language & Courteous
Language (2-L)
 Reference
Kikuchi, Yasuto (1997) Keigo (Honorifics) in Kōdansha gakujutsu bunko (Kodansha Academic
Pocketbook Series). Kodansha.
(Ohso Mieko)

252 Adjectives of Emotion and Senses, Verbs of Emotion
Adjectives that express human emotion are called adjectives of emotion (e.g., ureshii, kanashii,sabishii, hoshii, nikui, kiraida), as opposed to attributive adjectives that express characteristics ofpeople and things (e.g., takai, ōkii, omoshiroi). Adjectives that express human senses are calledadjectives of senses (e.g., itai, kayui). Together they are often called adjectives of emotion andsenses.
Adjectives of emotion and senses express inner conditions of people, and they provide strongly
subjective expressions. Usually the subject of the emotion or sense is the speaker.
(1) Watashi wa tegami o moratte ureshii ‘I am glad to have received a letter.’(2) ?Kare wa tegami o moratte ureshii
To express someone’s feeling or sense which is other than that of the speaker’s, it is necessary to
suffix an auxiliary verb such as sōda, yōda, rashii, or to itteiru, and so on.
(3) Kare wa tegami o moratte ureshii {sōda/yōda/ to itteiru} ‘He{is reportedly/seems/says he is}happy to have received a letter.’
The common sentence structure used with adjectives of emotion and senses is as follows:(Subject of the Emotion) wa
sensesWatashi+(Object) ga

wa+

Ano hito ga‘I’

adjectives of emotion andKoishii‘that person’‘yearn for’.

Some adjectives of emotion, such as suki da ‘fond of’ and kirai da ‘dislike’, may take a subject thatis other than the speaker.
(4) Kare wa inu ga suki da/kirai da ‘He likes/dislikes dogs.’
Verbs of emotion, such as nikumu ‘hate’, yorokobu ‘rejoice’, odoroku ‘get surprised’, and komaru‘get in a bind’, are less subjective than adjectives of emotion and senses, and the subject of the
feeling is not necessarily the speaker.
(5) Watashi wa kanojo o nikundeiru ‘I hate her.’(6) Kare wa kanojo o nikundeiru ‘He hates her.’

Verbs of emotion may take o or ni to mark the object.
(Subject of the Emotion) wa+(Object) o+

Verb of emotion

Watashi wa

ano hito oosoreru‘I’‘that person’

fear.

253

(Subject of the Emotion) wa+(Object) ni+

Verb of emotion

Watashi wa

ano hito ni

komaru‘I’‘that person’‘have a hard timedealing with’

In addition to nikumu and yorokobu, the group that takes o includes kirau ‘have a distaste for’,kanashimu ‘grieve’, natsukashimu ‘miss’, osoreru ‘fear’, and in addition to odoroku and komaru,
the group that takes ni includes obieru ‘be scared’, okoru ‘get angry’, kandō suru ‘be moved’, andshitsubō suru ‘be disappointed’.
The affix garu derives verbs of emotion from adjectives of emotion and senses.
(7) Kare wa kuruma o hoshigatteiru ‘He wants a car.’(8) Kodomo ga kurushigatteiru ‘A child is in pain.’Garu is strongly objective and the speaker does not become the subject for it.
→形容詞 Adjectives (2-B)
 References
Masuoka, Takashi & Takubo Yukinori (1992) Kiso nihongo bunpō: kaiteiban (Basic Japanese
Grammar, Revised Ed.). Kurosio Publishers.
Iori, Isao et al. (2000) Nihongo bunpō handobukku (Handbook of Japanese Grammar). 3A Network.
Hida, Yoshihumi & Asada Hideko (1991) Gendai keyoshi yōhō jiten (Usage Dictionary ofContemporary Adjectives). Tokyodo Shuppan.
(Ichikawa Yasuko)254 Mieru and Kikoeru
Mieru ‘visible/see’ and kikoeru ‘audible/hear’ express both potentiality and spontaneity. Learners
will have difficulty ① differentiating these verbs from the potential form, mirareru ‘able tosee/watch’ and kikeru ‘able to hear/listen’, and ② learning to use case particles ni and kara withthese verbs.
 Differences with the Potential Form
Mieru and kikoeru have the meaning of spontaneity, and express that the object comes through, ordoes not come through, to the subject via vision or auditory sense regardless of the subject’s will.
See examples (1) and (2). What they express is that the cause of potentiality exists in the object,
not the subject. When the cause of potentiality exists in the subject, the potential form is used.
See example (4). Even when the cause exists in something other than the subject, basically thepotential form is used if the act of seeing and hearing has something to do with the subject’s will.
See example (3).
(1) “Moshi moshi, kikoemasu ka” ‘Hello, can you hear me?’“Sumimasen, yoku kikoemasen.
well. Could you say it again?’Mōichido onegaishimasu”‘I am sorry, I can’t hear you(2) Fukuoka de wa Kankoku no rajio ga kikoerundesu ‘You can hear Korean radio in Fukuoka.’(3) Fukuoka de wa Kankoku no rajio ga kikerundesu ‘You are able to listen to Korean radio in
Fukuoka.’(4) Watashi wa okubyō nano de horaa eega wa miraremasen ‘I am such a chicken. I cannot watch
horror movies.’ Use of Particles Kara and Ni
Kara is used to indicate the position from which one perceives something with one’s eyes and ears
(e.g., (6) and (9)). Ni may indicate the position of the object with mieru, but kara is used withkikoeru, even though it is a literary expression (e.g., (5), (7), and (8)). Mieru and kikoeru aretreated in the same way grammatically, but they use different case particles, which tend to confuse
learners.
(5) Oki ni fune ga mieru ‘One can see a ship in the offing.’(6) Koko kara fune ga mieru ‘One can see a ship from here.’(7) ? Oki ni fune no kiteki ga kikoeru.
(8) Oki kara fune no kiteki ga kikoeru ‘One can hear the ship’s whistle in the offing.’(9) Koko kara fune no kiteki ga kikoeru ‘One can hear the ship’s whistle from here.’Ni, the adjectival form of da, is used as in Kumo ga hitsuji ni mieru ‘The cloud looks like a sheep,’
but this use of ni may be mistaken by learners for ni of location.

255

→自発 Spontaneity (2-E), 可能文に用いられる形式 Forms Used in Potential Sentences (2-E)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1982) Nihongo no shintakusu to imi I (Japanese Syntax and Meaning I).
Kurosio Publishers.
Morita, Yoshiyuki (1989) Kiso nihongo jiten (Basic Japanese Dictionary). Kadokawa Shoten.
GroupJamashii ed. (1998) Kyoshi to gakushusha no tame no nihongo bunkei jiten (Dictionary ofJapanese Language Patterns for Teachers and Learners). Kurosio Publishers.
(Kobayashi Noriko)256

 Giving and Receiving Expressions
Giving and receiving expressions use verbs such as yaru, ageru, sashiageru, kureru, kudasaru,
morau, and itadaku. They include expressions that express giving and receiving of objects, andthose where giving and receiving verbs are used as auxiliary verbs to express transactions involving
benefit. The latter function is especially indispensable in creating authentic-sounding Japanese
expressions. Without these expressions, the utterances sound somewhat unnatural. The group ofverbs listed above is usually introduced as main verbs of giving and receiving in Japanese language
instruction. The three systems of verbs which are represented by ageru, kureru, and yaru,
respectively, are shown at that time. When these verbs are used as auxiliary verbs, the basic
differences among them remain the same as when they are used as main verbs, but the following
points must be noted.
First, kureru expresses events that occur around the speaker with a sense of gratitude, and thesubject of te kureru does not have to be an animate object, as seen in Example (1).
(1) Ame ga futtekurete, tasukatta ‘The rain saved me.’
In contrast, te morau tends to express the receiver’s intention of seeking a beneficial action from thegiver, and thus, the benefactor has to be an animate object. It is not possible to rewrite (1) as *Ameni futtemorau.
Next, te kureru expresses gratitude, and is good to use whenever and wherever it is appropriate, but
caution must be exercised when one uses te ageru. It is because te ageru tends to make the action
look like an unsolicited favor. It is acceptable to say, Tetsudatte ageyō ka ‘Do you want me to help
you?’ to a friend, but it is advisable not to say, Tetsudatte agemashō ka ‘Would you like me to give
you a hand?’ to your superior. Otetsudai shimashō ka ‘May I help you?’ instead is appropriate.
Lastly, attention must be paid to the fact that, when kureru and ageru are used, the use of caseparticles with the receiver is not fixed. When the verb originally takes case ni, as in …ni…o kasu
and…ni…o oshieru, ni is also used with kureru and ageru. In other instances, the recipient ismarked in a variety of ways.
(2) Yamada san to isshoni hashitte ageta ‘I ran with Ms. Yamada.’(3) Tomodachi ga otōto o tasukete kureta ‘Myfriend helped my younger brother.’→授受の補助動詞表現 Giving and Receiving Expressions Used as Auxiliary Verbs (2-E), 授受表
現の諸特徴 Characteristics of Giving and Receiving Expressions (2-E)
 References
Iori, Isao et al. (2001) Chujokyu o oshieru hito no tame no nihongo bunpō handobukku (Japanese
Grammar Handbook for Those Who Teach Intermediate and Advanced Levels). 3A Network.
Yamada, Toshihiro (2004) Nihongo no benefakutibu – teyaru, tekureru, temorau no bunpō (Japanese
Benefactives: Grammar of Teyaru, Tekureru & Temorau). Meiji Shoin.
(Ooso Mieko)
257 Modality and Style
Expressions of modality differ considerably between spoken language and written language.
Especially, casual conversation style differs greatly from written style.
In spoken communication, sentence final particles, such as ne and yo, play a very significant role,
while the sentence final particle yo is about the only one in written language.
In written language, hearsay is expressed with sōda, while in speech tte is frequently used, as in thefollowing examples.
(1) Yamada san, konaitte ‘I’ve heard Ms. Yamada isn’t coming.’(2) Yamashita san, oyame ni narundesutte? ‘I’ve heard Ms. Yamashita is quitting.”
Yōda, which expresses inference based on evidence, is often replaced with mitaida in spoken
language.
(3) Kare wa dekaketa mitai desu ‘It looks like he’s gone out.’
Noda expresses modality of explanation, and usually appears as nda in conversation. At the end of asentence da is often omitted, and noda becomes no.
(4) Tabenaindesuka ‘Are you not going to eat?’(5) Tabenaino? ‘Aren’t you going to eat?”
In conversation to omou is used to express the speaker’s opinion, while it sounds very assertive in
written communication. Instead, to omowareru and de wa naidarō ka are preferred in written
style.
Lastly, intonation and prominence naturally play an important role in conversation. For example, janaika may express very different meanings according to the prominence.
(6) Kiree janai (ka) ‘It IS pretty.’ (Counterargument)(prominence is on kiree, falling intonation)(7) Kiree janai(desu ka) ‘It’s pretty, I think.’(Expressing one’s opinion)(prominence is on kiree, rising intonation)

Deshō, an auxiliary verb of conjecture, comes to mean confirmation in conversation when it isuttered with rising intonation.
(8) Anata mo taberu desho(o)? ‘You’re going to eat, too, aren’t you?’→終助詞の用法 Usage of Sentence Final Particles (2-H), 証拠からの判断 Judgment Based on
Evidence (2-H), 確認表現 Expressions of Confirmation (2-H), 伝聞 Hearsay (2-H)
 References258

Iori, Isao, et al (2001) Chūjōkyū o oshieru hito no tame no nihongo bunpō handobukku (Handbookof Japanese Grammar for Those Who Teach Intermediate and Advanced Classes). 3A Network.
Hasunuma, Akiko (1995) ‘Taiwa ni okeru kakunin kōi—darō, janaika, yone no kakunin yōhō’ (Actof Confirmation in Dialogs: How to Confirm with Darō, janaika, and yone) in Nitta, Yoshio, ed.,Fukubun no kenkyū (ge) (Study of Complex Sentences II). Kurosio Publishers.
(Ooso Mieko)

259

 Conjunctive Expressions and Style
Which conjunctive expression to use has a lot to do with the style. For example, it sounds
incongruous if one uses dakara in public documents, or daga with a close friend.
In addition to stylistic differences by situation, there are other types of differences in style. Let us
examine how to differentiate tokoro ga and demo as examples, and how style figures into it.
In Example (1), the speaker intends to demonstrate the prediction in the preceding part and theactual result in the succeeding part. In this situation, tokoro ga sounds more natural than demo.
(1) Shiken ni shippai shite, Ri kun wa akiramete kuni ni kaetta to omōdeshō? {Tokoroga/?demo}
Ri kun wa yokunen mo shiken ni chōsen shita nodesu ‘You would think that Mr. I gave up and wenthome. To the contrary, he tried the exam again the following year.’If the speaker and listener are on equal ground in the discussion, tokoro ga is not appropriate.
(2) A: Kondo no Nichiyōbi wa kyampu ni ikō yo ‘Let’s go camping next Sunday.’
B: {Demo/*Tokorogo} ame da to taihen da yo ‘But, it’ll be a big hassle if it rains.’
Tokoro ga can be used only in the type of style where the speaker leads the discussion of thesituation. This is the biggest difference between tokoro ga and demo.
Here are some more examples of conjunctive expressions that are used in styles where the speakerleads the discourse:
Fujisan wa Nihon de ichiban yūmei na yama desu. Sate, Fujisan wa nani ken ni aru deshō ka ‘Mt.
Fuji is the most famous mountain in Japan. Now, which prefecture is Mt. Fuji in?’Obaasan wa hōchō de momo o kirimashita. Suruto, naka kara genkina otoko no ko ga
detekimashita ‘The old woman cut the peach with a knife. Lo and behold, out came a vibrant little
boy.’
Usually it is difficult for learners of Japanese to understand which style is suitable for various
conjunctive expressions. It is important that conjunctive expressions are taught systematically.
→接続詞 Conjunctives (2-B), 文体 Style (2-K), モダリティと文体 Modality and Style (2-M)
 References
Miyajima, Tatsuo & Nitta Yoshio, ed. (1995) Nihongo ruigi hyōgen no bunpō (ge) (Grammar ofJapanese Synonymous Expressions II). Kurosio Publishers.
Koda, Naomi (2001) Danwa, tekusuto no tenkai no mekanizumu—setsuzoku hyōgen to danwa
hyōshiki no ninchiteki kōsatsu (Mechanism of the Development of Discourse and Text: A Cognitive
Study of Conjunctive Expressions and Discourse Indicators).
Kazama Shobo.
(Hamada Mari)

260

 Grammar Items Viewed from Their Expressive Functions
There are two approaches to studies of grammar items when we examine them based on theirexpressive functions. One approach examines patterns of expression. It puts the emphasis on“expressing something using language,” and tries to sort out the meaning and function of particularlanguage forms. The other approach puts emphasis on “doing something using language,” and ittries to deal with “the communicative function of particular language forms in specific situations
and context.” The two approaches differ considerably in what grammar items they pick out andalso in the specific content of each item they pick out.
 Studies Based on Language Form (Patterns of Expression)
Studies based on language form (patterns of expression) are concerned with “which expression touse for the message the speaker wants to convey, i.e., sorting and sequencing sentence patterns froma functional point of view” (Teramura,1989). Such studies include Gendai nihongo hyōgen bunten(Grammar Dictionary of Contemporary Japanese Expressions) (1944), Nihongo hyōgen bunkei：
Chukyu I, II (Japanese Expressive Patterns: Intermediate I & II) (1983), Nihongo kyoshi no tame no
gendai nihongo hyōgen bunten (Grammar Dictionary of Contemporary Japanese Expressions for
Teachers of Japanese) (1995), and Tomonari et al. (1996, 2000). Morita & Matsuki (1989),
Sakamoto (1996), and Okamoto et al. (2000) include classification of the meaning and usages ofcomplex words.
Topics that are dealt with in patterns of expression include three groups: (1) grammatical topics
such as passive and causative, (2) conceptual topics such as time and space, and (3) functional
topics such as request and permission. All three groups are intermixed when they are listed. The
emphasis is on (1) and (2), but recently more topics are being added in Category (3). The main
topics are the following:
passive, causative, potentiality, spontaneity, volition, conjecture, obligation, natural outcome,necessity, completion/result, starting/ending, giving and receiving, agreement/disagreement,
existence, characteristic/state, location, quantity, time, transportation, change, analogy,
similitude/metaphor, contrast/comparison, degree, hearsay/quotation, condition, perception/emotion,
classification/definition, cause/reason, purpose, difficulty/feasibility, prediction/expectation,
wish/desire, demand/request, command/prohibition, permission, offer, recommendation, invitation,suggestion, etc.
Each topic accompanies a list of patterns, and vocabulary and idiomatic expressions are rarely partof the list. It differs from lists such as the Notional-Functional Syllabus (Willkins (1984) and Van
Ek and Alexander (1980)) where a comprehensive list of concepts and functions for learners is
included.
 Studies Based on Language Behavior
When one tries to figure out what language form is actually used in performing particular language
behavior, a broader array of topics, including gratitude, apology, complaint, and advice, has to beconsidered. Textbooks that have been published since Aural Comprehension Practice in Japanese(ACP, 1979) and Situational Functional Japanese (SFJ, 1991) have been moving in the direction261

where language behavior is dealt with as a process of mutual negotiation in a series of discourse
between the speaker and the listener, rather than regarding sentence patterns as isolated topics oflearning. This means that the goal is to use the language appropriately in specific situations andcontext. To that end, not only sentence patterns but also idiomatic expressions and pragmaticusages are included for instruction. Sentence final particles, hesitation, etc., are presented in forms
that are actually used. The following is a list of main topics.
request, command/prohibit, instruct, invite, recommend, permit, decline, offer, suggest, express
one’s appreciation, apologize, complain, advise, greet, introduce, congratulate, ask how someone
has been, praise, explain, console/encourage, persuade, warn, scold, give an excuse, promise, etc.
→発話の機能 Functions of Utterances (4-A), 言語行動 Language Behavior (6-C), 発話行動
Speech Act (6-C), コミュニカティブ･アプローチ Communicative Approach (8-B), 語用論
Pragmatics (7-C)
 References
Teramura, Hideo (1989) ‘Kozo bunkei to hyōgen bunkei’ (Structural Patterns and Expressive
Patterns) in Kōza nihongo to nihongo kyōiku 13 nihongo kyōjuhō (jō) (Lectures on Japanese andJapanese Education 13: Japanese Language Teaching Methodology I).
Meiji Shoin.
Nihongo Kyoiku Gakkai ed. (1991) Nihongo kyōiku kikan ni okeru kōsu dezain (Course Design at
Institutions of Japanese Educatioin). Bonjinsha.
Blundell, J., Higgins, J., and Middlemiss, N. (1982) Function in English, Oxford University Press.
Namatame, Yasu (1995) Nihongo kyōsi no tame no gendai nihongo hyōgen bunten (Grammar
Dictionary of Expressive Patterns in Contemporary Japanese for Teachers of Japanese). Bonjinsha.
Okamoto, Makiko, Ujihara Yōko & Sunabe Taro (2000) Nihongo – hyōgen bunkei nōto (Japanese:
Notes on Patterns of Expression). Osaka YMCA Kyoshikai.
Sakamoto, Tadashi (1996) Gakushusha no hassō ni yoru nihongo hyōgen bunkei reibunshū(Collection of Usage Examples of Japanese Expressive Patterns Compiled From the Learner’s
Perspective). Bonjinsha.
Tomomatsu, Etsuko et al. (1996) Donna toki dō tsukau nihongo hyōgen bunkei 500 chū-jōkyū(When and How to Use 500 Expressive Patterns of Japanese: Intermediate and Advanced Levels).
ALC.
____________________ (2000) Donna toki dō tsukau nihongo hyōgen bunkei 200 sho-chūkyū(When and How to Use 200 Expressive Patterns of Japanese: Beginning and Intermediate Levels).
ALC.
Morita, Yoshiyuki & Matsumoto Masae (1989) Nihongo hyōgen bunkei (Japanese Expressive
Patterns). ALC.
Kokusai Bunka Shinkokai (1944) Nihongo hyōgen bunten (Grammar Dictionary of Japanese
Expressions). Kokusai Bunka Shinkokai.
262

Wilkins, D.A. (Shimaoka, Takashi, transl. & annotation) (1984) Notional Syllabus, Kirihara
Shoten/Oxford University Press.
Tsukuba Daigaku Nihongo Kyoiku Kenkyūkai (1983) Nihongo hyōgen bunkei: Chūkyū I, II(Expressive Patterns in Japanese: Intermediate I & II). Bonjinsha.
Van Ek, J.. A. and Trim, J.L. (1991) Threshold 1990.

Cambridge University Press.

Mizutani, Osamu & Mizutani Nobuko (1979) Aural Comprehension Practice in Japanese (ACP).
Japan Times.
Tsukuba Language Group (1991) Situational Functional Japanese (SFJ).

Bonjinsha.
(Suzuki Mutsumi)

263